HMI Manual VK, VT V1.0 PDF

CHAPTER 1
INTRODUCTION
1.1. Project Development Steps .......................................................................... 1

1.2. Using the Software........................................................................................ 2
1.2.1. Main Menus ................................................................................................................... 2
1.2.2. Toolbars ....................................................................................................................... 14
1.2.3. Project Manager........................................................................................................... 22
1.2.4. Screen Manager ........................................................................................................... 30
1.2.5. Pop-up Menus.............................................................................................................. 32
-i-
1
1.1. Project Development Steps
Install and run

the Software
Set up project
Create a project
protection
Global Settings Create and set up

Languages panel applications
Font Templates
Picture Database
Sound Database Create and set
Text Database up links
Global Tags
Global macros
Create local tags
Application setup Create and set Alarm blocks

Command block up screens
Recipe blocks
Status words
Clock Data loggers
Passwords Design the screens Operation logger
Local macros
Compile current Simulate current

panel application panel application
Download current
panel application
Run
1-1 CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION

1
1.2. Using the Software
1.2.1. Main Menus

There are 11 drop down menus you can select in the main menu: File, Edit, View, Screen, Draw, Object, Project, Panel,
Tools, Window, Help.
1.2.1.1. File Menu
Icon Menu Item Shortcut Description
New Ctrl+N Create a new project.
Open... Ctrl+O Open an existing project.
Close Close the current project.
Save Ctrl+S Save the current project.
Save As... Save the current project with a new name.

<Recently opened filename> Open the referred project.
Exit Exit the software.
1.2.1.2. Edit Menu
Icon Menu Item Pop-up Menu Item Shortcut Description
Undo Ctrl+Z Undo the last action.
Redo Ctrl+Y Redo the previously undone action.
Cut Ctrl+X Cut the selection and put it on the Clipboard.
Copy Ctrl+C Copy the selection and put it on the Clipboard.
Paste Ctrl+V Place the Clipboard contents on the current screen.
Delete Del Delete the selection.

Duplicate... Duplicate the selected object.
Fine and Find... Find the specified text.
Replace Replace... Replace specific text with different text.
Show Grid Show or hide the grid.
Select or deselect the option of aligning objects to the
Snap to Grid
grid points.
Grid Settings... Opens the Grid Settings dialog box.
Select All Ctrl+A Select entire objects of the active screen.
Group Group the selection.
Ungroup Ungroup the selected group.

Continued
CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION 1-2

1
Icon Menu Item Pop-up Menu Item Description
Pin Pin the selection so it cannot move.
Unpin Unpin the selection so it can move again.
Auto Text Select or deselect the option of automatic text resizing.

Resizing
Align Left Align the left sides of selected objects to the left side of the reference
object. All the objects move horizontally so their left sides are in line
with the left side of the reference object.
Vertical Center Align the vertical centers of selected objects to the vertical center of
the reference object. All the objects move horizontally so their vertical
centers are in line with the vertical center of the reference object.
Right Align the right sides of selected objects to the right side of the
reference object. All the objects move horizontally so their right sides
are in line with the right side of the reference object.
Top Align the tops of the selected objects to the top of the reference
object. All the objects move vertically so their tops are in line with the
top of the reference object.
Horizontal Center Align the horizontal centers of selected objects to the horizontal
center of the reference object. All the objects move vertically so their
horizontal centers are in line with the horizontal center of the
reference object.
Bottom Align the bottoms of selected objects to the bottom of the reference
object. All the objects move vertically so their bottoms are in line with
the bottom of the reference object.
To Grid Select or deselect the option of aligning objects to the grid points.
Make Same Width Make the selected objects have the same width as the reference
Size object.
Height Make the selected objects have the same height as the reference
object.
Both Make the selected objects have the same width and height as the
reference object.
Nudge Left Nudge the selection left. When the Snap to Grid option is not
selected, all objects of the selection move one pixel left. When the
Snap to Grid option is selected, each object of the selection moves
left to where its upper-left corner aligns to the nearest grid point.
Right Nudge the selection right. When the Snap to Grid option is not
selected, all objects of the selection move one pixel right. When the
right to where its upper-left corner aligns to the nearest grid point.
Up Nudge the selection up. When the Snap to Grid option is not
selected, all objects of the selection move one pixel up. When the
up to where its upper-left corner aligns to the nearest grid point.
Down Nudge the selection down. When the Snap to Grid option is not
selected, all objects of the selection move one pixel down. When the
down to where its upper-left corner aligns to the nearest grid point.
Continued

1
Layer Bring to Top Bring the selection to the top.
Bring Forward Bring the selected object one layer up.
Send Backward Send the selected object one layer down.
Send to Bottom Send the selection to the bottom.
Set Order Start the order setting process for the objects of the active screen.
Object Open the property sheet of the selected object.
Properties...
Save as Save the selected object as the default object for the type of that
Default object. Default objects are saved in the Objects category of the
object library.
Save to Object Save the selected object to the object library.
Library...
Save as Global Save the selected object as the global object which is saved in the
Object… Global category of the object library. Global Objects can be used for
the Global Object Containers.
Note:
1. To select a reference object from the selection, use [Ctrl+Click].
2. To add an object to the selection, use [Shift+Click].
1.2.1.3. View Menu

Address Write/Monitor Display the Write address and Monitor address defined for each object of
all the opened screens.
Write Display the Write address defined for each object of all the opened
screens.
Monitor Display the Monitor address defined for each object of all the opened
screens.
Read Display the Read address defined for each object of all the opened
screens.
Notification Display the Notification address defined for each object of all the opened
screens.
Touch Operation Display the address of the Touch Operation Control bit defined for each
Control object of all the opened screens.
Visibility Control Display the address of the Visibility Control bit defined for each object of
all the opened screens.
Show Tips Select or deselect the option of displaying tip for the toolbar icon or the
object on which the cursor stays.
Continued

1
Zoom 25% Display screens in 25% of their normal sizes.
50% Display screens in 50% of their normal sizes.
100% Display screens in normal size.
Normal Size Display screens in normal size.
Project Manager Show or hide Project Manager.

Screen Manager Show or hide Screen Manager.
Screen Overview Show or hide Screen Overview.
Link Overview Show or hide Link Overview.
Object Library Show or hide Object Library.
Macro Command Show or hide Macro Command Properties window.
Properties
Object List Show or hide Object List.
I/O List Show or hide I/O List.
Standard Toolbar Show or hide Standard toolbar.
Object Toolbar Show or hide Object toolbar.
Draw Toolbar Show or hide Draw toolbar.
Text Toolbar Show or hide Text toolbar.
Edit Toolbar Show or hide Edit toolbar.
Address Toolbar Show or hide Address toolbar.
Picture Toolbar Show or hide Picture toolbar.
Status Bar Show or hide Status bar.
Semi-transparent Object Select or deselect the option of displaying the object
Dialog View property dialog box in semi-transparent mode. A
semi-transparent dialog box allows you to see the objects
underlying the dialog box.
<Language name> Display the text of objects in the selected language.

1
1.2.1.4. Screen Menu
Icon Menu Item Description
New Screen... Create a new screen for the current panel application.
Open Screen... Open an existing screen of the current panel application.

Close Screen Close the current screen.
Close All Screens Close all the opened screens.
Cut Screen Cut the current screen and put it on the Clipboard.
Copy Screen Copy the current screen and put it on the Clipboard.
Insert the screen on the Clipboard to the current panel
Paste Screen
application.
Delete Screen Delete the current screen.
Stretch Screen... Stretch the current screen.
Export Screen... Export the current screen to a file.
Import Screen... Import a screen from a file for the current panel application.
Save Current Screen as Picture... Save the current screen to a picture file.
Open the Save Screens as Pictures dialog box. You can save
Save Screens as Pictures... each of the selected screens to a picture file using the dialog
box.
Screen Properties Open the screen property dialog box for the current screen.

1
1.2.1.5. Draw Menu
Dot Get ready to place a copy of the default dot on a screen.
Line Get ready to place a copy of the default line on a screen.
Horizontal Line Get ready to place a copy of the default horizontal line on a screen.
Vertical Line Get ready to place a copy of the default vertical line on a screen.
Polyline Get ready to draw a polyline on a screen.
Rectangle Get ready to place a copy of the default rectangle on a screen.
Round Rectangle Get ready to place a copy of the default round rectangle on a screen.
Clipped Rectangle Get ready to place a copy of the default clipped rectangle on a screen.
Circle Get ready to place a copy of the default circle on a screen.
Ellipse Get ready to place a copy of the default ellipse on a screen.
Arc Get ready to place a copy of the default arc on a screen.
Pie Get ready to place a copy of the default pie shape on a screen.
Polygon Get ready to draw a polygon on a screen.
Text Get ready to place a copy of the default text object on a screen.
Picture Get ready to place a copy of the default picture object on a screen.
Scale Get ready to place a copy of the default scale on a screen.
Table Get ready to place a copy of the default table on a screen.

1
1.2.1.6. Object Menu
Bit Button Get ready to place a copy of the default bit button on a screen.
Get ready to place a copy of the default toggle switch on a

Toggle Switch
screen.
Get ready to place a copy of the default screen button on a
Screen Button
screen.
Get ready to place a copy of the default function button on a
Function Button
screen.
Get ready to place a copy of the default slide switch on a
Slide Switch
screen.
Get ready to place a copy of the default word button on a
Word Button
screen.
Get ready to place a copy of the default multistate Switch on a
Multistate Switch
screen.
Get ready to place a copy of the default radio button group on
Radio Button Group
a screen.
Get ready to place a copy of the default keypad button on a
Keypad Button
screen.
More buttons
Get ready to place a copy of the default scroll button group on
Scroll Button Group
a screen.
Scroll Bar Get ready to place a copy of the default scroll bar on a screen.
Get ready to place a copy of the default step button on a

Step Button
screen.
Get ready to place a copy of the default page selector on a
Page Selector
screen.
Get ready to place a copy of the default numeric entry on a
Numeric Entry
screen.
Get ready to place a copy of the default numeric display on a
Numeric Display
screen.
Advanced Get ready to place a copy of the default advanced numeric
Numeric Display display on a screen.
Get ready to place a copy of the default ASCII string entry on a
Character Entry
screen.
Get ready to place a copy of the default ASCII string display on
Character Display
a screen.
Bit Lamp Get ready to place a copy of the default bit lamp on a screen.
Get ready to place a copy of the default multistate lamp on a

Multistate Lamp
screen.
Get ready to place a copy of the default message display on a
Message Display
screen.
Get ready to place a copy of the default time display on a
Time Display
screen.
Get ready to place a copy of the default date display on a
Time/Date Date Display
screen.
Get ready to place a copy of the default day-of-week display on
Day-of-week Display
a screen.
Continued

1
Get ready to place a copy of the default meter on a
Meter
screen.
Get ready to place a copy of the default dynamic circle
Dynamic Circle
on a screen.
Get ready to place a copy of the default dynamic
Dynamic Rectangle
rectangle on a screen.
Get ready to place a copy of the default GIF display on
Dynamic Graphic GIF Display
a screen.
Get ready to place a copy of the default picture display
Picture Display
on a screen.
Get ready to place a copy of the default animated
Animated Graphic
graphic on a screen.
Get ready to place a copy of the default pipeline on a
Pipeline
screen.
Get ready to place a copy of the default bar graph on a
Bar Graph
screen.
Get ready to place a copy of the default line chart on a
Line Chart
screen.
Graph/Chart
Get ready to place a copy of the default circular bar
Circular Bar Graph
graph on a screen.
Get ready to place a copy of the default scatter chart
Scatter Chart
on a screen.
Get ready to place a copy of the default alarm display
Alarm Display
on a screen.
Get ready to place a copy of the default historic data
Historic Data Table
table on a screen.
Get ready to place a copy of the default historic event
Historic Event Table
table on a screen.
Get ready to place a copy of the default historic trend
Historic Display Historic Trend Graph
graph on a screen.
Single Record Line Get ready to place a copy of the default single record
Chart line chart on a screen.
Get ready to place a copy of the default operation log
Operation Log Display
display on a screen.
Get ready to place a copy of the default recipe selector
Recipe Selector
on a screen.
Get ready to place a copy of the default recipe table on
Recipe Table
a screen.
Get ready to place a copy of the default sublink table
Sublink Table
on a screen.
Get ready to place a copy of the default schedule
Schedule Setting Table
setting table on a screen.
Get ready to place a copy of the default screen window
Screen Window
on a screen.
Get ready to place a copy of the default global object
Global Object Container
container on a screen.
Get ready to place a copy of the default USB camera
USB Camera View
view on a screen.

1
1.2.1.7. Project Menu

Information & Open the Project Information & Protection dialog box.
Protection... This dialog box shows the basic information of your
project and allows you to define how to protect it.
Languages... Open the Languages dialog box. You can specify up to
10 languages for your project to support with this dialog
box.
Font Templates... Open the Font Templates dialog box. With this dialog
box, you can specify up to 20 fonts as the frequently
used fonts for each language.
Picture Database... Open the Picture Database (dialog box). You can
import pictures and organize them for your project in
this dialog box.
Sound Database... Open the Sound Database (dialog box). You can import
sounds for your project in this dialog box.
Text Database... Open the Text Database (dockable window). With Text
Database, you can import text, export text, and edit text
for your project.
Global Tags... Open the Global Tags window. You can define the
global tags in this window.
Global Macro Add... Create a new macro.
Edit Select a macro to edit.
Delete Select a macro to delete.
Add New Panel Create a new panel application.
Application...
Import Panel Import a panel application from a PLF file.
Application...
Delete Panel Application Select a panel application to delete.

1
1.2.1.8. Panel Menu

Current Panel <Panel application name> Select a panel application as the current application
Application
Link Add... Add a new communication link to the current application.
Properties Select a communication link to open its property sheet.
Delete Select a communication link to delete.
Driver List… Open communication driver list dialog box which lists all the
supported communication drivers. In the dialog box, you can
export the driver list to the .csv file.
Tags... Open the Tags window of the current application. You can define
tags for the application in this window.
Sound Table... Open the Sound Table (dialog box). You can collect sounds for the
current application in this dialog box.
General Setup... Open the Panel General Setup dialog box. You can define the
general settings for the current application in this dialog box.
Command & Open the Command & Status dialog box. You can define the
Status... command block and the status words for the current application in
this dialog box.
Clock... Open the Clock dialog box. You can define the clock operations for
the current application in this dialog box.
Passwords... Open the Passwords dialog box. You can define passwords and
related settings for the application in this dialog box.
Discrete Alarm Add Add a new discrete alarm block to the current application.
Block Properties Select a discrete alarm block to open its property sheet.
Delete Select a discrete alarm block to delete.
Analog Alarm Add Add a new analog alarm block to the current application.
Block Properties Select an analog alarm block to open its property sheet.
Delete Select an analog alarm block to delete.
Recipe Block Add Add a new recipe block to the current application.
Properties Select a recipe block to open its property sheet.
Delete Select a recipe block to delete.
Data Logger Add Add a new data logger to the current application.
Properties Select a data logger to open its property sheet.
Delete Select a data logger to delete.
Operation Open the Operation Logging dialog box. You can define the
Logging... settings of operation logging for the current application in this
dialog box.
Schedule… Open the Schedule dialog box. You can define schedules and
related settings for the application in this dialog box.
Macro Add... Add a new macro to the current application.
Edit Select a macro of the current application to edit.
Delete Select a macro of the current application to delete.
Compile... Compile the current application to build the runtime data. You can
download the runtime data to the target panel. With the runtime
data the target panel can perform exactly what you programmed
for the application.
Continued

1
Build Panel Runtime Build the panel runtime package (PRP) file for the current
Package (PRP)... application. The PRP file contains the runtime data and the
system programs. You can update the target panel without
the project file by downloading the PRP file to it. The target
panel can also update itself by loading the PRP file from a
USB mass storage device.
Build ROM Image... Build the ROM image file for the current application. The
ROM image file contains the runtime data and the system
programs. The target panel can update itself by loading the
ROM image file from a micro SD card.
Download... Download data to the target panel.
Upload... Upload data from the target panel.

Export Panel Export the current panel application to a PLF file.
Application...
1.2.1.9. Tools Menu

Language Selection Auto When this item is selected:
Default Language for Language Used for the U/I of
the Windows the software
Simplified Chinese Simplified Chinese
Traditional Chinese Traditional Chinese
Others English
English Select English as the language for the U/I of the software.
Chinese (Simplified) Select simplified Chinese as the language for the U/I of the
software.
Chinese Select traditional Chinese as the language for the U/I of the
(Traditional) software.
Run Offline Simulation Run offline simulation for the current application.
Run Online Simulation Run online simulation for the current application.
Set Transparent Open the Set Transparent Communication dialog box.
Communication...
Start Transparent Start the transparent communication.
Communication
End Transparent End the transparent communication.
Communication
Update OS0 through Update the system program OS0 of the target panel through
BIOS its BIOS. This operation is useful when the system programs
of the target panel were destroyed.
Export Text... Export the text of the current application to a PTX file.
Import Text... Import the text in a PTX file for the selected application.
TextEditor Run the TextEditor program to edit the text of a PTX file.

1
1.2.1.10. Window Menu

Cascade Arrange windows so they overlap.
Tile Vertical Arrange windows as non-overlapping vertical tiles.
Tile Horizontal Arrange windows as non-overlapping horizontal tiles.
Arrange Icon Arrange icons at the bottom of the window.
Restore Restore the windows to their original sizes and positions.
Maximize Maximize the windows
Opened Window List Display a list of opened windows titles. You may click the window title to bring the
corresponding window to the top.
Windows… Open the Windows dialog box to activate or save or close the selected window.
1.2.1.11. Help Sub-menu

About... Open the About… dialog box. You can see the version number of the software in
this dialog box.

1
1.2.2. Toolbars
1.2.2.1. Standard Toolbar
Icon Tool Tip Description
New Create a new project.
Open Open an existing project.
Save Save the current project.
Cut Cut the selection and put it on the Clipboard.
Copy Copy the selection and put it on the Clipboard.
Paste Place the Clipboard contents on the current screen.
Undo Undo the last edit action.
Redo Redo the previously undone edit action.
New Screen Create a new screen for the current panel application.
Previous Screen Open the previous screen in terms of screen number.
Next Screen Open the next screen in terms of screen number.
Zoom In Make the screen view one step bigger.
Zoom Out Make the screen view one step smaller.
Normal Size Restore the screen view to normal size.
Off (State 0) Show the Off state of all the objects on the current screen.
On (State 1) Show the On state of all the objects on the current screen.
State Select a state for the selected object to show.
Compile the current application to build the runtime data. You can download the
Compile runtime data to the target panel. With the runtime data, the target panel performs
exactly like how the application was programmed.
Download Download data to the target panel.
Download
Download data using the existing settings to the target panel immediately
Immediately
Run Offline
Run offline simulation for the current application.
Simulation
About Open the About dialog box.

1
1.2.2.2. Object Toolbar
Bit Button Get ready to place a copy of the default bit button on a screen.
Word Button Get ready to place a copy of the default word button on a screen.
Screen Button Get ready to place a copy of the default screen button on a screen.
Page Selector Get ready to place a copy of the default page selector on a screen.
Function Button Get ready to place a copy of the default function button on a screen.
Keypad Button Get ready to place a copy of the default keypad button on a screen.
Scroll Button Group Get ready to place a copy of the default scroll button group on a screen.
Scroll Bar Get ready to place a copy of the default scroll bar on a screen.
Radio Button Group Get ready to place a copy of the default radio button group on a screen.
Step Button Get ready to place a copy of the default step button on a screen.
Toggle Switch Get ready to place a copy of the default toggle switch on a screen.
Multistate Switch Get ready to place a copy of the default multistate switch on a screen.
Slide Switch Get ready to place a copy of the default slide switch on a screen.
Numeric Entry Get ready to place a copy of the default numeric entry on a screen.
ASCII String Entry Get ready to place a copy of the default ASCII string entry on a screen.
Advanced Numeric Display Get ready to place a copy of the default advanced numeric display on a screen.
Bit Lamp Get ready to place a copy of the default bit lamp on a screen.
Multistate Lamp Get ready to place a copy of the default multistate lamp on a screen.
Numeric Display Get ready to place a copy of the default numeric display on a screen.
ASCII String Display Get ready to place a copy of the default ASCII string display on a screen.
Message Display Get ready to place a copy of the default message display on a screen.
Meter Get ready to place a copy of the default meter on a screen.

Continued

1
Time Display Get ready to place a copy of the default time display on a screen.
Date Display Get ready to place a copy of the default date display on a screen.
Day-of-week Display Get ready to place a copy of the default day-of-week display on a screen.
Dynamic Circle Get ready to place a copy of the default dynamic circle on a screen.
Dynamic Rectangle Get ready to place a copy of the default dynamic rectangle on a screen.
GIF Display Get ready to place a copy of the default GIF display on a screen.
Picture Display Get ready to place a copy of the default picture display on a screen.
Animated Graphic Get ready to place a copy of the default animated graphic on a screen.
Pipeline Get ready to place a copy of the default pipeline on a screen.
Bar Graph Get ready to place a copy of the default bar graph on a screen.
Line Chart Get ready to place a copy of the default line chart on a screen.
Circular Bar Graph Get ready to place a copy of the default circular bar graph on a screen.
Scatter Chart Get ready to place a copy of the default scatter chart on a screen.
Alarm Display Get ready to place a copy of the default alarm display on a screen.
Historic Data Table Get ready to place a copy of the default historic data table on a screen.
Historic Event Table Get ready to place a copy of the default historic event table on a screen.
Historic Trend Graph Get ready to place a copy of the default historic trend graph on a screen.
Single Record Line Chart Get ready to place a copy of the default single record line chart on a screen.
Operation Log Display Get ready to place a copy of the default operation log display on a screen.
Recipe Selector Get ready to place a copy of the default recipe selector on a screen.
Recipe Table Get ready to place a copy of the default recipe table on a screen.
Sublink Table Get ready to place a copy of the default sublink table on a screen.
Schedule Setting Table Get ready to place a copy of the default schedule setting table on a screen.
Screen Window Get ready to place a copy of the default screen window on a screen.
USB Camera View Get ready to place a copy of the default USB camera view on a screen.

1
1.2.2.3. Draw Toolbar
Dot Get ready to place a copy of the default dot on a screen.
Line Get ready to place a copy of the default line on a screen.
Horizontal Line Get ready to place a copy of the default horizontal line on a screen.
Vertical Line Get ready to place a copy of the default vertical line on a screen.
Polyline Get ready to draw a polyline on a screen.
Rectangle Get ready to place a copy of the default rectangle on a screen.
Round Rectangle Get ready to place a copy of the default round rectangle on a screen.
Clipped Rectangle Get ready to place a copy of the default clipped rectangle on a screen.
Polygon Get ready to draw a polygon on a screen.
Circle Get ready to place a copy of the default circle on a screen.
Ellipse Get ready to place a copy of the default ellipse on a screen.
Arc Get ready to place a copy of the default arc on a screen.
Pie Get ready to place a copy of the default pie shape on a screen.
Table Get ready to place a copy of the default table on a screen.
Scale Get ready to place a copy of the default scale on a screen.
Text Get ready to place a copy of the default text object on a screen.
Picture Get ready to place a copy of the default picture object on a screen.
Dot Style Select a dot style for the selected dot.
Line Style Select a line style for the selected shape.
Border Color Select a color for the border of the selected shape.
BG Color Select a color for the background of the selected solid shape.
Pattern Style Select a pattern for the selected solid shape.
FG/Pattern Color Select a color for the pattern of the selected solid shape.

1
1.2.2.4. Text Toolbar

Text Type Select the type of text you are working on.
Text Type Description
Inner Text Text displayed inside of an object.
External Text Text of the external label of an object.
Language Select a language that you are defining the text for.
Font Select a font for the text.
Size Select a font size for the text.
Text Edit the text. Click to select the text from text database.
Text Select the text from the text database. Click to edit text.
Text Color Select a color for the text.
Background Color Select a color for the background of the object.
Center Position Position the text at the center within the object.
Horizontal Position Change the horizontal position of the text within the object.
Vertical Position Change the vertical position of the text within the object.
Align Left Align the text to the left of the text body.
Center Align the text to the center of the text body
Align Right Align the text to the right of the text body
External Label
Change the position of the external label.
Position

1
1.2.2.5. Edit Toolbar

Align Left Align the left sides of selected objects to the left side of the reference object. All the
objects move horizontally so their left sides are in line with the left side of the
reference object.
Align Vertical Center Align the vertical centers of selected objects to the vertical center of the reference
object. All the objects move horizontally so their vertical centers are in line with the
vertical center of the reference object.
Align Right Align the right sides of selected objects to the right side of the reference object. All the
objects move horizontally so their right sides are in line with the right side of the
reference object.
Align Top Align the tops of the selected objects to the top of the reference object. All the objects
move vertically so their tops are in line with the top of the reference object.
Align Horizontal Align the horizontal centers of selected objects to the horizontal center of the
Center reference object. All the objects move vertically so their horizontal centers are in line
with the horizontal center of the reference object.
Align Bottom Align the bottoms of selected objects to the bottom of the reference object. All the
objects move vertically so their bottoms are in line with the bottom of the reference
object.
Snap to Grid Select or deselect the option of aligning objects to the grid points.
Make Same Width Make the selected objects have the same width as the reference object.
Make Same Height Make the selected objects have the same height as the reference object.
Make Same Size Make the selected objects have the same width and height as the reference object.
Nudge Left Nudge the selection left. When the Snap to Grid option is not selected, all objects of
the selection move one pixel left. When the Snap to Grid option is selected, each
object of the selection moves left to where its upper-left corner aligns to the nearest
grid point.
Nudge Right Nudge the selection right. When the Snap to Grid option is not selected, all objects of
the selection move one pixel right. When the Snap to Grid option is selected, each
object of the selection moves right to where its upper-left corner aligns to the nearest
grid point.
Nudge Up Nudge the selection up. When the Snap to Grid option is not selected, all objects of
the selection move one pixel up. When the Snap to Grid option is selected, each
object of the selection moves up to where its upper-left corner aligns to the nearest
grid point.
Nudge Down Nudge the selection down. When the Snap to Grid option is not selected, all objects of
the selection move one pixel down. When the Snap to Grid option is selected, each
object of the selection moves down to where its upper-left corner aligns to the nearest
grid point.
Continued

1
Bring to Top Bring the selection to the top.
Group Group the selection.
Ungroup Ungroup the selected group.
Auto Text Resizing Select or deselect the option of automatic text resizing.
1.2.2.6. Address Toolbar
Write Address Specifies the Write address of the selected object.
Read Address Specifies the Read address of the selected object.
Monitor Address Specifies the Monitor address of the selected object.

1
1.2.2.7. Picture Toolbar

Specifies the picture name. You can select an imported picture here using the
Picture Name
drop-down list.
Import from File Select a picture from a picture file.
Select/Import
Select a picture from the software provided picture library.
from Library
Select or deselect the option that parts of the picture are transparent. The
Transparent
transparent parts are pixels having the specified transparent color.
Transparent
Select a color as the transparent color.
Color
Flip/Rotate Select a method to rotate/flip the picture.
Select or deselect the option that the picture is toned with the specified toning
Tone
color.
Toning Color Select a color as the toning color.
Fit to Object Stretch the picture so it has the same size as the object.
Center Position the picture at the center location within the object.
Horizontal
Change the horizontal position of the picture within the object.
Position
Vertical Position Change the vertical position of the picture within the object.
Background
Select a color for the background of the object.
Color
1.2.2.8. Status Bar
Coordinate of the cursor; (x, y) Size of the selected object; (width x height)
Type of the selected object Coordinate of the selected object; (x, y) Zooming factor of the screen view

1
1.2.3. Project Manager
The Project Manager is a dockable window with a project tree. You can manage your project with it easily. To open the
Project Manager, check the Project Manager menu item in the View menu. The following is an example of the Project
Manager. In this example, the project MyProject has two panel applications: MyAP_1 and MyAp_2.
Languages node
Project node
Font Templates node

Global node
Picture Database node
Sound Database node
Panel Application node Text Database node
Links node Global Tags node
Internal Memory node Global Macros node

Tags node
Link node
Sound Table node
Setup node General Setup node
Command & Status node
Screens node Clock node
Passwords node
Alarms node
Screen node
Recipes node Discrete Alarm Block node
Analog Alarm Block node

Data Loggers node
Recipe Block node
Operation Logging node
Data Logger node
Macros node Schedule node
Macro node
Panel Application node

1
■ Project Node ( )
The label of the Project node is the project name. You can do the following with the Project node:
1) Double-click it to open the Project Information & Protection dialog box.
2) Right-click it to get a pop-up menu with the following menu items:
Menu Item Description
Add Panel Application... Create a new panel application.
Import Panel Application... Import a panel application from a PLF file.
Information Open the Project Information & Protection dialog box.
Toggle All Expand all the collapsed lists of sub-nodes and collapse all the expanded lists of
sub-nodes.
■ Global Node ( )
The Global node has seven sub-nodes. You can do the following with the Global node:
1) Double-click it to expand or collapse the list of its sub-nodes.
■ Languages Node ( )
You can do the following with the Languages node:
1) Double-click it to open the Languages dialog box.
2) Right-click it to get a pop-up menu with the following menu item:
Properties... Open the Languages dialog box.
■ Font Templates Node ( )

You can do the following with the Font Templates node:
1) Double-click it to open the Font Templates dialog box.
Properties... Open the Font Templates dialog box.
■ Picture Database Node ( )

You can do the following with the Picture Database node:
1) Double-click it to open the Picture Database dialog box.
Properties... Open the Picture Database dialog box.
■ Sound Database Node ( )

You can do the following with the Sound Database node:
1) Double-click it to open the Sound Database dialog box.
Properties... Open the Sound Database dialog box.

1
■ Text Database Node ( )
You can do the following with the Text Database node:
1) Double-click it to open the Text Database dialog box.
Open Open the Text Database window.
■ Global Tags Node ( )

You can do the following with the Global Tags node:
1) Double-click it to open the Global Tags window.
Open Open the Global Tags window.
■ Global Macros Node ( )

The Global Macros node can have many Global Macro sub-nodes. Each Global Macro node is associated with a global
macro of the project. You can do the following with the Global Macros node:
2) Right-click it to get a pop-up menu with the following menu items.
Add Macro... Create a new global macro.
Import Import a global macro from an MCR file.
Macro...
■ Global Macro Node ( )

Each Global Macro node is associated with a global macro of the project. You can do the following with the Global Macro
node:
1) Double-click it to open the editing window of the associated macro.
Open Open the editing window of the associated macro.
Close Close the editing window of the associated macro.
Rename Rename the associated macro.
Delete Delete the associated macro.
Export Macro... Export the associated macro to an MCR file.

1
■ Panel Application Node ( )
The label of a Panel Application node is the associated application name. You can do the following with the Panel
Application node:
1) Double-click it to open the General Setup dialog box.
2) Right-click it to get a pop-up menu with the following menu items:
Rename Rename the panel application.
Delete Delete the panel application.
General Setup Open the General Setup dialog box.
Export Panel Application... Export the panel application to a PLF file.
Toggle All Expand all the collapsed lists of sub-nodes and collapse all the expanded lists of
sub-nodes.
■ Links Node ( )
The Links node has one Internal Memory sub-node and can have up to 16 Link sub-nodes. You can do the following with
the Links node:
Add Link Create a new communication link.
Driver Open communication driver list dialog box which lists all the supported communication drivers. In the
Link… dialog box, you can export the driver list to the .csv file.
■ Internal Memory Node ( )

You can do the following with the Internal Memory node:
1) Double-click it to open the Internal Memory dialog box.
Properties... Open the Internal Memory dialog box.
■ Link Node ( )
A Link node is associated with a communication link. You can do the following with the Link node:
1) Double-click it to open the Link Properties dialog box of the associated communication link.
Rename Rename the associated communication link.
Delete Delete the associated communication link.
Properties... Open the Link Properties dialog box of the associated communication link.
■ Tags Node ( )
You can do the following with the Tags node:
1) Double-click it to open the Tags window.
Open Open the Tags window.

1
■ Sound Table Node ( )
You can do the following with the Sound Table node:
1) Double-click it to open the Sound Table dialog box.
Properties... Open the Sound Table dialog box.
■ Setup Node ( )
The Setup node has four sub-nodes. You can do the following with the Setup node:
■ General Setup Node ( )

You can do the following with the General Setup node:
1) Double-click it to open the General Setup dialog box.
Properties... Open the General Setup dialog box.
■ Command & Status Node ( )

You can do the following with the Command & Status node:
1) Double-click it to open the Command & Status dialog box.
Properties... Open the Command & Status dialog box.
■ Clock Node ( )
You can do the following with the Clock node:
1) Double-click it to open the Clock dialog box.
Properties... Open the Clock dialog box.
■ Passwords Node ( )
You can do the following with the Passwords node:
1) Double-click it to open the Passwords dialog box.
Properties... Open the Passwords dialog box.

1
■ Screens Node ( )
The Screens node can have many Screen sub-nodes. Each Screen sub-nodes is associated with a screen of the panel
application. You can do the following with the Screens node:
New Screen... Create a new screen.
Import Screen... Import a screen from an SNF file.
Sort by Name Sort the list of Screen sub-nodes by the screen name.
Sort by Number Sort the list of Screen sub-nodes by the screen number.
Close All Screens Close all opened screens.
Save Screens as Pictures... Open the Save Screens as Pictures dialog box. You can save each of the selected
screens to a picture file using the dialog box.
■ Screen sub-Node ( )
Each Screen sub-Node is associated with a screen of the panel application. You can do the following with the Screen
sub-node:
1) Double-click it to open the associated screen if the screen is not opened yet.
2) Double-click it to open the property sheet of the associated screen if the screen is already opened.
Open Open the associated screen.
Delete Delete the associated screen.
Properties Open the property sheet of the associated screen.
Export Screen... Export the associated screen to an SNF file.
■ Alarms Node ( )
The Alarms node can have many Discrete Alarm Block sub-nodes and Analog Alarm Block sub-nodes. You can do the
following with the Alarms node:
1) Double-click it to open the Alarm Properties dialog box.
Add Discrete Alarm Block Create a new discrete alarm block.
Add Analog Alarm Block Create a new analog alarm block.
Import Alarm Block... Import an alarm block from an ALM file.
Properties Open the Alarm Properties dialog box.

1
■ Discrete Alarm Block Node ( )
A Discrete Alarm Block node is associated with a discrete alarm block of the panel application. You can do the following
with the Discrete Alarm Block node:
1) Double-click it to open the Discrete Alarm Block dialog box of the associated alarm block.
Delete Delete the associated discrete alarm block.
Properties Open the Discrete Alarm Block dialog box of the associated discrete alarm block.
Export Alarm Block... Export the associated alarm block to an ALM file.
■ Analog Alarm Block Node ( )

An Analog Alarm Block node is associated with an analog alarm block of the panel application. You can do the following
with the Analog Alarm Block node:
1) Double-click it to open the Analog Alarm Block dialog box of the associated alarm block.
Delete Delete the associated analog alarm block.
Properties Open the Analog Alarm Block dialog box of the associated analog alarm block.
Export Alarm Block... Export the associated alarm block to an ALM file.
■ Recipes Node ( )
The Recipes node can have many Recipe Block sub-nodes. Each Recipe Block sub-node is associated with a recipe block
of the panel application. You can do the following with the Recipes node:
Add Recipe Block Create a new recipe block.
■ Recipe Block Node ( )

A Recipe Block node is associated with a recipe block of the panel application. You can do the following with the Recipe
Block node:
1) Double-click it to open the Recipe Block dialog box of the associated recipe block.
Delete Delete the associated recipe block.
Properties Open the Recipe Block dialog box of the associated recipe block.
■ Data Loggers Node ( )

The Data Loggers node can have many Data Logger sub-nodes. Each Data Logger sub-node is associated with a data
logger of the panel application. You can do the following with the Data Loggers node:
Add Data Logger Create a new data logger.

1
■ Data Logger Node ( )
A Data Logger node is associated with a data logger of the panel application. You can do the following with the Data
Logger node:
1) Double-click it to open the Data Logger dialog box of the associated recipe block.
Delete Delete the associated data logger.
Properties Open the Data Logger dialog box of the associated data logger.
■ Operation Logging Node ( )

You can do the following with the Operation Logging node:
1) Double-click it to open the Operation Logging dialog box.
Properties... Open the Operation Logging dialog box.
■ Schedule Node ( )
You can do the following with the Schedule node:
1) Double-click it to open the Schedule dialog box.
Properties... Open the Schedule dialog box.
■ Macros Node ( )
The Macros node can have many Macro sub-nodes. Each Macros sub-node is associated with a macro of the panel
application. You can do the following with the Macros node:
Add Macro... Create a new macro.
Import Macro... Import a macro from an MCR file.
■ Macro Node ( )
Each Macro node is associated with a macro of the panel application. You can do the following with the Macro node:
1) Double-click it to open the editing window of the associated macro.
Open Open the editing window of the associated macro.
Close Close the editing window of the associated macro.
Rename Rename the associated macro.
Delete Delete the associated macro.
Export Macro... Export the associated macro to an MCR file.

1
1.2.4. Screen Manager
The Screen Manager is a dockable window. You can manage the screens of your project with it easily. To open the Screen
Manager, check the Screen Manager menu item in the View menu. The following is an example of the Screen Manager
that lists the screens of the application EV-104 of the project.
The name of the current panel
application. You can select another
panel application of the project to
view.
Click this icon to get the list

view of the screens.
If the Use box of a screen is

checked, the application
compiler will generate the Click this icon to get the thumbnail
runtime data for that screen. If view of the screens.
the Use box of a screen is
unchecked, the application
compiler will not generate the
runtime data for that screen,
and will assume that the
screen is non-existant.
Click the row of a screen to select

the screen. The selected screen is
highlighted. Use [Ctrl] + click or
[Shift] + click to make multiple
selections.

1
The following is an example of the Screen Manager that shows the screens in thumbnail view.
If the Use box of a screen is

checked, the application
compiler will generate the
runtime data for that screen. If
the Use box of a screen is
unchecked, the application
compiler will not generate the
runtime data for that screen, and
will assume that the screen is
non-existant.
Click the thumbnail of a screen to

select that screen. The selected
screen is highlighted. Use [Ctrl] +
click or [Shift] + click to make
multiple selections.
You can right-click the Screen Manager to get the pop-up menu with the following menu items:
New Screen... Create a new screen for the current panel application.
Open Screen... Open the selected screen.
Cut Screen Cut the selected screen and put it on the Clipboard.
Copy Screen Copy the selected screen and put it on the Clipboard.
Paste Screen Insert the screen on the Clipboard to the current panel application.
Delete Screen Delete the selected screen.
Export Screen... Export the selected screen to a file.
Import Screen... Import a screen from a file for the current panel application.
Screen Properties Open the screen property dialog box of the selected screen.

1
1.2.5. Pop-up Menus
1.2.5.1. Object Pop-up Menu
■ For all objects

Icon Menu Item Shortcut Description
Cut Ctrl+X Cut the selection and put it on the Clipboard.
Copy Ctrl+C Copy the selection and put it on the Clipboard.
Paste Ctrl+V Place the Clipboard contents on the current screen.
Delete Del Delete the selection.

Duplicate... Duplicate the selected object.

Object Properties… Open the property sheet of the selected object.

Save as Default Save the selected object as the default object for that type of object.
Default objects are saved in the Objects category of the object library.
Save to Object Library… Save the selected object to the object library.
Save as Global Object… Save the selected object as the global object in the Global category of
the object library. Global Objects can be used for the Global Object
Containers.
Save Current Screen as
Save the current screen to a picture file.
Picture…
■ For polylines and polygons

Insert Point Add a point at the specified position.
Delete Point Delete a selected point.
■ For pipelines

Insert Connector Add a connector at the specified position. If the specified position is on the vertical pipe
segment, you can add left, right or cross connector. If the specified position is on the
horizontal pipe segment, you can add up, down or cross connector.
Delete Pipe Segment Delete a selected connector and its pipe segments.

1
1.2.5.2. Screen Pop-up Menu

Close Screen Close the current screen.
Cut Screen Cut the current screen and put it on the Clipboard.
Copy Screen Copy the current screen and put it on the Clipboard.
Paste Screen Insert the screen on the Clipboard to the current panel application.
Delete Screen Delete the current screen.
Save Current Screen as Picture... Save the current screen to a picture file.

CHAPTER 2
CREATING PROJECTS
2.1. Project Information and Protection ........................................................... 1

2.2. Global Settings .............................................................................................. 3
2.2.1. Languages ...................................................................................................................... 4
2.2.2. Font Templates............................................................................................................... 5
2.2.3. Picture Database ............................................................................................................ 6
2.2.4. Sound Database ........................................................................................................... 10
2.2.5. Text Database............................................................................................................... 12
2.3. Working with Tags...................................................................................... 15
2.3.1. Types of Tags ............................................................................................................... 15
2.3.2. Opening and Closing Tags Editor................................................................................ 15
2.3.3. Creating Tags with Tags Editor................................................................................... 16
2.3.4. Importing and Exporting Tags..................................................................................... 19
2.3.5. Adding/Deleting/Renaming Tag Groups..................................................................... 19
-i-
42
2.1. Project Information and Protection
You can get project information and set up passwords to protect your project, password table, and global macros by using
the Project information & Protection dialog box. To open the dialog box, you can do one of the following:
1) In the Project Manager tool window, double-click the Project node ( ).
2) In the menu bar, click Project to bring up the Project sub-menu. Then, click Information & Protection….
The following is an example of the Project Information and Protection dialog box.
2-1 CHAPTER 2 CREATING PROJECTS

2
The following table describes how to read or use each of the items in the dialog box.
Item Description
Project Name The name of the project. It is also the file name of the project.
Author The author of the project.
Created Time/date The time and date when the project was created.
Last Saved Time/date The last time and date when the project was saved.
Version The version number of the Software that was used to save the project last time.
Developer Click it to bring up the Edit Developer Password dialog box and specify the
Password developer password.
The developer password must be an unsigned integer and can have up to 9
digits. The default developer password is 000000000 (nine 0s) for new projects
and new panels. When the runtime data of an application is downloaded to a
panel, the panel compares its developer password with the developer password
of the application. If the passwords match, the panel accepts the download
operation immediately. If the passwords are different, the panel prompts for the
entry of the developer password of the application. This ensures that one has the
right to use the runtime data. After the entry of the application's developer
password, the panel accepts the download operation and takes the developer
password of the application as its own developer password.
Project File Protect Check this item to enable project file protection. You need to enter the specified
Protection password to open the project file when this item is checked.
Use Developer Available when the Protect item is checked. Check this item if you want to use
Password the developer password as the protection.
Available when the Use Developer Password item is unchecked. Click it to bring
up the Edit Password dialog box and specify the password.
Password Protect Check this item to enable the password table protection. You need to enter the
Table specified password in order to view the password table of any panel application
Protection of the project when this item is checked.
Password the developer password for the protection.
Global Protect Check this item to enable the global macro protection. You need to enter the
Macro specified password for viewing any global macro of the project when this item is
Protection checked.
Password the developer password as the protection.
Note You can type a note for the project.
OK Click it to close the dialog box and accept all changes.
Cancel Click it to close the dialog box and discard all changes.
Click it to open the help document for more details about the dialog and how to
use it.
Click it to close the dialog box and discard all changes.
CHAPTER 2 CREATING PROJECTS 2-2

42
2.2. Global Settings
Global settings are the settings that can be used by all panel applications in the same project. They are accessible and
modifiable throughout the project. Global settings help a designer to construct a project that is flexible and easy to update.
Designers can make changes to the overall design of the panel application by revising the global settings directly.
You can modify the Global settings in the corresponding dialog box. To open the dialog box, double-click the related node
under the Global node in the Project Manager tool window. Alternatively, click Project to access the Project sub-menu in
the menu bar, and then click the related command in the Project sub-menu.
The global settings contain the following items.
■ Languages
Described in Section 2.2.1.
■ Font Templates
■ Picture Database
■ Sound Database
■ Text Database
■ Global Tags
Described in Section 2.3.
■ Global Macros
Described in Chapter 14.

2
2.2.1. Languages
This section describes how to set up the languages for the project using the Languages dialog box. Each panel application
in the project can have up to 10 languages for the screen texts. The following is an example of the Languages dialog box.
The following table describes each property in the Languages dialog box.
Property Description
Number of languages Specifies how many languages the project will have.
Language The index of the language.
Name Specifies a name for a language. The name must be unique within the project.
Character Set Specifies the character set for a language to determine how to translate the bytes in the
text into characters on the screen.
Import... Click it to import the languages settings from a LNG file.
Export... Click it to export the languages settings to a LNG file.
OK Click it to close the dialog box and accepts all changes.
Click it to open the help document for more details about the dialog and how to use it.

42
2.2.2. Font Templates
The following is an example of the Font Templates dialog box.
Item Description
Language Specifies the language to apply the font settings to.
Template List Lists the font templates of the selected language. You can select a font template
here as the current template.
Current Name The name of the current template.
Template Windows Font Specifies the Windows font for the current template.
Font Style Specifies the font style for the current template.
Size Specifies the size for the current template.
Underline Specifies if the Underline feature is selected for the current template.
Strikeout Specifies if the Strikeout feature is selected for the current template.
Update Click it to update the selected template using the new settings.
Import... Click it to import the font templates from an FTF file.
Export... Click it to export the font templates to an FTF file.
OK Click it to close the dialog box and accepts all changes.
Click it to open the help document for more details about the dialog and how to
use it.

2
2.2.3. Picture Database
The picture database contains all the pictures used by the project. The picture database is empty when the project is
initially created.
2.2.3.1. Importing and Exporting Pictures
■ Importing Pictures
You need to import a picture before you can use it for the project. There are 5 ways to import pictures:
1) Use the Picture Database dialog box to import one picture at a time from a picture file. The types of importable picture
files include: BMP, JPG, GIF, and WMF.
2) Use the Picture Database dialog box to import many pictures at a time from a picture database (PDB) file.
3) Use the Picture Database dialog box to import one or many pictures at a time by dragging the pictures files from
Windows Explorer to the Picture Database list.
4) Click the icon to select and import a picture file when you specify a picture in a dialog box or a property sheet.
5) Click the icon to select and import a picture in a picture database file when you specify a picture in a dialog box or
a property sheet.
■ Exporting Pictures
You can export the pictures of the project so other projects can use those pictures by importing them. There are 2 ways to
export pictures:
1) Use the Picture Database dialog box to export one picture at a time to a picture file.
2) Use the Picture Database dialog box to export many pictures at a time to a picture database (PDB) file.

42
2.2.3.2. Picture Groups
The picture database can contain picture groups.
A picture group is a collection of pictures. Each picture in a picture group represents one state. When a picture group is
displayed as the picture shape of an object, the picture that corresponds to the current object state is shown. This is the
main benefit of using a picture group as the object shape because it can show each object state with a different picture.
When a picture group is used as the shape for buttons or switches, you may want it to look differently when it is pressed. In
order to support the pressed look, a picture group needs two pictures for each state: one picture for the normal (released)
look, and another picture is for the pressed look.
For example, a 3-state multi-state switch needs a picture group that contains 6 pictures as its picture shape if the pressed
look is required.
The following is an example of a picture group supporting 3 states and the pressed look.
Picture Group State Pictures
0 (Normal/Released)
0 (Pressed)
1 (Normal/Released)
1 (Pressed)
2 (Normal/Released)
2 (Pressed)

2
2.2.3.3. Picture Database dialog box
The following is an example of the Picture Database dialog box.
Item Description
Pictures Lists the pictures and picture groups of the project. You can select a picture or a picture group as the
current selection. You can also make multiple selections.
View Shows the current selection. If the selection is a picture group, the first picture of the group will be
shown.
OK Closes the dialog box and accepts all changes to the picture database.
Cancel Closes the dialog box and discards all changes to the picture database.
Import... Imports a picture from a picture file. The types of importable picture files include: BMP, JPG, GIF,
and WMF.
Import From... Imports pictures from a picture database (PDB) file.
Export... Exports the current picture to a picture file.
Export To... Exports the current selection to a picture database (PDB) file.
Add Group Adds one picture group to the picture database.
Add Item Imports a picture from a picture file and adds the picture to the current picture group.
Continued

42
Item Description
Add From... Imports pictures from a picture database (PDB) file and adds those pictures to the current picture
group.
Move Up Moves the selection down in the list
Move Down Moves the selection up in the list
Delete Delete the selection.
Color Select Dithering or Nearest Color as the color conversion method.
Conversion If the color resolution of a picture is not compatible with the target panel, the application compiler will
use the specified method to convert the picture data so it can be displayed without too much color
distortion at runtime.
Support Available when the selection is a picture group. Check this item so the current picture group
Pressed Look supports the pressed look. When a picture group supports the pressed look, it needs two pictures for
each state; one picture is for the normal (released) look and another picture is for the pressed look.
Transparent Check this item to enable the transparent feature of the selection; if the selection is a picture, the
picture will be transparent for the specified transparent color; if the selection is a picture group, all
the pictures of the picture group will be transparent for the specified transparent color. Note that this
feature is effective only when a picture or a picture group is shown as the picture shape for an
object.
It is a common practice to make a picture transparent for a certain color so the picture can be shown
as a non-rectangle shape. The following are some examples:
Original Picture Transparent Color Picture Shown
Transparent Available when the Transparent item is checked. Select a color for the transparent color.
Color
Rename Click this button to rename the current picture or the current picture group.
Rotate/Flip Rotates or flips the current picture and saves it as another picture in the picture database.
You can select one of the following 7 methods for the Rotate/Flip operation.
Method Description
90° Rotates the picture clockwise by 90 degrees
X Flips the picture over the X axis
90° & X Rotates the picture clockwise by 90 degrees and flips it over the X Axis
Y Flips the picture over the Y axis
90° & Y Rotates the picture clockwise by 90 degrees and flips it over the Y Axis

2
2.2.4. Sound Database
The sound database contains all the sounds used by the project. The sound database is empty when the project is initially
created.
You can use a function button to play or stop playing a sound. For details, please see Section 5.4.1 Basic Operations of
function buttons
You can use the Execute General Command ($C2.f) command flag setting in the Command Block to play a sound. For
details, please see Section 3.6.7 Using General Commands.
2.2.4.1. Importing and Exporting Sounds
■ Importing Sounds
You need to import a sound before you can use it for the project. There are two ways to import sounds:
1) Use the Sound Database dialog box to import one sound at a time from a sound file. The types of importable sound
files include: WAV.
2) Use the Sound Database dialog box to import many sounds at a time from a sound database (SDB) file.
■ Exporting Sounds
You can export the sounds of the project so other projects can import those sounds. There are 2 ways to export sounds:
1) Use the Sound Database dialog box to export one sound at a time to a sound file.
2) Use the Sound Database dialog box to export many sounds at a time to a sound database (SDB) file.

42
2.2.4.2. Sound Database dialog box
The following is an example of the Sound Database dialog box.
Item Description
Sounds Lists the sounds of the project. You can select a sound as the current selection. You can also make
multiple selections.
Sound Displays the sound information of the current selection such as sound format and length.
Information
You can click to start playing the sound, click to pause, and click to stop playing the
sound.
OK Closes the dialog box and accepts all changes to the sound database.
Cancel Closes the dialog box and discards all changes to the sound database.
Import... Imports a sound from a sound file. The types of importable sound files include: WAV.
Import From... Imports sounds from a sound database (SDB) file.
Export... Exports the current sound to a sound file.
Export To... Exports the current selection to a sound database (SDB) file.
Rename Click this button to rename the current sound.
Delete Delete the selection.
Move Up Moves the selection down in the list
Move Down Moves the selection up in the list

2
2.2.5. Text Database
The Text Database is a dockable window. With the Text Database, you can manage the texts of the multiple languages in
your project easily. To open the Text Database, check the Text Database menu item in the Project menu, or double click
the Text Database node under the Global node in the Project Manager tool window.
The following is an example of the Text Database that lists the texts in all the languages of the project.
File to Table Icon Table to File Icon Table to Application Icon Application to Table Icon
Name of the table. You can

select a table from Table A
to Table L.
To edit text, select a text row by first left-click anywhere in it, and then click the cell of
the row to bring up the edit box. In the edit box, type in the text.
To stop or confirm editing, click anywhere outside the selected row.

42
You can click the following icons to bring up the corresponding dialog box to import or export texts.
Icon Description
Imports texts from a text file(.txt file) to the selected table.
Click to open the help document for more

details about the dialog and how to use it.
Select an operation from the

If the Import box of a language is dropdown list. You can overwrite
checked, the texts of that language in the table or append the text to
the text file will be imported into the the table.
table. If the Import box of a language is
unchecked, the texts of that language
will not be imported.
Exports texts from the selected table to a text file (.txt file).

If the Export box of a language is

checked, the texts of that language in
the table will be exported to the file. If
the Export box of a language is
unchecked, the texts of that language
will not be exported.

2
Icon Description
Imports texts from the selected table to a panel application in the same project.
Table Name
Application Name

If the Import box of a language is
checked, the texts of that language in
the table will be imported into the
application. If the Import box of a
language is unchecked, the texts of
that language will not be imported.
Exports texts from a panel application of the project to the selected table.

You can right-click the Text Database to get the pop-up menu with the following menu items:
Cut Cut the selected text and put it on the Clipboard.
Copy Copy the selected text and put it on the Clipboard.
Paste Insert the text on the Clipboard to the current table.
Delete Delete the selected text.
<Language name> Check the language name to display the text of objects in the selected
language.

42
2.3. Working with Tags
A tag represents a single input or output variable monitored or controlled by the system. By changing tags, you can use
any PLC or controller without re-developing the application. This chapter explains how you can define and manage tags
with the tags editor.
After the tag is created in tags editor, you can use it in your application using the Select Tag Dialog Box. Please see
Section 4.4.3.3 Selecting Tags for details. Or you can specify the tag by yourself. The format of a tag is Link Number\Tag
Group Name\Tag Name.
For example:
Tags Description
1\MONITOR\CORE DISPLAY Indicates a local tag named CORE DISPLAY in MONITOR tag group of link 1
0\BOT\DECLARE Indicates a local tag named DECLARE in BOT tag group of internal memory
0\_ALARM SHOW Indicates a global tag named _ALARM SHOW of internal memory
Note that the maximum text amount of the tag/tag group name is 48 characters. You are allowed to define not only tags for
the link, but also the tags for a tag group of the link.
2.3.1. Types of Tags
There are two types of tags: global tags and local tags.
■ Global Tag
A global tag is a tag that can be used by all panel applications in the same project. With global tags, the panel applications
in the same project can share the common address declaration without having to keep and maintain the same set of tags
locally.
Note that a global tag can only be associated with internal variables.
■ Local Tag
A local tag is a tag that can only be used by the panel application in which the tag is located.
2.3.2. Opening and Closing Tags Editor

■ Opening Tags Editor
To open the global tags editor, use the Global Tags… command in the Project menu, or double click Global > Global Tags
in the Project Manager tool window, or right-click Global > Global Tags in the Project Manager tool window to bring out the
pop-up menu, and then use the Open command on the pop-up menu.
To open the local tags editor, use the Tags… command on the Panel menu, or double click Panel Application > Tags in the
Project Manager tool window, or right-click the Panel Application > Tags in the Project Manager tool window to bring out
the pop-up menu, and then use the Open command on the pop-up menu.
■ Closing Tags Editor

To close the tags editor, select the window and click the close button, or choose Windows... on the Window menu, select
the window to close in the window dialog, and then click the Close Window(s) button. You can also right-click Global >
Global Tags (Panel Application > Tags) in the Project Manager tool window to bring out the pop-up menu, and then use the
Close command on the pop-up menu to close the tags editor.

2
2.3.3. Creating Tags with Tags Editor
You can use tags editor to create and manage tags. Tags editor is split into two panes: Tag Group Explorer on the left and
Tag List Window on the right. Each pane scrolls separately, and both horizontally and vertically. You can position the
mouse over the vertical splitter bar to drag the bar and resize the panes.
The following is an example of the tags editor.

List all the Tags for the
active tag group named
Tag Group Explorer List all the Tags for the link MONITOR Tag List Window
Tag Groups
Vertical Splitter Bar

42
2.3.3.1. Tag Group Explorer
Tag explorer displays links, recipes, data loggers and their tag groups, if any. From tags explorer, you can:
■ Open a tag group of a link for editing by clicking the node
■ Import and export tags of a link
Described in Section 2.3.4
■ Add new groups to a link and delete or rename the existing tag groups
■ View tags (Data Items) of recipes and data loggers.
If there are any recipes or data loggers in the application, the tags editor will display their data items as the tags. All the
data items (tags) for the recipes or data loggers are read only in the tags editor. If you want to edit the data items (tags),
please use the corresponding dialog box.
You can edit the data items of

the selected recipe block with
the Recipe Block dialog box.
Please see Section 10.5
Setting up Recipe Blocks for
details.
Recipe Block Name (ID)
Data Logger Name (ID)

2
2.3.3.2. Tag List Window
Tag list window displays all the tags related to the selected tag group. In the tag list window, you can:
■ Switch between tag groups by clicking the window tab
■ Click any column header to sort the list
■ Add a tag by defining the tag name and then click other cells to edit the elements of the tag
The following table describes each attribute of the tag.
Item Description
Name Specifies the name for the tag.
The name must be unique in the tag group.
The maximum text amount of the name is 48 characters. Chinese characters are supported.
The name cannot start with a number, and cannot be the same as a macro keyword.
The name of global tags must start with underscore ( _ ). The name of the local tags cannot
start with underscore ( _ ).
Data Type Selects the data type for the tag from the dropdown list. The supported data types for each tag
are the following: 16-Bit Unsigned Integer, 32-Bit Unsigned Integer, 16-Bit Signed Integer,
32-Bit Signed Integer, 16-Bit BCD, 32-Bit BCD, 32-Bit Floating Point, ASCII String, Bit.
Address <Edit Specifies the bit address when the Data Type is Bit, otherwise specifies the word address.
Box>
Click this icon to bring up the Address Input Keypad and specify the desired address for the
<Edit Box> field.
Length Specifies the string length when the Data Type is ASCII string, otherwise displays n/a
Scan Rate Selects the scan rate for the tag from the dropdown list. The supported scan rates for each tag
are Fast and Normal.
Comment Type a comment for the tag.
■ Cut, copy, paste and delete selected tags using menu commands or key combinations.
You can right-click the number column to display a pop-up menu of editing commands. The editing commands available
vary depending on what is selected.
The following table shows the supported editing commands.
Menu Command Key Combination Description

Cut CTRL+X Removes selected tags from the active window and saves them to
the Clipboard.
Copy CTRL+C Duplicates selected tags in the active window.
Paste CTRL+V Pastes cut or copied tags into an active window.
Delete DELETE Deletes tags without copying it to the Clipboard.
Note that all editing commands require a selection in order to work. To select a tag, click the row on its header number
column. To select multiple tags, click the row on its heard column and use Ctrl+Click to add a row to the selection.

42
2.3.4. Importing and Exporting Tags
■ Importing Tags
1) Right-click the Internal Memory, a link, or any tag groups item in the Tag Group Explorer to bring out the pop-up menu.
Then use the Import Tags… command on the pop-up menu.
2) Click the *.csv file you want to import. If you want to open a tags import file that is saved in a different folder, locate and
open the folder first.
3) Click Open.
Note: If the file format is not correct, the import operation will be cancelled.
Note: The tags import file can contain tags only, or many tag groups and their tags.
Note: If the name of a tag already exists in the tag group, you will be asked to confirm whether to replace the existing tag
or not.
z If Yes, the tag in the tag group will be replaced by the tag from the file.
z If No, only the tag with nonexisting names will be imported.
z If Cancel, the import operation will be cancelled.
Note: If the tag group name already exists, you will be asked to confirm whether to replace the existing tag group or not.
z If Yes, the tags in the existing tag group will be removed and replaced by the tags from the file.
z If No, only the tag group with nonexistent name and its tags will be imported.
z If Cancel, the import operation will be cancelled.
■ Exporting Tags
If you have tags you want to reuse in another application panel, export the tags of the selected tag group as a .csv file. You
may do the following:
1) Locate the tag group you would like to export.
2) Right-click on the tag group to display the pop-up menu; and then click Export Tags..,
3) If you want to save tags in a different folder, locate and open the folder first, then click Save.
You can export all the tags of the internal memory as a .csv file by right-clicking on the internal memory and then using the
Export All Tags command on the pop-up menu.
2.3.5. Adding/Deleting/Renaming Tag Groups

■ Adding a Tag Group
1) Click the internal memory you want to add a tag group for.
2) Right-click the selected item to display the pop-up menu, and then click Add Group.
3) The new tag group will be added, and the default tag group name will become selected for renaming.
■ Deleting a Tag Group:

1) Locate the tag group you would like to delete.
2) Right-click on the tag group to display the pop-up menu, and then click Delete Group.
Note: You can only select one tag group to delete at one time.
■ Renaming a Tag Group:

1) Locate the tag group you would like to rename.
2) Right-click on the tag group to display the pop-up menu, and then click Rename Group or click the tag group.
3) The tag group name will become selected. Simply type the new name over the selected text, and then press the
ENTER key or click anywhere outside the editing field.

CHAPTER 3
CREATING PANEL
APPLICATIONS
3.1. Setting up the Panel Application................................................................. 1

3.1.1. General Settings............................................................................................................. 2
3.1.2. Custom Settings ............................................................................................................. 5
3.1.3. Activating Multiple Overlapped Buttons by One Touch ............................................... 7
3.1.4. Specifying Default Folder for PC Based File I/O.......................................................... 8
3.2. Working with Keys ..................................................................................... 10
3.2.1. Default Settings for the Panel Application .................................................................. 11
3.2.2. Settings for a Screen .................................................................................................... 12
3.2.3. Key Usage Table Settings ............................................................................................ 13
3.2.4. Usage Settings for a Key ............................................................................................. 14
3.3. Internal Memory ........................................................................................ 18
3.3.1. Types of Internal Memory ........................................................................................... 18
3.3.2. Index Registers ............................................................................................................ 18
3.3.3. System Memory........................................................................................................... 19
3.3.4. Setting up Internal Memory......................................................................................... 21
3.4. Communication Links................................................................................ 22
3.4.1. Types of Communication Links................................................................................... 22
3.4.2. General Settings........................................................................................................... 26
3.4.3. Parameter Settings (Serial Port)................................................................................... 29
3.4.4. Parameter Settings (Ethernet Port) .............................................................................. 30
3.4.5. Sub-link Settings.......................................................................................................... 31
3.4.6. Sharing Data among Panels Using Data Sharer .......................................................... 32
3.4.7. Writing Communication Programs Using Macro Commands..................................... 33
3.4.8. Using Gateway Server of the Target Panel .................................................................. 37
3.5. Sound Table................................................................................................. 40
3.6. Command Block and Status Words .......................................................... 42
3.6.1. Types of Command Block and Status Words .............................................................. 42
3.6.3. Command Block Settings (Type A)............................................................................. 48
-i-
3.6.4. Status Word Settings (Type A)..................................................................................... 51
3.6.5. Command Block Settings (Type H)............................................................................. 52
3.6.6. Status Word Settings (Type H) .................................................................................... 54
3.6.7. Using General Commands........................................................................................... 55
3.7. Setting up Clock Operations ..................................................................... 57
3.8. Setting up Passwords.................................................................................. 60
3.9. Screens ......................................................................................................... 61
3.9.1. Types of Screens .......................................................................................................... 61
3.9.2. Creating and Opening Screens..................................................................................... 62
3.9.3. Setting up a Screen ...................................................................................................... 63
3.9.4. Importing/Exporting a Screen...................................................................................... 68
3.9.5. Cutting/Copying/Pasting/Deleting a Screen ................................................................ 68
3.9.6. Saving Screens as Pictures........................................................................................... 69
- ii -
43
3.1. Setting up the Panel Application
You can set up the panel application with the General Setup dialog box. There are five ways to open the dialog box:
1) In the Project Manager window, double-click the panel application node ( ).
2) In the Project Manager window, right-click the panel application node ( ) to bring up the pop-up menu and select
General Setup.
3) In the Project Manager window, double-click the General Setup node ( ) under Setup node of the panel application
4) In the Project Manager window, right-click the General Setup node ( ) under Setup node of the panel application to
bring out the pop-up menu and select Properties.
5) In the menu bar, click Panel | Setup | General Setup….
The General Setup dialog box contains the following pages. Some of the pages appear only when they are needed.
■ General
■ Custom
■ Keys
■ Startup Macro / Main Macro / Event Macro / Time Macro
3-1 CHAPTER 3 CREATING PANEL APPLICATIONS

3
3.1.1. General Settings
This section describes how to define the general settings for a panel application. The following is an example of the
General page of the General Setup dialog box.
CHAPTER 3 CREATING PANEL APPLICATIONS 3-2

43
The following table describes each item in the General page.
Item Description
Application Name The name of the panel application.
Model The model of the target panel.
Click to bring up the Panel Model dialog box which helps you to select a
model by specifying the size, resolution and orientation of the display.
The following is a sample of Panel Model dialog box
Battery Backed RAM Specifies the size of the battery backed RAM installed in the target panel.
Flash ROM Specifies the size of the flash ROM installed in the target panel.
Use External Keypad Available if the target panel supports the custom designed external keypad.
Select this option if the application uses a custom designed external keypad.
Start Up Screen Specifies the first screen of the application that the target panel will display after
powering up.
Delay Time Specifies the time that the target panel will delay to run the application.
Display Check this option if you want the target panel to display countdown while it is
Countdown waiting for the expiry of the Delay Time.
Language Specifies the language the application will display the text in after power up.
Login Required Check this option if you want the target panel to get a valid password from the
operator before it displays the first screen.
Default User Available when Login Required is not selected. Specifies the initial user level for
Level the application.
Idle Display Idle Check this option to display the Idle Screen when the target panel has idled for
Processing Screen the specified amount of time.
Idle Time The length of time used to determine when the idle screen is displayed.
Idle Screen Specifies the screen that will be displayed as the idle screen.
Change User Check this option to change the current user level when the idle screen is
Level displayed.
Idle User Level Available when the Change User Level is selected. Specifies the user once the
idle screen is displayed.
Screen Saver Specifies the screen saver time. The target panel will turn off its backlight when it
Time has not been operated by the operator for the specified amount of time.
Continued

3
Item Description
Buzzer Sounding Time Specifies the length of the beep sounded by the buzzer when a touch operation is
activated.
Overlapped buttons can be Check this option if you want the application to have the overlapped buttons can
activated in sequence by one be activated in sequence by one touch feature. This allows the operator to issue
touch multiple data settings or commands with one touch. There are some constraints
with using this feature. See Section 3.1.3 for details.
Note You can type a note for the panel application.
Macro Startup Macro Check this item if you want the application to have the Startup macro.
The Startup macro is only run once when the application starts. The target panel
will not display the start-up screen until the macro terminates. You can use
Startup macro to initialize global data and settings for your application.
Main Macro Check this item if you want the application to have the Main macro.
The Main macro runs concurrently with the application. The target panel runs the
Main macro cyclically, i.e. it will delay preset time to run Main macro starting from
the first command each time after processing the last command of the macro, or
when it encounters an END command in the middle of the macro.
Event Macro #1~#4 An Event macro is run whenever the associated trigger bit changes from 0 (Off) to
1 (On). An application can have up to four Event macros. If the application needs
an Event macro for a certain event, check one of the items that are available and
specify the associated trigger bit for the corresponding Event macro.
Time Macro #1~#4 A Time macro is run periodically with a preset time interval. An application can
have up to four Time macros. Each Time macro has a different set of time
intervals that can be chosen to specify how often it runs. The following table
describes the available time intervals for each Time macro.
Time Macro Available Time Intervals Remark
#1 0.5 and 1 second
#2 1, 2, 3, ... and 59 seconds
#3 1, 2, 3, ... and 59 minutes The macro is run at 0 second.
#4 1, 2, 3, ... and 24 hours The macro is run on the clock.
If the application needs a Time macro, check the item of an appropriate Time
macro and specify the time interval for that Time macro.
Print Printer Specifies the type of printer that the application will use.
Port Specifies the port of the target panel that will connect to the printer.
If the printer is a mono printer, you can click it to bring up the “Settings for
Printing” dialog box which helps you to select the colors to be printed in black.
The following is a sample of Settings for Printing dialog box.

43
3.1.2. Custom Settings
This section describes how to define the customization settings for a panel application. The following is an example of the
Custom page of the General Setup dialog box.

3
The following table describes each item in the Custom page.
Item Description
Decimal Number Use custom Check this item if you want the application to use the custom keypad instead
Keypad keypad of the built-in keypad for the entry of decimal numbers.
Window Screen Specify the window screen that is designated as the decimal number keypad.
Hexadecimal Use custom Check this item if you want the application to use the custom keypad instead
Number Keypad keypad of the built-in keypad for the entry of hexadecimal numbers.
Window Screen Specify the window screen that is designated as the hexadecimal number
keypad.
Octal Number Use custom Check this item if you want the application to use the custom keypad instead
Keypad keypad of the built-in keypad for the entry of octal numbers.
Window Screen Specify the window screen that is designated as the octal number keypad.
Character Keypad Use custom Check this item if you want the application to use the custom keypad instead
keypad of the built-in keypad for the entry of characters.
Window Screen Specify the window screen that is designated as the character keypad.
Password Keypad Use custom Check this item if you want the application to use the custom keypad instead
keypad of the built-in keypad for the entry of passwords.
Window Screen Specify the window screen that is designated as the password keypad.
Default Folder for File I/O This field is available only for Windows-based panels. There are 4 kinds of
default folder that you can select for your application. They are Same as
Application File, Pre-assigned, New Per Day, New Per Month. Please see
Section 3.1.4 for details
Touch Operation Use custom sign Check this item if you want the application to display the custom sign instead
Disabled Sign of the built-in sign when the touch operation of an object is disabled.
Picture Specify the picture that is to replace the built-in sign.
Transparent Select this item if you want parts of the custom sign to be transparent.
T. Color Specify the transparent color.
CSV/Text Files Date Format The date format that the target panel will use to output date information to text
files.
Time Format The time format that the target panel will use to output time information to text
files.
Separator Select desired delimiter that can be TAB, semicolon, or comma of CSV files.
User Level Required Set Time/Date The minimum user level that is required to set the time and date of the target
in Panel Setup panel through the target panel's Panel Setup menu.
Prohibit uploading and copying of the Check this option if you want to prohibit uploading and copying of the panel
panel application stored in the HMI unit application stored in the HMI unit.
Communication Error Mark Specify what to display for the Numeric Objects (including Numeric Entry and
Numeric Display) and Character Objects (including Character Entry and
Character Display) when their monitored data are unavailable due to
communication errors. You can select the following options as the error mark.
Mark Description
(As is) No communication error mark for the object. Leaves the display
unchanged.
(Blank) Clears the display of the object.
? Displays a string of character ‘?’.
# Display a string of character ‘#’.

43
3.1.3. Activating Multiple Overlapped Buttons by One Touch
To enable the feature of activating multiple overlapped buttons by one touch, open the Panel General Setup dialog box and
check the option of “Activate multiple overlapped buttons by one touch” on the General page. With this feature, the
overlapped underlying buttons will be activated sequentially from top to bottom when the top-most button is pressed. The
following are the constraints of applying this feature.
1. The types of buttons that support this feature include: Bit Button, Toggle Switch, Screen Button, Function Button, Word
Button, Multi-state Switch, and Keypad Button.
2. The first button, i.e. the top-most button, can only be a bit button, a toggle switch, a word button, a multi-state switch, or
a keypad button. The button cannot have the optional property of Minimum Hold Time or Operator Confirmation. If the
button is a bit button, a toggle switch, or a keypad button, it cannot have any macro. If the button is a word button, it
cannot be configured for Enter Value or Enter Password. If the button is a multi-state switch, it cannot be configured as
a List or Drop-down List.
3. The underlying buttons that have the optional property of Minimum Hold Time or Operator Confirmation will not be
activated.
4. An underlying bit button that is configured for Momentary ON or Momentary OFF will not be activated. However, if that
bit button is the second button and the first button is a keypad button, it can be activated. An underlying bit button that
has any macro will not be activated.
5. An underlying toggle switch that has any macro will not be activated.
6. An underlying multi-state switch that is configured as a List or Drop-down List will not be activated.
7. A function button can only be the last button, i.e. the bottom-most button. All the buttons that are under a function
button will not be activated.
8. A screen button can only be the last button. All the buttons that are under a screen button will not be activated.
9. A word button that is configured for Enter Value or Enter Password can only be the last button. All the buttons that are
under such a button will not be activated.
10. The maximum number of buttons that can be indirectly activated by one touch is 10.

3
3.1.4. Specifying Default Folder for PC Based File I/O
The default folder will be used for a file I/O operation when one of the following two conditions exists:
1) The command issued for the operation does not require a specific filename.
2) The command issued for the operation requires a filename and the specified filename contains no path information.
To specify the default folder, access the “Custom” page of the “Panel General Setup” dialog box. Select “General Setup”
and “Panel” in the submenu to get the dialog box, then click the “Custom” tab. Another way to access the dialog box is to
double-click the “Panel General Setup” node on the project tree.
On the “Custom” page, you can specify the desired default folder in the “Default Folder for File I/O” group according to the
following rules:
1) If you want the folder of your application file (.pe2 or .pl2 file) to be the default folder, select “Same as Application File”
in the “Option” combo box.
For applications with this selection running on HMI units, because the applications are not stored in any file or under
any directory, the root directory of the USB memory stick will be used as the default folder instead.
2) If you want to use a specific folder that will exist at run-time as the default folder, select “Pre-assigned” in the “Option”
combo box and specify the folder in the “Folder” edit box.
Note that the specified folder must exist at run-time or the file I/O operations will fail.

43
3) If your application needs a new default folder every day, select “New Per Day” in the “Option” combo box,
and specify the following 3 items:
A) Folder Path: The path for the new folder. The system will create a new default folder under the specified path
every day.
B) Folder Name Format: The format to create a default folder name.
C) <Prefix>: The string to be used as the prefix of the new default folder names. Note that only ASCII characters are
allowed.
Example:
Folder Name Format Folder Path <Prefix> Date Default Folder Name
<Prefix>yymmdd C: ABC December 19, 2008 C:\ABC081219
<Prefix>yyyymmdd D:\NEO ABC_ December 19, 2008 D:\NEO\ABC_20081219
<Prefix>yyMMMdd C: XYZ January 10, 2009 C:\XYZ09JAN10
<Prefix>yyyyMMMdd D:\123 XYZ_ January 10, 2009 D:\123\XYZ_2009JAN10
4) If your application needs a new default folder every month, select “New Per Month” in the “Option” combo box and
specify the following 3 items:
A) Folder Path: The path for the new folder. The system will create a new default folder under the specified path
every month.
B) Folder Name Format: The format to create a default folder name.
C) <Prefix>: The string to be used as the prefix of the new default folder names. Note that only ASCII characters are
allowed.
Example:
Folder Name Format Folder Path <Prefix> Date Default Folder Name
<Prefix>yymm C: ABC December 19, 2008 C:\ABC0812
<Prefix>yyyymm D:\NEO ABC_ December 19, 2008 D:\NEO\ABC_200812
<Prefix>yyMMM C: XYZ January 10, 2009 C:\XYZ09JAN
<Prefix>yyyyMMM D:\123 XYZ_ January 10, 2009 D:\123\XYZ_2009JAN

3
3.2. Working with Keys
Some of the target panels are key type. Those key type panels carry external keys that you can press to perform the
defined operations.
To assign or change the operation of the keys in the panel application, you can use the following two ways:
■ Default Settings for the Panel Application

■ Settings for a Screen

43
3.2.1. Default Settings for the Panel Application
The default settings are settings that can be used by all screens in the panel application. With the default settings of the
keys, all the screens in the panel application can share the common usages of keys and do not have to keep and maintain
the same usages in each screen.
You can change the default settings of keys for the panel application in the General Setup property sheet. To open the
General Setup property sheet, please see Section 3.1 Setting up the Panel Application for details. The General Setup
property sheet provides you with the Keys page to set up the default keys.
The following is an example of the Keys page and Usage Setup dialog in the General Setup property sheet.
Key Usage Table Usage Setup Dialog
If all the screens use the

default settings of the key
named K22, the K22 key
will perform just like the bit
button when it is pressed.
That means in any screen
at runtime, the state of
1\M238 bit will be inverted
when the K22 Key is
pressed.
There are two parts in the above illustration: Key Usage Table and Usage Setup Dialog.
■ Key Usage Table
A table lists all the keys of the target panel and their default usages. The key usage table is initially empty (Usages for key
and key combination are none) after the panel application is created. For details about Key Usage Table, please see
Section 3.2.3
■ Usage Setup Dialog
A floating dialog box allows you to specify the usage of the selected key or key combination. Left-click the cell in the key
usage table to bring up the dialog. For details about Usage Setup Dialog, please see Section 3.2.4.

3
3.2.2. Settings for a Screen
Each screen can have its own key operation. You can allow a key to perform an operation only in the specified screen by
changing the settings of the screen keys in the Screen Properties property sheet. To open the Screen Properties property
sheet, please see Section 3.9.3 Setting up a Screen for details. The Screen Properties property sheet has the Keys page
to set up the keys for the screen.
The following is an example of the Keys page and Usage Setup dialog in Screen Properties property sheet.
Key Usage Table Usage Setup Dialog
F5 key will perform just like

the screen button when it is
pressed. That means at
runtime, the screen 253 will
be opened when the F5
Key is pressed in the
specified screen.
There are two parts in the above illustration: Key Usage Table and Usage Setup Dialog.
■ Key Usage Table
A table lists all the keys of the target panel and their usages. The key usage table is the same as the one in the Keys page
of the General Setup property sheet when the screen is created. For details about Key Usage Table, please see Section
3.2.3
■ Usage Setup Dialog

A floating dialog box allows you to specify the usage for the selected key or key combination. Left-click the cell in the key
usage table to bring up the dialog. The Use Default option is checked by default. Uncheck the Use Default option to
assign a usage for the selected cell that will only be available in the specified screen. For details about Usage Setup
Dialog, please see Section 3.2.4.

43
3.2.3. Key Usage Table Settings
The key usage table is located in the Keys page of the General Setup property sheet or Screen Properties property sheet.
It lists all the keys of the target panel and their default usages. The Keys page is only displayed for target panel with
keypads.
The following is an example of a key usage table in the Keys page.
There are three columns in the key usage table.

Column Description
Key Available keys of the target panel.
Usage Displays how the key will be used
when it is pressed.
Usage (Esc+) Displays how the key combination
(ESC+Key) will be used when it is
pressed.
This column exists only when the
target panel supports the key
combination.
Note: Left-click the cell brings up the Usage Setup Dialog
which sets up the usage of the selected cell. For details
about Usage Setup Dialog, please see Section 3.2.4.

3
3.2.4. Usage Settings for a Key
You can assign or change the usage for the key or the key combination with the Usage Setup Dialog. The Usage Setup
Dialog is a floating dialog box that can be freely moved.
To open the Usage Setup Dialog, left-click the cell in the key usage table. If the selection in the key usage table is changed,
the dialog box remains open and displays the settings related to the new selection.
The following is an example of usage setup dialog.
The name of the Click the close

key or the key button to exit the
combination dialog box.
Use Default Check this option if you want to use the default setting in the Keys page of the General Setup
property sheet. The field is only available in the Keys page of the Screen Properties property sheet.
Usage Select a usage for the key or key combination. There are 7 options: None, Bit Button, Function Button,
Keypad Button, Multistate Switch, Screen Button and Word Button.
Bit Button If the usage is Bit Button, specify the following properties:
Function Select the operation of the bit button. There are 5 options: Set ON, Set OFF,
Momentary ON, Momentary OFF, and Invert.
For details, see Section 5.1.1 Basic Operations
Write Address Specifies the bit variable to be operated.
Click to enter an address for this field. Click to select a tag for this
field.
ON Macro Check this option for the button to have an ON macro. Select a macro from
the dropdown list. This option is available when the bit button operation is
Set ON, Momentary ON, or Momentary OFF.
OFF Macro Check this option for the button to have an OFF macro. Select a macro from
the dropdown list. This option is available when the bit button operation is
Set OFF, Momentary ON, or Momentary OFF.
Continued

43
Function If the usage is Function Button, specify the following properties:
Button Property Description
Function Specifies the operation for the function button to perform. About the available
operations, see Section 5.4.1 Basic Operation.
Keypad If the usage is Keypad Button, specify the following properties:

Enter Select this item if the button is used to input specified character to the keypad buffer.
Character
Character Available when Enter Character is selected. Specifies the character to be entered in
the keypad buffer.
Enter Select this item if the button is used to issue the specified command to the keypad
Command buffer.
Command Available when the Enter Command is selected. Specifies the command issued to
the keypad buffer. There are 4 commands available:
Command Description
Enter Completes the data entry and sends the input string to the
associated object or the system.
Escape Cancels the data entry operation.
Clear Clears the keypad buffer.
Backspace Removes the last character in the keypad buffer.
Multistate If the usage is Multistate Switch, you need to specify the following properties:
Switch Property Description
State Type The state type of the monitored variable. There are 2 options: Value and LSB. For
details, see Section 4.4.1.1 State Types
Data Type The data type of the variables specified in this page.
Write Specifies the variable to be controlled.
Address
Click to enter an address for this field. Click to select a tag for this field.
Total State Specifies the number of valid states that the monitored variable has.
Note: The last state is state N-1 when the Total States is N.
Next State Specifies the method of calculating the next state.
+1 means the next state is the current state plus one, when the current state is not
the last state. When the current state is the last state, the next state is state 0.
-1 means the next state is the current state minus one, when the current state is not
state 0. When the current state is state 0, the next state is the last state.
Screen If the usage is Screen Button, specify the following properties:

Function Specifies the operation for the screen button to perform. There are 4 options:
Open Screen, Previous Screen, Close and Open Screen, and Close Screen. For
details, see Section 5.3.1 Basic Operations.
Screen Specifies the screen to be opened.
Change user Check this option for the button to change the current user level.
level to Specify the new user level to replace the current user level.
Acknowledge Check this option for the button on the alarm-associated screen to acknowledge
alarm the alarm.
Continued

3
Word Button If the usage is Word Button, you need to specify the following properties:
Function Specifies the operation that the word button performs. For details, see Section
5.6.1 Basic Operations.
Data Type The data type of the variable to be controlled.
Write Address Specifies the variable to be controlled.
field.
Constant The constant for the specified operation.
Minimum The minimum for the specified operation.
Maximum The maximum for the specified operation.
Total Digits The number of digits to be displayed for the Minimum and the Maximum on the
numeric keypad.
Fractional When the Data Type is 32-bit Floating Point, this property specifies the number
Digits of fractional digits to be displayed for the Minimum and the Maximum on the
numeric keypad.
When the Data Type is not 32-bit Floating Point, this property specifies not only
the number of fractional digits to be displayed, but also the number of least
significant digits to be displayed as the fractional part. With this feature, an
integer can be shown and entered as a fixed point number. When the
Fractional Digits is nonzero, say N, the entered value will be converted to an
integer according to the following formula before being output.
OutputValue = EnteredValue * (Nth power of 10)
Example:
Display Type Total Fractional Entered Output
Digits Digits Value Value
32-bit Floating Point 4 2 12.34 12.34
32-bit Floating Point 4 2 123.4 Error!
16-bit Signed Decimal 5 2 123.45 12345
16-bit Signed Decimal 5 2 -0.05 -5
16-bit Signed Decimal 5 2 3 300
Activation Select Button Down item so the touch operation will be activated when the
button is touched. Select Button Up item so the touch operation will be
activated when the button is released.
Continued

43
Advanced The following table describes each Advanced property. Not all properties are available for each object.
Enabled by Check this option so the operation of the object will be enabled and disabled by
Bit the specified bit.
Bit Specifies the bit that enables and disables the touch operation.
Click to enter a bit address. Click to select a bit tag.
Enabling Specifies the state (On or Off) that enables the touch operation.
State
Enabled by Check this item so the touch operation of the object will be enabled and
User Level disabled by the current user level.
Lowest Specifies the lowest user level that is required to enable the touch operation.
Enabling
User Level
Operator Check this option if you want the operator to confirm the operation. The
Confirmation Confirmation box will be displayed when the object performs the operation. If
the operator selects “Yes” in the Confirmation box, the operation will be
performed. If the operator selects “No” or the operator does not respond within
the specified time period (Maximum Waiting Time), the operation will be
cancelled.
Maximum Specifies the maximum time that the object will wait for the operator’s
Waiting Time confirmation. The operation will be cancelled if the operator does not respond
within this time.
Notification Check this option so the object will notify the specified bit after it finishes the
operation.
Bit Specifies the bit that receives the notification.
State Specifies the state (On or Off) that is used for the notification.

3
3.3. Internal Memory
This section describes how to set up and use the internal memory for the panel application.
3.3.1. Types of Internal Memory

The following table describes the types of memory space that can exist or always exist in the internal memory.
Type Address Format Description

Regular user Word: $Un The size of this memory space is settable.
memory Bit: $Un.b; b: 0~f
Battery backed Word: $Nn This memory space is available when the target panel is equipped with
user memory Bit: $Nn.b; b: 0~f battery backed RAM. The size of this memory space is settable.
System memory Word: $Sn This memory space keeps the system’s required data and information.
Bit: $Sn.b; b: 0~f See Section 3.3.3 for details.
Index registers Word: $In The index registers are provided to support indirect addressing. To know
Bit: $In.b; b: 0~f how to specify indirect address by using index registers, please see
Section 3.3.2 for details.
Command block Word: $CBn This memory space is allocated for storing the data read from the specified
Bit: $CBn.b; b: 0~f command block.
3.3.2. Index Registers
The index registers are battery backed if the panel has battery backed memory. The index registers are cleared to zero
when the panel application is updated.
You can use the index registers to specify the indirect address. With the support of indirect addressing, an object or macro
can be designed to access different sets of data at run time.
Examples
1) The word address W[$I30] is equivalent to W2000 when the value of $I30 is 2000.
2) The word address $U[$I0+123] is equivalent to $U223 when the value of $I0 is 100.
3) The bit address $U[$I2].a is equivalent to $U0.a when the value of $I2 is 0.
4) The word address [$I2]:W100 is equivalent to 3:W100 when the value of $I2 is 3.
5) The bit address [$I0]: W[$I1+10].f is equivalent to 5:W20.f when the values of $I0 and $I1 are 5 and 10 respectively.
Notes:
1) It is your responsibility to make sure that values in the index registers will result in valid addresses at runtime. The
software has no way of checking the validity of the use of index registers.
2) The offset values must be a positive number, and the maximum offset value is 65535.
3) Only $I0~$I15 can be used for the node address (PLC address), and no offset value is allowed.
4) Make sure the PLC driver you are using supports indirect addressing.

43
3.3.3. System Memory
The following table lists the system maintained data and information in the system memory of the target panels that may
be useful for your application.
Note that in any case do not modify the system memory for any purpose, or the system may malfunction or crash.
Address Length Content

$S0~$S25 26 Keypad input buffer for keypads
$S0: Command code for keypad display
$S1~$S24: Null terminated ASCII character string up to 48 characters
$S42 1 The second and minute of the current time in BCD format
Bit 0~7: Second (0x00~0x59)
Bit 8~15: Minute (0x00~0x59)
$S43 1 The hour of the current time in BCD format and the RTC adjustment parameter
Bit 0~7: Hour (0x00~0x23)
Bit 8~15: RTC adjustment value
$S44 1 The day and month of the current date in BCD format
Bit 0~7: Day (0x01~0x31)
Bit 8~15: Month (0x01~0x12)
$S45 1 The year and the day-of-week of the current date in BCD format
Bit 0~7: Year (0x00~0x99)
Bit 8~15: Day of week (0x00~0x06); 0 represents Sunday
$S46 1 The second of the current time in binary format (0~59)
$S47 1 The minute of the current time in binary format (0~59)
$S48 1 The hour of the current time in binary format (0~23)
$S49 1 The one tenth of a second of the current time in binary format (0~9)
9 represents 0.9 second
$S50 1 The date of the current day in binary format (0~30)
0 represents the first day of a month
$S51 1 The month of the current day in binary format (0~11)
0 represents January
$S52 1 The year of the current day in binary format (0~99)
$S53 1 The day of week of the current day in binary format (0~6)
0 represents Sunday
$S219 1 Current user level (0~9); 9 indicates that the user logged in with the developer password
$S230~$S241 12 The ASCII character string, up to 24 characters, to show the allowable input range for
numeric keypads
$S297 1 The lowest user level that can be accepted by the current password keypad. When the
value is 0, any user level is accepted. When the value is 9, only the developer password is
accepted.
$S300~$S301 2 500ms timer
$S302~$S303 2 1 second timer
$S304 1 20 Hz sine wave (-1000 ~ 1000)
$S305 1 20 Hz cosine wave (-1000 ~ 1000)
$S306 1 20 Hz triangle wave (0~1000)
Continued

3
Address Length Content
$S307 1 System signals
$S307.0: always 0 when ready
$S307.1: always 1 when ready
$S315 1 System status
$S315.0: 1 indicates that the data in battery backed RAM is good
$S317 1 Current language number (0~9); 0 represents language #1
$S319 1 Status bits of USB memory sticks
$S319.0: Drive C (1:OK; 0:None)
$S319.1: Drive D (1:OK; 0:None)
$S319.2: Drive E (1:OK; 0:None)
$S654 1 Link enabled bits for Link 1~16
$S654.0 is for Link 1; 0: Disabled; 1: Enabled
$S654.1 1 is for Link 2;
…
$S654.f is for Link 16
$S662~$S677 32 Communication status words for Link 1~16
$S662 is for Link 1
$S663 is for Link 2
…
$S677 is for Link 16
Communication Status
Value Meaning Value Meaning
0 OK 13 Invalid request
1 Overrun error 14 Device busy
2 Break error 15 Unknown error
3 Parity error 16 Link disabled
4 Framing error 17 Initialization failure
5 No response 18 Failed to send data
6 Unrecognized response 19 Failed to receive data
7 Timeout 20 Failed to open connection
8 Inactive CTS 21 Connection not ready
9 Checksum error 22 Invalid sub-link
10 Command rejected 23 Invalid COM port
11 Invalid address 24 Error
12 Invalid range 255 Uncertain
$S838 1 The ID of the current recipe block (0~15)

$S839~$S854 16 The current recipe numbers of recipe block 0~15
$S839 is for recipe block 0
…

43
3.3.4. Setting up Internal Memory
You can use the Internal Memory dialog box to define the size of the regular user memory and the battery backed user
memory. To open the Internal Memory dialog box, do one of followings:
1) In the Project Manager window, double-click the Internal Memory node ( ) under Links node of the panel
application.
2) In the Project Manager window, right-click the Internal Memory node ( ) under Links node of the panel application to
bring out the pop-up menu and select Properties.
The following is an example of the Internal Memory dialog box.
Specify the size of regular user memory. The

size must be between 0 and 131072 words.
By default, it is 5000.
Specify the size of battery backed user

memory. The size must be between 0 and
131072 words. By default, it is 0.

3
3.4. Communication Links
This section describes how to set up communication links to allow the panel application to access the data of external
devices.
3.4.1. Types of Communication Links
The following table describes the three types of communication links that the panel application can have.
Link Type Description

Direct link Directly connects the panel with the specified device(s). The following are examples of direct links.
[Example 1] The panel uses an RS232 direct link to talk with the specified device directly.
[Example 2] The panel uses an RS485 direct link to talk with the specified devices directly.
[Example 3] The panel uses an Ethernet direct link to talk with the specified device directly.
Continued

43
Indirect link Allow the panel to talk with a device that is not directly connected to it. An indirect link connects the
panel with a specified indirect link server. The indirect link server is the target panel of a panel
application in the same project and is directly connected to the specified device.
[Example 1] Indirect Link via 2-to-1 Connection
[Example 2] Indirect Link via N-to-1 Connection (COM)
[Example 3] Indirect Link via N-to-1 Connection (Ethernet)
Continued

3
Communication Add an appropriate communication service link to the application to allow other panels to
service communicate with the device directly connected to the target panel. The following table describes
the available communication services.
Communication Description
Service
2-to-1 Server (COM) You need to specify the data link, i.e. the associated direct link,
for this communication service. This service allows two panels
to talk with one device, and only one communication port is
required on that device.
2-to-1 Transparent This communication service makes the target panel a gateway
Server (COM) for another computing device, such as, a PC, another target
panel, or a panel of another brand, to access the associated
controller. See the following diagrams for the possible
applications.
Any kind of controller whose communication protocol is of

the request-reply type can be supported by this communication
service. Ask your local representative to check if your controller
is supported. Note that the communication parameters (baud
rate, number of data bits, number of stop bits, and type of parity
check) of the computing device and the communication
parameters of the 2-to-1 Transparent Server must be identical.
N-to-1 Master (COM) You need to specify the data link, i.e. the associated direct link,
for this communication service. This service allows up to 16
panels to talk with one device, and only one communication port
is required on that device.
N-to-1 Master (Ethernet) You need to specify the data link, i.e. the associated direct link,
for this communication service. This service allows up to 16
panels to talk with one device, and only one communication port
is required on that device.
Continued

43
Gateway Allows an application program running on any computing device, such as a PC, to access the data
service of the controllers that are connected to the HMI with Gateway Server. The following table describes
the available gateway services.
Gateway Service Description
TCP/IP Gateway This gateway service makes the target panel a gateway for another
Server (Ethernet) computing device, such as, a PC, another target panel, or a panel of
other brand, to access the associated controller through Ethernet.
See the following diagram to know the possible applications.
The blue, green, and red lines in the above figure indicate the
different data blocks flowing on the Ethernet with the target panel
acting as a gateway server.
The gateway server makes the HMI behave as a Modbus device.
Your application program can use the Modbus protocol to access the
transfer memory of the gateway server. To use the gateway server,
please see Section 3.4.8 for details.

3
This section describes how to define the general settings for the communication links using the General page of the Link
Properties dialog box. The following is an example of the General page that defines a direct link.
The following is an example of the General page that defines a communication service link.

43
The following table describes each property in the General page of the Link Properties dialog box.
Link Number The sequence number of the communication link. It is assigned when the link is created and
reassigned when any other link of the same application is removed.
Link Name Specifies the name of the communication link.
Link Type Select one of the following link types for the link:
Direct Link (COM) The link connects to the specified device directly through the
specified serial (COM) port.
Direct Link The link connects to the specified device directly through the
(Ethernet) specified Ethernet port.
Communication The link connects to one or more other target panels through the
Service (COM) specified serial (COM) port and provides the communication
service specified in the Device/Server field to the connected target
panels. See the description of the Device/Server field to know the
available communication services.
Communication The link connects to one or more other target panels through the
Service (Ethernet) specified Ethernet port and provides the communication service
specified in the Device/Server field to the connected target
panels. See the description of the Device/Server field to know the
available communication services.
Gateway The link connects to a target panel that provides gateway service
Service(Ethernet) as a gateway server through the specified Ethernet port.
The target panel allows an application program running on any
computing device, such as a PC, to access the data of the
controllers through that target panel.
Indirect Link via The link connects to a target panel that provides the
2-to-1 Connection communication service as a 2-to1 server through the specified
(COM) serial (COM) port. The target panel can communicate with the
associated device indirectly through that target panel.
N-to-1 Connection communication service as an N-to1 master through the specified
(COM) serial (COM) port. The target panel can communicate with the
N-to-1 Connection communication service as an N-to1 master through the specified
(Ethernet) Ethernet port. The target panel can communicate with the
Continued

3
Device/Server When the Link Type is Direct Link, specify the link’s connected device.
When the Link Type is Communication Service (COM), select one of the following servers.
Server Description
2-to-1 Server In the Data Link field, specify a direct link of the application as the data
link for the server. The 2-to-1 server is a bridge between another panel
and the device connected to the specified data link. Another
panel/application of the project can now use an indirect link to access
the device connected to the server through the specified data link.
2-to-1 In the Data Link field, specify a direct link of the application as the data
Transparent link for the server. The service link connects to a computing device, and
Server allows the device to indirectly communicate with another device through
the data link. The computing device can be a target panel, a panel of
another brand, or a PC. If the computing device is a target panel, it must
use a direct link to accept the service.
N-to-1 Master In the Data Link field, specify a direct link of the application as the data
link for the server. The link can connect up to 8 target panels, and allow
these panels to indirectly communicate with the device connected to the
specified data link. The panels served by the link must use an indirect
link to accept the service.
When the Link Type is Communication Service (Ethernet), select one of the following servers.
Server Description
N-to-1 Master In the Data Link field, specify a direct link of the application as the data
link for the server. The link can connect up to 8 target panels, and allow
these panels to indirectly communicate with the device connected to
the specified data link. The panels served by the link must use an
indirect link to accept the service.
When the Link Type is Indirect Link and the Indirect Link Server Location is specified, the
indirectly connected device is shown here.
Link Port Select a port for this link.
Sub-links When an RS485 communication line has many devices connected to it, the logical
connection of a device on the link with the target panel is called a sub-link.
This field is available when the Link Type is Direct Link (COM). Select this option if this link
will connect to many devices, and you want to identify, monitor, or control the communication
with each connected device.
Data Link Select a direct link of the application as the data link for the communication service when the
Link Type is Communication Service.
Indirect Panel Select the panel application that provides the communication service for this indirect link.
Link Application
Server Link Select the communication service link that provides the communication service for this
Location indirect link.
Record Check this option if you want the communication status of the link or the link’s sub-links to be
communication status recorded in the operation log. The recordable types of status include: Enabled, Disabled,
in operation log Failed, and Recovered. The operation log display can show the logged communication
status.
Check Word The panel will read the specified word periodically to check the status of the link’s
connection.
The duration of showing The communication error message box will hide and show according to the specified
a communication error duration. If the duration is 0, the error message box will not show.
message

43
3.4.3. Parameter Settings (Serial Port)
This section describes how to set up the communication parameters for the serial communication links using the
Parameter page of the Link Properties dialog box.
The following is an example of the Parameter page for a The following is an example of the Parameter page for an
serial direct link. N-to-1 master.
The following table describes each property in the Parameter page of the Link Properties dialog box for a serial link.
Baud Rate The baud rate used.
Data Bits The number of data bits used.
Parity The scheme of parity used.
Stop Bits The number of stop bits used.
Panel Address The address of the target panel.
PLC Address The address of the connected device.
Timeout Time The maximum time allowed for the communication driver to wait for a reply from the
connected device. When the elapsed time exceeds the Timeout Time, the communication
driver assumes the communication failed.
Command Delay If the Command Delay is 0, the communication driver immediately sends the next request to
the connected device when it receives a reply from the last request. If the Command Delay
is nonzero, the communication driver delays for the specified amount of time before sending
the next request to the connected device.
Retry Count The number of times the communication driver will retry for each request to get a successful
reply from the connected device. If the number is zero, the communication driver will use the
default retry count.
Specify N-to-1 This button is available when the link is an N-to-1 master. Click this button to bring up the
Connection Slave N-to-1 Connection Slave Panels dialog box. You can define the slave panels of the N-to-1
Panels connection in the dialog box.
Specify Other Data This button is available when the link is a direct link and the connected device is Data
Sharing Panels Sharer (RS485). Click this button to bring up the Other Data Sharing Panels dialog box. You
can define the other data sharing panels in the dialog box.

3
3.4.4. Parameter Settings (Ethernet Port)
This section describes how to set up the communication parameters for Ethernet links using the Parameter page of the
Link Properties dialog box. The following is an example of the Parameter page for an Ethernet direct link.
The following table describes each property in the Parameter page of the Link Properties dialog box for an Ethernet link.
IP Address The IP address of the connected device.
Use Default Port Check this option if the default IP port is used
Port Specifies the IP port used
Node Address Specifies the node address of the connected device.
Timeout Time The maximum time allowed for the communication driver to wait for a reply from the connected
device. When the elapsed time exceeds the Timeout Time, the communication driver assumes
the communication failed.
Command Delay If the Command Delay is 0, the communication driver immediately sends the next request to the
connected device when it receives a reply from the last request. If the Command Delay is
nonzero, the communication driver delays for the specified amount of time before sending the
next request to the connected device.
Retry Count The number of times the communication driver will retry for each request to get a successful reply
from the connected device. If the number is zero, the communication driver will use the default
retry count.

43
3.4.5. Sub-link Settings
An RS485 link can have many slave devices connected to it. The HMI uses the same communication protocol to talk with
all the slave devices. The connection between the HMI and each of the slave devices is a sub-link. With the Sub-link table,
the operator can enable or disable a sub-link at any time.
This section describes how to define the sub-links within a direct link using the Sub-link page of the Link Properties dialog
box. The following is an example of the Sub-link page.
The following table describes each property in the Sub-link page of the Link Properties dialog box for a direct link.
Number of sub-links Specifies how many devices the link will connect as sub-links.
Language Specifies the current language for the Name field.
Name The name of the selected sub-link for the language specified in the Language field.
Node Address The address of the selected sub-link. The address must be a unique number within all the
sub-links.
Initial State The initial communication state for the selected sub-link. If the state is On, the panel will
communicate with the sub-link after running the application. If the state is Off, the panel will
not communicate with the sub-link until the communication state is turn On in a sub-link table.
Show error message If this option is checked, the communication error message will be shown when the selected
sub-link encounters communication errors. If this option is unchecked, no error message will
be shown for any communication errors.

3
3.4.6. Sharing Data among Panels Using Data Sharer
The data sharer is a virtual device. It allows data sharing among up to 16 target panels on an Ethernet or an RS485
network. Each of the target panels can have up to 256 words of data to share.
To set up the communication for data sharing, create a direct link and select Data Sharer (UDP) or Data Sharer (RS485)
as the connected device. The panel address that you can set in the Parameter page of the Link Properties dialog box must
be unique for each sharing panel as it is used to identify the shared data.
The communication driver for the link connecting to Data Sharer is responsible for broadcasting the panel's shared data on
the network. For example, if the panel address of a panel is 10 and the number of the link connecting to Data Sharer is 2,
the following Macro command will cause the communication driver to broadcast the corresponding data on the network.
2\P10.0 = MOV($u300, 30)
The communication driver receives the broadcasted shared data on the network automatically. It has a block of memory to
store the shared data. To access a word, use the following address, where m is the panel address and n is the word
number of that panel’s shared data.
Pm.n m=1~16; n=0-255
To access a bit, use the following address, where b is a hexadecimal number representing the bit number in the specified
word.
Pm.n.b m=1~16; n=0-255; b=0~f
The UDP is used for the data sharing on Ethernet.

43
3.4.7. Writing Communication Programs Using Macro Commands
You can write a macro program to let your HMI communicate with a computing device through a serial port. For simplicity,
we will use Device in the following sections to refer to the target computing device.
1. Create a communication link for the application to connect the panel and Device.
or
2. Specify the general settings for the link. You need to select PanelMaster - General Device (COM) as the device to be
connected.
3. Specify the parameters of the communication.

3
4. Understand the key words that are available for composing the communication macro programs.
Key Word Type R/W Function

TX Word Write Writing a block of words to TX transmits the low bytes of that block of words to Device.
Only The write operation is done when the transmission starts or is cancelled.
Example:
$U10 = “ABC”
$U20 = B2W($U10, 3) // Convert the byte array to a word array
TX = MOV($U20, 3) // Transmit “ABC” to Device
Operation rules:
1) The transmission cannot start until the previous transmission has finished.
2) The word TXT_STS will be set to 1 when the transmission starts.
3) When the hardware flow control is enabled (Bit EN_HS is set to 1), the
transmission will not start until the device allows the panel to send data (The CTS
signal on the port is asserted).
4) When the RTS/CTS flow control is enabled (Bit EN_HS is set to 1), the RTS
signal on the serial port will be negated when the transmission starts and it will be
asserted when the transmission ends.
5) The transmission will be cancelled if it cannot start after waiting a time specified
by the word TO_TIME. The word TX_STS will be set to 2 when the timeout
condition occurs.
TX_W Word Write TX_W provides the same functionality as TX, except that the write operation is done after
Only all the bytes are transmitted. It is recommended to use TX_W to transmit data as the
macro program will not waste time to wait for the completion and the CPU of the panel will
be utilized more efficiently.
TX_STS Word Read Reading this word gets the status of the last transmission.
Only Value Status
1 Succeeded
2 Timeout
255 In progress
RX Word Read Reading this word copies a specified number of word values from the receive buffer. The
Only receive buffer is a word array. The bytes received from Device are stored in the low bytes
of the buffer. The high bytes of the buffer are always 0. Once the received data are
copied, they are removed from the receive buffer. The read operation is executed whether
or not there are enough bytes received in the buffer.
Example:
$U10 = MOV(RX, 3) // Receive 3 words from the receive buffer.
// $U10 gets the value of the first received byte.
// $U11 gets the value of the second received byte.
// $U12 gets the value of the third received byte.
Operation rules:
Assume the number of words to be read from the buffer is n and the number of
available words in the buffer is m.
1) If there are enough data received in the buffer, the read operation does the
following 4 things: copies the first n words in the buffer to the destination, sets
RX_CNT to n, sets RXB_CNT to (m-n), and sets RX_STS to 1.
2) If there are not enough data received in the buffer, the read operation does the
following 4 things: copies all the available data to the destination, sets RX_CNT
to m, sets RXB_CNT to 0, and sets RX_STS to 1.
Continued

43
RXB_CNT Word Read Reading this word gets the number of words that are available in the receive buffer. Note
Only that one word of the receive buffer contains one received byte.
RX_CNT Word Read Reading this word gets the number of words that were actually taken out of the receive
Only buffer by the last receive operation. Note that one word of the receive buffer contains one
received byte.
RX_STS Word Read Reading this word gets the status of the last receive operation.
Only Word Value Description
1 Succeeded
2 Timeout
Others Failed
RX_W Word Read Reading this word copies a specified number of word values from the receive buffer. The
Only receive buffer is a word array. The bytes received from Device are stored in the low bytes
of the buffer. The high bytes of the buffer are always 0. Once the received data are
copied, they are removed from the receive buffer. If there are not enough data received in
the buffer, the read operation will wait a time specified by TO_TIME. The read operation
will not complete until all the required data are received or the timeout occurs.
Example:
$U10 = MOV(RX_W, 3) // Receive 3 words from the receive buffer.
// Wait for the data if they are not received from Device yet.
// $U10 gets the value of the first received byte.
// $U11 gets the value of the second received byte.
// $U12 gets the value of the third received byte.
Operation rules:
Assume the number of words to be read from the buffer is n and the number of
available words in the buffer is m
1) If there are enough data received in the buffer, the read operation does the
following 4 things: copies the first n words in the buffer to the destination, sets
RX_CNT to n, sets RXB_CNT to (m-n), and sets RX_STS to 1.
2) If there are not enough data received in the buffer, the read operation will wait a
time specified by TO_TIME for the required data to come. When enough data are
received, the read operation performs rule 1 above. When timeout occurs, the
read operation is cancelled and RX_STS is set to 2.
FLUSH Bit Write Writing 1 to this bit flushes the receive buffer that is used to receive data from Device.
Only
RESET Bit Write Writing 1 to this bit resets the UART that is used for the communication between the panel
Only and Device.
TO_TIME Word Read/ Writing the timeout time to this word sets the timeout time for the communication. The unit
Write is 0.1 second.
Example:
TO_TIME = 20 (U) // Set the timeout time to 2 second
EN_HS Bit Read/ Writing 1 to the bit enables the RTS/CTS flow control.
Write Bit Value Function
0 Disables the hardware flow control.
1 Enables the hardware flow control.
Example:
EN_HS = 1 (B) // Enable the flow control
Continued

3
CTS_STS Bit Read Reading the bit gets the status of the CTS signal from the device.
Only Bit Value CTS Signal Comment
0 Asserted The panel is allowed to send data to Device
1 Negated The panel is not allowed to send data to Device
Example:
IF !CTS_STS (B) // Do the following when the CTS is asserted
TX = MOV($U100, 10) // Send 10 bytes to Device
ENDIF
RTS Bit Read/ Writing 0 to the bit asserts the RTS signal on the port.
Write Bit Value Function
0 Asserts the RTS signal. The Device is allowed to send data to the panel.
1 Negates the RTS signal. The Device is not allowed to send data to the
panel.
Example:
RTS = 1 (B) // Disallow Device to send data to the panel
5. Understand the communication protocol.

6. Write the program. The following is an example:

43
3.4.8. Using Gateway Server of the Target Panel
A gateway server in a HMI allows an application program running on any computing device, such as a PC, to access the
data of the controllers that are connected to that HMI. The HMI behaves as a Modbus device. Your application program
can use the Modbus protocol to access the transfer memory provided by the gateway server.
There are two gateway servers available to be selected for your application. The Serial Gateway Server is for the serial
port connection, and the TCP/IP Gateway Server is for the Ethernet port connection.
Gateway Server Protocol Used Link Type

TCP/IP Gateway Server Modbus TCP/IP Ethernet
Serial Gateway Server Modbus RTU RS-232/422/485
Controller
#1
Computing Device HMI with

(e.g. PC) Gateway Server
Controller
#N
The blue dashed lines shown in the above figure indicate that the PC can access the data of Controller #1 and Controller
#N through the HMI with the help of the gateway server.

3
3.4.8.1. Setting up Gateway Service
Suppose that the application has two links: One direct link that connects the target panel and PanelMaster->Null PLC
device through COM1; the other direct link that connects the target panel and Siemens AG->Simatic S7-300(MPI Port)
device through COM2. To use the gateway service, you may do the followings:
1. Create a new link and select Gateway Service (Ethernet) as the Link Type and PanelMaster->TCP/IP Gateway Server
as the Device/Server in Link Properties dialog box.
The gateway service is not necessarily the first link.

Here, it is the third link in the sample application.
2. You need to define the address mapping table for the gateway server because:
■ When your application writes a block of data to the transfer memory of the gateway server, the gateway server
knows the real destination of that block of data, and writes the data to the real destination for your application.
■ When your application program reads a location of the transfer memory of the gateway server, the gateway server
knows the real data source of the read operation, and retrieves the data from the real data source for your application.
To define the address mapping table, click the Address Mapping Table tab in the Link Properties dialog. The following
is an example of the Address Mapping Table page.
The address range of the transfer memory:

No. Modbus Corresponding
1 10001 ~ 10016 N100.0 ~ N100.f
2 10100 ~ 10131 1\W20.0 ~ 1\W21.f
3 10350 ~ 10381 2\Q10.0 ~ 2\Q13.7
4 40001 ~ 40020 $U300 ~ $U319
5 40100 ~ 40139 W250 ~ W289
6 40200 ~ 40229 2\MW70 ~ 2\MW99

43
The following table describes each property in the Address Mapping Table page of the Link Properties dialog box for a
Gateway Service (Ethernet) link.
Use Check this option if you want to use mapping block #n.
No The mapping block’s number.
Type Select location type for the mapping block. Bit indicates a bit block, and Word indicates a word
block.
Modbus The starting address in the computing device that is using the Modbus protocol. The address
Address ranges and the location types of the transfer memory are shown in the table.
Address Range Location Type Max. Size of Block Read/Write Note
1~9999 Bit 256 bits Read Only
10001~19999 Bit 256 bits
30001~39999 Word 128 words Read Only
40001~49999 Word 128 words
Size The block size. If the location type is Word, the unit is 1 word. If the location type is Bit, the unit
is 16 bits. For example: The size of the mapping bit block, 3, is 2 words and 32 bits.
Corresponding The starting address of the corresponding controller or the target panel with gateway server.
Address
Cached Check this option to save data into the memory devoted to high-speed retrieval of requested
data.
Refresh Available only when the Cached option is checked. Select Fast to refresh data in the memory
every second. Select Normal to refresh data in the memory every 3 seconds.
Limitations:
1. At most, 32 mapping blocks can be defined.
2. At most, 12 mapping blocks can be cached.
3. At most, 4 of the cached mapping blocks can have fast refresh rate.
4. When reading a block of words or bits, the words or bits must be within a single mapping block, or the read
operation will fail.

3
3.5. Sound Table
The sound table contains all the sounds used by the panel application. The sound table is empty when the panel
application is initially created.
In the application, you can use the function button with the play sound operation to play a specified sound.
Before using the sound in a panel application, import or add a sound into the Sound Table.
To open the Sound Table dialog box, please do one of the following:
1) In the Project Manager window, double-click the Sound Table ( ) node of the panel application.
2) In the Project Manager window, right-click the Sound Table ( ) node to bring out the pop-up menu and select
Properties.
3) On the Panel menu, click Sound Table…
The following is an example of the Sound Table dialog box.

43
Item Description
Sounds Lists the sounds for the panel application. Select a sound as the current selection, or make multiple
selections. To select a sound, click the row of the header column of the sound on the list. To select
multiple rows, click the row of the header column and use Ctrl + Click to add a row to the selection.
The following table describes each column in the sound list.
Column Description
Number The number of the sound in the sound list. The number is an unsigned integer
starting from 0. It must be unique in the panel application. The number can be
edited by clicking the cell.
Name The name of the sound. Click the cell to select a predefined sound in the Sound
Database from the drop down list. To know how to predefine sounds in the
Sound Database, please see Section 2.2.4.
Type Displays the type of sound.
OK Close the dialog box and accept all changes to the sound table.
Cancel Close the dialog box and discard all changes to the sound table.
Import… Import a sound from a sound file. The types of importable sound files include: WAV only.
Add Add a sound from the Sound Database to the end of the sound table. To know how to use the Sound
Database, please see Section 2.2.4.
Insert Insert a sound from the Sound Database before the selection. To know how to use Sound Database,
please see Section 2.2.4. This button is available when the selection is made.
Delete Delete all the selections. This button is available when the selection is made.
Move Up Move the selection one item down in the list. This button is available when the selection is made.
Move Down Move the selection one item up in the list. This button is available when the selection is made.

3
3.6. Command Block and Status Words
You can command the panel to do a variety of things using the command block. The command block is a block of words in
the controller or the internal memory. The panel scans the control block periodically and performs the specified operations
according to the contents of the control block. You can decide the size of the command block, the command words that are
required in the command block, and the rate of scanning the command block, so the overhead of reading the command
block is minimized.
The panel can provide its status information by writing status values to the status words. The status words are in the
controller or the internal memory. You can decide the status words that are required for your application so the panel will
not waste time to output useless status values.
3.6.1. Types of Command Block and Status Words

There are three types of control blocks and status words that can be chosen for your application.
3.6.1.1. Type A
■ Type A Command Block
The following command words for the application and their order in the command block are adjustable.
Screen Switching Register

You can command the panel to change the main screen or display a window screen by setting this word to the number of
the desired screen.
Command Flag Word (Command Flags #0 - #15)

The following table describes the function of each bit in the Command Flag Word.
Bit Function Description
0 (reserved)
1 Switch Language Change the language that the panel displays.
Parameter One Register: Specifies the number of the desired language
2 Set Current Recipe Set the current recipe number of the recipe block to the specified recipe number.
Number Parameter One Register: Specifies the recipe number
Parameter Two Register: Specifies the recipe block
Note: You do not need to specify the recipe block if the application has only one
recipe block.
3 Read Recipe From PLC Read a recipe from the specified address defined in the Recipe Block dialog box,
and use that recipe to replace the specified recipe of the specified recipe block.
Parameter One Register: Specifies the recipe number
recipe block.
4 Write Recipe To PLC Write the specified recipe of the specified recipe block to the specified address
defined in the Recipe Block dialog box.
Parameter One Register: Specifies the recipe number
recipe block.
5 Clear Alarm History Clear the alarm history.
Continued

43
Bit Function Description
6 Clear Alarm Count Clear the alarm counts.
7 Sound Buzzer Sound buzzer.
Parameter One Register: Specifies the sound type.
Sound Type Value Description
0 Continuous beep
1 500ms beeps
2 200ms beeps
3 100ms beeps
4 50ms beeps
8 Print Screen Print the specified screen.

Parameter One Register Operation
(Undefined) Prints the top screen.
0 Prints the top screen.
The number of the screen Prints the specified screen.
to be printed Note: This operation is not supported by
PL035/037/057/058
9 Backlight On Turn the backlight on.

10 Backlight Off Turn the backlight off.
11 Set Current User Level Set the current user level to the specified level.
Parameter One Register: the user level
12 Close All Window Close all window screens.
Screens
13 (reserved)
14 (reserved)
15 Execute General See the section 3.6.7 Using General Commands for details.
Command
Note: To activate any of the above functions, change the corresponding command bit from Off to On. The panel does not
reset the command bit, so you have to reset the command bit before commanding the panel to perform the same
function again. Keep the state of the command bit long enough so the panel can detect the change. The best way is
to use the corresponding acknowledge bit in the Command Status Word. The panel turns on the acknowledge bit
when it detects the change. It is safe to reset the command bit when the acknowledge bit turns on. The panels turns
off the acknowledge bit when it sees the command bit turn off.

3
Low Trigger Word (Trigger Bits #0 - #15), High Trigger Word (Trigger Bits #16 - #31)
You can use the trigger bits to initiate the following operations:
1) Asking the associated data loggers to collect data
2) Asking the associated data loggers to clear their logging buffers
3) Executing event macros
4) Increasing the clock by one hour
5) Decreasing the clock by one hour
6) Logging in
7) Logging out
8) Asking the associated line charts to read and draw a new set of data.
9) Asking the associated line charts to clear its content.
10) Asking the associated scatter charts to read and draw a new set of data.
11) Asking the associated scatter charts to clear its content.
Enabling Word (Enabling Bits #0 ~ #15)

You can use the enabling bits to enable the following operations:
1) The data collection of data loggers
Parameter One Register

This word specifies parameter #1 for the specified operation.
Parameter Two Register

Parameter Three Register

Parameter Four Register

■ Type A Status Words

You can have the following status words for the application.
Status Word Description
Command Status Word
Stores the acknowledge bits of the command bits #0 - #15.
(Command Flag Ack. Bits #0 - -#15)
Low Trigger Ack. Word
Stores the acknowledge bits of the trigger bits #0 - #15.
(Trigger Ack. Bits #0 - #15)
High Trigger Ack. Word
Stores the acknowledge bits of the trigger bits #16 - #31.
(Trigger Ack. Bits #16 - #31)
Current Screen Number Word Stores the current main screen number.
Current Recipe Block ID Word Stores the current recipe block number.
Current Recipe Number Word Stores the current recipe number of the current recipe block.
Current User Level Word Stores the current user level.
Current Language Word Stores the current language number.

43
3.6.1.2. Type H (Binary)
■ Type H (Binary) Command Block
You can have the following command words for the application.
Screen Number Register

You can command the panel to change the main screen or display a window screen by setting this word to the number of
the desired screen. Use this word to request the panel to 1) change the language, 2) turn on the backlight, and 3) turn off
the backlight. The following table describes how to program this word.
Bit Description
0-9 Specifies the screen to be displayed.
11-13 Specifies the language that the panel displays for.
000: The panel does nothing.
001: The panel changes the language to language 1.
...
14 If this bit is On, the panel turns off the back light of the display.
15 If this bit is On, the panel turns on the back light of the display.
Command Flag Register

The following table describes the function of each bit in the Command Flag Register.
Bit Function
0 Clears the alarm history.
1 Clears the alarm counts.
2 (reserved)
3 (reserved)
4 Writes the current recipe of recipe block #0 to the address defined in the Recipe Block dialog box of recipe block
#0.
5 Sets the current recipe number of recipe block #0 to the number specified in Recipe Number Register.
6 Reads the recipe from the address defined in the Recipe Block dialog box of recipe block #0, and use it to
replace the current recipe of recipe block #0.
7 Turns on the buzzer.
8 Used as trigger bit #4.
Note: To activate any of the above functions, change the corresponding command bit from Off to On. The panel does not
reset the command bit, so you have to reset the command bit before commanding the panel to perform the same
function again. Keep the state of the command bit long enough so the panel can detect the change. The best way is
to use the corresponding acknowledge bit in the Command Status Word. The panel turns on the acknowledge bit
when it detects the change. It is safe to reset the command bit when the acknowledge bit turns on. The panels turns
off the acknowledge bit when it sees the command bit turn off.

3
Recipe Number Register
The number in this word will be used as the current recipe number of recipe block #0 when bit 5 of Command Flag
Register changes from Off to On.
■ Type H (Binary) Status Words
You can have the following status words for the application.
Whenever the panel switches the main screen, it sets this word to the number of
Screen Status Word
the current main screen.
Command Flag Ack. Word Contains the acknowledge bits for the command flags of Command Flag Register.
Current Recipe Number Word Stores the current recipe number of recipe block #0.
3.6.1.3. Type H (BCD)
The command words and status words you can have for the application are the same as the H (Binary) type. However, the
values in the following words must be in BCD format: Screen Number Register, Recipe Number Register, Screen Status
Word, and Current Recipe Number Word.

43
This section describes how to define the general settings for the command words and the status words using the General
page of the Command & Status dialog box. The following is an example of the General page.
The following table describes each property in the General page.
Type Select one of the following three types of control block and status words for your
application:
A, H (Binary), H (BCD)
Use Command Block Check this item if the application needs any of the command words.
Read Address Specify the address of the command block.
Size Specify the size of the command block.
Scan Time Select one of the following rates for the panel to scan the command block:
1 second, 0.5 second, 0.25 second
Command Bit Address Show the valid address range of the bits in the command block. Note that the application
Block Range can only read the bits.
Image Word Show the valid address range of the words in the command block. Note that the
Address application can only read the words.
Range

3
3.6.3. Command Block Settings (Type A)
This section describes how to configure the type A command block using the Command Block page of the Command &
Status dialog box. The following is an example of the Command Block page.
The following table describes each property in the Command Block page.
Command Arrangement Select Default for the command words to be in the default order in the
Word command block. Select Custom to arrange each command word in the
command block by yourself.
Screen Switching Check this option to use the word to change the main screen, or display a
Register window screen by setting the word to the number of the desired screen.
Reset SSR to Zero If this option is selected, the panel always resets the Screen Switching
Register to zero when it detects a nonzero value in the word. If this option is
not selected, the panel resets the Screen Switching Register to zero only
when the specified screen is valid and not yet displayed.
Parameter One Register Check this option to use this word to specify the No. 1 parameter for the
specified operation.
Command Flags #0 - #15 Check this option to use the command flags to request the panel to perform
(Command Flag Word) the specified operations.
Trigger Bits #0 - #15 Check this option if any of the trigger bits in the word are needed for your
(Low Trigger Word) application.
Parameter Two Register Check this option to use this word to specify the No. 2 parameter for the
Trigger Bits #16 - #31 Check this option if any of the trigger bits in the word are needed for your
(High Trigger Word) application.
Continued

43
Command Enabling Bits #0 - #15 Check this option if any of the enabling bits in the word are needed for your
Word (Enabling Word) application.
Parameter Three Check this option to use this word to specify the No. 3 parameter for the
Register specified operation.
Parameter Four Register Check this option to use this word to specify the No. 4 parameter for the
Command Switch Language (#1) Check this option to use command flag #1 to request the panel to display
Flag the specified language. Specify the following:
1) Parameter One Register: the number of the desired language
Set Current Recipe Check this option to use command flag #2 to request the panel to set the
Number (#2) current recipe number of the specified recipe block to the specified recipe
number. Specify the following:
1) Parameter One Register: The recipe number
2) Parameter Two Register: The recipe block
Note: You do not need to specify the recipe block if the application has only
one recipe block.
Read Recipe From PLC Check this option to use command flag #3 to request the panel to read a
(#3) recipe from the specified address defined in the Recipe Block dialog box,
and use that recipe to replace the specified recipe of the specified recipe
block. Specify the following:
one recipe block.
Write Recipe To PLC Check this option to use command flag #4 to request the panel to write the
(#4) specified recipe of the specified recipe block to the specified address
defined in the Recipe Block dialog box. Specify the following:
one recipe block.
Clear Alarm History (#5) Check this option to use command flag #5 to request the panel to clear the
alarm history.
Clear Alarm Count (#6) Check this option to use command flag #6 to request the panel to clear the
alarm counts.
Sound Buzzer (#7) Check this option to use command flag #7 to request the panel to sound its
buzzer in the specified manner.
Specify the following:
1) Parameter One Register: The sound type.
The following table describes the sound type value.
Sound Type Value Description
0 Continuous beep
1 500ms beeps
2 200ms beeps
3 100ms beeps
4 50ms beeps
Continued

3
Command Print Screen (#8) Check this option to use command flag #8 to request the panel to print the
Flag specified screen.
1) Parameter One Register: the number of the screen to be printed
Note 1: The top screen is printed if the number is zero or if there is no
Parameter One Register.
Note 2: The operation of printing a screen that is not the top screen is not
supported by PL035/037/057/058
Backlight On (#9) Check this option to use command flag #9 to request the panel to turn its
backlight on.
Backlight Off (#10) Check this option to use command flag #10 to request the panel to turn its
backlight off.
Set Current User Level Check this option to use command flag #11 to request the panel to set the
(#11) current user level to the specified one.
1) Parameter One Register: the user level
Close All Window Screens Check this option to use command flag #12 to request the panel to close all
(#12) window screens.
Execute General Check this option to use command flag #15 to request the panel to perform
Command (#15) the specified operation. See the section 3.6.7 Using General Commands for
details.

43
3.6.4. Status Word Settings (Type A)
This section describes how to configure the type A status words for your application using the Status Word page of the
Command & Status dialog box. The following is an example of the Status Word page.
In the Status Word page, check the needed status words for your application, and specify a word variable that will receive
the status value for each checked status word.
The following table describes when and what the panel will write to each status word.
Command Flag Ack. Bits #0 - #15 The states of all the effective command flags to this word whenever a state
change occurs on the effective command flags.
Trigger Ack. Bits #0 - #15 The states of trigger bits #0 - #15 to this word whenever a state change occurs on
trigger bits #0 - #15.
Trigger Ack. Bits #16 - #31 The states of trigger bits #16 - #31 to this word whenever a state change occurs
on trigger bits #16 - #3.
Current Screen Number Word The number of the current main screen to this word whenever the main screen
changes.
Current Recipe Block ID Word The current recipe block ID to this word whenever a different recipe block
becomes the current recipe block.
Current Recipe Number Word The current recipe number of the current recipe block to this word whenever a
different recipe becomes the current recipe of the current recipe block.
Current User Level Word The current user level to this word whenever the current user level changes.
Current Language Word The current language number to this word whenever it changes the language.

3
3.6.5. Command Block Settings (Type H)
This section describes how to configure the type H command block using the Command Block page of the Command &
Status dialog box. The following is an example of the Command Block page.
The following table describes each property in the Command Block page.
Command Screen Number Register Use the word to change the main screen, or display a window screen by
Block setting the word to the number of the desired screen. You can also use this
word to request the panel to do the following operations: 1) Change the
language, 2) Turn on the backlight, and 3) Turn off the backlight.
The following table describes how to program this word.
Bit Description
0-9 Specifies the screen to be displayed.
11-13 Specifies the language that the panel displays for.
000: The panel does nothing.
...
14 If this bit is On, the panel turns off the back light of the
display.
15 If this bit is On, the panel turns on the back light of the
display.
Continued

43
Reset SNR to Zero If this option is selected, the panel always resets the Screen Number
Register to zero when it detects a nonzero value in the word. If this option
is not selected, the panel resets the Screen Number Register to zero only
when the specified screen is valid and not displayed yet.
Command Flag Register Use the command flags to request the panel to do the specified operations.
Recipe Number Register Use command flag #5 to set the current recipe number for recipe block #0,
specify the recipe number in this word.
Command Clear Alarm History (#0) Check this option to use command flag #0 to request the panel to clear the
Flag alarm history.
Clear Alarm Counts (#1) Check this option to use command flag #1 to request the panel to clear the
alarm counts.
Write Recipe To PLC (#4) Check this option to use command flag #4 to request the panel to write the
current recipe of recipe block #0 to the specified address defined in the
Recipe Block dialog box.
Set Current Recipe Check this option to use command flag #5 to request the panel to set the
Number (#5) current recipe number for recipe block #0.
1) Recipe Number Register: the recipe number
Read Recipe From PLC Check this option to use command flag #6 to request the panel to read a
(#6) recipe from the specified address defined in the Recipe Block dialog box,
and use that recipe to replace the current recipe of recipe block #0.
Sound Buzzer (#7) Check this option to use command flag #7 to request the panel to sound its
buzzer.
Trigger Bit #4 (#8) Check this option so command flag #8 will be used as trigger bit #4.

3
3.6.6. Status Word Settings (Type H)
This section describes how to configure the type H status words for your application using the Status Word page of the
Command & Status dialog box. The following is an example of the Status Word page.
In the Status Word page, check the needed status words for your application and specify a word variable that will receive
the status value for each checked status word.
The following table describes when and what the panel will write to each status word.
Screen Status Word The panel will write the number of the current main screen to this word whenever
the main screen changes.
Command Flag Ack. Word The panel will write the states of all the effective command flags to this word
whenever there a state change occurs on the effective command flags.
Current Recipe Number Word The panel will write the current recipe number of recipe block #0 to this word
whenever a different recipe becomes the current recipe of recipe block #0.

43
3.6.7. Using General Commands
This section describes how to use the general commands provided by the type A command block. To issue a general
command, specify necessary parameters in the parameter registers and then turn on command flag #15 in Command Flag
Register.
You can request the panel to perform the following file operations using the General Command and the default filename:
Parameter One
Parameter Two Register
Operation Register Default Filename Format
(Data ID)
(Operation code)
Save logged data to TXT file 1 ID of the data logger (0-15) DL<ID>_<Date>_<Time>.txt
Save logged data to CSV file 14 ID of the data logger (0-15) DL<ID>_<Date>_<Time>.csv
Save logged alarms to TXT file 2 (Not required) AL_<Date>_<Time>.txt
Save logged alarms to CSV file 15 (Not required) AL_<Date>_<Time>.csv
Save alarm counts to TXT file 3 (Not required) AC_<Date>_<Time>.txt
Save alarm counts to CSV file 16 (Not required) AC_<Date>_<Time>.csv
Save recipe data to TXT file 4 ID of the recipe block (0-15) RB<ID>.txt
Save recipe data to CSV file 17 ID of the recipe block (0-15) RB<ID>.csv
Save recipe data to DAT file 5 ID of the recipe block (0-15) RB<ID>.dat
Print screen to BMP file (256 6 Number of the screen S<ID>_<Date>_<Time>.bmp
colors)
If the target panel is PE, the
color resolution follows the
setting of the PC
Print screen to BMP file (64K 7 Number of the screen S<ID>_<Date>_<Time>.bmp
colors)
If the target panel is PE, Print
screen to JPG file
Save logged operations to TXT 9 (Not required) OL_<Date>_<Time>.txt
file
Save logged operations to 18 (Not required) OL_<Date>_<Time>.csv
CSV file
Save logged data to LDF file 10 ID of the data logger (0-15) DL<ID>_<Date>_<Time>.ldf
Take picture and save it to 12 ID of the USB camera (0-3) CAM<ID>_<Date>_<Time>.bm
BMP file p
Take picture and save it to 13 ID of the USB camera (0-3) CAM<ID>_<Date>_<Time>.jpg
JPG file
Note for default filename format:

<ID>: ID of the data logger, ID of the recipe block, ID of the USB camera, or number of the screen
<Date>: date when saving the data; format is YYMMDD
<Time>: time when saving the data; format is hhmmss

3
You can request the panel to perform the following file operations using the General Command and the specified
filename:
Operation Parameter One Register Parameter Two Parameter Three Register
(Operation code) Register (Data ID) (Specified filename)
Save logged data to 31 ID of the data Specifies the address in the internal
TXT file logger (0-15) memory $U that stores the specified
filename or full pathname. The name
must be a valid Windows pathname
with ASCII characters only. The
character string must be null terminated
and each character occupies one byte.
The maximum length of the string is
127. All the folders stated in the full
pathname must already exist or the file
operation will fail. For example, if the
number stored in this register is 400, it
means the specified filename is stored
in $U400.
Save logged alarms 32 (Not required) Same as above
to TXT file
Save alarm counts to 33 (Not required) Same as above
TXT file
Save recipe data to 34 ID of the recipe Same as above
TXT file block (0-15)
Save recipe data to 35 ID of the recipe Same as above
DAT file block (0-15)
Save logged 39 (Not required) Same as above
operations to TXT file
Save logged data to 40 ID of the data Same as above
LDF file logger (0-15)
Take picture and save 42 ID of the USB Same as above
it to BMP file camera (0-3)
Take picture and save 43 ID of the USB Same as above
it to JPG file camera (0-3)

43
3.7. Setting up Clock Operations
This section describes how to define Clock Operations for the panel application using the Clock dialog box. The following is
an example of the Clock dialog box.
The following table describes each property in the Clock dialog box.
Write Write Time/date to Select this option so the panel will write time and date information to the specified
PLC variable.
Time/date Data Type Select one of the following data types for the output time and data information.
Data Type Description
6 BCD bytes The following shows the data structure.
Byte No. Content
0 Minute; 0-59
1 Hour; 0-23
2 Day; 1-31
3 Month; 1-12
4 Year; 00-99
5 Day-of-week; 0(Sunday)-6(Saturday)
Note: All the values are in BCD format.
Continued

3
Write Time/date Data Type
Data Type Description
8 BCD bytes The following shows the data structure.
Byte No. Content
0 Minute; 0-59
1 Hour; 0-23
2 Day; 1-31
3 Month; 1-12
4 Year; 00-99
6 Second; 0-59
7 0
7 BCD words The following shows the data structure.
Word No. Content
0 Second; 0-59
1 Minute; 0-59
2 Hour; 0-23
3 Day; 1-31
4 Month; 1-12
5 Year; 00-99
7 binary words The following shows the data structure.
Word No. Content
0 Second; 0-59
1 Minute; 0-59
2 Hour; 0-23
3 Day; 1-31
4 Month; 1-12
5 Year; 00-99
Write Address Specifies the variable that will receive the output time and date information.
Write Timed When this item is selected, the panel writes time and date information to the
Operation specified variable periodically at a rate specified in the Interval field. Specify an
interval between 1 and 255 minutes.
Triggered When this item is selected, the panel writes time and date information to the
specified variable whenever the specified trigger bit changes from Off to On.
Continued

43
Read Synchronize Panel Select this option so the panel will read time and date information from the
with PLC specified variable and adjust its clock accordingly.
Time/date Data Type Specifies the data type for the input time and data information. For details, see the
description of the Time/date Data Type field of the Write group.
Read Address Specifies the variable that the panel will read the time and date information.
Do not run panel Select this option so the panel application does not run until the restart
application until the synchronization is done successfully.
restart synchronization
is done successfully
Read Timed When this item is selected, the panel reads time and date information from the
Operation specified variable periodically at a rate specified in the Interval field. Specify an
interval between 1 and 255 minutes.
Triggered When this item is selected, the panel reads time and date information from the
specified variable whenever the specified trigger bit changes from Off to On.
Increase Hour Select this option to increase the panel's clock by one, by changing the specified
trigger bit from Off to On.
Decrease Hour Select this option to decrease the panel's clock by one, by changing the specified
trigger bit from Off to On.

3
3.8. Setting up Passwords
This section describes how to set up passwords for the panel application using the Passwords dialog box. The following is
an example of the Passwords dialog box.
The following table describes each property in the Passwords dialog box.
Password The Password column contains 8 fields. Specify the password for a user level in the
corresponding field. A password is a positive integer up to 8 digits. A password must be
unique within the application.
Comment The Comment column contains 8 editable fields. You can type the comment for a
password or user level in the corresponding field.
9 Check this item if you want the developer password to be the password with the highest
privilege.
Automatic login for The password keypad will be displayed to enter a password for a higher user level when
operations requiring a the operator touches an object that requires a higher user level than the current one in
higher user level order to perform the programmed operation.
Login Trigger Bit When the specified trigger bit changes from Off to On, the password keypad will be
displayed to enter a password. The operator can enter a valid password or cancel the
password keypad.
Logout Trigger Bit When the specified trigger bit changes from Off to On, the current user level is reset to 0.
Login Timeout The password keypad will close automatically when it gets no input from the operator for
the specified time.

43
3.9. Screens
3.9.1. Types of Screens

There are three types of screens: Normal Screen, Window Screen and Menu Screen.
To create any type of screen, you can do the following:
1) Create a screen. Default is a normal screen. To learn how to create a screen, please see Section 3.9.2 for details.
2) Open Screen Properties dialog box. To learn how to open the dialog box, please see Section 3.9.3 for details.
3) In the dialog box, select the type you would like the screen to be.
The following table describes how each type of screen opens, closes, and displays.
Types Description
Normal Screen A screen that will be displayed when it is selected to be a startup screen, or when a screen button
with open screen/previous screen operation is pressed.
Usually the normal screen cannot be closed until the other normal screen is opened.
The normal screen is also called a main screen that is only displayed one at a time in the panel.
The screen size is fixed and depends on the panel model.
Window Screen A screen that appears in the following situations:
z Screen button with open screen operation is pressed
z Selected to be a startup screen
z OPEN_WS macro command is used.
z Alarm is active or clear when the display screen option in the discrete/analog alarm block is
selected
z Page selector object is used
z Custom keypad is needed
Usually the window screen stays on the normal screen until the close button is pressed on the title
bar or the screen button or CLOSE_WS macro command to close. It then disappears.
The panel can display many window screens at a time.

At runtime, the window screen will initially be displayed at the predefined position. If the window
screen has the title bar, click-and-hold the title bar to move it around in the panel.
Menu Screen A screen that is displayed when it is selected to be a startup screen, or when a screen button with
the open screen operation is pressed.
The menu screen remains on the normal screen or window screen, until an area outside the menu
screen is pressed, or the screen button is used to close the menu screen. The menu screen then
closes.
The panel can display one menu screen at a time.

The menu screen can slide horizontally into view from either the left or right side of the screen. It
can also appear by the left or right side of the button and slide upward or downward into view.
Please see Section 5.3.4 to learn how to use the screen button to set up the position of the menu
screen.
Usually the menu screen stays on the normal screen or window screen until you press anywhere
outside the menu screen or use screen button to close. It then disappears.

3
3.9.2. Creating and Opening Screens
■ Creating Screens
To create a screen, you can do the following:
1) Do one of the following:
z On the Screen menu, click New Screen…
z In the Project Manager window, right-click the panel application > Screens item and then click New Screen… on
the pop-up menu.
2) In the New Screen dialog box, type the name and number desired, and hit the ENTER key or click the OK button to
validate your choice. The following is an example of the New Screen dialog box.
Specify the screen name. Screen names are case

insensitive. For example, the names Startup Screen,
startup screen are considered to be the same.
Specify the screen number. The screen number must

be between 1 and 7999.
Note: In each panel application, both the screen name and the screen number have to be unique.
■ Opening Screens
To open a screen, you can do the following:
1) In the Project Manager window, double click the screen you want to open
2) On the Screen menu, click Open Screen… In the Open Screen dialog box, select one or multiple screens and click
Open button to open all the selected screens.
The following is an example of Open Screen dialog box.
To select a screen, click the

row of the screen in the list.
To select multiple screens,

click one row and use Ctrl +
Click to add additional rows to
the selection.
To select continuous screens,

click one row and hold the Shift
key and click the last row.

43
■ Activating Screens after Opening
To uncover any screen that is partially or completely obscured by other screens, you can do the following:
1) In the Project Manager window, double click the screen which is not at the top.
2) On the Window menu, click the screen you need to activate. Or click Windows… to bring out the Windows dialog box.
In the Windows dialog box, select the screen and then click Activate button.
3) Click anywhere on the screen. If the screens are maximized, click on the title tab of the screen.
3.9.3. Setting up a Screen

You can set up the screen with the Screen Properties dialog box.
To set up a screen, right click Panel Application > Screens > screen to set up in the Project Manager window, and then
click Properties on the pop-up menu.
To set up a current screen (an opened screen which is at the top), do one of the following:
1) In the Project Manager window, double click the current screen.
2) Right click the blank area on the current screen, and then click Screen Properties… on the pop-up menu.
3) On the Screen menu, click Screen Properties…
The Screen Properties dialog box contains the following pages. Some of the pages appear only when they are needed.
■ General
Described in Section 3.9.3.1.
■ Background
■ Keys
■ Open Macro / Close Macro / Cycle Macro

3
3.9.3.1. General Page
This section describes how to define the general settings for a screen. The following is an example of the General page of
the Screen Properties dialog box.
The following table describes each item in the General page.
Screen Number The number of the screen. It must be between 1 and 7999.
Screen Name The name of the screen.
Use This Screen Check this option to use the screen.
Type Specifies the type of the screen. There are three types: Normal Screen, Window
Screen and Menu Screen. Please see Section 3.9.1 for details.
Continued

43
Width Specifies the width (in pixels) of the screen. This field is available to edit when the
Type is Window Screen and Menu Screen.
Height Specifies the height (in pixels) of the screen. This field is available to edit when the
Type is Window Screen and Menu Screen.
Shown on Display Center Check this option to show the window screen on the display center. This field is
available when the Type is Window Screen.
Shown At Check this option to show the window screen at the specified position. This field is
available when the Type is Window Screen.
X Specifies the X coordinate of the window screen’s upper-left corner in pixels on the
normal screen.
Y Specifies the Y coordinate of the window screen’s upper-left corner in pixels on the
normal screen.
Title Bar Select this option to show a title bar with the specified title with the window screen
when the Type is Window Screen.
Close Button Select this option for the window screen to have a close Button when the Type is
Window Screen and the Title Bar field is checked.
Language Select a language to view and edit the settings of the title for that language. This field
is available when the Type is Window Screen and Title Bar field is checked.
Title
Specifies the title or select the title from text database for the Title Bar. Click to
select the text from text database. Click to edit text. This field is available when
the Type is Window Screen and Title Bar field is checked.
Base <Check Box> Check this option to have a base screen for the current screen
Screen <Combo Box> Specifies the screen to be a base screen. This field is available when the Base
Screen is checked.
OPEN Macro Check this item for the screen to have the OPEN macro.
An Open Macro is run once when the associated screen is being opened. The target
panel will not display the screen until the Open Macro terminates. Use OPEN macro
to initialize global data and settings for the screen.
CLOSE Macro Check this item for the screen to have the CLOSE macro.
A Close Macro is run once when the associated screen is being closed. The target
panel will not erase the screen until the Close Macro terminates.
CYCLE <Check Box> Check this item for the screen to have the CYCLE macro.
Macro A Cycle Macro is run continuously while the associated screen is open. The target
panel runs Cycle Macros cyclically, i.e. a Cycle Macro will run beginning with the first
command each time after it completes the processing of the last command of the
macro, or when it encounters an END command in the middle of the macro. The
cycle macro terminates immediately when the screen is closed.
Cycle Macro Specifies the delay time in 0, 100, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, 700, 800, 900, 1000
Delay Time millisecond for the cycle macro.
Print Whole Screen Check this item to print the whole screen by Command Flag or Function Button or
Macro Command
Upper-left Specifies the X and Y coordinates in pixels for the upper-left corner of the screen’s
printing area. The field is available when Whole Screen item is unchecked.
Lower-Right Specifies the X and Y coordinates in pixels for the lower-right corner of the screen’s
printing area. The field is available when Whole Screen item is unchecked.
Position on Paper Specifies the X and Y coordinates in millimeters for the position where the specified
area of the screen will print on paper.
Continued

3
Percentage of data scan time allocated to Select the percentage of data scan time allocated to the fast scan
the fast scan among 50%, 66%, 75%, 80%, 86% and 90%.
Note: With a bigger percentage, the data scan time is faster to the tag
with fast scan rate. However, data scan time is slower to the tag with
normal scan rate.
What to show for Blank Select this item to show blank for an object’s content before its
an object’s content corresponding data is scanned for the object.
before its Last scanned data Select this item to show last scanned data or blank for an object’s
corresponding data or blank content before its corresponding data is scanned for the object.
is scanned for the
object? Last scanned data Select this item to show last scanned data or zero for an object’s content
or zero before its corresponding data is scanned for the object.
Operable under window screen Check this option to make the screen operable under window screen.
This field is available only when the Type is Normal Screen.
Numeric keypad remains open for Check this option for numeric keypad to remain open for continuous
continuous data entry data entry.
Note Type a note for the screen.

43
3.9.3.2. Background Page
This section describes how to define the background of a screen. The following is an example of the Background page of
the Screen Properties dialog box.
The following table describes each item in the Background page.
Solid Color Check this option for the screen background to be filled with a solid color.
<Solid Color> Click the corresponding color button to specify the color used to fill the background.
This item is available when Solid Color option is selected.
Tile Check this option for the screen background to be filled with a pattern.
Pattern Specify the pattern used to fill the background. Click the corresponding Pattern icon
and select a pattern from the Pattern palette. This item is available when Tile option
is selected.
FG Color The color used to paint the black part of the pattern. When the solid white pattern is
selected, this color is not used. This item is available when Tile option is selected.
BG Color The color used to paint the white part of the pattern. This item is available when Tile
option is selected.
Picture Check this option to have a picture background for the screen.
<Name> The name of the picture. Use the drop-down list to select a picture from the picture
database.
Click to select a picture file. Then, the picture of the selected file is imported
and saved in the picture database.
Click to bring up the Select/Import from Library dialog box. Select a picture
from a picture library file. Then, the selected picture is imported and saved in the
picture database.
Stretch Check this item so the picture can change its size automatically to fit the screen.

3
3.9.4. Importing/Exporting a Screen
This section describes how to export a screen and import a screen regardless of the panel model and screen size.
■ Importing a screen
1) Right-click Panel Application > Screens item in the Project Manager window to bring out the pop-up menu and then
use Import Screen…
2) Click the *.snf file you want to create a new screen from. To open a screen that was saved in a different folder, locate
and open the folder first.
3) Click Open.
■ Exporting a screen
If you have screen you want to reuse, you can export the screen as a .snf file. You can do the following:
1) In the Project Manager window, click the screen to export
2) Right-click on the screen to display the screen item's "pop-up menu"; and then click Export Screen...
3) To save a screen in a different folder, locate and open the folder first, then click Save.
3.9.5. Cutting/Copying/Pasting/Deleting a Screen
■ Copying or Cutting and Pasting a Screen

To copy/cut a screen which is opened and activated, right click the blank area on the screen, and then click Copy
Screen/Cut Screen on the pop-up menu, or use the Copy Screen/Cut Screen command On the Screen menu.
After Copying or Cutting, you can paste the screen by right clicking the blank area on any of the screen, and then use
Paste Screen on the pop-up menu or the Paste Screen command On the Screen menu.
■ Deleting a Screen
To delete a screen which is opened and activated, right click the blank area on the screen, and then click Delete Screen on
the pop-up menu or use the Delete Screen command on the Screen menu.
To delete a screen from Project Manager window, locate the screen to delete and right-click on the screen node to use the
Delete command on the pop-up menu. Confirm the deleting operation.

43
3.9.6. Saving Screens as Pictures
This section describes how to save screens as pictures.
■ Saving a screen as a picture

To save a current screen as the bmp or jpg file, you can do the following.
1) Open and activate the screen as a current screen
2) Right click anywhere on the current screen, and then click Save Current Screen as Picture… on the pop-up menu.
- or -
On the Screen menu, click Save Current Screen as Picture…
■ Saving multiple screens as pictures

You can also use the Save Screens as Pictures dialog box to save a screen or multiple screens as bmp or jpg files. To
open the dialog box, click Save Screens as Pictures… on the Screen menu.
The following is an example of the Save Screens as Pictures dialog box.

3
The following table describes each item in the dialog box.
Panel Application The application Name.
Screen The screen list shows all the screens in the panel application. Click the column
header to sort the items.
The following table describes each column in the screen list.
Column Description
Number The screen number. Check the box before the screen
number to save the screen as a picture file.
Name The screen name.
Filename The Filename. The default filename is Screen
Name+Language Name+S+State Number.
Note: If any of the characters such as /\:*?"<>| in the screen
name, they will be converted to underscore ( _ ).
Check All Click the button to check all the screens.

Uncheck All Click the button to uncheck all the screens.
Selections Language The language used to display the text of objects.
State The state that displays the state of objects.
File Type Select the file type. There are two types: bmp and jpg.
Save in Specifies the folder to locate the files. If the file exists in the folder, it will be replaced
Folder by the new one.
Print Screen Check this option to display general screen information, such as foot note. The
Name as format of the foot note is Screen Name (#Screen Number); Screen WidthXScreen
Foot Note Height.
Progress <Screen Show the selected screen or the screen which is being saved. To select a screen,
View> click its row in the screen list.
<Progress Show the saving progress after the Save button is clicked.
Bar>
Save Click the button to save all the selections with the specified conditions.
Close Click the button to exit the dialog box.

CHAPTER 4
DESIGNING SCREENS
4.1. Drawing Basic Shapes .................................................................................. 1

4.1.1. Drawing Dots................................................................................................................. 2
4.1.2. Drawing Lines ............................................................................................................... 3
4.1.3. Drawing Polylines ......................................................................................................... 5
4.1.4. Drawing Rectangles....................................................................................................... 8
4.1.5. Drawing Circles ........................................................................................................... 11
4.1.6. Drawing Ellipses.......................................................................................................... 13
4.1.7. Drawing Arcs ............................................................................................................... 15
4.1.8. Drawing Pie Shapes..................................................................................................... 16
4.1.9. Drawing Polygons ....................................................................................................... 18
4.1.10. Drawing Text Objects .................................................................................................. 21
4.1.11. Drawing Picture Objects.............................................................................................. 24
4.1.12. Drawing Scales ............................................................................................................ 26
4.1.13. Drawing Tables ............................................................................................................ 28
4.2. Editing Objects ........................................................................................... 32
4.2.1. Selecting and De-selecting Objects ............................................................................. 32
4.2.2. Basic Operations with the Selected Area..................................................................... 32
4.2.3. Duplicating Objects ..................................................................................................... 34
4.2.4. Aligning Objects.......................................................................................................... 35
4.2.5. Making Objects Same Size.......................................................................................... 36
4.2.6. Arranging the Order of Objects ................................................................................... 36
4.3. Designing Object Appearance ................................................................... 38
4.3.1. Selecting a Color.......................................................................................................... 40
4.3.2. Selecting a Pattern ....................................................................................................... 41
4.3.3. Selecting a Graphical Shape ........................................................................................ 41
4.3.4. Setting up the Shape of an Object................................................................................ 44
4.3.5. Label Settings .............................................................................................................. 45
4.3.6. Text Settings ................................................................................................................ 49
4.3.7. Picture Settings ............................................................................................................ 51
4.3.8. External Label Settings................................................................................................ 53
-i-
4.4. Setting up Objects ...................................................................................... 55
4.4.1. States of Objects .......................................................................................................... 55
4.4.2. Operation Options of Objects ...................................................................................... 57
4.4.3. Address Settings .......................................................................................................... 58
4.4.4. Scale Settings............................................................................................................... 61
4.4.5. Advanced Settings ....................................................................................................... 63
4.4.6. Visibility Settings......................................................................................................... 65
- ii -
4
4.1. Drawing Basic Shapes
The software provides a drawing tool you can use to create simple or elaborate drawing shapes such as lines, rectangles,
circles, arcs etc.
To create a drawing shape, click the shape on the Draw Toolbar (See Section 1.4.2.3 Draw Toolbar for details), or use the
command on the Draw menu (See Section 1.4.1.5 Draw menu for details). Then, move the mouse to the position you want
to place the shape and click the left button. To set up a drawing shape, double-click the shape to bring up the
corresponding properties dialog, which can then allow you to set up the color and style of the line/outlined, pattern, FG/BG
Color…of the shape.
Note: If you don’t see the Draw Toolbar pictured below in the lower left corner of the program window, please click the
Draw Toolbar command on the View menu.
The following is a sample of the basic shapes:
4-1 CHAPTER 4 DESIGNING SCREENS

4
4.1.1. Drawing Dots
1. In the Draw menu or Draw toolbar, click Dot .

2. Move the cursor onto the screen where you want to draw a dot. A dot with default settings will display and move
along with the cursor.
3. Click the desired position on the screen to place the dot. The center of the dot will be at the clicked position.
4. Double-click the dot to bring up the Dot dialog box and then modify the settings of the dot.
The following is an example of the Dot dialog box.
The following table describes each property in the Dot dialog box.
Select one of the dot styles listed below:
Style
Color Specifies the dot color.

X Specifies the X coordinate of the upper-left corner of the dot.
Position
Y Specifies the Y coordinate of the upper-left corner of the dot.
5. You can click the following icons in the Draw toolbar to modify the properties of the dot.
Click Icon To
Select a style for the dot.
Select a color for the dot.
CHAPTER 4 DESIGNING SCREENS 4-2

4
4.1.2. Drawing Lines
1. In the Draw menu or Draw toolbar, click Line to draw a straight line. You can also click Horizontal Line
to draw a horizontal line or click Vertical Line to draw a vertical line.

2. Move the cursor onto the screen where you want to draw a line. A line with default settings will display and move
3. Click the desired position on the screen to place the line. The start point of the line will be at the clicked position.
4. Drag the handle at the start point to adjust the position of the start point. Drag the handle at the end point to adjust
the position of the end point.
The picture on the left shows the two handles of a line. Position the mouse
pointer over one of the handles. When the cursor changes to , drag the handle
until the line has the length and slope you want.
5. Left-click and hold down the mouse button until the cursor becomes a cross icon to move the line.
6. Double-click the line to bring up the Line dialog box and then modify the settings of the line. The following is a
sample of the Line dialog box.

4
The following table describes each property in the Line dialog box.
Type Specifies the type of line: General, Horizontal, or Vertical.
Style Click the button to select the
line style from the dropdown
window shown on the right:
Color Static Check this option if the color of the line will not be changed.
Controlled By Bit Check this option if the color of the line will be controlled by the specified bit.
Blink Check this option so the line will blink. You have to choose the blink effects
that change the color of the line from its On state color to Off state color.
Blink(Enabled by Bit) Check this option if you want to enable the line blinking by the specified bit.
State Select the state that you want to view or define the color for.
Color Specifies the line color for the selected state.
Control Bit Specifies the bit that controls the color or enables the color blinking.
Click to enter the bit address. Click to enter the bit tag.
Start / End Start/End Point Select this option if you want the line to have a shape at the start/end point.
Point Type Click the dropdown list to select the type for Start/End Point
Start Point Type: End Point Type:
Filled Select this option if you want the shape to be filled with the line color.
Size Specifies the shape size.
Visibility Visibility Controlled Check this option if the line will be shown or hidden by the specified bit.
Control By Bit
Control Bit Specifies the bit that shows or hides the object.
Visible State Specifies the state (On or Off) that makes the line visible.
Terminal X1 The X coordinate of the start point.
Y1 The Y coordinate of the start point.
X2 The X coordinate of the end point.
Y2 The Y coordinate of the end point.
7. You can click the following icons in the Draw toolbar to modify the properties of the line.
Click Icon To
Select a style for the line.
Select a color for the line.

4
4.1.3. Drawing Polylines
1. In the Draw menu or Draw toolbar, click Polyline to draw a polyline.

2. Move the cursor onto the screen where you want to draw a polyline, and click the position where you want the start
point of the polyline to be at.
3. Continue clicking on the screen to place as many points needed for nodes in the polyline.
4. Right-click to place the last point for the polyline and complete the polyline.
5. Drag one blue handle of the polyline at a time to resize the polyline.
6. Drag one black handle of the polyline at a time to adjust the node positions of the polyline.
The picture on the left shows all the blue and black handles of a polyline.
Position the mouse pointer over one of the handles. When the cursor
changes to or or or , drag the handle until the polyline is
the shape and size you want.
7. Right-click anywhere on the polyline and use the Insert Point command on the object pop-up menu to insert a new
point for the polyline. Or right-click the existing point of the polyline and use the Delete Point command on the object
pop-up menu to delete the point.
Pop-up menu Description

Add a point at the specified position.
Insert Point
Delete a selected point.
Delete Point

4
8. Double-click the polyline to bring up the Polyline dialog box and then modify the settings of the polyline.
The following is a sample of the Polyline dialog box.
The following table describes each property in the Polyline dialog box.
Line Style Specifies the style of the polyline.
Color Static Check this option if the color of the polyline will not be changed.
Controlled By Bit Check this option if the color of the polyline will be controlled by the specified
bit.
Blink Check this option so the polyline will blink. You have to choose the blink
effects that change the color of the polyline from its On state color to Off state
color.
Blink(Enabled by Check this option if you want to enable the polyline blinking by the specified
Bit) bit.
State Select the state that you want to view or define the color for.
Color Specifies the line color for the selected state.
Control Bit Specifies the bit that controls the color or enables the color blinking.
Start Point Start Point Select this option if you want the polyline to have a shape at the start point.
Type Specifies the shape type.
End Point End Point Select this option if you want the polyline to have a shape at the end point.
Type Specifies the shape type.
Continued

4
Visibility Visibility Controlled Check this option if the polyline will be shown or hidden by the specified bit.
Control By Bit
Control Bit Specifies the bit that shows or hides the polyline.
Visible State Specifies the state (On or Off) that makes the line visible.
Profile Left The X coordinate of the upper-left corner of the bounding rectangle of the
polyline.
Top The Y coordinate of the upper-left corner of the bounding rectangle of the
polyline.
Width The width of the bounding rectangle of the polyline.
Height The height of the bounding rectangle of the polyline.
9. You can click the following icons in the Draw toolbar to modify the properties of the polyline.
Click Icon To
Select a style for the polyline.
Select a color for the polyline.

4
4.1.4. Drawing Rectangles
1. In the Draw menu or Draw toolbar, click Rectangle to draw a normal rectangle. You can also click Round
Rectangle to draw a round rectangle or click Clipped Rectangle to draw a clipped rectangle.
2. Move the cursor onto the screen where you want to draw a rectangle. A rectangle with default settings will display
and move along with the cursor.
3. Click the desired position on the screen to place the rectangle. The upper-left corner of the rectangle will be at the
clicked position.
4. Drag one handle of the rectangle at a time to resize the rectangle.
The picture on the left shows the eight handles of a rectangle. Position the mouse pointer
over one of the handles. When the cursor changes to or or or , drag the
handle until the rectangle is the shape and size you want.
5. Double-click the rectangle to bring up the Rectangle dialog box and then modify the settings of the rectangle. The
following is a sample of the Rectangle dialog box.
The following table describes each property in the Rectangle dialog box.
Specifies the type of the rectangle. There are three types: Normal, Round, or Clipped.
Normal Round Clipped
Type
Continued

4
Number Specifies the size of the clipped corners if the rectangle is a clipped rectangle. Specifies the radius
of Dots of the round corners if the rectangle is a round rectangle.
Specifies the 3D visual effect for the rectangle. There are three effects: Flat, Raised, or Sunken.
Effects Samples Description

Flat You can specify the Color and
Style for the Border if it is
selected.
Thickness field is not available

when flat is selected.
Raised You can specify the color for the

top and left edges. The software
will darken the specified color
and draw in the bottom and right
edges for you.
3D
Border and Style field is not
available when Raised is
selected.
Sunken You can specify the color for the

bottom and right edges. The
software will darken the specified
color and draw in the top and left
edges for you.
Border and Style field is not

available when Sunken is
selected.
Continued

4
Color Static Check this option if the color of the rectangle will not be changed.
Control Check this option if the color of the rectangle will be controlled by the specified
Controlled By Bit
bit.
Blink Check this option so the rectangle will blink. You have to choose the blink
effects that change the color of the rectangle from its On state Border and Solid
option settings to Off state Border and Solid option settings.
Blink(Enabled by Check this option if you want to enable the rectangle blinking by the specified
Bit) bit.
Specifies the bit that controls the color or enables the blinking.
Control Bit
State Select the state that you want to view or define the colors for.
Border Border Check this option if you want the rectangle to have a border.
Thickness Specifies the thickness of the border.
Color Specifies the border color for the selected state.
Style Select a line style for the border.
Solid Check this option if you want the rectangle to be solid. A solid rectangle is filled
Solid with the specified pattern and colors. This field is available when Border is
selected.
Pattern Specifies the fill pattern for the selected state.
Specifies the color for the selected state that will be used for painting the black
FG Color
part of the fill pattern.
Specifies the color for the selected state that will be used for painting the white
BG Color
Profile Left The X coordinate of the upper-left corner of the rectangle.
Top The Y coordinate of the upper-left corner of the rectangle.
Width The width of the rectangle.
Height The height of the rectangle.
Visibility Visibility
Check this option if the rectangle will be shown or hidden by the specified bit.
Control Controlled By Bit
Specifies the bit that shows or hides the rectangle.
Control Bit
Visible State Specifies the state (On or Off) that makes the rectangle visible.
6. You can click the following icons in the Draw toolbar to modify the properties of the rectangle.
Click Icon To
Select a line style for the border.
Select a color for the border.
Select a color for painting the white part of the fill pattern.
Select a pattern for the fill pattern.
Select a color for painting the black part of the fill pattern.

4
4.1.5. Drawing Circles
1. In the Draw menu or Draw toolbar, click Circle to draw a circle.

2. Move the cursor onto the screen where you want to draw a circle. A circle with default settings will display and move
3. Click the desired position on the screen to place the circle. The center of the circle will be at the clicked position.
4. Position the mouse pointer over the handle on the edge of the circle. When the cursor changes to or , drag
the handle until the circle is the size you want.
5. Position the mouse pointer over the handle on the center of the circle. When the cursor changes to , left-click the
center and hold down the button to move the circle.
The picture on the left shows the two handles of a circle.
6. Double-click the circle to bring up the Circle dialog box to modify the settings of the circle.
The following is a sample of the Circle dialog box.

4
The following table describes each property in the Circle dialog box.
Color Static Check this option if the color of the circle will not be changed.
Control Controlled By Bit Check this option if the color of the circle will be controlled by the specified bit.
Blink Check this option so the circle will blink. You have to choose the blink effects
that change the color of the circle from its On state Outlined and Solid option
settings to Off state Outlined and Solid option settings.
Blink(Enabled by Check this option if you want to enable the rectangle blinking by the specified
Bit) bit.
Control Bit Specifies the bit that controls the color or enables the blinking.
Outline Outlined Check this option if you want the circle to be outlined.
Color Specifies the outline color for the selected state.
Solid Solid Check this option if you want the circle to be solid. A solid circle is filled with the
specified pattern and colors.
FG Color Specifies the color for the selected state that will be used for painting the black
BG Color Specifies the color for the selected state that will be used for painting the white
Center X The X coordinate of the center of the circle.
& Y The Y coordinate of the center of the circle.
Radius
Radius The radius of the circle.
Visibility Visibility Check this option if the circle will be shown or hidden by the specified bit.
Control Bit Specifies the bit that shows or hides the circle.
Visible State Specifies the state (On or Off) that makes the circle visible.
7. You can click the following icons in the Draw toolbar to modify the properties of the circle.
Click Icon To
Select a color for the outline.

4
4.1.6. Drawing Ellipses
1. In the Draw menu or Draw toolbar, click Ellipse to draw an ellipse.

2. Move the cursor onto the screen where you want to draw an ellipse. An ellipse with default settings will display and
move along with the cursor.
3. Click the desired position on the screen to place the ellipse. The upper-left corner of the bounding rectangle of the
ellipse will be at the clicked position.
4. Drag one handle of the ellipse at a time to resize the ellipse.
The picture on the left shows the eight handles of an ellipse. Position the mouse pointer
over one of the handles. When the cursor changes to or or or , drag the
handle until the rectangle is the shape and size you want.
5. Double-click the ellipse to bring up the Ellipse dialog box and then modify the settings of the ellipse.
The following is a sample of the Ellipse dialog box.

4
The following table describes each property in the Ellipse dialog box.
Color Static Check this option if the color of the ellipse will not be changed.
Control Controlled By Bit Check this option if the color of the ellipse will be controlled by the specified bit.
Blink Check this option so the ellipse will blink. You have to choose the blink effects
that change the color of the ellipse from its On state Outlined and Solid option
Blink(Enabled by Check this option if you want to enable the ellipse blinking by the specified bit.
Bit)
Control Bit Specifies the bit that controls the color or enables the blinking.
Outline Outlined Check this option if you want the ellipse to be outlined.
Solid Solid Check this option if you want the ellipse to be solid. A solid ellipse is filled with
the specified pattern and colors.
FG Color Specifies the color for the selected state that will be used for painting the black
BG Color Specifies the color for the selected state that will be used for painting the white
Profile Left The X coordinate of the upper-left corner of the bounding rectangle of the ellipse.
Top The Y coordinate of the upper-left corner of the bounding rectangle of the ellipse.
Width The width of the bounding rectangle of the ellipse.
Height The height of the bounding rectangle of the ellipse.
Visibility Visibility Check this option if the ellipse will be shown or hidden by the specified bit.
Control Bit Specifies the bit that shows or hides the ellipse.
Visible State Specifies the state (On or Off) that makes the ellipse visible.
6. You can click the following icons in the Draw toolbar to modify the properties of the ellipse.
Click Icon To

4
4.1.7. Drawing Arcs
1. In the Draw menu or Draw toolbar, click Arc to draw an arc.

2. Move the cursor onto the screen where you want to draw an arc. An arc with default settings will display and move
3. Click the desired position on the screen to place the arc. The upper-left corner of the bounding rectangle of the arc
will be at the clicked position.
4. Drag one handle of the arc at a time to change the shape of the arc.
The picture on the left shows the handles of an arc. The blue handles are for shaping the
arc. The black handles of the two ends of the arc are for changing the ends' angles. The
black handle at the center of the arc is for forcing the arc to be a part of a circle.
Position the mouse pointer over one of the handles. When the cursor changes to or
or or , drag the handle until the arc is the shape and size you want.
5. Double-click the arc to bring up the Arc dialog box and then modify the settings of the arc.
The following is a sample of the Arc dialog box.
The following table describes each property in the Arc dialog box.
Color Specifies the color of the arc.
Profile Left The X coordinate of the upper-left corner of the bounding rectangle of the arc.
Top The Y coordinate of the upper-left corner of the bounding rectangle of the arc.
Width The width of the bounding rectangle of the arc.
Height The height of the bounding rectangle of the arc.
6. You can click the following icons in the Draw toolbar to modify the properties of the arc.
Click Icon To
Select a color for the arc.

4
4.1.8. Drawing Pie Shapes
1. In the Draw menu or Draw toolbar, click Pie to draw a pie shape.
2. Move the cursor onto the screen where you want to draw a pie shape. A pie shape with default settings will display
3. Click the desired position on the screen to place the pie shape. The upper-left corner of the bounding rectangle of
the pie shape will be at the clicked position.
4. Drag one handle of the pie shape at a time to change the pie shape.
The picture on the left shows the handles of a pie shape. The blue handles are for
changing the pie shape. The black handles at the two ends of the pie are for
changing the size of the pie. Clicking the black handle at the center of the pie
applies the radius to the entire pie and can be used to change the radius of the
pie.
Position the mouse pointer over one of the handles. When the cursor changes to
or or or , drag the handle until the pie is the shape and size you
t
5. Double-click the pie shape to bring up the Pie dialog box to modify the settings of the pie shape.
The following table describes each property in the Pie dialog box.
Outline Outlined Check this option if you want the pie shape to be outlined.
Color Specifies the outline color.
Solid Solid Check this option if you want the pie shape to be solid. A solid pie shape is filled with the
specified pattern and colors.
Pattern Specifies the fill pattern.
FG Color Specifies the color that will be used for painting the black part of the fill pattern.
BG Color Specifies the color that will be used for painting the white part of the fill pattern.
Profile Left The X coordinate of the upper-left corner of the bounding rectangle of the pie shape.
Top The Y coordinate of the upper-left corner of the bounding rectangle of the pie shape.
Width The width of the bounding rectangle of the pie shape.
Height The height of the bounding rectangle of the pie shape.

4
6. You can click the following icons in the Draw toolbar to modify the properties of the pie shape
Click Icon To

4
4.1.9. Drawing Polygons
1. In the Draw menu or Draw toolbar, click Polygon to draw a polygon.

2. Move the cursor onto the screen where you want to draw a polygon and click the position where you want the first
vertex of the polygon to be at.
3. Continue clicking on the screen to place as many points needed for vertices in the polygon.
4. Right-click to place the last vertex for the polygon and complete the polygon.
5. Drag one handle of the polygon at a time to resize the polygon.
6. Drag one black handle of the polygon at a time to adjust the vertex positions of the polygon.
The picture on the left shows the handles of a polygon. The blue
handles are for resizing the polygon. The black handles are for moving
the vertices of the polygon.
Position the mouse pointer over one of the handles. When the cursor
changes to or or or , drag the handle until the polygon is
7. Right-click anywhere on the polygon and use the Insert Point command on the object pop-up menu to insert a new
point for the polygon. Or right-click the existing point of the polygon and use the Delete Point command on the
object pop-up menu to delete the point.

Add a point at the specified position.
Insert Point
Delete a selected point.
Delete Point

4
8. Double-click the polygon to bring up the Polygon dialog box to modify the settings of the polygon.
The following table describes each property in the Polygon dialog box.
Color Static Check this option if the color of the polygon will not be changed.
Control Check this option if the color of the polygon will be controlled by the specified
Controlled By Bit
bit.
Blink Check this option so the polygon will blink. You have to choose the blink effects
that change the color of the polygon from its On state Outlined and Solid option
Blink(Enabled by Check this option if you want to enable the polygon blinking by the specified bit.
Bit)
Specifies the bit that controls the color or enables the blinking.
Control Bit
Outline Outlined Check this option if you want the polygon to be outlined.
Thickness Specifies the thickness of the outline.
Continued

4
Solid Check this option if you want the polygon to be solid. A solid polygon is filled with
Solid
the specified pattern and colors.
Specifies the color for the selected state that will be used for painting the black
FG Color
Specifies the color for the selected state that will be used for painting the white
BG Color
Profile The X coordinate of the upper-left corner of the bounding rectangle of the
Left
polygon.
The Y coordinate of the upper-left corner of the bounding rectangle of the
Top
polygon.
Width The width of the bounding rectangle of the polygon.
Height The height of the bounding rectangle of the polygon.
Visibility Visibility
Control Controlled By Check this option if the polygon will be shown or hidden by the specified bit.
Bit
Specifies the bit that shows or hides the polygon.
Control Bit
Visible State Specifies the state (On or Off) that makes the polygon visible.
9. You can click the following icons in the Draw toolbar to modify the properties of the polygon.
Click Icon To
Select a line style for the border.
Select a color for the border.

4
4.1.10. Drawing Text Objects
1. In the Draw menu or Draw toolbar, click Text .

2. Move the cursor onto the screen where you want to draw a text object. A text object with default settings will display
3. Click the desired position on the screen to place the text object. The upper-left corner of the bounding box of the text
object will be at the clicked position.
4. Double-click the text object to bring up the Text Object dialog box and then modify the settings of the text object.
This dialog box contains the following three pages:
■ General
■ Shape
■ Visibility
Note 1: You can use the Text toolbar to modify the properties of the text object's text instantly.
Note 2: You can use the Draw toolbar to modify the properties of the text object's shape instantly.
Tip: By default, the Auto Text Resizing on the Edit menu is checked and the related icon on the Edit toolbar is sunken. If
you don’t want to resize the text when resizing the object, you need to uncheck the Auto Text Resizing command
on the Edit menu or click the sunken icon on the Edit toolbar to make the font size fixed.

4
4.1.10.1. General Settings
This section describes how to define the general settings for text objects.
In this edit box, you can view

and edit the current text of the
current selected language.
Click to select a text

from the text database Select a text from the
of the current selected dropdown text table.
language.
Click to change text

table. You can select
the text or edit the text
in the selected table.
The above is an example of the General page of the Text Object dialog box.

4
Language The language that you are setting the text for.
Shape Check this option if you want the text object to have a frame as its background. The Shape
page appears in the dialog box when the option is selected.
Use the text of the first
Check this item so the text object always shows the text of the first language regardless of
language for all other
what the current language is.
languages
Font The font of the current text. You can use the drop-down list to select a font, or click to
bring up the Font Templates dialog box and select a font for the current text. You can
change the font templates before selecting a font in that dialog box.
Text <Edit Box> /
<Combo Box> The current text of the currently selected language.
/ Click to view and edit the text for the selected language in this edit box, or click to
select a text from dropdown text table that lists all the texts from Text Database. You can
change the text database before selecting a text.
Color The color of the text. To specify the color, click the corresponding Color icon and select a
color from the Color palette.
Transparent Check this item to make the background of the text transparent.
BG Color Specifies the background color of the text. This field is available when Transparent is not
selected.
Direction Select one of the following directions to arrange the characters of the text.
From left to From right to From top to From bottom
Direction
right left bottom to top
Input text:
An
example
Position
The position of the text body.
The alignment of the text.
Border Spacing The margin (in pixels) to the border of the object’s shape for the text body.
Line Spacing The distance (in pixels) between two adjacent lines of the text.
Character Spacing The distance (in pixels) between two adjacent characters of the text.

4
4.1.11. Drawing Picture Objects
1. In the Draw menu or Draw toolbar, click Picture .

2. Move the cursor onto the screen where you want to draw a picture object. A picture object with default settings will
display and move along with the cursor.
3. Click the desired position on the screen to place the picture object. The upper-left corner of the bounding box of the
picture object will be at the clicked position.
4. Double-click the picture object to bring up the Picture Object dialog box. Select a picture and define the settings for
the picture object in the dialog box. Note that you can use the Picture toolbar to modify the properties of the picture
object instantly. The following is an example of the Picture Object dialog box.
The following table describes each property in the Picture Object dialog box.
The name of the picture that the object displays. You can use the drop-down list to select a
picture from the picture database.
Click to select a picture from a file. After the selection, the software imports the picture
Name of the selected file and saves the picture in the picture database.
Click to bring up the Select/Import from Library dialog box. Select a picture from a
picture library file. After the selection, the software imports the selected picture from the
selected library and saves the picture in the picture database.
View Shows the processed result of the selected picture according to the current settings.
Continued

4
Check this item so the picture can change its size automatically to fit inside the
Fit to Object
object.
Check this item to make parts of the picture transparent. The transparent parts
Transparent are pixels whose colors are identical to the specified transparent color. This
item is available when the picture is not a black and white picture.
The transparent color. This item is available when the picture is not a black
Transparent Color
and white picture.
The color to paint the black part of a black and white picture. This item is
FG Color
available when the picture is a black and white picture.
The color to paint the white part of a black and white picture. This item is
BG Color
available when the picture is a black and white picture.
Flip/Rotate Specifies the method to flip or rotate the picture before drawing it. There are 8
options:
Method Description
0° Do nothing
90° & X Rotates the picture clockwise by 90 degree and flips it over the
X axis
Y Flips the picture over Y axis
90° & Y Rotates the picture clockwise by 90 degree and flips it over the
Y axis
Tone Check this item to tone the picture.
Toning Color The color to tone the picture.
Visibility Visibility Check this option if the picture will be shown or hidden by the specified bit.
Control Bit Specifies the bit that shows or hides the picture object.
Visible State Specifies the state (On or Off) that makes the picture visible.
Profile Left The X coordinate of the upper-left corner of the object.
Top The Y coordinate of the upper-left corner of the object.
Width The width of the object.
Height The height of the object.
Redraw Click this button to redraw the object on the screen with the current settings.

4
4.1.12. Drawing Scales
1. In the Draw menu or Draw toolbar, click Scale .

2. Move the cursor onto the screen where you want to draw a scale. A scale with default settings will display and move
3. Click the desired position on the screen to place the scale. The upper-left corner of the bounding box of the scale
will be at the clicked position.
4. Double-click the scale to bring up the Scale dialog box and then define the settings for the scale. The following is an
example of the Scale dialog box. The corresponding scale is shown to the right of the dialog box.

4
The following table describes each property in the Scale dialog box.
Direction and Position Select the direction and the position of the scale.
Direction Horizontal Vertical

Position Top Bottom Left Right
Example
Dynamic Dynamic Check this item if you want the numbers of the scale ticks and the range of the scale marks
Range Range to be dynamic, i.e. to be controlled by the specified variable.
Parameter Specifies the variable that controls the numbers of the scale ticks and the range of the
Block scale marks. The variable is an array of four double-words (8 words). The following table
describes the data members of the array.
Word # Data Type Description
0, 1 32-bit unsigned integer The number of major ticks. The allowable range of
this number is between 2 and 101.
2, 3 32-bit unsigned integer The number of divisions between two adjacent
major ticks. The allowable range of this number is
between 1 and 100.
4, 5 32-bit signed integer The minimum of the scale marks.
6, 7 32-bit signed integer The maximum of the scale marks.
Example
Assume a scale’s dynamic range control block is $U100. The following macro commands
makes the scale look like this:
$U100 = 3 (UD) // The number of major ticks.
$U102 = 5 (UD) // The number of sub-divisions.
$U104 = 0 (SD) // The minimum of the scale marks.
$U106 = 100 (SD) // The maximum of the scale marks.
Color The color of the scale. To specify the color, click the corresponding Color icon and select a
Number of Major Ticks The number of major ticks. The minimum you can specify is two.
Number of Sub The number of divisions between two adjacent major ticks. The minimum you can specify
Divisions is one.
Minor Tick Length The length of minor ticks.
Axis Check this item if you want the scale to have an axis.
Marks Marks Check this option if you want the scale to have marks.
Font The font of the marks.
Minimum The minimum of the marks. It is a 32-bit integer.
Maximum The maximum of the marks. It is a 32-bit integer.
Total Digits The total digits to be displayed for the marks.
Fractional The number of fractional digits for the marks. For example, when the Maximum is 5000, the
Digits Total Digits is 4, and the Fractional Digits is 2, the mark for the Maximum will be 50.00.
Reverse Check this option if you want the marks of the scale to show in reverse order. In normal
Order order, the maximal mark is at the right end or top end of the scale. In reverse order, the
maximal mark is at the left end or bottom end of the scale.

4
4.1.13. Drawing Tables
1. In the Draw menu or Draw toolbar, click Table .

2. Move the cursor onto the screen where you want to draw a table. A table with default settings will display and move
3. Click the desired position on the screen to place the table. The upper-left corner of the table will be at the clicked
position.
4. Use drag-and-drop editing to move an existing object into an empty cell of the table. If the object is allowed to be
placed in the cell, a message box will pop-up to confirm the operation. The following is an example of object
insertion with the confirmation dialog box.
h If you click Yes to insert the object to the table,

the object will be part of the table. Any
modifications such as moving the table, resizing
the table, deleting the table… will be applied to
the objects of the table at the same time.
h If you click No to cancel the operation, the

object will move to the specified position and
float over the table.
Note: Only 23 types of objects can be placed in the cells of the table. The supported objects are Picture, Dot, Text,
Bit Button, Toggle Switch, Word Button, Multistate Switch, Screen Button, Function Button, Keypad Button, Numeric
Display, Numeric Entry, ASCII String Display, ASCII String Entry, Bit Lamp, Multistate Lamp, Time Display, Date
Display, Day-of-Week Display, Message Display, Bar Graph, Picture Display, GIF Display, and Advanced Numeric
Display.
5. Click the cell inside the table. If the cell contains the object, there will be the icon on the upper-left corner of the
cell. The following is an example showing you how to edit the object in the table.
h Left-click the icon

and hold down the
button. When the
This is an empty
cell where you cursor changes to ,
can place an move the object out of
object. the table.
h Double click the icon

to bring up the
properties dialog box
of the corresponding
object and then define
the settings of object
for the selected cell.

4
6. Position the mouse point over one of the grid lines. When the cursor changes to or , drag the line until the
column is the width and the row is the height you want.
Drag the line to adjust the

width of the column.
Drag the line to adjust the

height of the row.
Note: You can adjust the width of the column when the Distribute Columns Evenly is not selected in the general
page of the Table dialog box. And you can adjust the height of the row when the Distribute Rows Evenly is not
selected in the general page of the Table dialog box.
7. Double-click anywhere inside the table, other than the icon, to bring up the Table dialog box and then define the
settings for the table. This dialog box contains the following two pages:
■ General
■ Cell

4
4.1.13.1. General Settings
This section describes how to define the general settings for the table objects. The following is an example of the General
page of the Table Object dialog box.
The following table describes each property in the General page of the Table dialog box.
ID The object’s identifier is generated when the object is created and is unchangeable.
The identifier is unique within the screen where the object is located. The format of the
IDs for the tables is TBLnnnn.
Note You can type a note for the object.
Shape settings For details about the following properties, see Section 4.3.4 Setting up the Shape of an
Object. , Border Color, BG Color
Cell Number of rows Specifies the number of rows in the table.
Number of columns Specifies the number of columns in the table.
Distribute rows Check this option if you want the rows of the table to be always distributed evenly.
evenly Uncheck this option if you want to adjust the heights of the rows.
Distribute columns Check this option if you want the columns of the table to be always distributed evenly.
evenly Uncheck this option if you want to adjust the widths of the columns.
Drag and drop Check this option so you can drag and drop an object into a cell of the table. Note that
not all kinds of objects can be placed in the cells of the table.
Grid Vertical Check this option if you want the table to have vertical grid lines.
Horizontal Check this option if you want the table to have horizontal grid lines.
Style Specifies the style for the grid lines.
Color Specifies the color for the grid lines.

4
4.1.13.2. Cell Settings
The following is an example of the Cell page of the Table Object dialog box and the Select Object Dialog box when the
Insert Button is clicked.
Click the button to bring up

the Select Object dialog.
The following table describes each property in the Cell page of the Table dialog box. To make the buttons available, you
need to select a row. To select a row, left-click the (Row, Column) column.
(Row,Column) The location of the cell.
Object The type of the specified object. If the field is empty, the cell has no object inserted and it is called
empty cell.
Click the button to bring up the properties dialog box of the specified object and define the settings
of the object for the selected cell. The button is available when the Object field is not empty.
Margin The distance in pixels between the object boundary and the cell border. Select a number between 0
and 10.
Delete Click the button to clear the contents of the selected cell. The button is available when the selected
cell is not empty.
Insert Click the button to bring up the Select Object dialog box shown above. Select an object type listed
in the dialog to create a new object for the selected cell. The button is available when the selected
cell is empty.
Note: The table won’t allow the insertion of the type of object which is not listed in the dialog.
Move Up Click the button to move the selected cell before the previous cell. It will not be available when
multiple rows are selected, no row is selected, or the first row is selected.
Move Down Click the button to move the selected cell after the next cell. It will not be available when multiple
rows are selected, no row is selected, or the last row is selected.

4
4.2. Editing Objects
In this section you will learn how to select the objects first and then move around, copy, or edit the selections without
affecting the rest of the screen.
4.2.1. Selecting and De-selecting Objects

■ Selecting Objects
To select an object, move the mouse to the object you want to select and then click the left button.
To add an object to the selection, use Shift + Click.
To select all objects of the active screen, use Ctrl + A, or use the Select All command on the Edit menu.
■ Selecting Objects by a Rectangular Area

Left-click on the blank area of the screen, and hold the button to begin your selection. Where you click will become one of
the corners of the rectangular selection area. Then drag the mouse diagonally. Release the mouse button when you reach
the position that you want the opposite corner of the rectangular area to be.
Each of the selected objects will have blue square-shaped tabs around it. The object with solid tabs is the reference object.
■ De-selecting Objects
To de-select objects, either click the blank area of the screen, or make a new selection.
4.2.2. Basic Operations with the Selected Area

■ Moving Objects
Left-click anywhere inside the selected object and hold down the button. When the cursor turns changes to , drag the
mouse to move the selection to another area of the screen. The selection will "float" over the rest of the screen, allowing
you to position it wherever you like. Release the mouse button to "let go" of the selection.
■ Grouping or Ungrouping Objects
To group the selection, click on the edit toolbar, or use the Group command on the Edit menu or on the object pop-up
menu. After you have grouped a selection that includes at least two objects, you can copy, move or resize all objects in a
group as a single unit. You can select an object within the group and change its properties without ungrouping. You can
also save the group to the object library and use this object group in an animated graphic.
To ungroup the selected group, click on the edit toolbar, or use the Ungroup command on the Edit menu or on the
object pop-up menu. After ungrouping the objects, the objects within the group will be restored to the single ones.
■ Resizing Objects
The square-shaped tabs around your object can be re-sized. You can resize by clicking on the square-shaped tabs located
at the corners and the middle sections of the bound rectangle area and holding the mouse button down. When the cursor
changes to or or or , drag the mouse to change the size of the selection. Release the mouse button when
the selection is the size you like. You can make it bigger or smaller, and achieve a distorted effect by "squashing" or
"stretching" the selection to make it either wider/narrower or taller/shorter than its original proportions.
Tip: You can’t resize more than one object at a time unless you group multiple objects before resizing.
■ Auto Text Resizing
To automatically scale the text of the object when resizing the object, click on the edit toolbar if it is raised, or use the
Auto Text Resizing command on the Edit menu.
Tip: The Auto Text Resizing command is checked and the icon is sunken by default. If you don’t want to resize the text
when resizing the object, you need to uncheck the Auto Text Resizing command or click the sunken icon to make the
font size fixed.

4
■ Pinning or Unpinning Objects
To pin the selection so that it cannot move, click on the edit toolbar, or use the Pin command on the Edit menu or on
the object pop-up menu.
To unpin the selection so that it can move again, click on the edit toolbar, or use the Unpin command on the Edit
menu or on the object pop-up menu.
Tip: Pinned objects can still be resized.
■ Copying or Cutting and Pasting Objects
To copy a selection from the current screen and place it on the Windows™ clipboard, press Ctrl+C, or click on the
standard toolbar, or use the Copy command on the Edit menu or on the object pop-up menu.
To cut a selection from the screen, press Ctrl+X, or click on the standard toolbar, or use the Cut command on the
Edit menu or on the object pop-up menu.
After Copying or Cutting, you can paste the selection by pressing Ctrl+V, or click on the standard toolbar, or use the
Paste command on the Edit menu or on the object pop-up menu.
To copy and paste the selection by mouse, press and hold down the Ctrl key,
and then left-click the selection and hold down the button. When the cursor
changes to , drag the mouse to copy the selection to another area of the
screen. The picture on the right is an example.
Tip: Cut and Paste are good for moving objects around within the screen or to another screen.
Copy and Paste are good for duplicating objects from the current screen to other screens.
By pasting multiple times on the current screen, you can achieve a cascading effect.
By pasting once to a different screen, the position of the pasted object will be the same as the copied object from the
original screen.
■ Deleting Objects
To delete a selection, press Del, or use the Delete command on the Edit menu, or on the object pop-up menu. When you
use Delete, whatever is in the selection will be deleted.
■ Undo
To reverse the last action, press Ctrl+Z, or use the Undo command on the Edit menu.
■ Redo
To reapply the actions that were previously canceled by the Undo command, press Ctrl+Z, or use the Redo command on
the Edit menu.
■ Keyboard Shortcuts
Shortcut Operation Shortcut Operation Shortcut Operation

【Ctrl+N】 New Project 【Ctrl+X】 Cut 【Ctrl+D】 Duplicate
【Ctrl+O】 Open Project 【Ctrl+C】 Copy 【Ctrl+F】 Find
【Ctrl+S】 Save 【Ctrl+V】 Paste 【Ctrl+R】 Replace
【Ctrl+Z】 Undo 【Ctrl+Click+move】 Copy & Paste 【Ctrl+A】 Select All
【Ctrl+Y】 Redo 【Del】 Delete 【Shift+Click】 Multiple Select
【Ctrl+Click】 Reference Object Select

4
4.2.3. Duplicating Objects
To duplicate the selected object, use the Duplicate… command on the Edit menu or on the object pop-up menu. After the
duplicate command is executed, the following dialog will pop-up and allow you to set how to duplicate objects.
Preview
addresses
Click View > Address > Monitor on the

menu to show the monitor address on the
upper-left corner of the object.
The following table describes each property in the Duplicate dialog.
Number Columns The total number of columns.
of Copies Rows The total number of rows.
Spacing Vertical The distance (in pixels) between two adjacent objects in the vertical direction.
in Pixels Horizontal The distance (in pixels) between two adjacent objects in the horizontal direction.
Increase Address Check this item so the address of each duplicate will be increased to a specified increment
over the previous object.
Increment The increase amount.
Copy From top to bottom, place the duplicates row by row. In the same row, place the duplicate to
Direction the right of the previous object.
From top to bottom, place the duplicates row by row. In the same row, place the duplicate to
the left of the previous object.
From bottom to top, place the duplicates row by row. In the same row, place the duplicate to
the right of the previous object.
From bottom to top, place the duplicates row by row. In the same row, place the duplicate to
the left of the previous object.
From left to right, place the duplicates column by column. In the same column, place the
duplicate below the previous object.
From right to left, place the duplicates column by column. In the same column, place the
duplicate below the previous object.
From left to right, place the duplicates column by column. In the same column, place the
duplicate above the previous object.
From right to left, place the duplicates column by column. In the same column, place the
duplicate above the previous object.

4
4.2.4. Aligning Objects
To arrange the selected objects on a screen, you need to select a reference object from within the selection and then press
the icon on the toolbar or click the menu item listed as below. To do a multiple selection, use Shift + Click. To select a
reference object from the selection, use Ctrl + Click.
Use the Align commands on the Edit menu to arrange objects/drawings on a screen. Select an object or drawing by
single-clicking on it, then hold down the Shift key while clicking on the other objects or drawings to be aligned with it. When
all of the objects or drawings to be aligned are selected, choose one of the commands in the Align submenu or directly
click a specified icon in the Edit Toolbar.
Align the left sides of selected objects to the left side of the reference object. All the
Left objects move horizontally so their left sides are in line with the left side of the
reference object.
Align the vertical centers of selected objects to the vertical center of the reference
Vertical
object. All the objects move horizontally so their vertical centers are in line with the
Center
vertical center of the reference object.
Align the right sides of selected objects to the right side of the reference object. All the
Right objects move horizontally so their right sides are in line with the right side of the
reference object.
Align Align the tops of the selected objects to the top of the reference object. All the objects
Top
move vertically so their tops are in line with the top of the reference object.
Align the horizontal centers of selected objects to the horizontal center of the
Horizontal
reference object. All the objects move vertically so their horizontal centers are in line
Center
with the horizontal center of the reference object.
Align the bottoms of selected objects to the bottom of the reference object. All the
Bottom objects move vertically so their bottoms are in line with the bottom of the reference
object.
To Grid Select or deselect the option of aligning objects to grid points.
Nudge the selection left. When the Snap to Grid option is not selected, all objects of
the selection move one pixel left. When the Snap to Grid option is selected, each
Left
object of the selection moves left to where its upper-left corner aligns to the nearest
grid point.
Nudge the selection right. When the Snap to Grid option is not selected, all objects of
the selection move one pixel right. When the Snap to Grid option is selected, each
Right
object of the selection moves right to where its upper-left corner aligns to the nearest
grid point.
Nudge
Nudge the selection up. When the Snap to Grid option is not selected, all objects of
the selection move one pixel up. When the Snap to Grid option is selected, each
Up
object of the selection moves up to where its upper-left corner aligns to the nearest
grid point.
Nudge the selection down. When the Snap to Grid option is not selected, all objects of
the selection move one pixel down. When the Snap to Grid option is selected, each
Down
object of the selection moves down to where its upper-left corner aligns to the nearest
grid point.

4
4.2.5. Making Objects Same Size
Make objects in the selection the same size as the reference object by first selecting the objects using Ctrl + Click, press
the icon on the toolbar or click the menu item listed below.
Width Make the selected objects have the same width as the reference object.
Make
Same Height Make the selected objects have the same height as the reference object.
Size
Both Make the selected objects have the same width and height as the reference object.
4.2.6. Arranging the Order of Objects


Layer
Start the order setting process for the objects of the active screen. For details,
Set Order
please see Section 4.2.6.1 Changing the Order of Objects
4.2.6.1. Changing the Order of Objects

The object order in the software is the order in which the selection cursor moves the input focus from one object to the
next within a screen. Usually the order proceeds from left to right and from top to bottom in a screen. In the model with
programmable keys such as 037-LSK, the Data Entry Object receives input focus in the specified order by clicking
direction keys. In a touch panel, you can use the function button to select a data entry object with the order number
previous or next to the current selection.
The object order is also the display order. If the screen contains overlapping objects, changing the order will change the
display sequence of the objects. The objects that come later in the order are always displayed on top of any overlapping
objects that precede them in the order.
■ Viewing order
To view the current order of all objects in the screen, click Set Order on the Edit menu.
■ Changing order
To change the order for all objects in the screen
1) On the Edit menu, click Set Order
A Number in the upper-left corner of each object shows its place in the current order
2) Set the order by clicking each object in the order that you want the objects to be displayed. The ordering number
starts from 1.
3) Click the blank field on the screen to exit Set Order mode

4
The following is an example of the object ordering.
If the screen is running on 037-LSK, click the down or right direction key to move the selection in 2-4-6-8-10-12-14-16-18
-20-29 sequence. If the screen is running on the touch panel, click the function button to move the selection in the
same sequence. The text objects with 1,3,5…order number are not data entry object, so they won’t receive the selection
and are not listed in the sequence.

4
4.3. Designing Object Appearance
There are four common components of object appearance. They are described in the following table:
Appearance Component Description

Shape The shape of an object can either be a graphical shape or a picture shape.
The following are examples of graphical shapes
The following are examples of picture shapes.
The software provides many graphical shapes for you to choose from. For details, see
Section 4.3.3 Selecting a Graphical Shape. The color or the pattern of a graphical shape is
dependent on the state of the associated object. You need to specify the color or pattern
settings of a graphical shape for each state of the associated object. For details, see
Section 4.3.1 Selecting a Color and Section 4.3.2 Selecting a Pattern.
If you want an object to have a picture shape, check the item Picture Shape in the General
Page of the object’s property dialog box. You can select a picture from the picture
database or import a picture from a library file for the shape of an object. Any picture with
the format of BMP, JPG, or WMF can be a picture shape. When a picture is used as a
shape, the shape is state independent, i.e. the same look appears for all (object) states. If
you want a picture shape to display the object state and/or show the touch action, you
need to select a picture group as the shape. For details of picture groups, please see
Section 2.2.3.2 Picture Groups
To know how to set a shape, see Section 4.3.4 Setting up the Shape of an Object.
Inner Label An inner label is a label inside the associated object. It has the same number of states as
the associated object. You need to specify the text settings and the picture settings of an
inner label for each (object) state. Inner labels are language dependent. You need to
specify the text of an inner label for each language as well. Note that not all objects can
have inner labels and some objects can have just text or a picture as their inner label.
To know how to set an inner label, see Section 4.3.5 Label Settings.
VFTA (Visual Feedback for A button or switch can give the operator one of the following visual feedbacks when it is
Touch Action) touched:
Visual Feedback Description
Sunken Shifts the inner label to the lower-right corner by one or two pixels.
Back Fills the area inside the border of the shape with the shape’s FG
Color.
Outline Outlines the object with the shape’s FG Color.
External Label An external label is a label outside of but still attached to the associated object. Unlike
inner labels, external labels are state independent. They have the same look for all
(object) states. However, external labels are language dependent. You need to set the
text of an external label for each language. External labels are touch insensitive. Touching
an external label will not activate the associated object. Note that not all objects can have
an external label.
To know how to set an external label, see Section 4.3.8 External Label Settings.

4
The following table shows the common appearance components that each object type can have:
Shape Inner Label
External
Object Types Graphical Picture VFTA
Text Picture Label
Shape Shape
Bit Button, Toggle Switch, Screen Button, Word
Button, Multi-state Switch, Radio Button Group ● ● ● ● ● ●
Function Button, Keypad Button, Page Selector ● ● ● ● ●
Step Button ● ● ● ● ●
Bit Lamp, Multi-state Lamp, ● ● ● ● ●
Message Display ● ● ●
Picture Display ● ● ●
Day-of-week Display ● ●
Meter ● ●
Slide Switch, Numeric Entry, Numeric Display,
Advanced Numeric Display, ASCII Character ● ●
Entry, ASCII Character Display, Bar Graph
Time Display, Date Display, Pie Graph, Line Chart,
Scatter Chart, Alarm Display, Historic Data
Display, Historic Trend Graph, Single Record Line ●
Chart, Operation Log Display, Recipe Selector,
Recipe Table, Sub-link Table, Static Text, Table
Animated Graphic ●
The orders of drawing the common appearance components are shown in the following table with examples:
Step Draw Example 1 Example 2 Description
1 Shape Described in Section 4.3.4

A picture group that supports A graphical shape named
the pressed look SW_0023
Picture of Inner
2 (None) Described in Section 4.3.5.2
label
Text of inner
3 Described in Section 4.3.5.1
label
4 VFTA (None) Back (FG Color is )
5 External label (None) Described in Section 4.3.8
Final Appearance
(When untouched)
Final Appearance
(When touched)

4
4.3.1. Selecting a Color
■ Color Icons
In a dialog box, a color icon is associated with a property that requires a color. It shows the color of the current selection
and you can click it to bring up the Color palette. With the Color palette, you can select a color for the associated property.
The following is a Color icon showing that the current selection is yellow.
■ Color Palette
With the Color palette, you can: 1) Select a color from a set of predefined colors, 2) Customize a set of user colors, and 3)
Select a color from a set of user colors.
Usually, you click a Color icon to bring up the Color palette. The following shows the pages of the Color palette.
On page 1, the yellow block is outlined to indicate that it is the current selection. To select a color, click on that color block.
To select a page, click on that page’s number tab. To cancel the operation click on any position other than the color blocks
and the number tabs. Page 1, 2, and 3 contain the predefined colors. Page 4 contains the user colors. To customize user
colors, click to bring up the Define Custom Color dialog box as shown below.

4
4.3.2. Selecting a Pattern
■ Pattern Icons
In a dialog box, a Pattern icon is associated with a property that requires a pattern. It shows the pattern of the current
selection and you can click it to bring up the Pattern palette. With the Pattern palette, you can select a pattern for the
associated property. The following is a Pattern icon showing that the current selection is the “big dashes”.
■ Pattern Palette
With the Pattern palette, you can select a pattern from a set of predefined patterns. Usually, you click a Pattern icon to
bring up the Pattern palette as shown below.
The “big dashes” block is outlined to indicate that it is the current selection. To select a pattern, click on that pattern block.
To cancel the operation, click on any position other than the pattern blocks.
4.3.3. Selecting a Graphical Shape

■ Shape Buttons
In an object’s property dialog box, you can click the shape button to bring up the Shape palette. With the Shape
palette, you can select a graphical shape as the shape of the associated object.
■ Shape Palette
With the Shape palette, you can select a graphical shape for an object. Usually, you click to bring up the Shape
palette. The Shape palette contains several pages of graphical shapes. To select a graphical shape, click on that graphical
shape. To select a page, click on that page’s number tab. To cancel the operation, click the close button to close the
Shape palette.
There are four sets of graphical shapes available for your applications. Each of them is suitable for certain kinds of objects.
The Shape palette shows the set that is suitable for the type of object concerned. The four sets of shapes are shown
below.

4
Graphical shapes for buttons and switches
Graphical shapes for data entry objects

4
Graphical shapes for data display objects
Graphical shapes for lamps

4
4.3.4. Setting up the Shape of an Object
This section describes how to set the shape of an object.
In order to give the operator visual feedback for the touch action, most of the graphical shapes designed for touch operable
objects can change their look when touched. The edge or border can look pressed or the outline can be shown with a
different color.
The following examples are the shape settings of a bit button:

Example 1 Example 2
The graphical shape SW_0031 is selected. The graphical shape is a picture.
The following table describes each property that may be required for the settings of an object’s shape.
Picture Shape Check this option if you want the object to have a picture shape instead of a graphical shape. This
option is available when the object can have a picture shape.
Click this button to specify the shape of the object. When Picture Shape is checked, the
Select/Import from Library dialog box will display. Otherwise, the Shape palette will display.
VFTA The type of VFTA (Visual Feedback for Touch Action).
Test VFTA Click this button to view the selected VFTA.
Border Color The border color of the graphical shape. Click the corresponding Color icon to specify the color.
Pattern The pattern that is used to fill the area inside the border of the graphical shape for the current
(object) state. To specify the pattern, click the corresponding Pattern icon and select a pattern from
the Pattern palette. This item is available when the area inside the graphical shape needs be
painted.
FG Color The color that is used to paint the black part of the pattern for the current (object) state. When the
solid white pattern is selected, this color is not used. When a picture shape is used, this color is used
for the outline mode with VFTA.
Example 1 Example 2
To specify the color, click the corresponding Color icon and select a color from the Color palette.
This item is available when the area inside the graphical shape needs be painted.
BG Color The color that is used to paint the white part of the pattern for the current object state. To specify the
color, click the corresponding Color icon and select a color from the Color palette. This item is
available when the area inside the graphical shape needs be painted.

4
4.3.5. Label Settings
This section describes how to set up the inner label for the following types of objects:
Bit Button, Toggle Switch, Screen Button, Function Button, Word Button, Keypad Button, and Bit Lamp.
The property sheets of the above mentioned objects provide you with the Label page to set up the inner label. If an object
only has one state, the Label page has the Text sub-page and the Picture sub-page for you to set up the text and the
picture of the inner label respectively. If an object has two states, the Label page has the following four sub-pages:
Sub-page For Setting

OFF Text Text of state 0 (Off)
OFF Picture Picture of state 0 (Off)
ON Text Text of state 1 (On)
ON Picture Picture of state 1 (On)
You can use the Label page to set the inner label of an object that can have at most two states.
The following is an example of the Label page.
The following table describes only the properties in

the Label page that are common to all its sub-pages.
The properties of each of its sub-pages are described
in the specific section about each sub-page.
The language that you are setting
Language
the text for.
The margin (in pixels) to the
Border Spacing border of the object’s shape for
both the text body and picture.
Use the text of Check this item so the inner label
the first always shows the text of the first
language for all language regardless of what the
other current language is.
languages
Click this tab to bring up the Text
Text tab
sub-page.
Click this tab to bring up the
Picture tab
Picture sub-page.
Click this tab to bring up the OFF
OFF Text tab
Text sub-page.
Click this tab to bring up the ON
ON Text tab
Text sub-page.
OFF Picture Click this tab to bring up the OFF
tab Picture sub-page.
Click this tab to bring up the ON
ON Picture tab
Picture sub-page.

4
4.3.5.1. Text Sub-page Settings
You can use the Text sub-page, OFF Text sub-page, and ON Text sub-page to set up the text of the inner label for each of
the corresponding states, as well as the current language. The language being set is specified by the Language item in the
Label page.
The following are examples of the Text pages:
Text sub-page ON Text sub-page
The following table describes each property in the Text sub-page, OFF Text sub-page, and ON Text sub-page.
Copy from Note Click this button to replace the current text by the text of Note in the General page.
Copy to ON State Click this button to use the current text to replace the text of ON state.
Copy to OFF Click this button to use the current text to replace the text of OFF state.
State
Font The font of the text. You can use the drop-down list to select a font.
Click to bring up the Font Templates dialog box and select a font for the text. You can
change the font templates before selecting a font in that dialog box.
Color The color of the text. To specify the color, click the corresponding Color icon and select a color
from the Color palette.
Blink Check this item so the text will blink. You have blink effects to choose from. Color switching
changes the color of the text from its original color to the color of the background. Text On/Off
displays and hides the text.
Transparent Check this item to make the background of the characters transparent.
BG Color The background color of the text.
Continued

4
Character The distance (in pixels) between two adjacent characters of the text.
Spacing
Position The position of the text body.
Shape BG Color The BG color of the object’s shape for the current state.
Copy Attributes to Click this button to use the current attributes to replace the text of ON state.
ON State
Copy Attributes to Click this button to use the current attributes to replace the text of OFF state.
OFF State
4.3.5.2. Picture Sub-page Settings

You can use the Picture sub-page, OFF Picture sub-page, and ON Picture sub-page to set up the picture of the inner label
for the corresponding states.
The following are examples of the Picture pages:
Picture sub-page ON Picture sub-page.

4
The following table describes each property in the Picture sub-page, OFF Picture sub-page, and ON Picture sub-page.
Name The name of the picture. You can use the drop-down list to select a picture from the picture database.
Click to select a picture file. After the selection, the picture of the selected file is imported and
saved in the picture database.
Click to bring up the Select/Import from Library dialog box. Select a picture from a picture library
file. After the selection, the selected picture is imported and saved in the picture database.
Copy to OFF
Click this button to use the current picture to replace the picture of OFF state.
State
Copy to ON
Click this button to use the current picture to replace the picture of ON state.
State
Transparent Check this item to make parts of the picture transparent. The transparent parts are pixels whose
colors are the same as the specified transparent color. This item is available when the picture is not a
black and white picture.
T. Color The transparent color.
FG Color The color to paint the black part of a black and white picture. This item is available when the picture is
a black and white picture.
BG Color The color to paint the white part of a black and white picture. This item is available when the picture is
a black and white picture.
Flip/Rotate Specifies the method to flip or rotate the picture before drawing it. There are 8 options:
Method Description
0° No rotation
90° & X Rotates the picture clockwise by 90 degrees and flips it over the
X Axis
90° & Y Rotates the picture clockwise by 90 degrees and flips it over the
Y Axis
Tone Check this item to tone the picture.

Toning Color The color to tone the picture.
Fit to Object Check this item so the picture can change its size automatically to fit inside the border of the object’s
shape.
Position
The position of the picture within the object.
Shape BG
The BG color of the object’s shape for the current state.
Color

4
4.3.6. Text Settings
This section describes how to set up the text of the inner label for the following types of objects:
Multi-state Switch, Radio Button Group, Step Button, Page Selector, Multi-state Lamp, Message Display, and
Day-of-week Display.
The property sheets of the above mentioned objects provide you with the Text page to set up the text of the inner label.
The following is an example of the Text page.
You can view the texts and the picture names of all
the states here. You can select a state from the list.
The text of the selected state becomes the current
text.
The text of the current state and

language. You can view and edit
the current text here.
The following table describes each property in the Text page.

Language The language that you are setting the text to.
Border Spacing The margin (in pixels) of the border for the text body to the object’s shape.
Use the text of the
Check this item so the inner label always shows the text of the first language regardless of
first language for all
what the current language is.
other languages
<State list> Lists all states and the corresponding texts. To view and modify the state attribute and its text,
click the row of that state.
Move Up Click this button to move the current text (and picture) up the list, and thus the associated
state number of the current text (and picture) is decreased by one.
Move Down Click this button to move the current text (and picture) down the list, and thus the associated
state number of the current text (and picture) is increased by one.
Continued

4
Copy to all states… Click this button to use the text of state 0 to replace the text of all other states.
Copy from state 0… Click this button to use the text of state 0 to replace the current text.
Font The font of the current text. You can use the drop-down list to select a font.
Click to bring up the Font Templates dialog box and select a font for the current text.
You can change the font templates before selecting a font from the dialog box.
Color The color of the current text. To specify the color, click the corresponding Color icon and
select a color from the Color palette.
Transparent Check this item to make the text’s background transparent.
BG Color The background color of the text.
Position
The position of the text body.
Blink Select blink effects to make the text blink. Color switching changes the color of the text from
its original color to the color of the background. Text On/Off displays and hides the text.
Shape BG Color The BG color of the object’s shape for the current state.
Text <Edit Box> /
The text for the selected state in current language.
<Combo Box>
/ Click to view and edit the text for the selected language in this edit box, or click to
select a text from dropdown text table that lists all the texts from Text Database. You can
change the text database before selecting a text.
Character Spacing The distance (in pixels) between two adjacent characters of the text.

4
4.3.7. Picture Settings
This section describes how to define the picture settings for the following types of objects:
Multi-state Switch, Radio Button Group, Step Button, Page Selector, Multi-state Lamp, Picture Display, and Animated
Graphic.
The property sheets of the above mentioned objects provide you the Picture page to define the picture settings of the
objects. The following is an example of the Picture page.
The following table describes each property in the Picture page.
Picture The name of the current picture. You can use the drop-down list to select a picture from the picture
database.
Click to select a picture from a file as the current picture. After the selection, the software imports
the picture of the selected file and saves the picture in the picture database.
Click to bring up the Select/Import from Library dialog box. Select a picture from a picture library
file as the current picture. After the selection, the software imports the selected picture from the
selected library and saves the picture in the picture database.
Continued

4
Transparent Check this item to make parts of the current picture transparent. The transparent parts are pixels
whose colors are identical to the specified transparent color. This item is available when the current
picture is not a black and white picture.
Transparent The transparent color.
Color
FG Color The color to paint the black part of a black and white picture. This item is available when the current
picture is a black and white picture.
BG Color The color to paint the white part of a black and white picture. This item is available when the current
picture is a black and white picture.
Flip/Rotate Specifies the method to flip or rotate the current picture before drawing it. There are 8 options:
Method Description
0° No rotation
Rotates the picture clockwise by 90 degrees and flips it over the X
90° & X
Axis
Rotates the picture clockwise by 90 degrees and flips it over the Y
90° & Y
Axis
Tone Check this item to tone the current picture.

Toning Color The color to tone the current picture.
Fit to Object Check this item so the current picture can change its size automatically to fit inside the border of the
object’s shape.
Position The position of the current picture within the object.
Shape BG The BG color of the object’s shape for the current state.
Color

4
4.3.8. External Label Settings
This section describes how to set up the external label for the following types of objects:
Bit Button, Toggle Switch, Screen Button, Slide Switch, Word Button, Multi-state Switch, Radio Button Group, Step
Button, Numeric Entry, Numeric Display, Advanced Numeric Display, ASCII String Entry, ASCII String Display, Bit
Lamp, Multi-state Lamp, Message Display, Picture Display, and Bar Graph.
You can use the External Label page of an object's property sheet to set up the external label of that object. The following
is an example of the External Label page.
The following table describes each property in the External Label page.
Plate Style Specifies the plate type of the external label. There are four plate types as shown
below:
Plate Type Example
Transparent,
Flat,
Outlined
Raised
Continued

4
Position Specifies the position of the external label relative to the object. There are four
positions as shown below:
Position Example
Top
Left
Right
Bottom
Color The border color of the plate. To specify the color, click the corresponding Color icon
Border
and select a color from the Color palette.
The color of the plate. To specify the color, click the corresponding Color icon and
Plate
The color of the text. To specify the color, click the corresponding Color icon and
Text
Language The language that you are setting the text to.
Font <Drop-down List> The font of the text for the current language
Click this button to bring up the Font Templates dialog box and select a font for the
text. You can change the font templates before selecting a font in that dialog box.
Text <Edit Box> /
The text for the current language.
<Combo Box>
/ Click to view and edit the text for the selected language in this edit box, or click
to select a text from dropdown text table that lists all the texts from Text
Database. You can change the text database before selecting a text.
Spacing Border The distance (in pixels) between the plate border and the text body.
Line The distance (in pixels) between two adjacent lines of the text.
Character The distance (in pixels) between two adjacent characters of the text.

4
4.4. Setting up Objects
4.4.1. States of Objects

When an object has multiple states, its appearance automatically has the same number of corresponding states. You need
to specify the settings of the shape and the inner label of an object for each state. Usually the state of an object is
determined by the value of the variable it monitors. An object that monitors a bit has state 0 (off) and state 1 (on). An object
that monitors a word or a double-word can have up to 256 states.
4.4.1.1. State Types

You need to specify the state type of an object so the object knows how to determine its state. The following table
describes each of the four state types.
State Type For How to decide the state
Bit Bit Variable The state is the value of the variable.
Example:
1)The state of $U1.3 is 0 when $U1.3 is 0 (off).
2)The state of WX3.f is 1 when WX3.f is 1 (on).
Value Word Variable, The state is the value of the variable. The valid states are from 0 to 255.
Double-word Variable Example:
1)The state of $U200 is 123 when $U200 is 123.
2)The state of WX20 is 0 when WX20 is 0.
3)The state of $N300 is invalid when $N300 is 999.
LSB Word Variable, The state is the number of the least significant bit of the variable’s value that is 1
Double-word Variable (on). For a word variable, the valid state are from 0 to 16 and state 16 means all
the bits are 0. For a double-word variable, the valid state are from 0 to 32 and
state 32 means all the bits are 0.
Example:
1)The state of $U200 is 1 when $U200 is 246H.
2)The state of WX20 is 19 when WX20 is 80000H.
3)The state of $N300 is 16 when $N300 is 0.
Custom Word Variable, When you configure an object with the Custom state type, you assign each valid
Double-word Variable state a unique number which is called a state value. The assigned state values
will be used to determine the state of the object. If the variable’s value is equal to
one of the state values, the corresponding state of the state value is the state of
the object. If the value is equal to none of the state values, the state is invalid.
Example:
An object monitors $U100 and its state type is Custom. There are three valid
states and you assigned 300, 200, and 100 to state 0, 1, and 2 respectively. The
state is 2 when $U100 is 100 and the state is 0 when $U100 is 300.

4
4.4.1.2. Setting the Custom States of an Object
In the General page of the object’s property dialog box, with the Custom state type selected, click the
button to bring up the Custom State Value dialog box as the example shown below.
You can assign a positive integer for each state in the dialog box. To edit the value, click the row of that state under the
value column.
You can use the Move Up button and the Move Down button to adjust the position of state values. To move up or move
down the state values, you need to make a selection first. To select a state, click the header column. To select multiple
rows, click the header column and use Ctrl+Click to add a row to the selection.

4
4.4.2. Operation Options of Objects
The following table explains operation options which can be added to an object to make it more informative, secure, and
useful.
Terminology Definition
Enabling and disabling the The touch operation can be enabled and disabled either by a specified bit or by the
touch operation current user level. You can choose to display the touch operation disabled sign on the
button when the touch operation is disabled.
If the touch operation is to be enabled by a bit, you need to specify that bit and the bit
value that enables the touch operation.
If the touch operation is to be enabled by the current user level, you need to specify the
lowest user level that is required to enable the touch operation.
Select and set this feature in the Advanced page of the Bit Button dialog box.
Requiring the minimum hold The touch operation will not be activated until the button is pressed and held down for
time the specified Minimum Hold Time.
Requiring the operator A confirmation dialog box is displayed when the button is activated for setting a bit. The
confirmation button will proceed to set that bit if the operator selects “Yes” to confirm the operation.
The touch operation will be cancelled if the operator selects “No” to reject the operation
or if the operator does not respond within the Maximum Waiting Time.
This feature is available for the following operations:

Set ON, Set OFF, Set ON Pulse, Set OFF Pulse, and Invert.
Notifying a bit of the touch The notification is performed after the touch operation is done. You need to specify the
operation bit to be notified and the bit value to be used for the notification.
Logging the touch operations The time and date when the touch operation occurs, the new value that is written to the
bit, and the predefined text can be recorded in the operation log with this feature.
Showing and hiding an object The visibility of an object can be controlled either by a specified bit or by the current
user level, i.e. an object can be shown and hidden dynamically by any of these two
methods.
If visibility is to be controlled by a bit, you need to specify that bit and the bit value that
shows the object.
If visibility is to be controlled by the current user level, you need to specify the lowest
user level that is required to show the visibility.
Note 1: When an object is invisible, the touch operation is automatically disabled.

Note 2: It is allowed to simply set an object as invisible. The touch operation is still
enabled with this setting.
Select and set this feature on the Visibility page of the object setting dialog box.

4
4.4.3. Address Settings
This chapter describes the terms, rules, and methods to address data.
4.4.3.1. Terminologies for Data Accessing

The following table explains variables, addresses and tags.
Internal memory The memory space in the target panel that can be accessed by the panel application. For
example, the user memory $U, the non-volatile memory $N, the system memory $S, and
the recipe memory $R are all parts of the internal memory.
Internal variable An address or a tag referring to an address of a space in the internal memory.
Internal bit variable An internal variable that refers to a bit in the internal memory.
Note: “Internal variable” instead of “internal bit variable” is used when referring to a bit if
there is no ambiguity.
Internal word variable An internal variable that refers to a word in the internal memory.
The variables can also be used to refer to a double-word, a block of bytes (byte array), a
block of words (word array), and a block of double-words (double-word array).
Note: “Internal variable” instead of “internal bit variable” is used when referring to a bit if
External memory The memory spaces or the collections of addressable devices in the controllers that can
be accessed by the panel application through communication links.
External variable An address or a tag referring to an address of a space in the external memory.
External bit variable An external variable that refers to a bit in the external memory.
Note: “External variable” instead of “external bit variable” is used when referring to a bit if
External word variable An external variable that refers to a word in the external memory.
The variables can also be used to refer to a double-word, a block of bytes (byte array), a
block of words (word array), and a block of double-words (double-word array) if the access
unit of the associated addresses is word. If the access unit is double-word, you can only
use the variable to refer to a double-word or a block of memory space with a length of a
multiple of 4 (bytes).
Note: “External variable” instead of “external bit variable” is used when referring to a bit if
Variable An internal variable or an external variable.
Bit variable An internal bit variable or an external bit variable.
Word variable An internal word variable or an external word variable.
Double-word variable An internal variable or an external variable that refers to a double-word.
Byte array variable An internal variable or an external variable that refers to a byte array.
Word array variable An internal variable or an external variable that refers to a word array.
Double-word array variable An internal variable or an external variable that refers to a double-word array.
Tag A name that stands for an address of the internal memory or the external memory. It also
specifies the data type and scan rate of the data in the memory location it refers to.

4
4.4.3.2. Address Input Keypad
With the address input keypad, you can enter an address easily. Usually, you click to bring up the address input
keypad as shown below.
Link Click the down arrow and select a link from the drop down list.
PLC Click the down arrow and select a value between 0 and 255 or
Address an indirect address between [$I0] and [$I15] as the PLC
Address. If an indirect address is used, the plc address can be
dynamically changed.
Location Click the down arrow and select an item from the drop down list
Type as the location type.
Address Specify the address.
Input
keypad Buttons Description
Clears all the texts in the address field.
Deletes all selected texts, if any, or the text

character to the left of the cursor in the address
field.
Cancels the address input and escapes the
dialog.
Checks and enters the address if valid.
Others Click to specify the address. Only available

when the Address field holds the input focus.
Click the help button to see how to specify word or bit devices
and their addresses for the specified link in the following
pop-up dialog.

4
4.4.3.3. Selecting Tags
To select a tag, you can click to bring up the Select Tag dialog box as shown below.
All the predefined word or bit tags for the

selected link are listed. To use a tag, you
can double click the tag you want or select a
tag and then click the OK button.
Tag group
Selected tag
The address for the selected tag
Note: All the listed tags and tag groups are created in the Tags Editor. To create a tag, please see Section 2.3 Working with
Tags.

4
4.4.4. Scale Settings
This section describes how to set up the scale for the following types of objects:
Slide Switch, Bar Graph, Circular Bar Graph, and Meter.
The following are examples of scales used in different kinds of objects.
Slide Switch Circular Bar Graph
Major
Marks ticks
Axis Bar Graph

Minor
ticks
You can use the Scale page in an object's property sheet to set up the scale of that object. The following is an example of
the Scale page of the bar Graph.

4
The following table describes each property in the Scale page.
Scale Check this item if you want the object to have a scale.
Position Specifies the position of the scale in the object. The position is relative to the part of the
object that displays the monitored variable. There are six positions shown below:
Position Example Position Example
Top Bottom
Left Right
Inner Outer
Color The color of the scale. To specify the color, click the corresponding Color icon and select a
Number of Major Ticks The number of major ticks. The minimum you can specify is two.
Number of Sub The number of divisions between two adjacent major ticks. The minimum you can specify is
Divisions one.
Axis Check this item if you want the scale to have an axis.
Marks Marks Check this option if you want the scale to have marks.
Dynamic Check this option if you want the minimum and maximum of the marks to be controlled by
Range the dynamic range parameter block of the associated object at runtime.
Minimum The minimum of the marks. It is a 32-bit integer.
Maximum The maximum of the marks. It is a 32-bit integer.
Fractional The number of fractional digits for the marks. For example, when the Maximum = 5000, the
Digits Total Digits = 4, and the Fractional Digits = 2, the mark for the Maximum will be 50.00.

4
4.4.5. Advanced Settings
This section describes how to define the advanced settings for the following types of objects:
Bit Button, Toggle Switch, Screen Button, Function Button, Slide Switch, Word Button, Multi-state Switch, Radio
Button Group, Step Button, Advanced Numeric Display, ASCII String Entry, and Recipe Selector.
You can use the Advanced page in an object's property sheet to define the advanced settings of that object.
The following are examples of the Advanced page for different objects:
For an advanced numeric display. For a bit button.
The following table describes each property in the Advanced page.
Touch Enabled by Bit Check this option so the touch operation of the numeric entry will be enabled and
Operation disabled by the specified bit.
Control Control Bit Specifies the bit that enables and disables the touch operation.
Enabling State Specifies the state (On or Off) that enables the touch operation.
Enabled by Check this item so the touch operation of the numeric entry will be enabled and
Enabling User
Level
Show Disabled Check this option so the touch operation disabled sign will be shown on the numeric
Sign entry when the touch operation is disabled.
Continued

4
Timeout Timeout Check this option so the data entry will be cancelled if the numeric keypad does not
receive any input within the specified time.
Timeout Time Specifies the maximum time that the numeric keypad will wait to receive a new input.
If there is no input within the specified time, the numeric keypad will be closed and
the data entry will be cancelled.
Notification Notification Check this option so the numeric entry will notify the specified bit after it finishes
outputting the entered value to the destination variable.
Signal Select one of the following signals for the notification:
Signal Description
Level Set the specified bit to the specified state.
Pulse Send a positive pulse to the specified bit.

Operator Operator Check this option if you want the operator to confirm what he/she enters for the
Confirmation Confirmation numeric entry. The Confirmation box will be displayed when a value is entered for
numeric entry. If the operator selects “Yes” in the Confirmation box, the numeric
entry will write the entered value to the specified variable. If the operator selects “No”
or if the operator does not respond within the specified time period (Maximum
Waiting Time), the numeric entry will cancel the data entry operation.
Maximum Specifies the maximum time that the numeric entry will wait for the operator’s
Waiting Time confirmation. The data entry will be cancelled if the operator does not respond within
this time.
Operation Operation Check this option so the following three items will be recorded in the operation log
Logging Logging when the numeric entry outputs the entered value.
There are three recorded items:
1) The time when the operation is performed
2) The entered value
3) The predefined operation message
Message Enter the operation message of the first language here.
Click this button to bring up the Operation Message dialog box that you can edit the
operation message for all the languages.
Minimum Hold Time Available when the object is a button or switch. The touch operation of the button will
not be activated until the button is pressed and held down for the specified time
period (Minimum Hold Time).

4
4.4.6. Visibility Settings
In the Visibility page of an object's property sheet, you can define how to show and hide the object. You can also modify
the position and size of an object with the Visibility page.
The following are examples of the Visibility page:
The option “Controlled by Bit” is checked The option “Controlled by User Level” is checked
The following table describes each property in the Visibility page.
Invisible Check this option so the object will always be invisible.
Note: The touch operation is still enabled with this setting.
Controlled Controlled by Bit Check this option so the object will be shown and hidden by the specified bit.
by Bit Control Bit Specifies the bit that will show or hide the object.
Visible State Specifies the state (On or Off) that makes the object visible.
Controlled Controlled by Check this option so the object will be shown and hidden by the current user level.
by User User Level
Level Lowest Visible Specifies the lowest user level that is required to show the object.
User Level
Dimension Left Specifies the X coordinate of the object’s upper-left corner on the screen.
Top Specifies the Y coordinate of the object’s upper-left corner on the screen.
Width Specifies the width (in pixels) of the object.
Height Specifies the height (in pixels) of the object.
Click this button to redraw the object with the new settings.

CHAPTER 5
B UTTONS AND
SWITCHES
5.1. Changing Bit State Using Bit Buttons ........................................................ 1

5.1.1. Basic Operations............................................................................................................ 1
5.1.2. Operation Options.......................................................................................................... 2
5.1.3. Settings .......................................................................................................................... 3
5.2. Toggling Bit State Using Toggle Switches................................................... 6
5.2.1. Settings .......................................................................................................................... 6
5.3. Changing Screens Using Screen Buttons.................................................... 9
5.3.3. Settings ........................................................................................................................ 10
5.4. Performing Built-in Function Using Function Buttons .......................... 14
5.4.1. Basic Operations.......................................................................................................... 14
5.4.2. Operation Options........................................................................................................ 17
5.4.3. Settings ........................................................................................................................ 18
5.5. Selecting Word Value Using Slide Switches ............................................. 21
5.5.3. Settings ........................................................................................................................ 22
5.6. Setting Word Value Using Word Buttons................................................. 25
5.6.3. Settings ........................................................................................................................ 26
-i-
5.7. Selecting Work Value Using Multi-state Switches................................... 28
5.7.3. Settings ........................................................................................................................ 30
5.8. Setting Word State Using Radio Button Groups ..................................... 33
5.8.3. Settings ........................................................................................................................ 34
5.9. Customizing the Keypad Using Keypad Buttons .................................... 36
5.9.2. Settings ........................................................................................................................ 36
5.9.4. Creating your own keypads ......................................................................................... 38
5.10. Scrolling Object Content Using Scroll Button Groups........................... 40
5.10.3. Settings ........................................................................................................................ 41
5.11. Scrolling Object Content Using Scroll Bars............................................. 43
5.11.3. Settings ........................................................................................................................ 44
5.12. Stepping Through Word State Using Step Buttons ................................. 46
5.12.3. Settings ........................................................................................................................ 47
5.13. Displaying Window Screen as Information Page Using Page Selectors 50
5.13.2. Settings ........................................................................................................................ 50
- ii -
45
5.1. Changing Bit State Using Bit Buttons
You can touch a bit button to change the state of the specified bit.
5.1.1. Basic Operations

A bit button can be configured to perform the following operations:
Operation Description
Set ON Sets the specified bit to On when the button is pressed.
Set OFF Sets the specified bit to Off when the button is pressed.
Sets the specified bit to On when the button is pressed and then sets the bit to Off to generate a
Set ON Pulse
positive pulse with the specified pulse width.
Sets the specified bit to Off when the button is pressed and then sets the bit to On to generate a
Set OFF Pulse
negative pulse with the specified pulse width.
Sets the specified bit to On when the button is pressed and sets the bit to Off when the button is
released.
Momentary ON Note: Pressing and releasing a momentary button quickly might generate a pulse that is too short
to be detected by the controller. To avoid this problem, specify a sufficient minimum pulse width for
the operation; so the setting of the bit to Off is delayed if necessary to generate a pulse that is
always detectable.
Sets the specified bit to Off when the button is pressed and sets the bit to On when the button is
Momentary OFF released.
Note: See the note above.
Invert Inverts the state of the specified bit when the button is pressed.
Note: You can configure a bit button to operate a bit of a word or a bit of a double-word. In these instances, you need to
specify the number of the bit to be operated.
5-1 CHAPTER 5 BUTTONS AND SWITCHES

5
5.1.2. Operation Options
The following operation options can be selected for a bit button to make it more informative, secure, and useful. You need
to select and set those options in the Bit Button property sheet.
Option Description
Monitor The bit button can be configured to monitor a bit. When this option is selected, the state of the
button is controlled by the monitored bit. With the monitored bit, you can control the color and label
of the bit button.
ON Macro, OFF An ON Macro is a macro that is run when the associated button is activated to set a bit to 1 (On).
Macro An OFF Macro, on the contrary, is a macro that is run when the associated button is activated to set
a bit to 0 (Off). The following table shows the macros that each bit button operation can support.
Operation ON Macro OFF Macro

Set ON ●
Set OFF ●
Set ON Pulse ●
Set OFF Pulse ●
Momentary ON ● ●
Momentary OFF ● ●
Invert
Select these options in the General Page. Specify and edit the ON macro in the ON Macro page.
Specify and edit the OFF macro in the OFF Macro page.
Note: When an ON macro or OFF macro is specified, the associated bit setting operation is not
performed until the macro is completely executed. Therefore, it is important to keep ON and OFF
macros as short as possible so as not to delay the bit setting operation.
Touch Operation The touch operation can be enabled or disabled either by a specified bit or by the current user level.
Control Select and set this option in the Advanced page.
Minimum Hold The touch operation of the button will not be activated until the button is pressed and held down for
Time the specified time period (Minimum Hold Time). Set this option in the Advanced page.
Operator This option is available for the following bit button operations:
Confirmation Set ON, Set OFF, Set ON Pulse, Set OFF Pulse, and Invert.
The Confirmation box will display when the button is touched. If the operator selects “Yes” in the
Confirmation box, the button will proceed to perform its operation. If the operator selects “No” or the
operator does not respond within the specified time period (Maximum Waiting Time), the button will
stop performing its operation.
Select and set this option in the Advanced page.
Notification The button can be configured to notify a bit upon completion of the bit setting operation when the
button is pressed. Select and set this option in the Advanced page.
Operation Each touch operation of the button can be recorded in the operation log. Select and set this option
Logging in the Advanced page.
Invisible The button can be invisible and still touch operable. Select this option in the Visibility page.
Visibility Control The button can be shown or hidden either by a specified bit or by the current user level. Select and
set this option in the Visibility page.
CHAPTER 5 BUTTONS AND SWITCHES 5-2

45
5.1.3. Settings
You can complete all the settings of a bit button in the Bit Button property sheet. This sheet contains the following seven
pages. Some of the pages appear only when they are needed.
■ General
■ Label
■ Advanced
■ Visibility
■ External Label
■ On Macro
■ OFF Macro

5
This section describes how to define the general settings for the bit buttons in the General page of the Bit Button property
sheet. The following is an example of the General page.
ID The object’s identifier. It is generated when the object is created. The identifier is unique within
the screen where the object is located. The format of the IDs for the bit buttons is BBnnnn.
Note You can type a note for the bit button.
Shape settings For details about the following properties, see Section 4.3.4 Setting up the Shape of an Object.
Picture Shape, , VFTA, , Border Color, Pattern, FG Color, BG Color
External Label Check this option if you want the bit button to have an external label. Set up the external label in
the External Label page.
Click this button to change the object state to 1 (On) so you can view and set the object
appearance for state 1 (On).
Click this button to change the object state to 0 (Off) so you can view and set the object
appearance for state 0 (Off).
Continued

45
Operation Select the operation for the bit button. There are 7 choices: Set ON, Set OFF, Set ON Pulse,
Set OFF Pulse, Momentary ON, Momentary OFF, and Invert.
For details, see Section 5.1.1 Basic Operations
Address Type Specifies the type of variable in the Write Address field. The bit buttons support the following
three variable types:
Variable Type Description
Bit The variable is a bit variable.
Word The variable is a word variable. You need to specify which bit of the
word variable is to be operated. Specify the bit number (0~15) in the
Bit Number field.
Double-word The variable is a double-word variable. You need to specify which bit
of the double-word variable is to be operated. Specify the bit number
(0~31) in the Bit Number field.
Write Write Specifies the bit variable to be operated when the Address Type is Bit.
Address Address Specifies the word variable that contains the bit to be operated when the Address Type is
Word.
Specifies the double-word variable that contains the bit to be operated when the Address
Type is Double-word.
Write Address field.
Click this icon to bring up the Select Tag dialog box and select the desired tag for the Write
Address field.
Bit Number Specifies which bit of the variable specified in the Write Address field is to be operated. The
field is available only when the address type is Word and Double Word.
Minimum Pulse Width The minimum width of the pulse that the Momentary ON and Momentary OFF operations
must generate. There are six choices available: 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.4, and 0.5 second.
Pulse Width The width of the pulse generated by the Set ON Pulse and Set OFF Pulse operations. There
are six choices available: 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.4, and 0.5 second.
Monitor Check this option if you want the bit button to monitor a specified bit and display its state.
Monitor Address Specifies that the Monitor Address is identical to the Write Address. With this item checked,
identical to Write you don’t need to specify the Monitor Address again. This item is available when the Monitor
Address option is checked.
Monitor Monitor Specifies the bit variable to be monitored when the Address Type is Bit.
Address Address Specifies the word variable that contains the bit to be monitored when the Address Type is
Word.
Specifies the double-word variable that contains the bit to be monitored when the Address
Monitor Address field.
Click this icon to bring up the Select Tag dialog box and select the desired tag for the
Monitored Specifies which bit of the variable specified in the Monitor Address field is to be operated.
Bit Number The field is available only when the address type is Word and Double Word.
ON Macro Check this option if you want the button to have an ON macro. Specify and edit the ON
macro in the ON Macro page. This option is available when the bit button operation is Set
ON, Set ON Pulse, Momentary ON, or Momentary OFF.
OFF Macro Check this option if you want the button to have an OFF macro. Specify and edit the OFF
macro in the OFF Macro page. This option is available when the bit button operation is Set
OFF, Set OFF Pulse, Momentary ON, or Momentary OFF.
Key The hard key that is used to operate the bit button. This item is available only when the
target panel has hard keys.

5
5.2. Toggling Bit State Using Toggle Switches
You can touch a toggle switch to toggle the state of the specified bit.
The difference between a toggle switch and a bit button performing the Invert operation is described below:
1) A toggle switch performs the toggle operation by writing the inverse state of the monitored bit to the destination bit.
2) A bit button performs the Invert operation by inverting the destination bit directly, regardless of the monitored bit.
5.2.1. Settings
You can complete all the settings of a toggle switch in the Toggle Switch property sheet. This sheet contains the following
seven pages. Some of the pages appear only when they are needed.
■ General
■ Label
■ Advanced
■ Visibility
■ External Label
■ On Macro
■ OFF Macro

45
This section describes how to define the general settings for a toggle switch.
The above is an example of the General page of the Toggle Switch property sheet.
The object’s identifier. It is generated when the object is created. The identifier is unique within the
ID
screen where the object is located. The format of the IDs for toggle switches is TSnnnn.
For details about the following properties, see Section 4.3.4 Setting up the Shape of an Object..
Shape settings
Check this option if you want the object to have an external label. Set up the external label in the
External Label
External Label page.
Continued

5
Click this button to change the object state to 1 (On) so you can view and set the
object appearance for state 1 (On).
Click this button to change the object state to 0 (Off) so you can view and set the
object appearance for state 0 (Off).
Write Address Specifies the bit variable to be operated.
Click this icon to bring up the Address Input Keypad and specify a bit address for the
Write
Write Address field.
Address
Click this icon to bring up the Select Tag dialog box and select a bit tag for the Write
Address field.
Specifies that the Monitor Address is identical to the Write Address. With this item
Monitor Address identical to
checked, you don’t need to specify the Monitor Address again. This item is available
Write Address
when the Monitor option is checked.
Monitor Address Specifies the bit variable to be monitored.
Click this icon to bring up the Address Input Keypad and specify a bit address for the
Monitor
Address
Click this icon to bring up the Select Tag dialog box and select a bit tag for the Monitor
Address field.
Check this option if you want the button to have an ON macro. Specify and edit the
ON Macro
ON macro in the ON Macro page.
Check this option if you want the button to have an OFF macro. Specify and edit the
OFF Macro
OFF macro in the OFF Macro page.
The hard key that is used to operate the object. This item is available only when the
Key

45
5.3. Changing Screens Using Screen Buttons
You can touch a screen button to open or close a screen.

A screen button can be configured to perform one of the following screen switching operations:
Open Screen Opens the specified screen.
Previous Screen Closes the current main screen and opens the previous main screen.
Note: The panel can display many window screens but only one normal screen at a time, so
a normal screen is also called a main screen. The panel can remember up to 32 previously
opened main screens.
Close & Open Screen Closes the window screen where the screen button is located and opens the specified
screen.
Close Screen Closes the window screen where the screen button is located.

The following operation options can be selected for a screen button to make it more informative, secure, and useful. You
need to select and set these options in the Screen Button property sheet.
Options Description
Change User Level The button can be configured to change the current user level.
The button can be configured to acknowledge the associated alarm on the screen where it is
Acknowledge Alarm located. You can configure an alarm to display an (alarm) screen. The alarm is then the
screen’s associated alarm.
Indicate Screen The button can be configured to indicate that a specified screen is opened. The indication is
Already Opened done by exchanging the button’s FG color with its text color.
You can specify a macro that will run when the screen button is activated to perform its
operation. Select this option in the General page. Specify and edit the macro in the Macro
page.
Macro
Note: The screen switching operation will not be performed until the macro is completely
executed. Therefore, it is important to keep the macro as short as possible so as not to delay
the operation.
Touch Operation The touch operation can be enabled or disabled either by a specified bit or by the current user
Control level. Select and set this option in the Advanced page.
The touch operation of the button will not be activated until the button is pressed and held
Minimum Hold Time down for the specified time period (Minimum Hold Time). Select and set this option in the
Advanced page.
The screen button can be configured to notify a bit of the completion of the screen switching
Notification
operation. Select and set this option in the Advanced page.
Each touch operation of the button can be recorded in the operation log. Select and set this
Operation Logging
option in the Advanced page.
The button can be shown or hidden either by a specified bit or by the current user level. Select
Visibility Control
and set this option in the Visibility page.

5
5.3.3. Settings
You can complete all the settings of a screen button in the Screen Button property sheet. This sheet contains the following
six pages. Some of the pages appear only when they are needed.
■ General
■ Label
■ Advanced
■ Visibility
■ External Label
■ Macro

45
This section describes how to define the general settings for a screen button.
The above is an example of the General page of the Screen Button dialog box.

5
The object’s identifier. It is generated when the object is created. The identifier is unique
ID within the screen where the object is located. The format of the IDs for screen buttons is
SBnnnn.
For details about the following properties, see Section 4.3.4 Setting up the Shape of an
Shape settings Object. Picture Shape, , VFTA, , Border Color, Pattern, FG Color,
BG Color
Check this option if you want the object to have an external label. Set up the external label
External Label
in the External Label page.
Specifies the operation that you want the screen button to perform. There are four choices:
Operation Open Screen, Previous Screen, Close and Open Screen, and Close Screen. For details,
see Section 5.3.1 Basic Operations.
Screen Specifies the screen to be opened.
<Check
Check this option if you want the button to change the current user level.
Box>
Change
User Level New
User The new user level to replace the current user level.
Level
Check this option if you want the button to acknowledge the associated alarm of the screen
Acknowledge Alarm where the button is located. You can configure an alarm to display an (alarm) screen. The
alarm is then the screen’s associated alarm.
Indicate Screen Already
Check this option if you want the button to indicate the specified screen is already open.
Opened
Check this option if you want the button to have a macro. Specify and edit the macro in the
Macro
Macro page.
Button
Specifies that the touch operation is activated when the button is pushed.
Down
Activation
Button
Specifies that the touch operation is activated when the button is released.
Up
The hard key that is used to operate the object. This item is available only when the target panel has
Key
hard keys.
Continued

45
Menu Select one of the following 6 positions for the specified menu screen to be displayed. This field will be
Screen displayed only when the specified screen is a menu screen.
Position Position Description
Screen The menu screen slides into view
Left Side horizontally from the left side of the screen.
Screen The menu screen slides into view

Right Side horizontally from the right side of the screen.
Button Left The menu screen appears on the left side of

Side & the button and slides downward into view.
Downward
Button Left The menu screen appears on the left side of

Side & the button and slides upward into view.
Upward
Button The menu screen appears on the right side

Right Side of the button and slides downward into view.
&
Downward
Button The menu screen appears on the right side

Right Side of the button and slides upward into view.
& Upward

5
5.4. Performing Built-in Function Using Function Buttons
You can touch a function button to perform the specified built-in function provided by the target panel.

Category Operation Description
Setting up Increase Increases either the brightness or the contrast of the display depending on the
Panel Brightness/Contrast target panel. Not all target panels support this operation. Check the hardware
manual for details.
Decrease Decreases either the brightness or the contrast of the display depending on
Brightness/Contrast the target panel. Not all target panels support this operation. Check the
hardware manual for details.
Save Saves the setting of either the brightness or the contrast of the display
Brightness/Contrast depending on the target panel. Not all target panels support this operation.
Check the hardware manual for details.
Enter Panel Setup Exits the application and enters the panel setup mode.
Mode
End Transparent Ends the transparent communication.
Communication
Show Real Time Displays the settings of the Real Time Clock so you can change the settings.
Clock
Turn Backlight Off Turns off the backlight of the display. To turn on the backlight, touch the
screen. Not all target panels support this operation. Check the hardware
manual for details.
Setting up Log In Displays the password keypad so you can enter a password to change the
Application current user level.
Log Out Changes the current user level to 0.
Show Password Displays the password table so you can change the passwords. The password
Table table only lists the passwords whose user level is equal to or less than the
current user level.
Acknowledge Alarm Acknowledges the associated alarm of the screen that the button is located.
Change Language Change the current language to the specified language.
Show File Selection Displays the File Selection box for the specified purpose. The following table
Box lists the five purposes:
Purpose Description
Open to Open the specified file for reading. The file must exist.*
Read
Open/create Open the specified file for reading. A new file is created
to Write when the specified file does not exist. If the specified file
exists, it will be over written.*
Open/create Open the specified file for appending data. A new file is
to Append created when the specified file does not exist.*
Delete Delete the specified file.
Rename Rename the specified file.
You can specify the File Extension Name that will limit the File Selection Box
to list only the files of the specified type. The specified extension name can
only have ASCII characters and at most 3 characters.
Note: You need to specify the File I/O Control Block Address, an internal
variable that receives the result of the file open operation. You can specify a
macro that will run when the specified file is opened successfully. It is
important to close an opened file with the macro command CLOSE_FILE
when you finish the operation, or the file data will be lost.
Continued

45
Saving Data Save Recipe Data Saves the data of the specified recipe block in a text file. The file can be read
to File (.txt file) by any text editor, Microsoft Excel, and the target panel.
Save Recipe Data Saves the data of the specified recipe block in a file using the PRD format.
(.prd file) The file can be read by the RecipeEditor and the target panel.
Save Logged Data Saves the data collected by the specified data logger in a text file. The file
(.txt file) can be read by any text editor, Microsoft Excel, and the target panel.
Save Logged Data Saves the data collected by the specified data logger in an LDF file. The file
(.ldf file) can be read by the target panel only.
Save Alarm History Saves the alarm history in a text file. The file can be read by any text editor,
(.txt file) Microsoft Excel, and the target panel.
Save Alarm Counts Saves the alarm counts in a text file. The file can be read by any text editor,
(.txt file) Microsoft Excel, and the target panel.
Save Operation Saves the operation history in a text file. The file can be read by any text
History (.txt file) editor, Microsoft Excel, and the target panel.
Save Line Chart Data Saves the data collected by the specified line chart in a text file. The file can
(.txt file) be read by any text editor, Microsoft Excel, and the target panel.
Save Scatter Chart Saves the data collected by the specified scatter chart in a text file. The file
Data (.txt file) can be read by any text editor, Microsoft Excel, and the target panel.
Save Application Saves the application configuration data that was downloaded to the target
Configuration Data panel previously in a PLF file. The file can be used by the software.
(.plf file)
Save System and Saves the system programs and the application runtime data in a PRP file.
Application to File The file can be used by the software and compatible target panels.
(.prp file)
Loading Load Recipe Data Loads the data of the specified recipe block from a text file.
Data from (.txt file)
File Load Recipe Data Loads the data of the specified recipe block from a PRD file.
(.prd file)
Load Logged Data Loads the data of the specified data logger from a LDF file.
(.ldf file)
Load Line Chart Data Loads the data of the specified line chart from a text file.
(.txt file)
Load Scatter Chart Loads the data of the specified scatter chart from a text file.
Data (.txt file)
Transferring Write Recipe to Writes the current recipe, which is determined by the current recipe block and
Data Controller the current recipe number, to the specified controller. The controller and the
destination address are specified in the settings of the recipe block.
Read Recipe from Updates the current recipe, which is determined by the current recipe block
Controller and the current recipe number, by reading a recipe from the specified
controller. The controller and the source address are specified in the settings
of the recipe block.
Save Recipe Data to Saves the data of the specified recipe block to the target panel’s flash ROM.
Flash ROM The option “Need space in flash ROM to save backup” must be selected in
the settings of the recipe block to make this operation available.
Load Recipe Data Loads the data of the specified recipe block from the target panel’s flash
from Flash ROM ROM. The option “Need space in flash ROM to save backup” must be
selected in the settings of the recipe block to make this operation available.
Continued

5
Printing Print Screen Prints the screen where the button is located. The printed area is specified in
Screen the settings of the screen properties.
Print Screen to File Prints the screen where the button is located to a file with the BMP format of
(256-color .bmp) 256 colors. The printed area is specified in the settings of the screen
properties.
Print Screen to File Prints the screen where the button is located to a file with the BMP format of
(64K-color .bmp) 64K colors. The printed area is specified in the settings of the screen
properties.
Print Screen to File Prints the screen where the button is located to a file with the BMP format.
(True-color .bmp) The color resolution is the same as the target panel’s display. The printed
area is specified in the settings of the screen properties.
Print Screen to File Prints the screen where the button is located to a file with the JPG format.
(.jpg) The printed area is specified in the settings of the screen properties.
Clearing Clear Logged Data Clears the data of the specified data logger.
Data Clear Logged Data Clears the data of all the data loggers.
(All)
Clear Alarm History Clears the alarm history.
Clear Alarm Counts Resets the alarm counts to 0.
Clear Operation Clears the operation history.
History
Running Restart Application Restarts the application.
Application Update System and Updates the system programs and the application runtime data from a PRP
Application From File file. The original system programs and the application runtime data are
(.prp) replaced by the new ones.
Boot from File (.prp) Loads-and-runs the system programs and the application runtime data from
a PRP file. The original system programs and runtime data remain intact.
The loaded system programs and the runtime data will be lost after power off.
Multimedia Play Sound Plays the specified sound file.
Stop Playing Sound Stops playing the current sound file
Take Picture Takes a picture with the specified USB camera.
Adjusting Zoom In Makes the viewing range of the associated object half the size so the object
Viewing shows less content but with more detail.
Range Zoom Out Makes the viewing range of the associated object twice the size so the object
shows more content but with less detail.
Restore to Normal Restores the viewing range to the original setting.
View
Scrolling Scroll Left Scrolls the content displayed by the associated object to the left.
Content Scroll Right Scrolls the content displayed by the associated object to the right.
Scroll Up Scrolls the content displayed by the associated object to the top.
Scroll Down Scrolls the content displayed by the associated object to the bottom.
Scroll Page Left Scrolls the content displayed by the associated object to the left by a page.
Scroll Page Right Scrolls the content displayed by the associated object to the right by a page.
Scroll Page Up Scrolls the content displayed by the associated object to the top by a page.
Scroll Page Down Scrolls the content displayed by the associated object to the bottom by a
page.
Scroll to Left End Scrolls the content displayed by the associated object to the left end.
Scroll to Right End Scrolls the content displayed by the associated object to the right end.
Scroll to Bottom End Scrolls the content displayed by the associated object to the bottom end.
Scroll to Top End Scrolls the content displayed by the associated object to the top end.
Continued

45
Changing Select Next Data Selects the next data entry object on the screen where the button is on.
Data Entry Object
Select Previous Data Selects the previous data entry object on the screen where the button is on.
Entry Object
Increase Value by Activates the selected data entry object to set its specified variable to the
One value obtained by increasing the value of its monitored variable by one.
The operation is available for multi-state buttons whose property “Activation”
is set to “Indirect”. The operation is available for numeric entries whose
property “Data Entry” is set to “On-screen Keypad and/or Function Keys”.
Decrease Value by Activates the selected data entry object to set its specified variable to the
One value obtained by decreasing the value of its monitored variable by one.
The operation is available for multi-state buttons whose property “Activation”
is set to “Indirect”. The operation is available for numeric entries whose
property “Data Entry” is set to “On-screen Keypad and/or Function Keys”.

The following operation options can be added to a function button to make it more informative, secure, and useful. You
need to select and set these options in the Function Button property sheet.
Options Description
Macro You can specify a macro that will be run when a file is successfully opened. Select this
option in the General page. Specify and edit the macro in the Macro page.
Touch Operation Control The touch operation can be enabled and disabled either by a specified bit or by the current
user level. Select and set this option in the Advanced page.
Minimum Hold Time The touch operation of the button will not be activated until the button is pressed and held
down for the specified time period (Minimum Hold Time). Set this option in the Advanced
page.
Operator Confirmation The Confirmation box will be displayed when the button is touched. If the operator selects
“Yes” in the Confirmation box, the button will proceed to perform its operation. If the
operator selects “No” or the operator does not respond within the specified time period
(Maximum Waiting Time), the button will stop performing its operation.
Notification The button can be configured to notify a bit when the specified operation is performed
successfully. Select and set this option in the Advanced page.
Operation Logging Each touch operation of the button can be recorded in the operation log. Select and set this
Visibility Control The button can be shown or hidden either by a specified bit or by the current user level.
Select and set this option in the Visibility page.

5
5.4.3. Settings
You can complete all the settings of a function button in the Function Button property sheet. This sheet contains the
following five pages. Some of the pages appear only when they are needed.
■ General
■ Label
■ Advanced
■ Visibility
■ Macro

45
This section describes how to define the general settings for a function button.
The above is an example of the General page of the Function Button dialog box.
ID The object’s identifier. It is generated when the object is created. The identifier is
unique within the screen where the object is located. The format of the ID’s for
function buttons is FBnnnn.
Shape settings For details about the following properties, see Section 4.3.4 Setting up the Shape
of an Object. Picture Shape, , VFTA, , Border Color,
Pattern, FG Color, BG Color
Continued

5
External Label Check this option if you want the object to have an external label. Set up the external
label in the External Label page.
Operation Specifies the operation that you want the function button to perform. About the
available operations, see Section 5.4.1 Basic Operation.
ID, Associated The ID of the object associated with the selected operation.
Purpose, Object ID
or The ID of the data logger associated with the selected operation.
Data Logger
Language
Line Chart The ID of the line chart associated with the selected operation.
Recipe Block The ID of the recipe block associated with the selected operation.
Scatter Chart The ID of the scatter chart associated with the selected operation.
Purpose The purpose for the Show File Selection Box operation.
Language The language for the Change Language operation.
Sound The ID of the sound for the Play Sound operation.
Camera ID & The camera ID and the picture file type for the Take Picture operation.
Picture Type
Filename, Default The default filename for the selected operation. The name can only have ASCII
Extension Filename characters and at most 80 characters.
name, File Extension The file extension name for the selected operation. The name can only have ASCII
Method Name characters and at most 3 characters.
Method The method for the Play Sound operation.
Filename Selectable Check this item so the File Selection box will display for the operator to select a file.
The selected file will be used for the selected operation.
File I/O Specifies the internal variable to receive the result of the file open operation. The
Control memory block requires 44 words.
Block Word Description
Address
0,1 A 32-bit word to store the handle of an opened file
<Edit Box>
2,3 A 32-bit word to store the size (in byte) of the file
4-43 A byte array to store the filename and the extension name of the opened
file; the maximum length of the filename and the extension name is 80
characters
Click this icon to bring up the Address Input Keypad and specify an internal address
for this property.
Click this icon to bring up the Select Tag dialog box and select an internal tag for this
property.
Check this option if you want the button to have a macro. Specify and edit the macro in
Macro
the Macro page.
The hard key that is used to operate the object. This item is available only when the
Key

45
5.5. Selecting Word Value Using Slide Switches
You can touch the knob of a slide switch and move the knob to select a desired value. The selected value is written to the
specified variable when you release the knob.
Selected Value
Knob
Scale
The above are two examples of slide switches. The right one shows a slide switch whose knob is being touched.
You specify the variable to be controlled, the minimum of the variable, and the maximum of the variable for a slide switch.
The variable is monitored, and its value combined with the specified minimum and maximum determines the knob position
of the slide switch. You can touch and move the knob to select a desired value. The selected value is shown when the knob
is being held. When you release the knob, the selected value is written to the specified variable.
You can choose one of the following four directions for a slide switch:
Direction Description
Upward The knob can move vertically. The knob is at the top end when the variable value is equal to or greater
than the specified maximum. The knob is at the bottom end when the variable value is equal to or less
than the specified minimum. When the variable value is between the maximum and minimum, the knob is
at a proportional position between the top end and the bottom end.
Downward The knob can move vertically. The knob is at the bottom end when the variable value is equal to or
greater than the specified maximum. The knob is at the top end when the variable value is equal to or
less than the specified minimum. When the variable value is between the maximum and minimum, the
knob is at a proportional position between the bottom end and the top end.
Leftward The knob can move horizontally. The knob is at the left end when the variable value is equal to or greater
than the specified maximum. The knob is at the right end when the variable value is equal to or less than
the specified minimum. When the variable value is between the maximum and minimum, the knob is at a
proportional position between the left end and the right end.
Rightward The knob can move horizontally. The knob is at the right end when the variable value is equal to or
greater than the specified maximum. The knob is at the left end when the variable value is equal to or
less than the specified minimum. When the variable value is between the maximum and minimum, the
knob is at a proportional position between the right end and the left end.

5
The following operation options can be added to a slide switch to make it more informative, secure, and useful. You need to
select and set these options in the Slide Switch dialog box.
Options Description
Scale The switch can have a scale. Select and set this option in the Scale page.
Touch Operation The touch operation can be enabled and disabled either by a specified bit or by the current
Control user level. Select and set this option in the Advanced page.
Notification The switch can be configured to notify a bit when a change to the specified variable is
performed. Select and set this option in the Advanced page.
Operation Logging Each change to the specified variable can be recorded in the operation log. Select and set
this option in the Advanced page.
Visibility Control The switch can be shown or hidden either by a specified bit or by the current user level.
5.5.3. Settings
You can complete all the settings of a slide switch in the Slide Switch dialog box. This dialog box contains the following five
■ General
■ Scale
■ Advanced
■ Visibility
■ External Label

45
This section describes how to define the general settings for a slide switch.
The above is an example of the General page of the Slide Switch dialog box.
ID The object’s identifier. It is generated when the object is created. The identifier is unique
within the screen where the object is located. The format of the IDs for slide switches is
SWnnnn.
External Label Check this option if you want the object to have an external label. Set up the external
Direction Specifies the direction of the slide switch. For details, see 5.5.1 Basic Operation.
Data Type The data type of the variable to be controlled by the object.
Write Write Address Specifies the variable to be controlled by the object.
Address Click this icon to bring up the Address Input Keypad and specify an address for this field.
Click this icon to bring up the Select Tag dialog box and select a tag for this field.
Continued

5
Dynamic Dynamic Range Check this option so the minimum and maximum of the variable will be specified at
Range runtime. When this option is selected, the minimum and maximum of the marks for the
scale of the slide switch can be specified at runtime as well. The data that specifies the
above two ranges should be set and arranged correctly in a memory block called the
dynamic range parameter block. You need to specify the dynamic range parameter
block for the slide switch in the Dynamic Range Parameter Block field.
Dynamic Range Specifies the variable that stores the dynamic range parameter block for the slide
Parameter switch when Dynamic Range is selected.
Block
The following table shows the data arrangement of the parameter block when the data
type is 16-bit and the scale of the slide switch is not dynamic.
Word Parameter
0 The minimum of the variable
1 The maximum of the variable
type is 16-bit and the scale of the slide switch is dynamic.
Word Parameter
0 The minimum of the variable
1 The maximum of the variable
2, 3 The minimum of the mark for the scale; 32-bit integer number
4, 5 The maximum of the mark for the scale; 32-bit integer number
type is 32-bit and the scale of the slide switch is not dynamic.
Word Parameter
0, 1 The minimum of the variable
2, 3 The maximum of the variable
type is 32-bit and the scale of the slide switch is dynamic.
Word Parameter
0, 1 The minimum of the variable
2, 3 The maximum of the variable
Minimum The minimum of the variable to be controlled.

Maximum The maximum of the variable to be controlled.
Knob Border Color The border color of the knob. To specify the color, click the corresponding Color icon
and select a color from the Color palette.
BG Color The color inside the border. To specify the color, click the corresponding Color icon and

45
5.6. Setting Word Value Using Word Buttons
You can touch a word button to set a value to the specified variable.

A word button can be configured to perform one of the following operations:
Set Constant Writes the specified constant to the specified variable.
Enter Value Allows you to enter a value to change the specified variable.
The Numeric Keypad displays when the button is pressed and released. After a value is entered with
the keypad, the button checks if the value is within the range of the specified minimum and maximum.
If the value is valid, the button writes the entered value to the specified variable. If the value is invalid,
the operator has to enter another value or quit the operation.
Enter Allows you to enter a value to change the specified variable. The keypad shows the input with a string
Password of asterisks so others cannot know the input value.
The Numeric Keypad displays when the button is pressed and released. The keypad shows the
operator input with a string of asterisks so others do not know the input value. After a value is entered
with the keypad, the button checks if the value is within the range of the specified minimum and
maximum. If the value is valid, the button writes the entered value to the specified variable. If the
value is invalid, the operator has to enter another value or quit the operation.
Add Increases the specified variable by the specified constant. If the result of the increase is greater than
the specified maximum, the variable is set to the maximum.
Subtract Decreases the specified variable by the specified constant. If the result of the decrease is less than
the specified minimum, the variable is set to the minimum.

The following operation options can be added to a word button to make it more informative, secure, and useful. You need
to select and set these options in the Word Button dialog box.
Options Description
Touch Operation The touch operation can be enabled or disabled either by a specified bit or by the current
Minimum Hold Time The touch operation of the button will not be activated until the button is pressed and held
page.
Operator Confirmation The Confirmation box will be displayed when the button is touched. If the operator selects
“Yes” in the Confirmation box, the button will proceed to perform its operation. If the operator
selects “No” or the operator does not respond within the specified time period (Maximum
Waiting Time), the button will stop performing its operation.
Note: that this option is not available for the Enter Password operation.
Notification The button can be configured to notify a bit upon the completion of the specified operation.
Operation Logging Each touch operation of the button can be recorded in the operation log. Select and set this
Visibility Control The button can be shown or hidden either by a specified bit or by the current user level.

5
5.6.3. Settings
You can complete all the settings of a word button in the Word Button property sheet. This sheet contains the following five
■ General
■ Label
■ Advanced
■ Visibility
■ External Label

This section describes how to define the general settings for a word button.
The above is an example of the General page of the Word Button property sheet.

45
within the screen where the object is located. The format of the IDs for word buttons is
WBnnnn.
Note You can type a note for the word button.
Object. Picture Shape, , VFTA, , Border Color, Pattern, FG
Color, BG Color.
External Label Check this option if you want the word button to have an external label. Set up the
external label in the External Label page.
Operation Specifies the operation that the word button performs. For details, see Section 5.6.1
Basic Operations.
Data Type The data type of the variable to be controlled.
Write Write Address Specifies the variable to be controlled.
Address Click this icon to bring up the Address Input Keypad and specify an address for this
property.
Click this icon to bring up the Select Tag dialog box and select a tag for this property.
Constant The constant for the specified operation.
Minimum The minimum for the specified operation.
Maximum The maximum for the specified operation.
Total Digits The number of digits to be displayed for the Minimum and the Maximum on the numeric
keypad.
Fractional Digits When the Data Type is 32-bit Floating Point, this property specifies the number of
fractional digits to be displayed for the Minimum and Maximum on the numeric keypad.
When the Data Type is not 32-bit Floating Point, this property specifies not only the
number of fractional digits to be displayed, but also the number of least significant digits
to be displayed as the fractional part. With this feature, an integer can be shown and
entered as a fixed point number. When the Fractional Digits is nonzero, say N, the
entered value will be converted to an integer according to the following formula before
being output.
Example:
Display Type Total Fractional Entered Output
Activation Button Down Select this item so the touch operation will be activated when the button is touched.
Button Up Select this item so the touch operation will be activated when the button is released.
Key The hard key that is used to operate the word button. This item is available when the

5
5.7. Selecting Work Value Using Multi-state Switches
You can use a multi-state switch to change the state of the specified variable.

A multi-state switch can be configured to perform as one of the following types of controls:
Control Type Description

Button The multi-state switch is a push button. It changes the state of the specified variable to the next state
when it is touched. Note: that the next state is not necessarily the current state plus one.
List The multi-state switch is a list box. It lists the text of all the states of
the switch one state per line starting from state 0 as shown in the
example on the right.
The text of the current state is highlighted. If the desired state is not in
view, you can use the scroll bar attached to the right side of the list
box to scroll the text. When you select a desired state by touching its
text, the list box writes the value of the selected state to the specified
variable.
Drop-down The multi-state switch is a drop-down list. It displays the text of the current state and a button with the
List down arrow symbol as shown in the following example.
When the button is touched, the switch list displays a list box beneath itself as shown in the following
example.
The list box lists the text of all states of the switch one state per line starting from state 0. The text of
the current state is highlighted. If the desired state is not in view, you can use the scroll bar attached
to the right side of the list to scroll the text. When you select a desired state by touching its text, the
switch writes the value of the selected state to the specified variable and closes the list box.
If you want to cancel the operation when the list box is showing, touch anywhere other than the text in
the list box.
Continued

45
Control Type Description
Throw-up List The multi-state switch is a throw-up list. It displays the text of the current state and a button with the
up arrow symbol as shown in the following example.
When the button is touched, the switch list displays a list box above itself as shown in the following
example.
The list box lists the text of all states of the switch one state per line starting from state 0. The text of
the current state is highlighted. If the desired state is not in view, you can use the scroll bar attached
to the right side of the list to scroll the text. When you select a desired state by touching its text, the
switch writes the value of the selected state to the specified variable and closes the list box.
If you want to cancel the operation when the list box is showing, touch anywhere other than the text in
the list box.

The following operation options can be added to a multi-state switch to make it more informative, secure, and useful. You
need to select and set these options in the Multi-state Switch dialog box.
Options Description
Touch Operation The touch operation can be enabled and disabled either by a specified bit or by the current
Minimum Hold Time The touch operation of the switch will not be activated until the switch is pressed and held
page.
Notification The switch can be configured to notify a bit of the completion of the specified operation.
Operation Logging Each data change performed by the switch can be recorded in the operation log. Select and
set this option in the Advanced page.
Invisible The switch can be invisible and still touch operable. Select this option in the Visibility page.
Visibility Control The switch can be shown or hidden either by a specified bit or by the current user level.

5
5.7.3. Settings
You can complete all the settings of a multi-state switch in the Multi-state Switch dialog box. This dialog box contains the
following six pages. Some of the pages appear only when they are needed.
■ General
■ Text
■ Picture
■ Advanced
■ Visibility
■ External Label

45
This section describes how to define the general settings for a multi-state switch. The following is an example of the
General page of the Multi-state Switch property sheet.

the screen where the object is located. The format of the IDs for multi-state switch is MSnnnn.
Note You can type a note for the multi-state switch.
External Label Check this option if you want the multi-state switch to have an external label. Set up the
Continued

5
State The current state of the multi-state switch that you can view and set the object appearance
for.
State Type The state type of the monitored variable. There are two options: Value and LSB. For details,
see Section 4.4.1.1 State Types.
Control Type Specifies the control type that the multi-state switch will perform as. There are three types
you can choose: Button, List, and Drop-down List, Throw-up List. For details, see Section
5.7.1 Basic Operations.
Write Write Specifies the variable to be controlled.
Address Address
Click this icon to bring up the Address Input Keypad and specify an address for this
property.
Total States Specifies the number of valid states that the monitored variable has.
Note: The last state is state N-1 when the Total States is N.
Next Specifies the method of calculating the next state for the Button control type.
State +1 The next state is the current state plus one when the current state is not the last state.
(Wrap) When the current state is the last state, the next state is state 0.
-1 (Wrap) The next state is the current state minus one when the current state is not state 0. When the
current state is state 0, the next state is the last state.
+1/-1 With this method, the switch is either in the increasing mode or in the decreasing mode for
(Retreat) the next state calculation. The switch is in the increasing mode initially.
Assume that the total states of the switch is N. When the switch is in the increasing mode,
the next state is the current state plus one, if the current state is not the last state, i.e. state
N-1. If the current state is the last state, the switch changes into the decreasing mode, and
the next state is the current state minus one, i.e. state N-2. When the switch is in the
decreasing mode, the next state is the current state minus one if the current state is not
state 0. If the current state is state 0, the switch changes into the increasing mode and the
next state is the current state plus one, i.e. state 1.
Activation Specifies how the multi-state switch is activated for the Button control type.
Direct The multi-state switch is activated when the button is touched.
Indirect The multi-state switch is activated when it is selected, and a function button on the same
screen with the operation of “Increase Value By One” or “Decrease Value y One” is
touched.
Monitor Address Specifies that the Monitor Address is identical to the Write Address. With this item checked,
identical to Write you don’t need to specify the same variable for the Monitor Address field.
Address
Monitor Monitor Specifies the variable to be monitored.
Address Address
Click this icon to bring up the Address Input Keypad and specify an address for the Monitor
Address field.
Click this icon to bring up the Select Tag dialog box and select a tag for the Monitor Address
field.
Key The hard key that is used to operate the multi-state switch. This item is available when the

45
5.8. Setting Word State Using Radio Button Groups
You can press a button of a radio button group to change the state of the controlled variable.

A radio button group has as many radio buttons as the number of states it has. Each radio button corresponds to a state.
When a radio button is pressed, the value of that button’s associated state is written to the controlled variable. The state of
a radio button group is determined by the state of the controlled variable. A radio button is highlighted when its associated
state is the current state.

The following operation options can be added to a radio button group to make it more informative, secure, and useful. You
need to select and set these options in the Radio Button Group dialog box.
Options Description
Touch Operation The touch operation of the radio button group can be enabled and disabled either by a
Control specified bit or by the current user level. Select and set this option in the Advanced page.
Minimum Hold Time The touch operation will not be activated until a button of the radio button group is pressed
and held down for the specified time period (Minimum Hold Time). Set this option in the
Advanced page.
Operation Logging Each data change performed by the radio button group can be recorded in the operation log.
Visibility Control The radio button group can be shown or hidden either by a specified bit or by the current user
level. Select and set this option in the Visibility page.

5
5.8.3. Settings
You can complete all the settings of a radio button group in the Radio Button Group dialog box. This dialog box contains
the following six pages. Some of the pages appear only when they are needed.
■ General
■ Text
■ Picture
■ Advanced
■ Visibility
■ External Label

This section describes how to define the general settings for a radio button group. The following is an example of the
General page of the Radio Button Group property sheet.

45
within the screen where the object is located. The format of the IDs for radio button groups is
RBnnnn.
Note You can type a note for the radio button group.
Shape settings For details about the following properties, Section 4.3.4 Setting up the Shape of an Object.
Picture Shape, , VFTA, , Border Color, BG Color

External Label Check this option if you want the radio button group to have an external label. Set up the
State Specifies the current state of the radio button group. You can set the appearance of the button
associated with the current state.
Note: Although you can set the appearance for the button of the current state, you cannot
view all the changes immediately. This is because the button is highlighted with the BG color
and the text color set for the Current State. You can change the current state so the button is
shown with new settings instead of being highlighted.
State Type The state type of the controlled variable. There are three options: Value, LSB, and Custom.
For details, see Section 4.4.1.1 State Types.
State Order Specifies how to arrange the radio buttons. There are four kinds of order:
State Order Description
Left to Right The buttons are arranged in order, in a row with the button of state 0
at the left most position.
Right to Left The buttons are arranged in order, in a row with the button of state 0
at the right most position.
Top to Bottom The buttons are arranged in order, in a column with the button of
state 0 at the top position.
Bottom to Top The buttons are arranged in order, in a column with the button of
state 0 at the bottom position.
Write Write Specifies the variable to be controlled.
Address Address
Click this icon to bring up the Address Input Keypad and specify an address for this property.
Total States Specifies the number of valid states that the controlled variable has.
Indication Method Choose the method from display text with different colors, use round mark or use square mark
of to indicate the current selection.
Current BG The color to replace the shape’s BG color when selected.
Selection Color
Text / The color to replace the text or mark color when selected.
Mark
Button Spacing The distance in pixels between two adjacent radio buttons.
Custom State Value Click this button to define the state value for each state when the State Type is Custom. For
details, see Section 4.4.1.2 Setting the Custom States of an Object.

5
5.9. Customizing the Keypad Using Keypad Buttons
A keypad button inputs a character to the keypad buffer or issues a command to the keypad buffer when it is pressed. You
can use keypad buttons to create your own keypads.

The following operation options can be added to a keypad button to make it more useful. You need to select and set these
options in the Keypad Button dialog box.
Options Description
Macro The keypad button can have a macro to execute when being pressed. Specify and edit the macro
in the Macro page.
Visibility Control The keypad button can be shown or hidden either by a specified bit or by the current user level.
5.9.2. Settings
You can complete all the settings of a keypad button in the Keypad Button dialog box. This dialog box contains the
following four pages. Some of the pages appear only when they are needed.
■ General
■ Label
■ Visibility
■ Macro

45
This section describes how to define the general settings for a keypad button. The following is an example of the General
page of the Keypad Button property sheet.

ID The object’s identifier. It is generated when the object is created. The identifier is unique within the screen
where the object is located. The format of the IDs for keypad buttons is KBnnnn.
Note You can type a note for the keypad button group.
Shape For details about the following properties, see Section 4.3.4 Setting up the Shape of an Object.
settings
Picture Shape, , VFTA, , Border Color, Pattern Color, FG Color, BG Color
Enter Select this item if the button is used to input the specified character to the keypad buffer.
Character
Character Available when Enter Character is selected. Specifies the character to be entered in the keypad buffer.
Enter Select this item if the button is used to issue the specified command to the keypad buffer.
Command
Command Available when Enter Command is selected. Specifies the command to be issued to the keypad buffer.
There are four commands available:
Command Description
Enter Completes data entry and sends the input string to the associated object or the system.
Escape Cancels the data entry operation.
Clear Clears the keypad buffer.
Backspace Removes the last character in the keypad buffer.
Key The hard key that is used to operate the keypad button. This item is available only when the target panel
has hard keys.
Macro Check this option if you want the button to have a macro. Specify and edit the macro in the Macro page.

5
5.9.4. Creating your own keypads
You can create your own keypads using keypad buttons as custom keypads for your application. The following is an
example of a custom numeric keypad.
X Window Screen with a title bar and a close button
Y Keypad Display
Z
Allowable input range display
[ Keypad Buttons
To create your own keypads, please do the following:

1. Create a window screen, please see Section 3.9.2 Creating and Opening Screens for details.
2. Create a Character Display with the following settings to display characters when the keypad button is pressed.

45
3. Create a Character Display with the following settings to display an allowable input range.
Note:
Monitor Address: $S230
Total Characters: 24 (or less)
Font: Any font
Alignment: Any (Center recommended)
Character Set: ASCII code (7 bits)
Code Size: Byte
4. Create keypad buttons to customize the keypad.

5. Set up the Custom page of the General Setup dialog box to use the custom keypad instead of the built-in keypad.
Please see Section 3.1.2 Custom Settings for details.

5
5.10. Scrolling Object Content Using Scroll Button Groups
You can use the buttons of a scroll button group to scroll the content displayed by the associated object.

A scroll button group with the horizontal button alignment can have the following buttons:
Button Example Description
Scroll to Right End Scrolls the content displayed by the associated object to the right end.
Scroll Page Right Scrolls the content displayed by the associated object to the right by one page.
Scroll Right Scrolls the content displayed by the associated object to the right.
Scroll Left Scrolls the content displayed by the associated object to the left.
Scroll Page Left Scrolls the content displayed by the associated object to the left by one page.
Scroll to Left End Scrolls the content displayed by the associated object to the left end.
Pause This is a toggle switch. It stops the auto-scrolling of the content displayed by the
associated object when it is touched. When you touch it again, it resumes the
auto-scrolling operation.
A scroll button group with the vertical button alignment can have the following buttons:
Button Example Description

Scroll to Top End Scrolls the content displayed by the associated object to the top end.
Scroll Page Up Scrolls the content displayed by the associated object to the top by one page.
Scroll Page Down Scrolls the content displayed by the associated object to the bottom by one
page.
Scroll to Bottom End Scrolls the content displayed by the associated object to the bottom end.
Pause This is a toggle switch. It stops the auto-scrolling of the content displayed by the
associated object when it is touched. When you touch it again, it resumes the
auto-scrolling operation.

45
The following operation option can be added to a scroll button group. You need to select and set this option in the Scroll
Button Group dialog box.
Options Description
Visibility Control The scroll button group can be shown or hidden either by a specified bit or by the current
user level. Select and set this option in the Visibility page.
5.10.3. Settings
You can complete all the settings of a scroll button group in the Scroll Button Group dialog box. This dialog box contains
the following two pages.
■ General
■ Visibility

5
This section describes how to define the general settings for a scroll button group. The following is an example of the
General page of the Scroll Button Group property sheet.
within the screen where the object is located. The format of the IDs for the scroll button
groups is SBNnnnn.
Note You can type a note for the scroll button group.
Shape settings For details about the following properties, Section 4.3.4 Setting up the Shape of an
Legend Color The color of the legend for every button of the scroll button group.
Button Horizontal The buttons of the scroll button group are aligned in a row.
Alignment Vertical The buttons of the scroll button group are aligned in a column.
Associated Object ID The ID of the object that the scroll button group will be used to scroll its content. You
can select the associated object from this drop-down list which displays the IDs of
objects on the same screen that support the scroll operation.
Start/End buttons Check this item if you want the scroll button group to include the buttons that scroll the
content to the start or to the end.
Scroll Page buttons Check this item if you want the scroll button group to include the buttons that scroll the
content each time by one page.
Pause button Check this item if you want the scroll button group to include the Pause button.
Button Spacing The distance in pixels between two adjacent buttons.

45
5.11. Scrolling Object Content Using Scroll Bars
You can use a scroll bar to scroll the content displayed by the associated object. The associated objects include Historic
Data Display, Historic Message Display, Historic Trend Display, Operation Log Display, Alarm Display, Recipe Table, and
Sub-link Table.
A horizontal scroll bar has the following buttons:
Button Description
Scroll Right Scrolls the content displayed by the associated object to the right.
Scroll Page Right Scrolls the content displayed by the associated object to the right by one page.
Slide Bar You can push and move the slide bar to scroll the content displayed by the associated object. The
content is scrolled in the same direction as you move the slide bar. The amount of scrolling is
proportional to the displacement of the slide bar. The position of the slide bar in the scroll bar
indicates the position of the viewable part of the content. The width of the slide bar indicates how
much of the content is viewable.
Scroll Page Left Scrolls the content displayed by the associated object to the left by one page.
Scroll Left Scrolls the content displayed by the associated object to the left.
A vertical scroll bar has the following buttons:
Button Description
Scroll Page Up Scrolls the content displayed by the associated object to the top by one page.
Slide Bar You can push and move the slide bar to scroll the content displayed by the associated object. The
content is scrolled in the same direction as you move the slide bar. The amount of scrolling is
proportional to the displacement of the slide bar. The position of the slide bar in the scroll bar
indicates the position of the viewable part of the content. The height of the slide bar indicates how
much of the content is viewable.
Scroll Page Down Scrolls the content displayed by the associated object to the bottom by one page.

5
The following operation option can be added to a scroll bar. You need to select and set this option in the Scroll Bar property
sheet.
Options Description
Visibility Control The scroll bar can be shown or hidden either by a specified bit or by the current user level.
5.11.3. Settings
You can complete all the settings of a scroll bar in the Scroll Bar property sheet. This sheet contains the following two
pages.
■ General
■ Visibility

45
This section describes how to define the general settings for a scroll bar. The following is an example of the General page
of the Scroll Bar property sheet.
within the screen where the object is located. The format of the IDs for the scroll bars is
SBRnnnn.
Note You can type a note for the scroll button group.
Type The type of scroll bar. There are two types; horizontal and vertical.
Associated Object ID The ID of the object that will use the scroll bar to scroll its content. You can select the
associated object from this drop-down list which shows the IDs of objects on the same
screen that support the scroll operation.
Bar Color The color of the scroll bar.
Legend Color The color of the legend for the buttons of the scroll bar.

5
5.12. Stepping Through Word State Using Step Buttons
You can press a step button to write the value of the button’s next state to the specified variable.

Unlike most of the other objects, a step button displays all the states at once, with the current state highlighted, instead of
displaying just the current state. A step button can let the operators know all the available states, and what the next state
will be when they touch it.
The state of a step button is determined by the value of the specified variable and the specified state type. When a step
button is pressed, it calculates the value of the next state, and writes that value to the specified variable. The next state is
the current state plus one, when the current state is not the last state. When the current state is the last state, the next state
is state 0.

The following operation options can be added to a step button to make it more informative, secure, and useful. You need to
select and set these options in the Step Button property sheet.
Options Description
Touch Operation The touch operation of the step button can be enabled and disabled either by a specified bit
Control or by the current user level. Select and set this option in the Advanced page.
Minimum Hold Time The touch operation will not be activated until the step button is pressed and held down for
the specified time period (Minimum Hold Time). Set this option in the Advanced page.
Operation Logging Each data change performed by the step button can be recorded in the operation log. Select
and set this option in the Advanced page.
Visibility Control The step button can be shown or hidden either by a specified bit or by the current user level.

45
5.12.3. Settings
You can complete all the settings of a step button in the Step Button property sheet. This sheet contains the following six
■ General
■ Text
■ Picture
■ Advanced
■ Visibility
■ External Label

This section describes how to define the general settings for a step button. The following is an example of the General
page of the Step Button property sheet.

5
the screen where the object is located. The format of the IDs for the step buttons is STBnnnn.
Note You can type a note for this object.
, VFTA, , Border Color, BG Color

External Label Check this option if you want the object to have an external label. Set up the external label in the
State Select a state as the current state so you can set the BG Color for that state. You can also see
how the step button looks when the selected state is highlighted.
Note: The current state is always highlighted by the settings defined in the Highlight Current
State group. Therefore, you cannot see the change of the BG color you made for the current
state immediately. To see the change, select another state as the current state.
State Type The state type of the step button. The supported types are: Value, LSB, and Custom. For
details, see Section 4.4.1.1 State Types
State Order Specifies how to arrange the states on the step button. There are four different orders:
State Order Example
Left to Right
Right to Left
Top to Bottom
Bottom to Top
Data Type The data type for the variable in the Write Address field. The supported types are: 16-bit
Unsigned Integer, 16-bit BCD, 32-bit Unsigned Integer, and 32-bit BCD.
Continued

45
Write Write Specifies the variable to be controlled by the step button. This variable will also be monitored
Address Address to decide the state of the step button.
Click this icon to bring up the Address Input Keypad and specify an address for this property.
Total States Specifies the number of states that the step button can display and process.
Custom State Value… Click this button to define the state value for each state of the step button when the State
Type is Custom. For details, see Section 4.4.1.2 Setting the Custom States of an Object.
Indication Method Choose the method from display text with different colors, use round mark or use square
of current mark to indicate the current selection.
selection BG Color The color to replace the shape’s BG color when selected.
Text/Mark The color to replace the text or mark color when selected.
Separator Color The color of the lines that are drawn between two states.

5
5.13. Displaying Window Screen as Information Page Using Page Selectors
In a page selector, you can press a tab to view the associated page (window screen).

You can configure a page selector to contain up to 8 window screens. Each of the specified window screens is a page, and
each page has an associated tab. You can specify the text and picture for each tab. At runtime, a page selector shows one
of the specified pages in its viewing area. You can select a desired page to view by pressing the associated tab.
5.13.2. Settings
You can complete all the settings of a page selector in the Page Selector property sheet. This sheet contains the following
three pages.
■ General
■ Text
■ Picture

45
This section describes how to define the general settings for a page selector. The following is an example of the General
page of the Page Selector property sheet.
within the screen where the object is located. The format of the IDs for the page selectors
is PSnnnn.
Note You can type a note for this object.
Picture Shape, , VFTA, , Border Color, BG Color
Tab Select a tab as the current tab so you can set the BG Color for that tab. You can also see
how the tabs look when the selected tab is highlighted.
Note: The current tab is always highlighted by the settings defined in the Highlight Current
Tab group. Therefore, you cannot see the change of the BG color you made for the current
tab immediately. To see the change, select another tab as the current tab.
Tab Position You can select Top/Bottom/Left/Right for the location of the tab.
Number of Pages Specifies the number of window screens this page selector contains.
Specify Page… Click this button to open the Specify Page dialog box. You can specify the window screen
for each page in this dialog box.
Highlight The settings for highlighting the text of the current tab.
Current BG Color The color to replace the BG color of the current tab when highlighted.
Tab
Text Color The color to replace the text color of the current tab when highlighted.
Tab Height The height of each tab.

CHAPTER 6
LAMPS
6.1．Displaying Bit State Using Bit Lamps ........................................................... 1

6.1.3. Settings .......................................................................................................................... 1
6.2. Displaying Word State Using Multi-state Lamps ..................................... 4
6.2.3. Settings .......................................................................................................................... 5
6.3. Displaying Text Information Using Message Displays ............................. 7
6.3.3. Settings .......................................................................................................................... 8
-i-
46
6.1．Displaying Bit State Using Bit Lamps

You can use a bit to control the appearance of a bit lamp.
A bit lamp has two states, i.e. state 0 (Off) and state 1 (On). You can set the appearance of a bit lamp for each of the two
states. At runtime, a bit lamp is displayed with the appearance settings corresponding to the state of the monitored bit.
The following operation option can be added to a bit lamp. You need to select and set this option in the Bit Lamp property
sheet.
Options Description
Visibility Control The object can be shown or hidden either by a specified bit or by the current user level. Select
6.1.3. Settings
You can complete all the settings of a bit lamp in the Bit Lamp property sheet. This sheet contains the following four pages.
Some of the pages appear only when they are needed.
■ General
■ Label
■ Visibility
■ External Label
6-1 CHAPTER 6 LAMPS

6
This section describes how to define the general settings for a bit lamp.
The above is an example of the General page of the Bit Lamp dialog box.
within the screen where the object is located. The format of the IDs for the bit lamps is
BLnnnn.
Object. Picture Shape, , Border Color, Pattern, FG Color, BG Color
External Label Check this option if you want the bit lamp to have an external label. Set up the external
Continued
CHAPTER 6 LAMPS 6-2

46
Click this button to change the object state to 1 (On) so you can view and set the object
appearance for state 1 (On).
Click this button to change the object state to 0 (Off) so you can view and set the object
appearance for state 0 (Off).
Monitor Address Specifies the type of variable in the Monitor Address field. The bit lamp supports the
Address Type following three variable types:
Variable Type Description
Bit The variable is a bit variable.
Word The variable is a word variable. You need to specify which bit in
the word variable is to be monitored. Specify the bit number
(0~15) in the Bit Number field.
Double-word The variable is a double-word variable. You need to specify
which bit in the double-word variable is to be monitored. Specify
the bit number (0~31) in the Bit Number field.
Monitor Specifies the bit variable to be monitored when the Address Type is Bit.
Address Specifies the word variable that contains the bit to be monitored when the Address Type
is Word.
Specifies the double-word variable that contains the bit to be monitored when the Address
Click this icon to bring up the Address Input Keypad and specify the desired address for
the Monitor Address field.
Bit Number Specifies which bit of the variable specified in the Monitor Address field is to be
monitored.
6-3 CHAPTER 6 LAMPS

6
6.2. Displaying Word State Using Multi-state Lamps

You can use a variable to control the appearance of a multi-state lamp.
A multi-state lamp can have up to 256 states. The maximum number of states that a multi-state lamp can have is
determined by the state type and the data type of the monitored variable. The following table shows the maximum in each
case.
16-bit Variable 32-bit variable

State Bit 2 2
Type Value 256 256
LSB 16 33
You need to specify the number of states for a multi-state lamp, and the number must not exceed the allowed maximum.
You can set the appearance of a multi-state lamp for each of its states. At runtime, a multi-state lamp is displayed with the
appearance settings corresponding to the state of the monitored variable. The state of the monitored variable is
determined by the state type and value of the variable.

The following operation option can be added to a multi-state lamp. You need to select and set this option in the Multi-state
Lamp property sheet.
Options Description
Visibility Control The object can be shown or hidden either by a specified bit or by the current user level.
CHAPTER 6 LAMPS 6-4

46
6.2.3. Settings
You can complete all the settings of a multi-state lamp in the Multi-state Lamp property sheet. This dialog box contains the
■ General
■ Text
■ Picture
■ Visibility
■ External Label
6-5 CHAPTER 6 LAMPS

6
This section describes how to define the general settings for a multi-state lamp. The following is an example of the General
page of the Multi-state Lamp property sheet.
within the screen where the object is located. The format of the IDs for the multi-state
lamps is MLnnnn.
Object, Picture Shape, , Border Color, Pattern, FG Color, BG Color
External Label Check this option if you want the multi-state lamp to have an external label. Set up the
State Select a state as the current state of the multi-state lamp so you can view and set the
object appearance for that state.
Data Type The data type of the monitored variable. The supported data types include: 16-bit Unsigned
Integer, 16-bit BCD, 32-bit Unsigned Integer, and 32-bit BCD.
Monitor Monitor Specifies the variable to be monitored.
Address Address
Click this icon to bring up the Address Input Keypad and specify an address for the Monitor
Address field.
Click this icon to bring up the Select Tag dialog box and select a tag for the Monitor
Address field.
Total States Specifies the number of states that the multi-state lamp can display.
State Type The state type for the state of the monitored variable. The supported state types include
Value and LSB. For details, see Section 4.4.1.1 State Types
CHAPTER 6 LAMPS 6-6

46
6.3. Displaying Text Information Using Message Displays

You can use a variable to select and display a predefined message with a message display.
A message display can have up to 256 states. Each state can have a predefined message. The maximum number of
states that a message display can have is determined by the state type and data type of the monitored variable. The
following table shows the maximum in each case.
Type of Variable Maximum

State Bit Bit 2
Type Value 16-bit 256
32-bit 256
LSB 16-bit 17
32-bit 33
You need to specify the number of states for a message display, and the number must not exceed the allowed maximum.
You can set the text (message) for each state. At runtime, a message display shows the message corresponding to the
state of the monitored variable. The state of the monitored variable is determined by the state type and value of the
variable.
Note: The differences between Message Display and Lamps are:
Lamps can display either text or picture, or both; while message display can only display text. Both message displays and
lamps can display predefined text by changing the value of the monitored variable. However, only message displays can
perform as a marquee that is controlled by the value of the monitored variable and a specified running speed.

The following operation option can be added to a message display. You need to select and set this option in the Message
Display dialog box.
Options Description
Marquee The displayed message scrolls automatically in the specified direction. When the displayed
message is not long enough to cover the entire display area, the message is duplicated to fill the
uncovered area in sequence.
6-7 CHAPTER 6 LAMPS

6
6.3.3. Settings
You can complete all the settings of a message display in the Message Display dialog box. This dialog box contains the
■ General
■ Text
■ Visibility
■ External Label

This section describes how to define the general settings for a message display. The following is an example of the
General page of the Message Display property sheet.
CHAPTER 6 LAMPS 6-8

46
unique within the screen where the object is located. The format of the IDs for the
message displays is MDnnnn.
Shape settings For details about the following properties, Section 4.3.4 Setting up the Shape of an
Object. , Border Color, Pattern, FG Color, BG Color
External Label Check this option if you want the message display to have an external label. Set
up the external label in the External Label page.
State Select a state as the current state of the message display so you can view and set
the Pattern, FG Color, BG Color for that state.
State Type The state type of the variable that controls the message display. The supported
state types include Bit, Value and LSB. For details, see Section 4.4.1.1 State
Types
Data Type The data type of the variable that controls the message display. The supported
data types include: Bit, 16-bit Unsigned Integer, 16-bit BCD, 32-bit Unsigned
Integer, and 32-bit BCD.
Monitor Address Specifies the variable that controls the message display.
Total States Specifies the number of states of the message display.
Marquee Marquee Select this item if you want the displayed message to scroll automatically.
Running Speed The speed of scrolling. Select from 1 to 10, 1 being the slowest and 10 being the
fastest.
Direction The direction of scrolling. The supported directions include Leftward, Rightward,
and Upward.
Text can be scrolled by the Select this option so you can scroll the content of the message display vertically
vertical scroll bar or button using the associated scroll buttons or scroll bar.
6-9 CHAPTER 6 LAMPS

CHAPTER 7
DISPLAYING AND
INPUTTING DATA
7.1. Numeric Entries............................................................................................ 1

7.1.2. Settings .......................................................................................................................... 2
7.1.4. Advanced Settings for Numeric Entries ........................................................................ 5
7.2. Numeric Displays.......................................................................................... 8
7.2.2. Settings .......................................................................................................................... 8
7.3. Advanced Numeric Displays...................................................................... 12
7.3.1. Advanced Features....................................................................................................... 12
7.3.3. Settings ........................................................................................................................ 13
7.3.5. Range Settings ............................................................................................................. 16
7.4. Character Entries ....................................................................................... 18
7.4.2. Settings ........................................................................................................................ 18
7.5. Character Displays ..................................................................................... 23
7.5.2. Settings ........................................................................................................................ 23
7.6. Time Displays.............................................................................................. 25
7.6.1. Settings ........................................................................................................................ 25
7.7. Date Displays............................................................................................... 26
7.7.1. Settings ........................................................................................................................ 26
7.8. Day-of-week Displays ................................................................................. 27
7.8.1. Settings ........................................................................................................................ 27
47
7.1. Numeric Entries
You can enter a value and change the specified variable using a numeric entry.

The following operation options can be added to a numeric entry. Select and set up the options in the Numeric Entry
property sheet.
Options Description
Scaling The value of the monitored variable will be displayed in a scaled manner. The following is the
scaling formula.
DisplayedValue = MonitoredValue * Gain + Offset
If the option is selected, the entered value will be scaled by the following formula with the
same coefficients (Gain and Offset) before it is output.
OutputValue = (EnteredValue – Offset) / Gain
Note: The Gain and Offset are 32-bit floating point numbers. They have, at most, 6
significant digits. Rounding and truncation errors may occur.
Range Check Numeric entry will verify an entered value according to the specified maximum and minimum.
If the entered value is not within the allowable range, the value will not be output. Select and
set this option in the Advanced page.
Note 1: When the scaling option is selected, the output value is verified instead of the
entered value.
Note 2: When the scaling option is selected, the allowable maximum and minimum shown on
the numeric keypad are the scaled versions of the specified maximum and minimum.
ScaledMaximum = Maximum * Gain + Offset
ScaledMinimum = Minimum * Gain + Offset
Touch Operation You can enable or disable the touch operation of the object by the specified bit or by the
Control current user level. Select and set up this option in the Advanced page.
Timeout If the keypad for data entry receives no input for the specified time period, the data entry
operation will be cancelled.
Notification The Object will notify the specified bit of a successful data entry operation. Select and set up
Operator Confirmation When a value is entered by the operator, the Confirmation box will be displayed to receive
the operator’s confirmation. If the operator selects “Yes”, the object will write the entered data
to the specified variable. If the operator selects “No” or the operator does not respond within
the specified time period (Maximum Waiting Time), the data entry operation will be cancelled.
Select and set up this option in the Advanced page.
Operation Logging The entered value and the time of the data entry will be recorded. Select and set up this
Visibility Control You can show or hide the object by the specified bit or by the current user level. Select and
set up this option in the Visibility page.
7-1 CHAPTER 7 DISPLAYING AND INPUTTING DATA

7
7.1.2. Settings
You can complete all the settings of a numeric entry in the Numeric Entry property sheet. This sheet contains the following
four pages. Some of the pages appear only when they are needed.
■ General
■ Advanced
■ Visibility
■ External Label

This section describes how to define the general settings for a numeric entry. The following is an example of the General
page of the Numeric Entry property sheet.
CHAPTER 7 DISPLAYING AND INPUTTING DATA 7-2

47
ID The object’s identifier. It is generated when the object is created. The identifier is unique within the
screen where the object is located. The format of the IDs for the numeric entries is NEnnnn.
Transparent Select this option if you want the object to have a transparent background.
Background
settings
, Border Color, BG Color.
External Check this option if you want the object to have an external label. Set up the external label in the
Label External Label page.
Data Type The data type of the destination variable and the monitored variable. The supported data types
include: 16-Bit Unsigned Integer, 32-Bit Unsigned Integer, 16-Bit Signed Integer, 32-Bit Signed
Integer, 16-Bit BCD, 32-Bit BCD, 32-Bit Floating Point, 16-Bit Signed BCD (LMB), 32-Bit Signed BCD
(LMB), 16-Bit Signed BCD (LMD), and 32-Bit Signed BCD (LMD).
Display Type The display type of the value of the monitored variable. The following table shows the available
display types for each data type.
Data Type Available Display Types
16-Bit Unsigned Integer 16-Bit Unsigned Decimal, 16-Bit Hexadecimal, 16-Bit Octal
32-Bit Unsigned Integer 32-Bit Unsigned Decimal, 32-Bit Hexadecimal, 32-Bit Octal,
Password
16-Bit Signed Integer 16-Bit Signed Decimal
16-Bit BCD 16-Bit Unsigned Decimal
32-Bit Floating Point 32-Bit Floating Point
16-Bit Signed BCD (LMB) 16-Bit Signed Decimal
16-Bit Signed BCD (LMD) 16-Bit Signed Decimal
Write Address Specifies the destination variable where the entered value will be written.
Monitor Specifies that the monitored variable is the same as the destination variable. With this item checked,
Address you don’t need to specify the monitored variable in the Monitor Address field.
identical to
Write Address
Monitor Specifies the monitored variable.
Address
Font The font of the displayed value.
Text Color The color of the displayed value.
Total Digits The number of digits to be displayed.
Note: This property applies to the display of the initial value, the allowable minimum, and the
allowable maximum on the numeric keypad.
Continued

7
Fractional When the Display Type is 32-bit Floating Point, this property specifies the number of fractional digits
Digits displayed.
When the Display Type is not 32-bit Floating Point, this property specifies not only the number of
fractional digits displayed, but also the number of least significant digits displayed as the fractional
part. With this feature, an integer can be shown and entered as a fixed point number. When the
Fractional Digits is nonzero, say N, the entered value will be converted to an integer according to the
following formula before being output.
Example 1:
Total Fractional Monitored Displayed
Display Type Justification
32-bit Floating Point 4 2 Zero Suppress 12.34 12.34
16-bit Signed Decimal 5 2 Zero Suppress 12345 123.45
16-bit Signed Decimal 5 2 Zero Suppress -5 -0.05
Example 2:
Total Fractional Entered Output
Display Type
Alignment The alignment of the displayed value. There are three types of alignment: Left, Center, and Right.
Justification The justification of the displayed value. There are three types of justification:
Option Description
Zero Suppress The leading digits will not be displayed when they are 0.
Leading Zeros All digits will be displayed.
Leading Spaces The leading digits will be displayed as a blank character when they
are 0.
Data Entry Specifies how to enter a value for the numeric entry at runtime. There are two options:
Option Description
Pop-up Keypad You can bring up the keypad by pressing numeric entry and then
enter a value with the keypad.
On-screen Keypad You can move the cursor by using the function buttons with the
and/or Function Keys operation of “Select Next Data Entry Object” or “Select Previous Data
Entry Object” to select numeric entry. If there is an on-screen keypad,
you can enter a value for the numeric entry immediately. You can also
use the function buttons with the operation of “Increase Value By
One” or “Decrease Value By One” to change the value of the
destination variable.
Note: When On-screen Keypad and/or Function Keys option is selected, you can only enter a value
for the numeric entry with the input focus. To set the input focus on the corresponding object, you need
to click the object first.

47
7.1.4. Advanced Settings for Numeric Entries
This section describes how to define the advanced settings for numeric entries. The following is an example of the
Advanced page of the Numeric Entry property sheet.
Scaling Scaling Check this option if you want the value of the monitored variable to be displayed in a
scaled manner. The following is the scaling formula.
If this option is selected, the entered value will be scaled by the following formula with
the same coefficients (Gain and Offset) before it is output.
Note: The Gain and Offset are 32-bit floating point numbers. They have, at most, 6
significant digits. Rounding and truncation errors may occur.
Gain The Gain of the scaling formulas.
Offset The Offset of the scaling formulas.

7
Range Range Check this option if you want numeric entry to verify an entered value according to the
Check Check specified minimum and maximum. If the entered value is not within the allowable range,
the entered value will not be output.
Note 1: When the scaling option is selected, the output value is verified instead of the
entered value.
Note 2: When the scaling option is selected, the allowable maximum and minimum
shown on the keypad are the scaled versions of the specified maximum and minimum.
ScaledMaximum = Maximum * Gain + Offset
ScaledMinimum = Minimum * Gain + Offset
Variable Check this option if the minimum and maximum are specified by the designated
Range variables at runtime.
Min. Specifies the minimum when the Variable Range is not selected.
When the Variable Range is selected, this property specifies the variable that stores the
minimum at runtime. Click to enter an address. Click to select a tag.
Max. Specifies the maximum when the Variable Range is not selected.
When the Variable Range is selected, this property specifies the variable that stores the
maximum at runtime. Click to enter an address. Click to select a tag.
Touch Enabled by Check this option so the touch operation of numeric entry will be enabled and disabled
Operation Bit by the specified bit.
State
Enabled by Check this item so the touch operation of numeric entry will be enabled and disabled by
User Level the current user level.
Enabling
User Level
Show Check this option so the touch operation disabled sign will be shown on numeric entry
Disabled when the touch operation is disabled.
Sign
Timeout Timeout Check this option so data entry will be cancelled if the numeric keypad does not receive
any input within the specified time.
Timeout Specifies the maximum time that the numeric keypad will wait to receive a new input. If
Time there is no input within the specified time, the numeric keypad will be closed and data
entry will be cancelled.
Notification Notification Check this option so numeric entry will notify the specified bit after it finishes outputting
the entered value to the destination variable.
Signal Description
Level Set a specified bit to the specified state.

Continued

47
Operator Operator Check this option if you want the operator to confirm what he/she enters for the
Confirmation Confirmation numeric entry. The Confirmation box will be displayed when a value is entered for
numeric entry. If the operator selects “Yes” in the Confirmation box, numeric entry will
write the entered value to the specified variable. If the operator selects “No” or the
operator does not respond within the specified time period (Maximum Waiting Time),
numeric entry will cancel the data entry operation.
Maximum Specifies the maximum time that numeric entry will wait for the operator’s
Waiting Time confirmation. Data entry will be cancelled if the operator does not respond within this
time.
Logging Logging when numeric entry outputs the entered value.
2) The entered value
Message Enter the operation message of the first language.
Click this button to bring up the Operation Message dialog box so that you can edit
the operation message for all the languages.

7
7.2. Numeric Displays
You can use a numeric display to show the value of the specified variable.

The following operation options can be added to a numeric display. Select and set up the options in the Numeric Display
property sheet.
Options Description
Scaling The value of the monitored variable will be scaled by the following formula before it is
displayed.
Note: The Gain and Offset are 32-bit floating point numbers. They have, at most, 6 significant
digits. Rounding and truncation errors may occur.
Range Display You can specify a low limit and a high limit for the numeric display. The limits can be
constants or variables. At runtime, when the value of the monitored variable is below the low
limit, the numeric display will show the value with the text color and the BG color set for the
low limit. When the value of the monitored variable is above the high limit, the numeric
display will show the value with the text color and the BG color set for the high limit.
Visibility Control You can show and hide the numeric display by the specified bit or the current user level.
7.2.2. Settings
You can complete all the settings of a numeric display in the Numeric Display property sheet. This sheet contains the
■ General
■ Advanced
■ Visibility
■ External Label

47
This section describes how to define the general settings for a numeric display. The following is an example of the General
page of the Numeric Display property sheet.
the screen where the object is located. The format of the IDs for the numeric displays is NDnnnn.
Background
Shape settings For details about the following properties, see Section 4.3.4 Setting up the Shape of an Object..
, Border Color, BG Color
Data Type The data type of the monitored variable. The supported data types include: 16-Bit Unsigned
Integer, 32-Bit Unsigned Integer, 16-Bit Signed Integer, 32-Bit Signed Integer, 16-Bit BCD, 32-Bit
BCD, 32-Bit Floating Point, 16-Bit Signed BCD (LMB), 32-Bit Signed BCD (LMB), 16-Bit Signed
BCD (LMD), and 32-Bit Signed BCD (LMD).
Continued

7
Display Type The display type of the value of the monitored variable. The following table shows the available
Monitor Address Specifies the monitored variable.

Fractional Digits When the Display Type is 32-bit Floating Point, this property specifies the number of fractional
digits to be displayed.
fractional digits to be displayed, but also the number of least significant digits to be displayed as
the fractional part. With this feature, an integer can be shown as a fixed point number.
Example:
Total
Fractional Monitored Displayed
Display Type Digit Justification
Digits Value Value
s
Option Description
Leading Spaces The leading digits will be displayed as blank characters when they are 0.

47
This section describes how to define the advanced settings for a numeric display. The following is an example of the
Advanced page of the Numeric Display property sheet.
Scaling <Check Box> Check this option if you want the value of the monitored variable to be displayed in a
scaled manner. The following is the scaling formula.
Note: The Gain and Offset are 32-bit floating point numbers. They have at most 6
significant digits. The rounding and truncation may happen.
Gain The Gain of the scaling formula.
Offset The Offset of the scaling formula.
Range <Check Box> Check this option if you want the numeric display to display the value with a different
Display color when it is below the specified low limit or above the specified high limit.
Variable Range Check this option if the low limit and high limit are specified by the designated
variables at runtime.
Low Limit Specifies the low limit when the Variable Range is not selected.
When the Variable Range is selected, this property specifies the variable that stores
the low limit at runtime. Click to enter an address. Click to select a tag.
High Limit Specifies the high limit when the Variable Range is not selected.
When the Variable Range is selected, this property specifies the variable that stores
the high limit at runtime. Click to enter an address. Click to select a tag.
High Text Color The text color for the high limit.
Color BG Color The shape’s BG color for the high limit.
Low Text Color The text color for the low limit.
Color BG Color The shape’s BG color for the low limit.

7
7.3. Advanced Numeric Displays
7.3.1. Advanced Features

An advanced numeric display provides the following advanced features:
1) You can specify an arithmetic expression or a macro for the object to calculate the display value.
2) You can specify an arithmetic expression or a macro for the object to convert an operator entered value to an output
value.
3) You can specify up to 10 ranges for the object to display.

The following operation options can be added to an advanced numeric display. Select and set the options in the Advanced
Numeric Display property sheet.
Options Description
Range Display The advanced numeric display can support up to 10 fixed ranges or 3 variable ranges. You
can define the text color, BG color, and lower bound for each range. At runtime, the
advanced numeric display displays the value using color settings for the range to which the
value belongs.
Range Check The advanced numeric display will verify the entered value according to the specified
maximum and minimum. If the entered value is not within the allowable range, the value will
not be output. Select and set this option in the Range page.
Note: If the output expression or the output macro is defined, the converted value stored in
the variable $W is verified instead of the entered value.
Touch Operation You can enable and disable the touch operation of the advanced numeric display by the
Control specified bit or the current user level. Select and set this option in the Advanced page.
Timeout The keypad displayed for the advanced numeric display will be closed and the data entry
operation cancelled after the keypad receives no input for the specified time period.
Notification The advanced numeric display will notify the specified bit when it finishes outputting the
entered value. Select and set this option in the Advanced page.
Operator Confirmation The Confirmation box will be displayed when a value is entered for the advanced numeric
display. If the operator selects “Yes” in the Confirmation box, the advanced numeric display
will write the entered value to the specified variable. If the operator selects “No” or the
operator does not respond within the specified time period (Maximum Waiting Time), the
advanced numeric display will cancel the data entry operation.
Operation Logging The time, the entered value, and the predefined operation message will be recorded when
the advanced numeric display outputs the entered value. Select and set this option in the
Advanced page.
Visibility Control You can show and hide the advanced numeric display by the specified bit or the current user
level. Select and set this option in the Visibility page.

47
7.3.3. Settings
You can complete all the settings of an advanced numeric display in the Advanced Numeric Display property sheet. This
sheet contains the following seven pages. Some of the pages appear only when they are needed.
■ General
■ Range
■ Advanced
■ Visibility
■ External Label
■ Display Macro
■ Output Macro

This section describes how to define the general settings for an advanced numeric display. The following is an example of
the General page of the Advanced Numeric Display property sheet.

7
within the screen where the object is located. The format of the IDs for the advanced
numeric displays is ANDnnnn.
Transparent Background Select this option if you want the object to have a transparent background.
Object, , Border Color, BG Color
External Label Check this option if you want the object to have an external label. Set up the external label
in the External Label page.
Data Type The data type of the variables, arithmetic expressions, and macros of the advanced
numeric display. The supported data types include: 16-Bit Unsigned Integer, 32-Bit
Unsigned Integer, 16-Bit Signed Integer, 32-Bit Signed Integer, 16-Bit BCD, 32-Bit BCD,
32-Bit Floating Point, 16-Bit Signed BCD (LMB), 32-Bit Signed BCD (LMB), 16-Bit Signed
BCD (LMD), and 32-Bit Signed BCD (LMD).
Display Type The display type of the advanced numeric display. The following table shows the available
16-Bit Unsigned Integer 16-Bit Unsigned Decimal,
16-Bit Hexadecimal,
16-Bit Octal
32-Bit Unsigned Integer 32-Bit Unsigned Decimal,
32-Bit Hexadecimal,
32-Bit Octal
Display Monitor Select this option so the advanced numeric display will monitor the variable specified in the
Address Monitor Address field and display its value. When this option is selected, you need to
specify the monitored variable.
Expression Select this option so the advanced numeric display will display the result of the arithmetic
expression specified in the Expression field. When this option is selected, you need to
specify the arithmetic expression that calculates the value to be displayed.
Macro Select this option so the advanced numeric display will run the macro defined in the Display
Macro page before displaying the value of the internal variable $D. The macro can decide
the value displayed by saving the desired value in the internal variable $D.
Operator Input Select this option so the advanced numeric display will allow the operator to enter values for
it.
Continued

47
Write Address Specifies the destination variable where the entered value will be written to when the Operator
Input is selected. Click to enter an address for this field. Click to select a tag for this field.
Output Direct Select this option so the advanced numeric display will write the entered value to the destination
variable specified in the Write Address field directly.
Expre- Select this option so the advanced numeric display will write the result of the arithmetic expression
ssion specified in the Expression field. When this option is selected, you need to specify the arithmetic
expression that calculates the value to be output. To use the entered value as an operand in the
expression, specify the internal variable $K for the entered value.
Macro Select this option so the advanced numeric display will run the macro defined in the Output Macro
page before writing the value of the internal variable $W to the destination variable. The macro can
decide the value to be output by saving the desired value in the internal variable $W. To use the
entered value in macro commands as a parameter, specify the internal variable $K for the entered
value.
Fractional Digits When the Display Type is 32-bit Floating Point, this property specifies the number of fractional
digits to be displayed.
fractional digits to be displayed, but also the number of least significant digits to be displayed as the
fractional part. With this feature, an integer can be shown and entered as a fixed point number.
When the Fractional Digits is nonzero, say N, the entered value will be converted to an integer
according to the following formula before being output.
Example 1:
Total Fractional Monitored Displayed
Display Type Justification
Example 2:
Total Fractional Entered Output
Display Type
Continued

7
Option Description
Leading Spaces The leading digits will be displayed as blank characters when they are 0.
7.3.5. Range Settings

This section describes how to define the range settings for an advanced numeric display. The following is an example of
the Range page of the Advanced Numeric Display property sheet.
The following table describes each property in the Range page.

47
Range Range Display Check this option if you want the advanced numeric display to support the range
Display display. The advanced numeric display can support up to 10 fixed ranges or 3
variable ranges. You can define the text color, BG color, and lower bound for
each range. At runtime, the monitored value within a range will be displayed with
the color setting for that range.
Variable Bound Check this option so the lower bounds of range 1 and range 2 will be determined
(3 ranges) at runtime by the variables specified in the Lower Bound fields for Range 1 and
Range 2. The advanced numeric display supports 3 ranges when Variable Bound
is selected.
When Variable Bound is not selected, the advanced numeric display can support
up to 10 ranges. You need to specify the lower bounds for every range except the
lowest range.
Number of Ranges The number of ranges that the advanced numeric display supports.
Range 1 Lower Specifies the lower bound of range 1 when Variable Bound is not selected.
(Highest) Bound When Variable Bound is selected, this property specifies the variable whose
value will be the lower bound of range 1 at runtime.
Text Color The text color for range 1.
BG Color The shape’s BG color for range 1.
Blink Check the item when you want range 1 to be displayed as blinking.
Range 2 Lower Specifies the lower bound of range 2 when Variable Bound is not selected.
Bound When Variable Bound is selected, this property specifies the variable whose
value will be the lower bound of range 2 at runtime.
Text Color The text color for range 2.
BG Color The shape’s BG color for range 2.
Blink Check the item when you want range 2 to be displayed as blinking.
Range 3 Lower Specifies the lower bound of the corresponding range when the range is not the
to Range Bound lowest range.
10 Text Color The text color for the corresponding range.
BG Color The shape’s BG color for the corresponding range.
Blink Check the item when you want the corresponding range to be displayed as
blinking.
Range Range Check Check this option if you want the advanced numeric display to verify the entered
Check value according to the specified minimum and maximum. If the entered value is
not within the allowable range, the entered value will not be output.
Note: If the output expression or the output macro is defined, the converted
value stored in the variable $W is verified instead of the entered value.
Variable Range Check this option so the minimum and maximum will be determined at runtime
by the variables specified in the Minimum and Maximum fields.
Min. Specifies the minimum when the Variable Range is not selected.
When the Variable Range is selected, this property specifies the variable whose
value is the minimum.
Max. Specifies the maximum when the Variable Range is not selected.
When the Variable Range is selected, this property specifies the variable whose
value is the maximum.

7
7.4. Character Entries
You can enter a string for a variable using a character entry. If the target panel is a PC, you can also use this object to enter
a Unicode string.

The following operation options can be added to a character entry. Select and set up the options in the Character Entry
property sheet.
Option Description
Touch Operation You can enable or disable the touch operation of the object by the specified bit or by the
Control current user level. Select and set up this option in the Advanced page.
Timeout If the keypad for data entry receives no input for the specified time period, the data entry
operation will be cancelled.
Notification The Object will notify the specified bit of a successful data entry operation. Select and set up
Operator Confirmation When a character string is entered by the operator, the Confirmation box will be displayed for
the operator’s confirmation. If the operator selects “Yes”, the object will write the entered data
to the specified variable. If the operator selects “No” or the operator does not respond within
the specified time period (Maximum Waiting Time), the data entry operation will be cancelled.
Operation Logging The entered character string and time of data entry will be recorded. Select and set up this
Visibility Control You can show or hide the object by the specified bit or by the current user level. Select and
7.4.2. Settings
You can complete all the settings of a character entry in the Character Entry property sheet. This sheet contains the
■ General
■ Advanced
■ Visibility
■ External Label

47
This section describes how to define the general settings for character entries. The following is an example of the General
page of the Character Entry property sheet.
within the screen where the object is located. The format of the IDs for Character entries is
TEnnnn.
Transparent Background Select this option if you want the object to have a transparent background.
Continued

7
External Label Check this option if you want the object to have an external label. Set up the external label in
the External Label page.
Character Set Select one of the following three character sets to encode characters into a string of code
units
Character Set Description
ASCII (US) Defines 128 characters. Uses 8 or 16 bits per character.
ISO-8859-1 Covers mostly Western European languages. Uses 8 or 16 bits
(Western European) per character.
Unicode Available only when the target panel is a PC. Each character
occupies one word and the code is Unicode.
Write Address Specifies the destination variable where the entered character string will be written to.
Total Characters Specifies the number of characters that the Character entry can display and the destination
variable can receive.
Append a null Check this option so the Character entry will always append a null character to the entered
character character string before outputting it.
Monitor Address Specifies that the monitored variable is the same as the destination variable. With this item
identical to Write checked, you don’t need to specify the monitored variable in the Monitor Address field.
Address
Font The font of the displayed string.
Text Color The color of the displayed string.
Alignment The alignment of the displayed value. There are three types of alignment: Left, Center, and
Right.
Code Type Select one of the following two code types.
Type Description
Byte Each character occupies one byte.
Word Each character occupies one word.
Available only when the character set is ASCII (US) or ISO-8859-1 (Western European).
Data Entry Specifies how to enter a character string for the Character entry at runtime. There are two
options:
Option Description
Pop-up Keypad You can bring up the keypad by pressing the Character entry, and
then enter a character string with the keypad.
On-screen Keypad You can move the cursor by using the function buttons with the
and/or Function operation of “Select Next Data Entry Object” or “Select Previous
Keys Data Entry Object” to select the Character entry. If there is an
on-screen keypad, you can enter a character string for the
Character entry with that keypad.
Note: When the On-screen Keypad and/or Function Keys option is selected, you can only
enter a character string for the Character entry with the input focus. To set the input focus to
the corresponding object, you need to click that object first.
Byte Swap Check this option to display high byte first and then low byte.

47
This section describes how to define the advanced settings for character entries. The following is an example of the
Advanced page.

Touch Enabled by Check this option so the touch operation of the Character entry will be enabled and
Operation Bit disabled by the specified bit.
State
Enabled by Check this item so the touch operation of the Character entry will be enabled and
Enabling
User Level
Show Check this option for the touch operation disabled sign to be displayed on the
Disabled Character entry when the touch operation is disabled.
Sign
Timeout Timeout Check this option so data entry will be cancelled if the numeric keypad does not receive
any input within the specified time.
Timeout Specifies the maximum time that the numeric keypad will wait to receive a new input. If
Time there is no input within the specified time, the Character keypad will be closed and data
entry will be cancelled.
Continued

7
Notification Notification Check this option so the Character entry will notify the specified bit after it finishes
outputting the entered value to the destination variable.
Signal Description
Level Set the specified bit to the specified state.
Operator Operator Check this option if you want the operator to confirm what he/she enters into the
Confirmation Confirmation numeric entry. The Confirmation box will be displayed when a value is entered into
the Character entry. If the operator selects “Yes” in the Confirmation box, the
numeric entry will write the entered value to the specified variable. If the operator
selects “No” or the operator does not respond within the specified time period
(Maximum Waiting Time), the Character entry will cancel the data entry operation.
Maximum Specifies the maximum time that the Character entry will wait for the operator’s
Waiting Time confirmation. Data entry will be cancelled if the operator does not respond within this
time.
Logging Logging when the Character entry outputs the entered value.
2) The entered Character
Message Enter the operation message of the first language here.
Click this button to bring up the Operation Message dialog box so that you can edit
the operation message for all the languages.

47
7.5. Character Displays
You can use a character display to display the string stored in a variable. This object can display Unicode string if the target
panel is a PC.
Note: The difference between a character display and a text object is:
A character display is used either to display text, request text, or both. The text of the Character display is not allowed to be
set at design time but can easily be set at run time. You can specify the text by changing its defined variable.
A text object can be used to create a label at design time, which is a short text that accompanies another control to indicate
its use. The text object cannot be changed at run time.

The following operation option can be added to a character display. Select and set up the option in the Character Display
property sheet.
Options Description
Visibility Control You can show or hide the Character display by the specified bit or by the current user level.
Select and set up this option in the Visibility page.
7.5.2. Settings
You can complete all the settings of a character display in the Character Display property sheet. This sheet contains the
following three pages. Some of the pages appear only when they are needed.
■ General
■ Visibility
■ External Label

7
This section describes how to define the general settings for character displays. The following is an example of the
General page of the Character Display property sheet.
screen where the object is located. The format of the IDs for Character displays is TDnnnn.
Background
Character Set The types of character codes of the string in the monitored variable. You can select ASCII(US)
code or ISO-8859-1(Western European). If the target panel is a PC, the Unicode is also an option.
Used for keypad Check this option if the character display is used to display the input for a custom keypad.
display
Total Characters Specifies the number of characters that the Character display can display.
Code Size The size of each character. You can select Byte or Word.
Byte Swap Check this option to display high byte first and then low byte.

47
7.6. Time Displays
You can use a time display to show the time of the panel.
7.6.1. Settings
You can complete all the settings of a time display in the Time Display property sheet. The following is an example of the
sheet.

screen where the object is located. The format of the IDs for the time displays is TDnnnn.
Background
Format The format of how the time is displayed. There are two formats available.
Format Description
HH:MM HH: 00-23 (hour); MM: 00-59 (minute)
HH:MM:SS HH: 00-23 (hour); MM: 00-59 (minute); SS: 00-59 (second)
Font The font of the text.

Text Color The color of the text.
Alignment The alignment of the text in the object. There are three kinds of alignment available: Left, Center,
and Right.

7
7.7. Date Displays
You can use a date display to show the date of the panel.
7.7.1. Settings
You can complete all the settings of a date display in the Date Display property sheet. The following is an example of the
sheet.

the screen where the object is located. The format of the IDs for the date displays is DDnnnn.
Background
Format The format of how the date is displayed. There are 12 formats available: dd/mm/yy, mm/dd/yy,
yy/mm/dd, dd.mm.yy, mm.dd.yy, yy.mm.dd, dd-mm-yy, mm-dd-yy, yy-mm-dd, dd-MMM-yy,
MMM-dd-yy, and yy-MMM-dd. To change the date display format, choose one from the
drop-down table.
Note: dd: 01-31 (day); mm: 01-12 (month); yy: 00-99 (year); MMM: JAN-DEC (month)
Font The font of the text.
Text Color The color of the text.
Alignment The alignment of the text in the object. There are three kinds of alignment available: Left, Center,
and Right.

47
7.8. Day-of-week Displays
You can use a day-of-week display to show the day-of-week of the panel.
7.8.1. Settings
You can complete all the settings of a day-of-week display in the Day-of-week Display property sheet. This sheet contains
the following two pages.
■ General
■ Text
Note: When using the Text page to specify the text for each day, note that state 0 corresponds to Sunday, state 1
corresponds to Monday, and so on.

This section describes how to define the general settings for a day-of-week display. The following is an example of the
General page of the Day-of-week property sheet.
The following table describes each property in the General

page.
ID The object’s identifier. It is generated
when the object is created. The identifier
is unique within the screen where the
object is located. The format of the IDs for
the day-of-week displays is DWnnnn.
Transparent Select this option if you want the object to
Background have a transparent background.
Shape For details about the following properties,
settings see Section 4.3.4 Setting up the Shape of
an Object. , Border Color,
Pattern, FG Color, BG Color
Day Select a day from 0 to 6 so you can view
and set the Pattern, FG Color, and BG
Color for that day. Day 0 corresponds to
Sunday; day 1 corresponds to Monday,
and so on.

CHAPTER 8
GRAPHS AND CHARTS
8.1. Bar Graphs.................................................................................................... 1

8.1.3. Settings .......................................................................................................................... 3
8.1.5. Forward and Backward Marker Settings ....................................................................... 6
8.1.6. Advanced Settings ......................................................................................................... 8
8.2. Meters ............................................................................................................ 9
8.2.3. Settings ........................................................................................................................ 10
8.2.5. Range Settings ............................................................................................................. 14
8.3. Circular Bar Graphs .................................................................................. 15
8.3.3. Settings ........................................................................................................................ 16
8.4. Line Charts.................................................................................................. 19
8.4.3. Settings ........................................................................................................................ 20
8.4.5. Pen Settings ................................................................................................................. 26
8.4.6. Axis Settings................................................................................................................ 27
8.5. Scatter Charts ............................................................................................. 29
8.5.3. Settings ........................................................................................................................ 30
8.5.5. Pen Settings ................................................................................................................. 35
48
8.1. Bar Graphs

A bar graph shows the value of a monitored variable by displaying a bar with variable length. When the value of the
variable increases or decreases, the length of the bar increases or decreases accordingly. A bar graph can have a scale
and the scale enables you to measure the length of the bar and read the current value of the monitored variable.
There are two bar types that a bar graph can have: a polar bar and a bipolar bar. The polar bar can only move at one end,
but the bipolar bar can move both ends. The bar and the scale can be displayed in any of the following four directions:
Type Upward Downward Leftward Rightward

Polar Bar
(Monitored Value = 60)
Bipolar Bar
(Monitored Value = 60
Middle Point = 50)
A bar graph can also have a scale, forward markers, backward markers and a percentage display.
Major Ticks Sub Divisions
Forward Markers
Backward Markers Axis Percentage Marks

Note:
z The bipolar bar graph does not have forward and backward markers.
z If the bar graph is upward or downward, the scale and forward/backward markers will be located on the left or
right sides.
z If the bar graph is leftward or rightward, the scale and forward/backward markers will be located at the top or
bottom.
8-1 CHAPTER 8 GRAPHS AND CHARTS

8
The following operation options can be added to a bar graph to make it more informative. You need to select and set these
options in the Bar Graph property sheet.
Options Description
Bipolar A bar graph can be configured to display the difference between the monitored value and a specified
Bar value called the middle point. The bar can move at both ends, hence bipolar bar.
Monitored Value
Select and set this option in the General page.

Scale A bar graph can have a scale. Select and set this option in the Scale page.
Forward / The forward/backward markers of a bar graph can have up 12 marks. You can select equilateral triangle,
Backward triangle, diamond, or cone as the mark. The actual number of marks and the value of each mark is
Marker specified at runtime by the forward/backward marker control block. The position of a mark is determined
by that mark’s value. The color of a mark is determined by comparing the monitored value to the mark’s
value.
Monitored Value = 60
The color of a mark:
LT Color = Light Red
EQ Color = Yellow
GT Color = Light Green
Mark’s Value
Select and set Forward Marker option in the F. Marker page.
Select and set Backward Marker option in the B. Marker page.
Range You can specify a low limit and a high limit for a bar graph. The limits can be constants or variables. At
Display runtime, when the monitored value is equal to or below the low limit, the bar graph shows the bar with the
FG color and the BG color set for the low limit. When the monitored value is equal to or above the high
limit, the bar graph shows the bar with the FG color and the BG color set for the high limit.
Low Limit = 20
High Limit = 80
Low BG Color = Light Blue
High BG Color = Light red
Monitored Value
Continued
CHAPTER 8 GRAPHS AND CHARTS 8-2

48
Options Description
Percentage A bar graph can show the current bar length as a percentage of the full bar length.
Display Type Percentage
Polar Bar D / L x 100%
Bipolar Bar Value < Middle Point – D / L x 100%
Value > Middle Point D / L x 100%

Visibility A bar graph can be shown or hidden either by a specified bit or by the current user level. Select and set
Control this option in the Visibility page.
8.1.3. Settings
You can complete all the settings of a bar graph in the Bar Graph property sheet. This sheet contains the following six
pages.
■ General
■ Scale
■ F. Marker
■ B. Marker
■ Advanced
■ Visibility

8
This section describes how to define the general settings for a bar graph.
The above is an example of the General page of the Bar Graph dialog box.
screen where the object is located. The format of the IDs for the bar graphs is BGnnnn.
Shape For details about the following properties, see Section 4.3.1.4 Setting up the Shape of an Object,
settings
External Check this option if you want the object to have an external label. Set up the external label in the
Label External Label page.
Direction Specifies the bar direction for the bar graph.
Data Type The data type of the monitored variable. The supported data types include: 16-Bit Unsigned Integer,
32-Bit Unsigned Integer, 16-Bit Signed Integer, 32-Bit Signed Integer, 16-Bit BCD, 32-Bit BCD, 32-Bit
Floating Point, 16-Bit Signed BCD (LMB), 32-Bit Signed BCD (LMB), 16-Bit Signed BCD (LMD), and
32-Bit Signed BCD (LMD)
Continued

48
Monitor Specifies the variable to be monitored.
Address
Dynamic Check this option so the minimum and maximum of the monitored variable will be specified at runtime.
Range When this option is selected, the minimum and maximum of the marks for the scale of the bar graph
can be specified at runtime as well. The data that specifies the above two ranges should be set and
arranged correctly in a memory block called the dynamic range parameter block. You need to specify
the dynamic range parameter block for the bar graph in the Dynamic Range Parameter Block field.
Dynamic Specifies the variable that stores the dynamic range parameter block for the bar graph when Dynamic
Range
Range is selected. Click to enter an address for this field. Click to select a tag for this field.
Parameter
Block
The following table shows the data arrangements of the parameter block when the data type is 16-bit
and the scale of the bar graph is not dynamic.
Word Parameter
0 The minimum of the monitored variable
1 The maximum of the monitored variable
The following table shows the data arrangement of the parameter block when the data type is 16-bit
and the scale of the bar graph is dynamic.
Word Parameter
and the scale of the bar graph is not dynamic.
Word Parameter
0, 1 The minimum of the monitored variable
2, 3 The maximum of the monitored variable
and the scale of the bar graph is dynamic.
Word Parameter
Min. Specifies the minimum of the monitored variable when Dynamic Range is not selected.
Max. Specifies the maximum of the monitored variable when Dynamic Range is not selected.
Bipolar Bar Check this option for the bar graph to display the difference between the monitored value and the
value specified in the Middle Point field.
Middle Point Specifies the reference value/point for the bipolar bar.
Pie Pattern Select a pattern for the bar graph. The pattern will be used to fill the bar. When the pattern is filled in
the bar, the black part of the pattern is painted with the color specified in the Bar FG Color field, and
the white part of the pattern is painted with the color specified in the Bar BG Color field.
Pie FG Color Select a color for painting the black part of the specified pattern.
Pie BG Color Select a color for painting the white part of the specified pattern.

8
8.1.5. Forward and Backward Marker Settings
This section describes how to define the forward marker and the backward marker settings for a bar graph. The following is
an example of the Forward Marker page.
The following table describes each property in the Forward Marker page and the Backward Marker page.
Number of Marks Specifies the maximum number of marks this marker can support.
Location Select Up or Down for the location of the marker when the bar direction is Leftward or
Rightward. Select Left or Right for the location of the marker when the bar direction is Upward or
Downward.
Forward/Backward Specifies the variable that stores the marker control block.
Marker Control
Block Click to enter an address for this field. Click to select a tag for this field.
The following table shows the data arrangement of the marker control block when the data type
is 16-bit.
Word Description
0 Specifies the actual number of marks that the marker will display.
1 The value of mark 1.
2 The value of mark 2
… …
12 The value of mark 12
The following table shows the data arrangement of the marker control block when the data type
is 32-bit.
Word Description
0,1 Specifies the actual number of marks that the marker will display.
2,3 The value of mark 1.
4,5 The value of mark 2
… …
24,25 The value of mark 12
Note: The data format of the mark values should be the same as that of the monitored variable.
Continued

48
Mark
Style
No. 1 - Specifies the mark style. There are four mark styles:
No. 12 Border Color The border color of the mark.
LT Color The fill color of the mark when the monitored value is less than the mark’s value.
EQ Color The fill color of the mark when the monitored value is equal to the mark’s value.
GT Color The fill color of the mark when the monitored value is greater than the mark’s value.

8
This section describes how to define the advanced settings for the bar graphs and circular bar graphs with the Advanced
page. The following is an example of the Advanced page.
Range Range Display Check this option if you want the object to display the monitored value with different
Display colors when the monitored value is below the specified low limit or above the
specified high limit.
Variable Range Check this option if the low limit and high limit are specified at runtime by the
designated variables.
Low Limit Specifies the low limit when Variable Range is not selected. When Variable Range
is selected, this property specifies the variable whose value is the low limit. Click
to enter an address. Click to select a tag.
High Limit Specifies the high limit when Variable Range is not selected. When Variable Range
is selected, this property specifies the variable whose value is the high limit. Click
to enter an address. Click to select a tag.
High FG Color The bar FG color for the high limit.
Color BG Color The bar BG color for the high limit.
Low FG Color The bar FG color for the low limit.
Color BG Color The bar BG color for the low limit.
Percentage Percentage Check this option so the object will display the percentage that is calculated by the
Display Display following formula:
Percentage = (Value - Min.) / (Max. - Min.) * 100%
If the bipolar bar is used, the percentage formula when Value > Middle Point is:
Percentage = (Value – Middle Point) / (Max. - Middle Point) * 100%
The percentage formula when Value < Middle Point is:
Percentage = -(Middle Point - Value) / (Middle Point - Min.) * 100%
The Value is the current value of the monitored variable. The Max. and Min. define
the value range of the monitored variable and are defined in the General page of
the property sheet.
Text Color Select a color for the percentage display.
Font Select a fixed size font for the percentage display.

48
8.2. Meters

A meter shows the value of a monitored variable by rotating its needle to the appropriate place. When the value of the
variable increases or decreases, the rotation angle of the needle increases or decreases accordingly. A meter can have an
arc/circle scale that enables you to measure the rotation angle of the needle and read the current value for the monitored
variable. A meter can be configured to perform one of the following swing types:
Span and Origin 360° & 90° 360° & 0° 360° & 270° 360° & 180°
Example
Span and Origin 270° & 45° 270° & 315° 270° & 225° 270° & 135°
Example
Span and Origin 180° & 90° 180° & 0° 180° & 270° 180° & 180°
Example
Span and Origin 90° & 90° 90° & 0° 90° & 270° 90° & 180°
Example
Span and Origin 90° & 45° 90° & 315° 90° & 225° 90° & 135°
Example

8
The following operation options can be added to a meter to make it more informative. You need to select and set these
options in the Meter property sheet.
Options Description
Range Display
The meter can display the low range mark and the high range mark along its swing path. The
limits for range marks can be specified at runtime by the designated variables. Select and set this
option in the Range page.
Scale
The meter can have a scale. Select and set this option in the Scale page.
Visibility Control The meter can be shown or hidden either by a specified bit or by the current user level. Select
8.2.3. Settings
You can complete all the settings of a meter in the Meter property sheet. This sheet contains the following four pages.
■ General
■ Range
■ Scale
■ Visibility

48
This section describes how to define the general settings for a meter.
The above is an example of the General page of the Meter property sheet.

8
within the screen where the object is located. The format of the IDs for the meters is Mnnnn.
Picture Picture Check this option if you want to use a picture for the meter’s shape. You can use a picture
Shape Shape to customize your own meter. For example:
+ =
Note: If Picture Shape is checked, Shape…, Border Color and BG Color fields are not
available to be used.
<Drop-down The name of the picture. You can use the drop-down list to select a picture from the picture
List> database.
Click this icon to select a picture file. After selection, the picture of the selected file is
imported and saved in the picture database.
Click this icon to bring up the Select/Import from Library dialog box. Select a picture from a
picture library file. After selection, the selected picture is imported and saved in the picture
database.
Graphical shape For details about the following properties, Section 4.3.1.4 Setting up the Shape of an
settings
Swing Specifies the type of swing. For details, see Section 8.2.1 Basic Operation.
The swing styles on the right are more
space saving because their needles can be
placed outside the shape by changing the
position of Center X or Center Y.
Direction Specifies the direction that the needle moves. Only Clockwise is available.
Data Type The data type of the monitored variable. The supported data types include: 16-Bit Unsigned
Integer, 32-Bit Unsigned Integer, 16-Bit Signed Integer, 32-Bit Signed Integer, 16-Bit BCD,
32-Bit BCD, 32-Bit Floating Point, 16-Bit Signed BCD (LMB), 32-Bit Signed BCD (LMB),
16-Bit Signed BCD (LMD), and 32-Bit Signed BCD (LMD).
Monitor Address Specifies the variable to be monitored.
Continued

48
Dynamic Dynamic Check this option so the minimum and maximum of the monitored variable will be specified
Range Range at runtime. When this option is selected, the minimum and maximum of the marks for the
scale of the meter can be specified at runtime as well. The data that specifies the above two
ranges should be set and arranged correctly in a memory block called the dynamic range
parameter block. You need to specify the dynamic range parameter block for the meter in
the Dynamic Range Parameter Block field.
Dynamic Specifies the variable that stores the dynamic range parameter block for the meter when
Range
Dynamic Range is selected. Click to enter an address for this field. Click to select
Parameter
a tag for this field.
Block
The following table shows the content of the parameter block when the data type is 16-bit
and the scale of the meter is not dynamic.
Word Parameter
and the scale of the meter is dynamic.
Word Parameter
and the scale of the meter is not dynamic.
Word Parameter
and the scale of the meter is dynamic.
Word Parameter
Needle Color Select a color for the needle.
Swing Radius You can adjust the radius of the swing of the needle. This field specifies the offset to be
Adjustment added to the default radius.
Angle You can adjust the span of the swing of the needle. This field specifies the offset to be
added to the default span.
Center X You can adjust the horizontal position for the pivot of the needle. This field specifies the
offset to be added to the default horizontal position.
Center Y You can adjust the vertical position for the pivot of the needle. This field specifies the offset
to be added to the default vertical position.

8
8.2.5. Range Settings
This section describes how to define the range settings for a meter. The following is an example of the Range page of the
Meter property sheet.
The following table describes each property in the Range page.
Range Display Check this option if you want the meter to display the range marks along its swing path.
Variable Range Check this option so the low limit and high limit for the range marks will be specified at runtime by
the designated variables.
Low Limit Specifies the low limit of the low range mark when Variable Range is not selected.
When Variable Range is selected, this property specifies the variable whose value is the low limit of
the low range mark at runtime. Click to enter an address for this field. Click to select a tag
for this field.
High Limit Specifies the high limit of the high range mark when Variable Range is not selected.
When Variable Range is selected, this property specifies the variable whose value is the high limit of
the high range mark at runtime. Click to enter an address for this field. Click to select a tag
for this field.
Low Color The color of the low range mark.
High Color The color of the high range mark.

48
8.3. Circular Bar Graphs

A circular bar graph shows the value of a monitored variable by displaying a circular bar with variable length. When the
value of the variable increases or decreases, the length of the circular bar increases or decreases accordingly. A circular
bar graph can have a circular scale and the scale enables you to measure the length of the bar and read the current value
of the monitored variable. The following table lists the supported styles of circular bar graphs.
Span and Origin 360° & 90° 360° & 0° 360° & 270° 360° & 180°
Example
Span and Origin 270° & 45° 270° & 315° 270° & 225° 270° & 135°
Example
Span and Origin 180° & 90° 180° & 0° 180° & 270° 180° & 180°
Example
Span and Origin 90° & 90° 90° & 0° 90° & 270° 90° & 180°
Example
Span and Origin 90° & 45° 90° & 315° 90° & 225° 90° & 135°
Example

8
The following operation options can be added to a circular bar graph to make it more informative. You need to select and
set up these options in the Circular Bar Graph property sheet.
Options Description
Range Display You can specify a low limit and a high limit for the object. The limits can be constants or variables.
At runtime, when the monitored value is below the low limit, the object shows the bar with the FG
color and the BG color set for the low limit. When the monitored value is above the high limit, the
object shows the bar with the FG color and the BG color set for the high limit.
Percentage The object can show the current bar length as a percentage of the full bar length.
Display

Scale The circular bar graph can have a circular scale. Select and set up this option in the Scale page.
and set up this option in the Visibility page.
8.3.3. Settings
You can complete all the settings of a circular bar graph in the Circular Bar Graph property sheet. This sheet contains the
following four pages.
■ General
■ Scale
■ Advanced
■ Visibility

48
This section describes how to define the general settings for a circular bar graph.
The above is an example of the General page of the Circular Bar Graph property sheet.
screen where the object is located. The format of the IDs for the circular bar graphs is PGnnnn.
Shape settings For details about the following properties, Section 4.3.1.4 Setting up the Shape of an Object.

Style Specifies the style of the circular bar graph. For details, see Section 8.3.1 Basic Operations.
Direction Specifies the progress direction of the circular bar graph. Only Clockwise is available.
Data Type The data type of the monitored variable. The supported data types include: 16-Bit Unsigned Integer,
32-Bit Unsigned Integer, 16-Bit Signed Integer, 32-Bit Signed Integer, 16-Bit BCD, 32-Bit BCD, and
32-Bit Floating Point.
Continued

8
Monitor Specifies the variable to be monitored.
Address
Dynamic Check this option so the minimum and maximum of the monitored variable will be specified at runtime.
Range When this option is selected, the minimum and maximum of the marks of the scale of the circular bar
graph can be specified at runtime as well. The data that specifies the above two ranges should be set
and arranged correctly in a memory block called the dynamic range parameter block. You need to
specify the dynamic range parameter block for the circular bar graph in the Dynamic Range
Parameter Block field.
Dynamic Specifies the variable that stores the dynamic range parameter block for the circular bar graph when
Range
Dynamic Range is selected. Click to enter an address for this field. Click to select a tag for
Parameter
this field.
Block
The following table shows the content of the parameter block when the data type is 16-bit and the
scale of the circular bar graph is not dynamic.
Word Parameter
scale of the circular bar graph is dynamic.
Word Parameter
scale of the circular bar graph is not dynamic.
Word Parameter
scale of the circular bar graph is dynamic.
Word Parameter
Bar Pattern Select a pattern for the circular bar graph. The pattern will be used to fill the arc/circular strip of the
circular bar graph. When the pattern fills in the circular bar graph, the black part of the pattern is
painted with the color specified in the Bar FG Color field, and the white part of the pattern is painted
with the color specified in the Bar BG Color field.
Bar FG Color Select a color for painting the black part of the specified pattern.
Bar BG Color Select a color for painting the white part of the specified pattern.
Back Color Select a color as the background color for the arc/circular strip of the circular bar graph.

48
8.4. Line Charts
A line chart displays a set of data by drawing a data point for each datum and drawing a line that connects all the data
points in sequence. The vertical position of a data point is determined by the value of the associated datum. The horizontal
position of a data point is determined by the order of the associated datum in the data set.
A line chart can display up to 8 sets of data. The following example shows a line chart that displays 3 sets of data.
A line chart can provide a cursor for you to select desired data points. The cursor of the line chart is a vertical line segment.
The user can move the cursor horizontally within a line chart to the desired data point(s). The values of the selected data
points can be displayed and output to an internal variable called Cursor Data Receiving Buffer.
Cursor Selected data points
Cursor data
receiving buffer The sequence number of the cursor
selected data in the data set.
Output Cursor value for data set 1
Cursor value for data set 3

8
The following operation option can be added to a line chart. Select and set the option in the Line Chart dialog box.
Options Description
Visibility Control You can show and hide a line chart by a specified bit or the current user level. Select and set this
option in the Visibility page.
8.4.3. Settings
You can complete all the settings of a line chart in the Line Chart dialog box. This dialog box contains the following four
pages.
■ General
■ Pen
■ XY Axis
■ Visibility

48
This section describes how to define the general settings for a line chart. The following is an example of the General page
of the Line Chart property sheet.
within the screen where the object is located. The format of the IDs for the line charts is
LCnnnn.
Shape settings For details about the following properties, see Section 4.3.1.4 Setting up the Shape of an
Chart BG Color Select a color for the background of the chart.
Data Type The type of the data that the line chart will display. The supported data types include: 16-Bit
Unsigned Integer, 32-Bit Unsigned Integer, 16-Bit Signed Integer, 32-Bit Signed Integer,
16-Bit BCD, 32-Bit BCD, 32-Bit Floating Point, 16-Bit Signed BCD (LMB), 32-Bit Signed BCD
Continued

8
Read Trigger The bit variable that will trigger the line chart to read and display data. The bit variable triggers
the line chart when its state changes from off to on. Click to enter an address for this
field. Click to select a tag for this field.
Read Address
The variable whose data is to be read and displayed. Click to enter an address for this
field. Click to select a tag for this field.
The following tables show the data arrangements of the variable.
Data Type: 16-bit; Number of Data Sets: 1

Word Description
0 Actual number of data points
1 Data point 0
2 Data point 1
… …
n+1 Data point n

Word Description
1 Data point 0; Data set 1
… …
2n+1 Data point n; Data set 1

Word Description
… …
Continued

48
Read Address Data Type: 32-bit; Number of Data Sets: 1
Word Description
0,1 Actual number of data points
2,3 Data point 0
4,5 Data point 1
… …
2n+2, 2n+3 Data point n

Word Description
2,3 Data point 0; Data set 1
… …
4n+2, 4n+3 Data point n; Data set 1

Word Description
… …
Number of Data Sets Specifies how many data sets the line chart will read. The line chart displays one line for each
data set. A line chart can display up to 8 lines.
Maximum Number of Specifies the maximum number of data points that the line chart will read for every data set. A
Data Points Per Data line chart can display up to 255 data points for one data set.
Set Note: The actual number of data points for every data set must be specified at runtime. The
actual number must not exceed the maximum number.
Continued

8
Point Distribution Select one of the following methods to distribute the data points of a data set:
Method Description
Maximum Points The data points of a data set are evenly distributed across the X
axis of the line chart based on the maximum number of data
points for every data set. Therefore, the space between two
adjacent data points is fixed.
Actual Points The data points of a data set are evenly distributed across the X
axis of the line chart based on the actual number of data points.
When the number of actual data points decreases, the space
between two adjacent data points increases.
Direction Specifies the direction that the line chart draws the data points.
Show Mark Check this option so the line chart will put a square mark on every data point.
Show Line Check this option so the line chart will display a line connecting all the data points of a data
set in sequence.
Clear Trigger The bit variable that will trigger the line chart to clear its content when its state changes from
off to on. Click to enter an address for this field. Click to select a tag for this field.
Cursor Show Check this option so the line chart will display a cursor. You can touch and drag the cursor to
Cursor the data point(s) that you want to select.
Cursor Select a color for the cursor.
Color
Value Select a font for displaying the values of the selected data point(s).
Display
Font
Cursor The variable that will receive the value(s) of the selected data point(s). It must be a piece of
Data the internal memory.
Receiving
Buffer Click to enter an address for this field. Click to select a tag for this field.
The following table shows the data arrangement of the buffer when the data type is 16-bit.
Word Description
0 The sequence number of the cursor selected data in the data set
1 The value of the selected data point of data set 1.
… …
The following table shows the data arrangement of the buffer when the data type is 32-bit.
Word Description
0,1 The sequence number of the cursor selected data in the data set
2,3 The value of the selected data point of data set 1.
… …
Continued

48
Dynamic Dynamic Check this option so the minimum and the maximum of the pen for each data set will be
Range Range specified at runtime. When this option is selected, the minimum and maximum of the marks
for the X axis and Y axis can be specified at runtime too. The data that specifies the above
two ranges should be set and arranged correctly in a memory block called the dynamic range
parameter block. You need to specify the dynamic range parameter block in the Dynamic
Range Parameter Block field.
Dynamic Specifies the variable that stores the dynamic range parameter block for the line chart when
Range
the Dynamic Range is selected. Click to enter an address for this field. Click to
Parameter
select a tag for this field.
Block
The following table shows the data arrangement of the parameter block when the data type is
16-bit.
Word Description
0,1 The minimum of the mark for the X axis; 32-bit integer number
2,3 The maximum of the mark for the X axis; 32-bit integer number
4,5 The minimum of the mark for the Y axis; 32-bit integer number
6,7 The maximum of the mark for the Y axis; 32-bit integer number
8 The minimum for pen #1; 16-bit integer number or 16-bit unsigned integer
number
9 The maximum for pen #1; (Same as above)
10 The minimum for pen #2; (Same as above)
… …
22 The minimum for pen #8; (Same as above)
The following table shows the data arrangement of the parameter block when the data type is
32-bit.
Word Description
8,9 The minimum for pen #1; 32-bit integer number, 32-bit unsigned integer
number, or 32-bit floating point number
10,11 The maximum for pen #1; (Same as above)
12,13 The minimum for pen #2; (Same as above)
… …
36,37 The minimum for pen #8; (Same as above)

8
8.4.5. Pen Settings
This section describes how to define the pens for the line charts. The following is an example of the Pen page.
The following table describes each property in the Pen page. Note that pen #1 is for data set 1; pen #2 is for data set 2;
and so on.
Pen #1 Dynamic Check this option so the minimum and the maximum of the associated data set will be
to Pen Range specified at runtime. This option is available when the Dynamic Range option in the
#8 General page is selected.
Min. The minimum of the associated data set. This property is available when the Dynamic
Range option is not selected.
Max. The maximum of the associated data set. This property is available when the Dynamic
Mark Size Select a size for the data point mark. The selection is valid when the Show Mark option in
the General page is selected.
Line Style Select a style for the connecting lines. The selection is valid when the Show Line option in
Color Select a color for the connecting lines.
Show Value Select one of the following methods for displaying the selected data point value.
Show Value Description
(None) Does not display the data point value.
Original Displays the data point value without modification.
Scaled Displays the corresponding Y axis value of the data point.
The selection is valid when the Show Cursor option in the General page is selected.

48
8.4.6. Axis Settings
This section describes how to define the X axis and the Y axis for the line charts and the scatter charts.
The following is an example of the Axis page.

8
The following table describes each property in the Axis page.
X Show Ticks Check this option if you want the X axis to have ticks.
Axis Show Y-axis Grid Select this option if you want the X axis to have vertical grids.
Axis/Tick Color Select a color for the X axis and its ticks.
Grid Color Select a color for the vertical grids.
Number of Major The number of major divisions for the X axis. The minimum you can specify is one.
Divisions
Number of The number of divisions between two adjacent major ticks. The minimum you can
Sub-divisions specify is one.
Mark Show Marks Check this option if you want the major ticks to have marks.
Dynamic Range Check this option if you want the minimum and maximum of the marks to be controlled
by the dynamic range parameter block of the associated object at runtime.
Min. The minimum of the marks. It is a 32-bit integer.
Max. The maximum of the marks. It is a 32-bit integer.
Fractional Digits The number of fractional digits for the marks. For example, when the Maximum is
5000, the Total Digits is 4, and the Fractional Digits is 2, the mark for the Maximum will
be 50.00.
Y Show Ticks Check this option if you want the Y axis to have ticks.
Axis Show X-axis Grid Select this option if you want the Y axis to have horizontal grids.
Axis/Tick Color Select a color for the Y axis and its ticks.
Grid Color Select a color for the horizontal grids.
Number of Major The number of major divisions for the Y axis. The minimum you can specify is one.
Divisions
Min. The minimum of the marks. You can specify a 32-bit signed integer.
Max. The maximum of the marks. You can specify a 32-bit signed integer.
be 50.00.

48
8.5. Scatter Charts
A scatter chart displays a set of data by drawing a data point for each datum and drawing a line that connects all the data
points in sequence. Each datum is a coordinate that contains an X value and a Y value. The vertical position of a data point
is determined by the X value of the associated datum. The horizontal position of a data point is determined by the Y value
of the associated datum.
A scatter chart can display up to 8 sets of data. The following example shows a scatter chart that displays 3 sets of data.

The following operation option can be added to a scatter chart. Select and set the option in the Scatter Chart dialog box.
Options Description
Visibility Control You can show and hide a scatter chart by a specified bit or the current user level. Select and set this
option in the Visibility page.

8
8.5.3. Settings
You can complete all the settings of a scatter chart in the Scatter Chart dialog box. This dialog box contains the following
four pages.
■ General
■ Pen
■ XY Axis
■ Visibility

48
This section describes how to define the general settings for a scatter chart. The following is an example of the General
page of the Scatter Chart property sheet.

within the screen where the object is located. The format of the IDs for the scatter charts is
SCnnnn.
Shape settings For details about the following properties, see Section 4.3.1.4 Setting up the Shape of an
Chart BG Color Select a color for the background of the char.
Data Type The type of the data that the scatter chart will display. The supported data types include:
16-Bit Unsigned Integer, 32-Bit Unsigned Integer, 16-Bit Signed Integer, 32-Bit Signed
Integer, 16-Bit BCD, 32-Bit BCD, 32-Bit Floating Point, 16-Bit Signed BCD (LMB), 32-Bit
Signed BCD (LMB), 16-Bit Signed BCD (LMD), and 32-Bit Signed BCD (LMD).
Read Trigger The bit variable that will trigger the scatter chart to read and display data. The bit variable
triggers the scatter chart when its state changes from off to on. Click to enter an address
for this field. Click to select a tag for this field.

8
Read Address
The variable whose data is to be read and displayed. Click to enter an address for this field. Click
to select a tag for this field.
The following tables show the data arrangements of the variable.
Word Description
1 X value of data point 0
2 Y value of data point 0
3 X value of data point 1
4 Y value of data point 1
… …
2n+1 X value of data point n
2n+2 Y value of data point n

Word Description
1 X value of data point 0; Data set 1
2 Y value of data point 0; Data set 1
… …
4n+3 X value of data point n; Data set 2
4n+4 Y value of data point n; Data set 2

Word Description Word Description
0 Actual number of data points 11 X value of data point 0; Data set 6
1 X value of data point 0; Data set 1 12 Y value of data point 0; Data set 6
2 Y value of data point 0; Data set 1 13 X value of data point 0; Data set 7
8 Y value of data point 0; Data set 4 … …
9 X value of data point 0; Data set 5 16n+15 X value of data point n; Data set 8
10 Y value of data point 0; Data set 5 16n+16 Y value of data point n; Data set 8
Continued

48
Read Address Data Type: 32-bit; Number of Data Sets: 1
0,1 Actual number of data points 8,9 Y value of data point 1
2,3 X value of data point 0 … …
4,5 Y value of data point 0 4n+2, 4n+3 X value of data point n
6,7 X value of data point 1 4n+4, 4n+5 Y value of data point n

0,1 Actual number of data points 12,13 Y value of data point 1; Data set 1
2,3 X value of data point 0; Data set 1 14,15 X value of data point 1; Data set 2
4,5 Y value of data point 0; Data set 1 16,17 Y value of data point 1; Data set 2
6,7 X value of data point 0; Data set 2 … …
8,9 Y value of data point 0; Data set 2 8n+6, X value of data point n; Data set 2
8n+7
10,11 X value of data point 1; Data set 1 8n+8, Y value of data point n; Data set 2
8n+9

0,1 Actual number of data points 22,23 X value of data point 0; Data set 6
2,3 X value of data point 0; Data set 1 24,25 Y value of data point 0; Data set 6
4,5 Y value of data point 0; Data set 1 26,27 X value of data point 0; Data set 7
16,17 Y value of data point 0; Data set 4 … …
18,19 X value of data point 0; Data set 5 32n+30, X value of data point n; Data set 8
32n+31
20,21 Y value of data point 0; Data set 5 32n+32, Y value of data point n; Data set 8
32n+33
Number of Specifies how many data sets the scatter chart will display. A scatter chart can display up to 8 sets of
Data Sets data.
Maximum Specifies the maximum number of data points that the scatter chart will display for every data set. A
Number of scatter chart can display up to 255 data points for one data set.
Data Points Note: The actual number of data points for every data set is specified at runtime. The actual number
Per Data Set must not exceed the maximum number.
Show Mark Check this option so the scatter chart will show a square mark on every data point.
Show Line Check this option so the scatter chart will display a line between two adjacent data points of a data
set.
Clear Trigger The bit variable that triggers the scatter chart to clear its content when its state changes from off to
on. Click to enter an address for this field. Click to select a tag for this field.
Continued

8
Cursor Show Check this option so the scatter chart will display a cursor. You can touch and drag the
Cursor cursor within the chart.
Cursor Color Select a color for the cursor.
Dynamic Dynamic Check this option so the minimum and the maximum for the X and Y values of each data
Range Range set can be specified at runtime. When this option is selected, the minimum and maximum of
the marks for the X axis and Y axis can be specified at runtime as well. The data that
specifies the above two ranges should be set and arranged correctly in a memory block
called the dynamic range parameter block. You need to specify the dynamic range
parameter block in the Dynamic Range Parameter Block field.
Dynamic Specifies the variable that stores the dynamic range parameter block for the line chart
Range when Dynamic Range is selected.
Parameter
The following table shows the data arrangement of the parameter block when the data type
is 16-bit.
Word Description
8 The minimum of X values for pen #1; 16-bit integer number or 16-bit
unsigned integer number
9 The maximum of X values for pen #1; (Same as above)
10 The minimum of Y values for pen #1; (Same as above)
11 The maximum of Y values for pen #1; (Same as above)
12 The minimum of X values for pen #2; (Same as above)
13 The maximum of X values for pen #2; (Same as above)
… …
38 The minimum of Y values for pen #8; (Same as above)
39 The maximum of Y values for pen #8; (Same as above)
The following table shows the data arrangement of the parameter block when the data type
is 32-bit.
Word Description
8,9 The minimum of X values for pen #1; 32-bit integer number, 32-bit
unsigned integer number, or 32-bit floating point number
10,11 The maximum of X values for pen #1; (Same as above)
12,13 The minimum of Y values for pen #1; (Same as above)
14,15 The maximum of Y values for pen #1; (Same as above)
… …
64,65 The minimum of X values for pen #8; (Same as above)
66,67 The maximum of X values for pen #8; (Same as above)
68,69 The minimum of Y values for pen #8; (Same as above)
70,71 The maximum of Y values for pen #8; (Same as above)

48
8.5.5. Pen Settings
This section describes how to define the pens for the scatter charts. The following is an example of the Pen page.
The following table describes each property in the Pen page. Note that pen #1 is for data set 1; pen #2 is for data set 2;
and so on.
Pen #1 Dynamic Check this option so the minimum and maximum for the X and Y values of the associated
to Pen Range data set will be specified at runtime. This option is available when the Dynamic Range option
#8 in the General page is selected.
X Min. The X minimum of the associated data set. This property is available when the Dynamic
X Max. The X maximum of the data value of the associated data set. This property is available when
the Dynamic Range option is not selected.
Y Min. The Y minimum of the associated data set. This property is available when the Dynamic
Y Max. The Y minimum of the associated data set. This property is available when the Dynamic
Mark Size Select a size for the data point mark. The selection is valid when the Show Mark option in the
General page is selected.

CHAPTER 9
ANIMATED OBJECTS
9.1. Pipelines......................................................................................................... 1
9.1.3. Settings .......................................................................................................................... 3
9.1.5. Pipe Settings .................................................................................................................. 6
9.2. Dynamic Circles............................................................................................ 7
9.2.2. Settings .......................................................................................................................... 7
9.2.4. Specifying Colors for Dynamic Rectangles and Circles ............................................. 10
9.3. Dynamic Rectangles ................................................................................... 12
9.3.2. Settings ........................................................................................................................ 12
9.4. GIF Displays................................................................................................ 16
9.4.2. Settings ........................................................................................................................ 16
9.5. Picture Displays .......................................................................................... 19
9.5.3. Settings ........................................................................................................................ 19
9.6. Animated Graphics .................................................................................... 21
9.6.2. Settings ........................................................................................................................ 21
9.6.4. GIF Settings ................................................................................................................. 29
9.6.5. Path Settings ................................................................................................................ 30
49
9.1. Pipelines
A pipeline is composed of L/T/Cross connectors and pipes. With the software, you can create a pipeline easily and
efficiently. You can also control a pipeline to change color, blink, and/or show the flow effect dynamically at runtime.
The following is a sample of a pipeline with the flow effect:
Flow Effect
Up T Connector
Left T Connector
L Connector
Cross Connector Pipe
To draw a pipeline, you need to do the following:
1. In the Object menu or Object toolbar, click Pipeline to draw a pipeline.

2. Move the cursor onto the screen where you want to draw a pipeline and click the position for the start point of the
pipeline.
3. Continue clicking on the screen to place as many L connectors needed for the pipes in the pipeline.
4. Right-click to complete the pipeline.
5. Drag one blue handle on the boundary of the pipeline at a time to resize the pipeline.
6. Drag one blue or black handle on the pipeline at a time to adjust the position and length of the selected pipe of the
pipeline. The pipe or connector with black handles represents the selected pipe or connector.
The picture on the left shows the handles of a pipeline.

The blue handles on the boundary of the pipeline are for
Boundary resizing the entire pipeline. The blue or black handles on
the pipeline are for moving the vertices of the selected
pipe.
Position the mouse pointer over one of the handles.

When the cursor changes to or or or , drag
the handle until the pipeline is the shape and size you
want.
Selected Pipe
9-1 CHAPTER 9 ANIMATED OBJECTS

9
7. Right-click anywhere on the pipeline and use the Insert Connector command on the object pop-up menu to insert a
new T/ Cross connector to the pipeline. Alternatively, right-click the existing connector or pipe of the pipeline and use
the Delete Pipe Segment command on the object pop-up menu to delete the connector and its connected pipe.
Add an Up/Down T or Cross connector to the specified position on the horizontal pipe.
Insert Connector Add a Left/Right T or Cross connector to the specified position on the vertical pipe
Delete a selected pipe segment and its successor.
Delete Pipe
Segment
CHAPTER 9 ANIMATED OBJECTS 9-2

49
The following operation option can be added to a pipeline. Select and set up the option in the Pipeline property sheet.
Options Description
Visibility You can show and hide a pipeline by a specified bit or the current user level. Select and set up this
Control option in the Visibility page.
9.1.3. Settings
You can complete all the settings of a pipeline in the Pipeline property sheet. This sheet contains the following three pages.
■ General
■ Pipe
■ Visibility

This section describes how to define the general settings for the pipelines. The following is an example of the General
page of the Pipeline property sheet.

9
pipelines is PLnnnn.
Type The type of the pipeline. There are five types available:
Type Example
2D Type 1
2D Type 2
2D Type 3
3D Type 1
3D Type 2
Shading Select a shading method when the Type is “3D Type 1” or “3D Type 2”. There are
three shading methods available:

Diameter Specifies the diameter of the pipeline.
Border Color Specifies the border color of the pipeline.
Body/Content Color Specifies the body or content color of the pipeline.
Flow Effect On/Off Control Check this option if you want to enable or disable the flow effect for the pipeline at
runtime. The flow effect will be enabled when bit 3 of the control word is on.
Continued

49
Body/Content <Check Box> Check this option if you want to control the body/content color of the pipeline at
Color runtime. The variable that controls the pipeline is called the control word and is
Changeable specified in the Address field.
View Color Select a color so you can view the pipeline painted with that color.
View Color Painted With
0 Body/Content Color
1 Body/Content Color #2
2 Body/Content Color #3
Body/Content Select a color as the second body/content color for the pipeline. This color will be
Color #2 used to paint the pipeline when bit 0 of the control word is on.
Body/Content Select a color as the third body/content color for the pipeline. This color will be used
Color #3 to paint the pipeline when bit 1 of the control word is on.
Blink On/Off Check this option if you want the pipeline to blink at runtime. The pipeline will blink
Control when bit 2 of the control word is on.
Control Word Size Select Word or Double Word for the size of the control word.
Address Specifies the variable that controls the pipeline.
The following table shows the bit assignment data of the variable:
Bit Assignment
0 Shows body/content color #2 when this bit is on
1 Shows body/content color #3 when this bit is on
2 Blinks when this bit is on
3 Shows the flow effect when this bit is on
Flow Effect Default Select a set of symbols as the default symbols for the flow effect. There are 14
Symbols available sets:
Click to make all pipes of the pipeline use the default

symbols for the flow effect.
Default Color Select a color as the default color for the flow symbols.
Click to make all pipes of the pipeline use the default color for
the flow symbols.
Default Specifies the length ratio between pipe and flow effect as the default length ratio.
Length
Ratio(%) Click to make all pipes of the pipeline use the default length
ratio for the flow effect.

9
9.1.5. Pipe Settings
This section describes how to define the pipes for the pipelines. The following is an example of the Pipe page.
Select a pipe here by clicking it
View and edit the property of

the selected pipe here
The following table describes each property in the Pipe page.
Pipe Type Specifies the type of the selected pipe.
X1 The horizontal coordinate of the upper-left corner of the selected pipe.
Y1 The vertical coordinate of the upper-left corner of the selected pipe.
X2 The horizontal coordinate of the lower-right corner of the selected pipe.
Y2 The vertical coordinate of the lower-right corner of the selected pipe.
Flow <Check Box> Select this option if you want the selected pipe to show the flow effect.
Effect
Symbol Select a symbol for the flow effect.
Color Select a color for the flow symbol
Length Ratio(%) Specifies the length ratio between pipe and flow effect.

49
9.2. Dynamic Circles
You can change the size, position, and/or color of a dynamic circle at runtime.

The following operation option can be added to a dynamic circle. Select and set up the option in the Dynamic Circle
property sheet.
Options Description
Visibility Control You can show and hide a dynamic circle by a specified bit or the current user level. Select
9.2.2. Settings
You can complete all the settings of a dynamic circle in the Dynamic Circle property sheet. This sheet contains the
following two pages.
■ General
■ Visibility

9
This section describes how to define the general settings for dynamic circles. The following is an example of the General
page of the Dynamic Circle property sheet.
dynamic circles is DCnnnn.
Data Type The data type of the variable that controls the dynamic circle. The supported data
types include: 16-Bit Unsigned Integer, 32-Bit Unsigned Integer, 16-Bit Signed
Integer, 32-Bit Signed Integer, 16-Bit BCD, and 32-Bit BCD.
Continued

49
Monitor Address Specifies the variable that controls the dynamic circle.
The following table shows the data arrangement of the variable.
Data Type 16-Bit Unsigned Int. 32-Bit Unsigned Int.
16-Bit Signed Int. 32-Bit Signed Int.
Controllable 16-Bit BCD 32-Bit BCD
Center
Radius W0 FG Color W0,1 FG Color
FG Color
Center
Radius W0 Radius W0,1 Radius
FG Color
Center
W0 Radius W0,1 Radius
Radius
W1 FG Color W2,3 FG Color
FG Color
Center
W0 X W0,1 X
Radius
W1 Y W2,3 Y
FG Color
Center W0 X W0,1 X
Radius W1 Y W2,3 Y
FG Color W2 FG Color W4,5 FG Color
Center W0 X W0,1 X
Radius W1 Y W2,3 Y
FG Color W2 Radius W4,5 Radius
W0 X W0,1 X
Center
W1 Y W2,3 Y
Radius
W2 Radius W4,5 Radius
FG Color
Note: About color values, see Section 9.2.4.

Controllable Center Check this option if you want to control the center.
Radius Check this option if you want to control the radius.
FG Color Check this option if you want to control the FG color. This option is available when
the Circle is Solid and the Pattern is not solid white.
Circle Solid <Check Box> Check this option if you want the dynamic circle to be filled with the selected
pattern.
Pattern Select a pattern for filling the dynamic circle.
FG Color Select a color to paint the black part of the pattern. This item is available when the
Pattern is not solid white.
BG Color Select a color to paint the white part of the pattern.
Border <Check Box> Check this option if you want the dynamic circle to have a border.
Border Color The border color.

9
9.2.4. Specifying Colors for Dynamic Rectangles and Circles
9.2.4.1. 64K-color Models
64K-color HMI models use one word to specify a color. The color word contains the three color components: red, green,
and blue. The format to store the three color components of a color is described below.
Bit 0-4: 5 bits to store the blue component

Bit 5-10: 6 bits to store the green component
Bit 11-15: 5 bits to store the red component
Example
Color Red Green Blue Hex. Value Decimal Value
Black 0 0 0 0000H 0
Blue 0 0 16 0010H 16
Green 0 32 0 0400H 1024
Cyan 0 32 16 0410H 1040
Red 16 0 0 8000H 32768
Magenta 16 0 16 8010H 32784
Brown 16 32 0 8400H 33792
Dark gray 16 32 16 8410H 33808
Gray 24 48 24 C618H 50712
Light blue 0 0 31 001FH 31
Light green 0 63 0 07E0H 2016
Light cyan 0 63 31 07FFH 2047
Light red 31 0 0 F800H 63488
Light magenta 31 0 31 F81FH 63519
Yellow 31 63 0 FFE0H 65504
White 31 63 31 FFFFH 65535

49
9.2.4.2. 256-color Models
The following table lists the color index values used by 256-color HMI models. You can use the color index values to
specify the desired colors for your application.
Color Color Color

Index Color Index Color Index Color
Value Value Value
0 Black 84 Autumn Orange 159 Chalk
1 Blue; 53% Blue 85 Light Orange 166 Deep Blue
2 Red; 53% Red 88 Deep Navy Blue 172 Deep River
3 Green; 53% Green 91 Grass Green 174 Twilight Blue
4 Magenta; 53% Magenta 94 Deep Purple 177 Turquoise
5 Cyan; 53% Cyan 96 Moss Green 178 Purple
6 Brown; 53% Yellow 97 Kentucky Green 179 Majestic Purple
7 Light blue 103 Army Green 180 Twilight Violet
8 Gray; 50% Black 107 Crimson 182 Light Blue Green
9 Light red 109 Khaki 186 Violet
10 Light green 110 Dull Green 187 Pale Purple
11 Light magenta 113 Regal red 189 Ghost Green
12 Light gray; 20% Black 117 Moon Green 193 Pink
13 Light cyan 118 Neon Red 194 Faded Pink
14 Yellow 120 Tropical Pink 195 Pale Yellow
15 White 121 Peach 200 Sky Blue
23 Murky Green 123 Light Yellow 209 Deep Azure
29 Walnut 125 Navy Blue 210 Electric Blue
34 Ruby red 130 Storm Blue 211 Baby Blue
39 Chartreuse 132 Desert Blue 214 Blue Purple
41 Brick Red 134 Sea Green 216 Blue Violet
48 Orange 137 Grape 217 Pastel Blue
50 Deep Yellow 139 Ocean Green 219 Ice Blue
54 Forest Green 142 Deep Violet 221 Neon Purple
62 Spring Green 144 Dusty Plum 222 Light Purple
65 Dark Brown 146 Faded Green 223 Easter Purple
66 Olive Drab 147 Mint Green 224 Powder Blue
67 Avocado Green 149 Deep Rose 229 Light Violet
73 Olive 150 Dusty Rose
74 Martian Green 155 Hot Pink
78 Red Brown 156 Deep Pink
79 Gold 157 Soft Pink
80 Banana Yellow 158 Sand

9
9.3. Dynamic Rectangles
You can change the size, position, and/or color of a dynamic rectangle at runtime.

The following operation option can be added to a dynamic rectangle. Select and set up the option in the Dynamic
Rectangle property sheet.
Options Description
Visibility Control You can show and hide a dynamic rectangle by a specified bit or the current user level. Select
9.3.2. Settings
You can complete all the settings of a dynamic rectangle in the Dynamic Rectangle property sheet. This sheet contains the
■ General
■ Visibility

49
This section describes how to define the general settings for dynamic rectangles. The following is an example of the
General page of the Dynamic Rectangle property sheet.
the screen where the object is located. The format of the IDs for the dynamic rectangles is
DRnnnn.
Data Type The data type of the variable that controls the dynamic rectangle. The supported data types
include: 16-Bit Unsigned Integer, 32-Bit Unsigned Integer, 16-Bit Signed Integer, 32-Bit Signed
Integer, 16-Bit BCD, and 32-Bit BCD.
Continued

9
Monitor Address Specifies the variable that controls the dynamic rectangle.
field.
The following table shows the data arrangement of the monitored variable.
Controllable 16-Bit BCD 32-Bit BCD
Position
Size W0 FG Color W0,1 FG Color
FG Color
Position
W0 Width W0,1 Width
Size
W1 Height W2,3 Height
FG Color
Position W0 Width W0,1 Width

Size W1 Height W2,3 Height
Position
W0 X W0,1 X
Size
W1 Y W2,3 Y
FG Color
Position W0 X W0,1 X
Size W1 Y W2,3 Y
W0 X W0,1 X
Position
W1 Y W2,3 Y
Size
W2 Width W4,5 Width
FG Color
W3 Height W6,7 Height
W0 X W0,1 X
Position W1 Y W2,3 Y
Size W2 Width W4,5 Width
FG Color W3 Height W6,7 Height
Note: About color values, see Section 9.2.4.

Controllable Position Check this option when you want to control the position.
Size Check this option when you want to control the size.
FG Color Check this option when you want to control the FG color. This option is available
when the Rectangle is Solid and the Pattern is not solid white.
Continued

49
Anchor Point Select one of the following four corners of the dynamic rectangle to stay fixed
as its size changes: Upper Left, Upper Right, Lower Left, and Lower Right. This
item is available when Size is controllable but Position is not controllable.
Rectangle Solid Solid Check this option if you want the dynamic rectangle to be filled with the
selected pattern.
Pattern Select a pattern to fill the dynamic rectangle.
FG Color Select a color to paint the black part of the pattern. This item is available when
the Pattern is not solid white.
BG Color Select a color to paint the white part of the pattern.
Border Border Check this option if you want the dynamic rectangle to have a border.
Border The border color.
Color

9
9.4. GIF Displays
You can use a GIF display to show a GIF image and control the animation of that image.

The following operation option can be added to a GIF display. Select and set up the option in the GIF Display property
sheet.
Options Description
Visibility Control You can show or hide a GIF display by a specified bit or the current user level. Select and set
up this option in the Visibility page.
9.4.2. Settings
You can complete all the settings of a GIF display in the GIF Display property sheet. This sheet contains the following two
pages.
■ General
■ Visibility

49
This section describes how to define the general settings for the GIF displays. The following is an example of the General
page of the GIF Display property sheet.

screen where the object is located. The format of the IDs for the GIF displays is GDnnnn.
Graphic Select a GIF image for the GIF display. You can use the drop-down list to select a GIF image from the
picture database. You can click to select a GIF image from a file. You can click to select a GIF
image from a library file. If the selected GIF image is not from the picture database, it is imported and
saved in the picture database.
Continued

9
Keep Graphic Size Check this option so the size of the selected graphic will not change with the object’s size.
Animation Enabled Check this option so the animation will be enabled by the specified bit variable.
By Bit Specifies the bit variable that enables the animation.
The animation is enabled when the state of the variable is on.
Speed Check this option so the speed of the animation will be controlled by the specified word
Controlled variable.
By Word Specifies the variable that controls the speed of the animation.
The value of the variable can be from 0 to 10. The slowest speed is 1 and the highest speed
is 10. The value 0 disables the animation.
Speed Select a speed from 1 to 10 for the animation. The slowest speed is 1 and the highest speed
is 10.
Click this button to see the animation of the GIF display with the current settings on the
screen.

49
9.5. Picture Displays

You can use a variable to select and display a predefined picture with a picture display.
A picture display can have up to 256 states. Each state can have a predefined picture. The maximum number of states that
a picture display can have is determined by the state type and the data type of the monitored variable. The following table
shows the maximum in each case.
State Type Type of Variable Maximum

Bit Bit 2
Value 16-bit 256
32-bit 256
LSB 16-bit 17
32-bit 33
Animation Bit 256
Note: This is a special state type that is unique to picture displays. The bit
variable is used to control the animation. When the bit is on, the animation is
enabled. When the bit is off, the animation is disabled. The animation is
performed by showing the picture of each state one by one at a specified
change frequency.
You need to specify the number of states for a picture display and the number must not exceed the allowable maximum.
You can define a picture for each state. At runtime, a picture display shows the picture corresponding to the state of the
monitored variable. The state of the monitored variable is determined by the state type and value of the variable.

The following operation option can be added to a picture display. Select and set up the option in the Picture Display
property sheet.
Options Description
Visibility Control You can show or hide a picture display by a specified bit or the current user level. Select and set up
this option in the Visibility page.
9.5.3. Settings
You can complete all the settings of a picture display in the Picture Display property sheet. This sheet contains the
following three pages.
■ General
■ Picture
■ Visibility

9
This section describes how to define the general settings for the picture displays. The following is an example of the
General page of the Picture Display property sheet.
screen where the object is located. The format of the IDs for the picture displays is PDnnnn.
Shape Shape Check this option if you want the picture display to have a frame.
settings
, Border Color, Pattern, FG Color, BG Color
External Label Check this option if you want the picture display to have an external label. Set up the external
State Select a state as the current state of the picture display so you can view and set the Pattern, FG
Color, BG Color for that state.
State Type The state type of the variable that controls the picture display. There are four state types you can
select from: Bit, Value, LSB, and Bit For Enabling Animation. For details, see Section 9.5.1 Basic
Operations.
Data Type The data type of the variable that controls the picture display. The supported data types include:
Bit, 16-bit Unsigned Integer, 16-bit BCD, 32-bit Unsigned Integer, and 32-bit BCD.
Monitor Address Specifies the variable that controls the picture display.
Total State The number of states for the picture display.
Animation The rate to change the picture.
Frequency (Hz)

49
9.6. Animated Graphics
An animated graphic can change its image and move along a specified path automatically. You can also change the
position and image of an animated graphic at runtime by a specified variable. You can use BMP/JPG/GIF/Object Group for
the animated graphics.

The following operation option can be added to an animated graphic. Select and set up the option in the Animated Graphic
property sheet.
Options Description
Visibility Control You can show or hide an animated graphic by a specified bit or the current user level. Select and
9.6.2. Settings
You can complete all the settings of an animated graphic in the Animated Graphic property sheet. This sheet contains the
■ General
■ Picture
■ GIF
■ Path
■ Visibility

9
This section describes how to define the general settings for animated graphics. The following is an example of the
General page of the Animated Graphic property sheet.
animated graphics is AGnnnn.
Continued

49
Graphic Type Select one of the following graphic types for the animated graphic:
Type Description
Bitmap/JPEG/Object You can configure the animated graphic to have up to
Group 256 pictures. The pictures can be bitmap images,
JPEG images, or object groups. Define the pictures
in the Picture page. For details, see Section 4.3.7
Picture Settings.
GIF The animated graphic can have one GIF image.
Define the GIF image in the GIF page. The speed of
the animation for the GIF image is specified in the
Change Rate field.
Total States The number of graphic states. You can specify a picture for each state. The
animated graphic displays the associated picture for the current state.
State Control Select one of the following methods to control the state of the animated graphic.
State Control Description
Automatic The animated graphic changes the state in sequence
starting from state 0 at a rate specified in the Change Rate
field. When the current state is the last state, it will change
back to state 0.
Position The state is determined by where the animated graphic is.
In the Path page, you can define the associated state for
each path point. For details, see Section 9.6.5 Path
Settings.
Dynamic The state is determined at run time by the variable specified
in the Monitor Address field.
The animated graphic displays the associated picture for the current state.
Change Rate (Hz) Select a rate when the State Control is Automatic or the Graphic Type is GIF.
Continued

9
Movement Path There are six path types: Still, Horizontal Line, Vertical Line, Polyline, Dynamic, and Dynamic;
Type Predefined Positions.
Select one of the following path types for the animated graphic:
Path Type Description
Still The animated graphic does not move.
Horizontal The animated graphic moves along a horizontal line.

Line
Vertical The animated graphic moves along a vertical line.

Line
Continued

49
Movement Path
Type Path Type Description
Polyline The animated graphic moves along a set of connected lines.
Tips: You can right-click anywhere on the connected line and use the Insert
Point command on the pop-up menu to insert a new point to the polyline. You can
also right-click the existing point and use the Delete Point command to delete the
point.
You can also position the mouse pointer over one of the points. When the cursor
changes to , drag the point to the position you want.
Dynamic The position of the animated graphic is determined at runtime by the variable
specified in the Monitor Address field. The data elements of the variable that
specify the position are X and Y. They specify the coordinate of the position.
$U100: State
$U101: X
$U102: Y
Dynamic; The position of the animated graphic is determined at runtime by the variable
Predefined specified in the Monitor Address field. The data element of the variable that
Positions specifies the position is Point. It specifies which point of the predefined path that
the animated graphic should move to.
Continued

9
Effect Marquee Check this option if you want the current picture of the animated graphic to scroll into
both ends of its path. This option is available when the Path Type is Horizontal Line or
Vertical Line.
Duplicate Check this option so the current picture of the animated graphic will be duplicated by a
Picture specified number of times. All the copies will display and move together. This option is
available when the Marquee option is selected.
Number of Specifies the number of copies to make for the Duplicate Picture option.
Copies
Monitor Address Specifies the variable that controls the animated graphic.
The following table shows the data arrangement of the variable:
Settings 16-Bit BCD 32-Bit BCD
State Control = Dynamic W0 State W0,1 State
W0 X W0,1 X
Path Type = Dynamic
W1 Y W2,2 Y
Path Type =
W0 Point W0,1 Point
Dynamic; Predefined Positions
W0 State W0,1 State

State Control = Dynamic
W1 X W2,3 X
Path Type = Dynamic
W2 Y W4,5 Y
State Control = Dynamic
W0 State W0,1 State
Path Type =
W1 Point W2,3 Point
Dynamic; Predefined Positions
Data Type The data type of the variable that controls the animated graphic. The supported data
types include: 16-bit Unsigned Integer, 32-bit Unsigned Integer, 16-bit Signed Integer,
32-bit Signed Integer, 16-bit BCD, and 32-bit BCD.

49
9.6.3.1. Using Object Group for Animated Graphics
You can use an object group for the animated graphic.
To create an object group, you can first group the selected objects and then save the group into the object library.
To use the object group, you can click the button in the Picture page to bring up the Copy Object from Object Library
dialog box. In the dialog, you can select an existing object group for the animated graphic.
Any modifications such as moving the group, resizing the group, deleting the group etc. will be applied to the objects of the
group at the same time. However, each object in the group can have its own properties. You can double click the icon
to bring up the properties dialog box of the corresponding object and then define the settings of each object.
The following is an example showing you how to edit the object group for the animated graphic. The object group includes
a numeric entry, a numeric display and a picture object. They will move along the set of connected lines. At the same time,
the value of numeric entry and the numeric display will change.
1. Set up the animated graphic with the object group as its graphic.
2. Set up the picture object

9
3. Set up the numeric entry

49
9.6.4. GIF Settings
This section describes how to define the GIF image for animated graphics. The following is an example of the GIF page.
The following table describes each property in the GIF page.
GIF Select a GIF image for the animated graphic. You can use the drop-down list to
select a GIF image from the picture database. You can click to select a GIF
image from a file. You can click to select a GIF image from a library file. If the
selected GIF image is not from the picture database, it is imported and saved in
the picture database.
Keep Graphic Size Check this option so the size of the selected GIF image will not change with the
object’s size.

9
9.6.5. Path Settings
This section describes how to define the path settings for animated graphics. You can easily define the path of an animated
graphic in the editing window. To edit the path of an animated graphic, click it to display the path as shown in the following
example.
Animated graphic
End point
Start point
Path Path point
To modify the path, drag the path points to desired positions. You can insert a path point by right-clicking at the desired
position on the path and clicking Insert Point from the popup menu. To delete a path point, right-click at the path point and
click Delete Point on the popup menu. Use the Path page to define all the properties of the path.
The following is an example of the Path page.

49
The following table describes each property in the Path page.
X The horizontal coordinate of the selected path point.
Y The vertical coordinate of the selected path point.
Picture for State The associated state of the selected path point for forward movement.
Forward Name The associated picture name of the selected state. It is also the associated picture name
Movement of the selected path point for forward movement.
Picture for State The associated state of the selected path point for backward movement.
Backward Name The associated picture name of the selected state. It is also the associated picture name
Movement of the selected path point for backward movement.

CHAPTER 10
RECIPES AND RECIPE

OBJECTS
10.1. Recipes ........................................................................................................... 1

10.2. Recipe Data Flow and Memory Allocation ................................................ 2
10.3. Working with Recipes .................................................................................. 3
10.4. Transferring Recipes .................................................................................... 4
10.4.1. Between the PC and HMI .............................................................................................. 4
10.4.2. Between the HMI and USB Memory Stick/Micro SD Card ......................................... 4
10.4.3. Between the battery backed memory and flash ROM ................................................... 4
10.4.4. Between the HMI and PLC/Controller .......................................................................... 5
10.5. Setting up Recipe Blocks.............................................................................. 6
10.5.2. Data Item Settings.......................................................................................................... 9
10.6. Selecting a Recipe Using Recipe Selectors ................................................11
10.6.3. Settings ........................................................................................................................ 12
10.7. Displaying and Modifying Recipe Data Using Recipe Tables ................ 14
10.7.3. Settings ........................................................................................................................ 15
10.7.5. Data Item Settings........................................................................................................ 17
4
10
In this chapter we will explain how recipes in the software can be set up, stored and transferred. We also describe how to
configure the basic functions and recipe objects (recipe selector and recipe table) used for recipes.
10.1. Recipes
■ Recipe Block
A recipe block is a memory block that stores recipe data as a two dimensional array in the panel. The memory size of each
recipe block is the product of the size of a recipe by the number of recipes in word. You can create up to 16 recipe blocks
for your application. Each recipe block can contain at most 65535 recipes. Each recipe can have as many as 4096 words
of data.
■ Recipe
A recipe is a group of data items. You can use a recipe number or a recipe name to index a recipe in the corresponding
recipe block.
The recipe number is a unique number between 0 and the total number of recipes. The current recipe number of the recipe
block m is saved in the current recipe number register $RNm (m: The recipe block ID).
The recipe name can be represented by ASCII or Unicode String. To specify ASCII or Unicode String as the recipe name,
you need to open the dialog box of a recipe block and set the data type of the related data item into ASCII or Unicode
String in the data item page. For details about recipe data item settings, please see Section 10.5.2.
■ Recipe Data Item

A data item is a word or words of data used to represent an application related data or a machine setup parameter used in
process and production control. You can specify the format such as name, data type, size, scaling and range check for
each data item in the recipe block dialog box.
The following is a sample of a recipe block with 3 recipes and each recipe has 8 data items.
A recipe block Recipe Number
A data item used to

represent the recipe
name
A recipe
A data Item
■ Recipe Data
There are two types of recipe data: TXT Data and PRD Data. These recipes can be transferred directly between the PC
and HMI or between the HMI and USB Memory Stick/Micro SD card.
Recipe Data Description
TXT Data z Can be created and edited in Microsoft Excel or text editor software (e.g., Notepad)
PRD Data z Binary Data created in the software
z Can be edited in RecipeEditor
10-1 CHAPTER 10 RECIPES AND RECIPE OBJECTS

10
10.2. Recipe Data Flow and Memory Allocation
Assume there are two recipe blocks (Recipe Block 0 and Recipe Block 9) in an application.
Recipe Block 0 has 3 recipes and each recipe has 4 data items named A, B, C and D.
Recipe Block 9 has 2 recipes and each recipe has 3 data items named E, F and G.
The following illustration gives an overview of recipe data flow and recipe memory allocation.
Recipe Data flow Memory allocation
Recipe Block 0
Recipe 2
Recipe Block 9
Recipe 1Addr. Data Item
Recipe 1
Addr. R0:8
Data Item A
Recipe 0 R0:9 B Addr. Data Item
R0:4 A
Addr. Data Item R0:10 R9:3 E
C
PC R0:0
R0:5
A
B
R0:11 D R9:4 F
R0:1
R0:6
B
C Recipe 0G
R9:5
R0:7 D Addr. Data Item
R0:2 C
R9:0 E
R0:3 D
R9:1 F
R9:2 G
.TXT/.PRD file by DTH ( )
Battery backed recipe memory
By FB ( ) or Recipe Block 0
Recipe 2
Macro ( ) Recipe Block 9
Addr. R0:8
Data Item A
Recipe 1
Flash R0:4 A
C
ROM R0:0
R0:5
A
B
R0:11 D R9:4 F
R0:1
R0:6
B
C Recipe 0G
R9:5
R0:2 C
HMI R9:0 E
R0:3 D
R9:1 F
R9:2 G
By FB ( ) Current Recipe
(Function Button) By FB ( ) or
CB and SW ( ) Recipe Block 9
Set recipe block
Recipe 1 number to 9
Addr. Data Item
CR9:0 E
CR9:1 F $RN9
CR9:2
G
.TXT/.PRD file Set current recipe

number to 1
USB Memory Stick PLC / Controller
MicroSD Card
CHAPTER 10 RECIPES AND RECIPE OBJECTS 10-2

4
10
10.3. Working with Recipes
To work with recipes, you need to do the following:
■ Create and set up a recipe block

To create a recipe block, you may do one of the following:
1) In the Project Manager tool window, right-click the Recipes node of the concerned panel application and select Add
Recipe Block.
2) In the menu bar, click Panel to bring up the Panel sub-menu. Click Recipe Block in the Panel sub-menu to bring up the
Recipe Block pop-up menu. Select Add in the pop-up menu.
For details about how to set up a recipe block, please see Section 10.5.
■ View and edit recipe data on a PC

On a PC, you can use RecipeEditor to view and edit recipe data saved in *.prd file. The following is an example of the
RecipeEditor.
To run the RecipeEditor, choose

Start > Programs > “The software”
> RecipeEditor.
To edit recipe data directly in the
cell, right click the cell and key in
the value you want. Note that any
value not matched with the
predefined format will cause an
error when using the recipe at
runtime.
■ View and edit recipe data on a HMI

On a HMI, you can use a recipe table to view and edit recipe data. For details about how to create and set up a recipe
table for an application, please see Section 10.7.
■ Select a recipe on HMI

On a HMI, you can select a recipe by using recipe selector. For details about how to create and set up a recipe selector for
an application, please see Section 10.6.
■ Transfer recipes
Described in Section 10.4

10
10.4. Transferring Recipes
10.4.1. Between the PC and HMI

■ Using Data Transfer Helper (DTH) ( )
You can use DTH to download recipe data in *.prd/*.txt file from a PC to a HMI. With DTH, you can also get recipe data
from a HMI and save the data in *.prd/*.txt file on to a PC. The following is an example of the Data Transfer Helper (DTH)
used to get or update recipe data.
Recipe related functions
To run the DTH, choose Start > Programs > “The software” > Data Transfer Helper (DTH).
10.4.2. Between the HMI and USB Memory Stick/Micro SD Card

■ Using the Function Button ( )
You can use a function button to save recipe data of the specified recipe block as a .txt\.prd file, or load recipe data of the
specified recipe block from a .txt\.prd file. For details, please see Section 5.4.1 Basic Operations of function buttons
10.4.3. Between the battery backed memory and flash ROM

■ Using Macro Command ( )
You can use RB2ROM to save the data of the specified recipe block to a flash ROM, and use ROM2RB to load recipe data
from a flash ROM. For details, please see Section 5.4.1 Basic Operations of Macro command
■ Using Function Button ( )

You can use a function button to save recipe data to a flash ROM, and load recipe data from a flash ROM. For details,
please see Section 5.4.1 Basic Operations of function buttons

4
10
10.4.4. Between the HMI and PLC/Controller
■ Using Command Block and Status Words ( )
You can use the command flag setting in Command Block to request the panel to set the current recipe number, read a
recipe from a PLC or write a recipe to a PLC. You can also receive current the recipe block ID or current recipe number by
checking the related status word and specifying the word variable in Status Words. For details, please see Section 3.5.1
Command Block and Status Words.
To change the current recipe number, the PLC first sets the Parameter Two Register to the desired recipe block and the
Parameter One Register to the desired recipe number, then turns on the Set Current Recipe Number (#2) command flag.
Also, $RNm (Current Recipe Number Register, m: Recipe Block ID) of the panel can be changed by the PLC.
To update a recipe in the panel, the PLC first sets the Parameter Two Register to the desired recipe block and the
Parameter One Register to the desired recipe number, then turns on the Read Recipe From PLC (#3) command flag. The
panel reads data in the Recipe Block to update the specified recipe in the panel.
To receive a recipe, the PLC first sets the Parameter Two Register to the desired recipe block and the Parameter One
Register to the desired recipe number, then turns on the Write Recipe To PLC (#4) command flag. The panel sends the
specified recipe data to the Recipe Block in the PLC.
Note: You do not need to specify the recipe block if the application has only one recipe block.
Note: To make the above operation work, the specified recipe block must exist, or else the panel ignores the request.
The specified recipe number in the Parameter One Register must be between 0 and the maximum recipe number - 1.If
the Parameter One Register is greater than or equal to the maximum recipe number, the panel ignores the request.

You can use a function button to write the current recipe to the controller, or update current the recipe by reading the
recipe from the controller. For details, please see Section 5.4.1 Basic Operations of function buttons

10
10.5. Setting up Recipe Blocks
You can set up a recipe block with the Recipe Block dialog box. There are two ways to open the dialog box of a recipe
block:
1) In the Project Manager window, right-click the node of the desired Recipe Block and select Properties.
2) In the menu bar, click Panel to bring up the Panel sub-menu. Click Recipes in the Panel sub-menu to bring up the
Recipe Block pop-up menu. Select Properties in the pop-up menu to bring up the recipe block list of the current panel
application. Select the recipe block in the list.
The Recipe Block dialog box contains the following two pages:
■ General
■ Data Item

Use the General page to define the general settings for a recipe block. The following is an example of the General page.

4
10
The table below describes each property in the General page.
Name The recipe block's name. The maximum length of the name is 48 characters.
ID The recipe block's ID number. Select a number between 0 and 15. The number is
unique among all recipe blocks of the panel application.
Recipe Size Specifies the data size that each recipe contains. The unit is word.
Number of Recipes Specifies the maximum number of recipes that the recipe memory can hold.
Memory Required The size of the recipe memory. The unit is word. The formula to calculate the size is:
Memory Required = Recipe Size * Number of Recipes
Write Recipe To PLC Check the option if you want to write the recipe to PLC
Write Address Available when Write Recipe To PLC is checked. Specifies the variable that is the
starting address of the Recipe Block in your PLC.
The size of the recipes to be written is specified in the Read/Write Size field.
Notification Check this option if you want the recipe to set the bit specified in the Bit Field to On
when it finishes writing a recipe to PLC.
Bit Available when the Notification field is checked. Specifies the bit for the operation
done notification. Click to enter an address for this field. Click to select a tag
for this field.
Read Recipe From PLC Check this option if you want to read recipes from PLC.
Read Address Identical To Specifies that the Read Address is identical to the Write Address. With this item
Write Address checked, you don’t need to specify the Read Address again. This item is available
when the option Read Recipe From PLC is checked.
Read Address Available when Read Recipe From PLC is checked. Specifies the variable
representing the starting address of the recipe block on your PLC.
Click to enter an address for this field. Click to select a tag for this field. The
size of the recipes to be read is specified in the Read/Write Size field.
Notification Check the option if you want the recipe to set the bit specified in the Bit Field to On
when it finishes reading a recipe from PLC.
for this field.
Read/Write Size The size of the recipe for reading and writing.
Reverse the order of the high Check this option if the Write Address or the Read Address belongs to a controller that
word and low word of 32-bit stores data in big-endian byte order and if there are 32-bit data items, such as 32-bit
data signed integers and 32-bit floating point numbers, defined in the recipe block.
Recipe Memory Set the overall recipe block’s address range in the internal memory of the panel.
Range Type Address Format Description
Bit Address Range $Rm:n.b Each bit address in the range
b: 0-f refers to a bit of a recipe word in
the specified recipe block.
Word Address Range $Rm:n Each word address in the range
refers to a recipe word
Legend: m = Recipe Block ID, n = The Number of Recipe Word, b = Bit Number
Continued

10
Current Recipe Set the current recipe’s address range in the internal memory of the panel.

Bit Address Range $CRm:n.b Each bit address in the range
the current recipe of the specified
recipe block.
Word Address Range $CRm:n Each word address in the range
refers to a recipe word in the
current recipe of the specified
recipe block.
Current Recipe $RNm An internal register of the panel
Number Register that specifies the current recipe
number of the specified recipe
block.
Legend: m = Recipe Block ID, n = The Number of Recipe Word, b = Bit Number.
Need space in flash ROM to Check this option if you need space in the flash ROM to save backup recipes.
save backup
Do not use battery backed Check this option so the recipe memory will be located in the ordinary RAM, and the
RAM recipe memory will be cleared whenever the target panel is powered up. If this option
is not selected, so the recipe memory will be located in the battery backed RAM. The
recipe data will not be lost after power down if the battery backed RAM is used.

4
10
10.5.2. Data Item Settings
Use the Data Item page to define the data items of the data for a recipe block. The following is an example of the Data Item
page.
The Data Item page contains two parts. The left side of the data item list shows the address and name of each data item .
The right side shows the properties of the selected data item. To select a data item, click the row of the data item in the
data item list. The following table describes each property of the data item.
Address The address of the latest value of the data item.
Name Specifies the name of the data item for the language specified in the Language field.
Language Select a language so you can view and edit the name of the data item for that language.
Data Type The data type of the data item. The supported data types include: 16-Bit Unsigned Integer,
32-Bit Unsigned Integer, 16-Bit Signed Integer, 32-Bit Signed Integer, 16-Bit BCD, 32-Bit
BCD, 32-Bit Floating Point, ASCII String, and Unicode String.
Continued

10
Display Type The display type for the value of the data item. The following table shows the available display
types for each data type.
ASCII String ASCII String
Unicode String Unicode String
Total Digits Specifies the number of digits to be displayed for the value of the data item.
Fractional Digits Specifies how to display the fractional part for the value of the data item. When the Display
Type is 32-bit Floating Point, this property specifies the number of fractional digits to be
displayed. When the Display Type is not 32-bit Floating Point, this property specifies not only
the number of fractional digits to be displayed, but also the number of least significant digits to
be displayed as the fractional part. With this feature, an integer can be shown as a fixed point
number.
Example:
Display Type Total Fractional Sampled Displayed
16-bit Signed Decimal 5 2 12345 123.45
16-bit Signed Decimal 5 2 -5 -0.05
Scaling Check this option if you want the value of the data item to be displayed in a scaled manner.
The following is the scaling formula:
DisplayedValue = SampledValue * Gain + Offset
digits. Rounding and truncation errors may happen.
Gain Available when the Scaling option is checked. Specifies the Gain used in the scaling formula.
Offset Available when the Scaling option is checked. Specifies the Offset used in the scaling
formula.
Range Check Check this option if you want the data item to verify the entered value according to the
specified minimum and maximum. If the entered value is not within the allowable range, the
entered value will not be output.
Min Specifies the minimum value.
Max Specifies the maximum value.

4
10
10.6. Selecting a Recipe Using Recipe Selectors

A recipe selector can be configured to perform as one of the following types of controls:
Type Description
List The recipe selector is a list box. It displays a list of index
strings of the recipes in the specified recipe block. The
index string’s format is recipe name (recipe number). One
recipe index string is displayed per line.
The index string of the current recipe is highlighted. If the

desired recipe is not in view, you can scroll the list with the
scroll bar attached to the right side of the list box. When you
select a desired recipe by touching its index string, the
recipe selector writes the recipe number of the selected
recipe to the current recipe number register.
Drop-down The recipe selector is a drop-down list. It displays the index string of the current recipe and a button
List with the down arrow symbol as shown.
When the button is touched, the recipe selector displays a list box beneath itself as shown.
The list box lists the index strings of all the recipes of the recipe block, one index string per line. The
index string of the current recipe is highlighted. If the desired recipe is not in view, you can use the
scroll bar attached to the right side of the list to scroll the index string. When you select a desired
recipe by touching its index string, the recipe selector writes the recipe number of the selected recipe
to the current recipe number register and closes the list box.
If you want to cancel the operation when the list box is showing, touch anywhere other than an index
string in the list box.

10
The following operation options can be added to a recipe selector. Select and set up the options in the recipe selector
property sheet.
Options Description
Visibility Control You can show or hide a recipe selector by a specified bit or the current user level. Select and
10.6.3. Settings
You can complete all the settings of a recipe selector in the Recipe Selector property sheet. This sheet contains the
■ General
■ Advanced
■ Visibility

This section describes how to define the general settings of a recipe selector. The following is an example of the General
page.

4
10
ID The object’s identifier. It is generated when the object is created and is
unchangeable. The identifier is unique within the screen where the object is
located. The format of the IDs for the recipe selectors is RSnnnn.
Shape settings For details about the following properties, Section 4.3.4 Setting up the Shape of
an Object. , Border Color, BG Color
Type Select one of the following types for the recipe selector:
Type Description
List The list box is displayed at all times.
Drop-down List The list box is not displayed unless the user clicks the
down arrow icon next to the static-text control.
Recipe Block Select the recipe block whose recipe is to be selected by the Recipe Selector
object.
Recipe Name Select a data item from the list as the recipe name. You can select any data items
with ASCII String data type as the name of the recipe from the drop down list.
Sort by Recipe Name Check this option to automatically sort all recipe names added to the list box.

10
10.7. Displaying and Modifying Recipe Data Using Recipe Tables

There are three types of recipe tables.
Type Description
Horizontal Displays the recipes in rows and recipe data items in columns.
View
The above is an example of the recipe table with horizontal view. The first row displays the data item
name of each column. The other rows display one recipe per row. The first column displays the recipe
number. You can create scroll button groups or scroll bars to scroll the contents.
Vertical Displays the recipes in columns and recipe data items in rows.
View
The above is an example of the recipe table with vertical view. The first column displays the data item
name of each row. The other columns display one recipe per column. The first row displays the recipe
Current Displays the recipe data items of the current recipe in rows.
Recipe
The above is an example of the current recipe. The first column displays the data item name of each row.
The other column displays the current recipe. You can create scroll button groups or scroll bars to scroll
the contents.

4
10
The following operation option can be added to a recipe table. Select and set up the option in the recipe table property
sheet.
Options Description
Visibility Control You can show or hide a recipe table by a specified bit or the current user level. Select and set
10.7.3. Settings
You can complete all the settings of a recipe table in the Recipe Table property sheet. This sheet contains the following
three pages.
■ General
■ Data Item
■ Visibility

This section describes how to define the general settings for a recipe table. The following is an example of the General
page.

10
located. The format of the IDs for the recipe tables is RTnnnn.
Type Select one of the following types for the recipe table:
Type Description
Horizontal View Displays the recipes in rows and recipe data items in
columns.
Vertical View Displays the recipes in columns and recipe data items
in rows.
Current Recipe Displays the recipe data items of the current recipe in
rows.
Allows operator input Check this option if you allow the operator to update the value of the recipe data
item.
Recipe Block Select the recipe whose collected data is to be displayed by the object.
Title Language Select a language so you can view and edit the settings of the title row for that
language.
Font Select a font for the title text.
Color Select a color for the title text.
Background Color Select a color for the background of the title row.
Recipe Number Specifies the title for the recipe number column.
Grid Vertical Check this option if you want the object to have vertical grids.
Horizontal Check this option if you want the object to have horizontal grids.
Color Select a color for the grids.
Data Font Select a font for displaying data.
Default Color Select a color as the default color for displaying data.
Set Default Color to Click this button to set the colors of all the data items to the Default Color.
All Data Items
Recipe Color Select a color for the recipe number.
Number
Line Spacing Specifies the extra space in pixels for two adjacent rows in the table.
Item Spacing Specifies the extra space for every column in the table.

4
10
This section describes how to define the display format for the values of each data item. The following is an example of the
Data Item page.
The following table describes each property in the Data Item page.
Language Select a language so you can view and edit the settings for that language.
Row #n Name The name of data item #n. The data item names are defined in the Data Item page of the
of the Data Logger dialog box.
property Display Check this option if you want the object to display data item #n.
table
Color Select a color for displaying data item #n.
Alignment The alignment for displaying data item #n. There are three types of alignments: Left, Center,
and Right.
Justification The justification for displaying data item #n. There are three types of justifications:
Option Description
Zero Suppress The leading digits will not display when they are 0.
Leading Zeros All digits will display.
Leading Spaces The leading digits will display as blank characters when they are 0.
Move Up Click the button to move the selected data item before the previous data item. The Move Up
button will help you to reorder the display sequence of the data items It will not be available
when multiple rows are selected or no row is selected.
Move Down Click the button to move the selected data item after the next data item. The Move Down
button will help you to reorder the display sequence of the data items. It will not be available

CHAPTER 10
RECIPES AND RECIPE

OBJECTS
10.1. Recipes ........................................................................................................... 1

10.2. Recipe Data Flow and Memory Allocation ................................................ 2
10.3. Working with Recipes .................................................................................. 3
10.4. Transferring Recipes .................................................................................... 4
10.4.1. Between the PC and HMI .............................................................................................. 4
10.4.2. Between the HMI and USB Memory Stick/Micro SD Card ......................................... 4
10.4.3. Between the battery backed memory and flash ROM ................................................... 4
10.4.4. Between the HMI and PLC/Controller .......................................................................... 5
10.5. Setting up Recipe Blocks.............................................................................. 6
10.6. Selecting a Recipe Using Recipe Selectors ................................................11
10.6.3. Settings ........................................................................................................................ 12
10.7. Displaying and Modifying Recipe Data Using Recipe Tables ................ 14
10.7.3. Settings ........................................................................................................................ 15
4
10
In this chapter we will explain how recipes in the software can be set up, stored and transferred. We also describe how to
configure the basic functions and recipe objects (recipe selector and recipe table) used for recipes.
10.1. Recipes
■ Recipe Block
A recipe block is a memory block that stores recipe data as a two dimensional array in the panel. The memory size of each
recipe block is the product of the size of a recipe by the number of recipes in word. You can create up to 16 recipe blocks
for your application. Each recipe block can contain at most 65535 recipes. Each recipe can have as many as 4096 words
of data.
■ Recipe
A recipe is a group of data items. You can use a recipe number or a recipe name to index a recipe in the corresponding
recipe block.
The recipe number is a unique number between 0 and the total number of recipes. The current recipe number of the recipe
block m is saved in the current recipe number register $RNm (m: The recipe block ID).
The recipe name can be represented by ASCII or Unicode String. To specify ASCII or Unicode String as the recipe name,
you need to open the dialog box of a recipe block and set the data type of the related data item into ASCII or Unicode
String in the data item page. For details about recipe data item settings, please see Section 10.5.2.
■ Recipe Data Item

A data item is a word or words of data used to represent an application related data or a machine setup parameter used in
process and production control. You can specify the format such as name, data type, size, scaling and range check for
each data item in the recipe block dialog box.
The following is a sample of a recipe block with 3 recipes and each recipe has 8 data items.
A recipe block Recipe Number
A data item used to

represent the recipe
name
A recipe
A data Item
■ Recipe Data
There are two types of recipe data: TXT Data and PRD Data. These recipes can be transferred directly between the PC
and HMI or between the HMI and USB Memory Stick/Micro SD card.
Recipe Data Description
TXT Data z Can be created and edited in Microsoft Excel or text editor software (e.g., Notepad)
PRD Data z Binary Data created in the software
z Can be edited in RecipeEditor

10
10.2. Recipe Data Flow and Memory Allocation
Assume there are two recipe blocks (Recipe Block 0 and Recipe Block 9) in an application.
Recipe Block 0 has 3 recipes and each recipe has 4 data items named A, B, C and D.
Recipe Block 9 has 2 recipes and each recipe has 3 data items named E, F and G.
The following illustration gives an overview of recipe data flow and recipe memory allocation.
Recipe Data flow Memory allocation
Recipe Block 0
Recipe 2
Recipe Block 9
Recipe 1
Addr. R0:8
Data Item A
R0:4 A
C
PC R0:0
R0:5
A
B
R0:11 D R9:4 F
R0:1
R0:6
B
C Recipe 0G
R9:5
R0:2 C
R9:0 E
R0:3 D
R9:1 F
R9:2 G
.TXT/.PRD file by DTH ( )
Battery backed recipe memory
By FB ( ) or Recipe Block 0
Recipe 2
Macro ( ) Recipe Block 9
Addr. R0:8
Data Item A
Recipe 1
Flash R0:4 A
C
ROM R0:0
R0:5
A
B
R0:11 D R9:4 F
R0:1
R0:6
B
C Recipe 0G
R9:5
R0:2 C
HMI R9:0 E
R0:3 D
R9:1 F
R9:2 G
By FB ( ) Current Recipe
(Function Button) By FB ( ) or
CB and SW ( ) Recipe Block 9
Set recipe block
Recipe 1 number to 9
Addr. Data Item
CR9:0 E
CR9:1 F $RN9
CR9:2
G
.TXT/.PRD file Set current recipe

number to 1
USB Memory Stick PLC / Controller
MicroSD Card

4
10
10.3. Working with Recipes
To work with recipes, you need to do the following:
■ Create and set up a recipe block

To create a recipe block, you may do one of the following:
1) In the Project Manager tool window, right-click the Recipes node of the concerned panel application and select Add
Recipe Block.
2) In the menu bar, click Panel to bring up the Panel sub-menu. Click Recipe Block in the Panel sub-menu to bring up the
Recipe Block pop-up menu. Select Add in the pop-up menu.
For details about how to set up a recipe block, please see Section 10.5.
■ View and edit recipe data on a PC

On a PC, you can use RecipeEditor to view and edit recipe data saved in *.prd file. The following is an example of the
RecipeEditor.
To run the RecipeEditor, choose

Start > Programs > “The software”
> RecipeEditor.
To edit recipe data directly in the
cell, right click the cell and key in
the value you want. Note that any
value not matched with the
predefined format will cause an
error when using the recipe at
runtime.
■ View and edit recipe data on a HMI

On a HMI, you can use a recipe table to view and edit recipe data. For details about how to create and set up a recipe
table for an application, please see Section 10.7.
■ Select a recipe on HMI

On a HMI, you can select a recipe by using recipe selector. For details about how to create and set up a recipe selector for
an application, please see Section 10.6.
■ Transfer recipes

10
10.4. Transferring Recipes
10.4.1. Between the PC and HMI

■ Using Data Transfer Helper (DTH) ( )
You can use DTH to download recipe data in *.prd/*.txt file from a PC to a HMI. With DTH, you can also get recipe data
from a HMI and save the data in *.prd/*.txt file on to a PC. The following is an example of the Data Transfer Helper (DTH)
used to get or update recipe data.
Recipe related functions
To run the DTH, choose Start > Programs > “The software” > Data Transfer Helper (DTH).
10.4.2. Between the HMI and USB Memory Stick/Micro SD Card

You can use a function button to save recipe data of the specified recipe block as a .txt\.prd file, or load recipe data of the
specified recipe block from a .txt\.prd file. For details, please see Section 5.4.1 Basic Operations of function buttons
10.4.3. Between the battery backed memory and flash ROM

■ Using Macro Command ( )
You can use RB2ROM to save the data of the specified recipe block to a flash ROM, and use ROM2RB to load recipe data
from a flash ROM. For details, please see Section 5.4.1 Basic Operations of Macro command
■ Using Function Button ( )

You can use a function button to save recipe data to a flash ROM, and load recipe data from a flash ROM. For details,
please see Section 5.4.1 Basic Operations of function buttons

4
10
10.4.4. Between the HMI and PLC/Controller
■ Using Command Block and Status Words ( )
You can use the command flag setting in Command Block to request the panel to set the current recipe number, read a
recipe from a PLC or write a recipe to a PLC. You can also receive current the recipe block ID or current recipe number by
checking the related status word and specifying the word variable in Status Words. For details, please see Section 3.5.1
Command Block and Status Words.
To change the current recipe number, the PLC first sets the Parameter Two Register to the desired recipe block and the
Parameter One Register to the desired recipe number, then turns on the Set Current Recipe Number (#2) command flag.
Also, $RNm (Current Recipe Number Register, m: Recipe Block ID) of the panel can be changed by the PLC.
To update a recipe in the panel, the PLC first sets the Parameter Two Register to the desired recipe block and the
Parameter One Register to the desired recipe number, then turns on the Read Recipe From PLC (#3) command flag. The
panel reads data in the Recipe Block to update the specified recipe in the panel.
To receive a recipe, the PLC first sets the Parameter Two Register to the desired recipe block and the Parameter One
Register to the desired recipe number, then turns on the Write Recipe To PLC (#4) command flag. The panel sends the
specified recipe data to the Recipe Block in the PLC.
Note: You do not need to specify the recipe block if the application has only one recipe block.
Note: To make the above operation work, the specified recipe block must exist, or else the panel ignores the request.
The specified recipe number in the Parameter One Register must be between 0 and the maximum recipe number - 1.If
the Parameter One Register is greater than or equal to the maximum recipe number, the panel ignores the request.

You can use a function button to write the current recipe to the controller, or update current the recipe by reading the
recipe from the controller. For details, please see Section 5.4.1 Basic Operations of function buttons

10
10.5. Setting up Recipe Blocks
You can set up a recipe block with the Recipe Block dialog box. There are two ways to open the dialog box of a recipe
block:
1) In the Project Manager window, right-click the node of the desired Recipe Block and select Properties.
2) In the menu bar, click Panel to bring up the Panel sub-menu. Click Recipes in the Panel sub-menu to bring up the
Recipe Block pop-up menu. Select Properties in the pop-up menu to bring up the recipe block list of the current panel
application. Select the recipe block in the list.
The Recipe Block dialog box contains the following two pages:
■ General
■ Data Item

Use the General page to define the general settings for a recipe block. The following is an example of the General page.

4
10
Name The recipe block's name. The maximum length of the name is 48 characters.
ID The recipe block's ID number. Select a number between 0 and 15. The number is
unique among all recipe blocks of the panel application.
Recipe Size Specifies the data size that each recipe contains. The unit is word.
Number of Recipes Specifies the maximum number of recipes that the recipe memory can hold.
Memory Required The size of the recipe memory. The unit is word. The formula to calculate the size is:
Memory Required = Recipe Size * Number of Recipes
Write Recipe To PLC Check the option if you want to write the recipe to PLC
Write Address Available when Write Recipe To PLC is checked. Specifies the variable that is the
starting address of the Recipe Block in your PLC.
The size of the recipes to be written is specified in the Read/Write Size field.
Notification Check this option if you want the recipe to set the bit specified in the Bit Field to On
when it finishes writing a recipe to PLC.
for this field.
Read Recipe From PLC Check this option if you want to read recipes from PLC.
Read Address Identical To Specifies that the Read Address is identical to the Write Address. With this item
Write Address checked, you don’t need to specify the Read Address again. This item is available
when the option Read Recipe From PLC is checked.
Read Address Available when Read Recipe From PLC is checked. Specifies the variable
representing the starting address of the recipe block on your PLC.
size of the recipes to be read is specified in the Read/Write Size field.
Notification Check the option if you want the recipe to set the bit specified in the Bit Field to On
when it finishes reading a recipe from PLC.
for this field.
Read/Write Size The size of the recipe for reading and writing.
Reverse the order of the high Check this option if the Write Address or the Read Address belongs to a controller that
word and low word of 32-bit stores data in big-endian byte order and if there are 32-bit data items, such as 32-bit
data signed integers and 32-bit floating point numbers, defined in the recipe block.
Recipe Memory Set the overall recipe block’s address range in the internal memory of the panel.
Bit Address Range $Rm:n.b Each bit address in the range
the specified recipe block.
Word Address Range $Rm:n Each word address in the range
refers to a recipe word
Legend: m = Recipe Block ID, n = The Number of Recipe Word, b = Bit Number
Continued

10
Current Recipe Set the current recipe’s address range in the internal memory of the panel.

Bit Address Range $CRm:n.b Each bit address in the range
the current recipe of the specified
recipe block.
Word Address Range $CRm:n Each word address in the range
refers to a recipe word in the
current recipe of the specified
recipe block.
Current Recipe $RNm An internal register of the panel
Number Register that specifies the current recipe
number of the specified recipe
block.
Legend: m = Recipe Block ID, n = The Number of Recipe Word, b = Bit Number.
Need space in flash ROM to Check this option if you need space in the flash ROM to save backup recipes.
save backup
Do not use battery backed Check this option so the recipe memory will be located in the ordinary RAM, and the
RAM recipe memory will be cleared whenever the target panel is powered up. If this option
is not selected, so the recipe memory will be located in the battery backed RAM. The
recipe data will not be lost after power down if the battery backed RAM is used.

4
10
Use the Data Item page to define the data items of the data for a recipe block. The following is an example of the Data Item
page.
The Data Item page contains two parts. The left side of the data item list shows the address and name of each data item .
The right side shows the properties of the selected data item. To select a data item, click the row of the data item in the
data item list. The following table describes each property of the data item.
Address The address of the latest value of the data item.
Continued

10
Fractional Digits Specifies how to display the fractional part for the value of the data item. When the Display
number.
Example:
formula.
Range Check Check this option if you want the data item to verify the entered value according to the
specified minimum and maximum. If the entered value is not within the allowable range, the
entered value will not be output.
Min Specifies the minimum value.
Max Specifies the maximum value.

4
10
10.6. Selecting a Recipe Using Recipe Selectors

A recipe selector can be configured to perform as one of the following types of controls:
Type Description
List The recipe selector is a list box. It displays a list of index
strings of the recipes in the specified recipe block. The
index string’s format is recipe name (recipe number). One
recipe index string is displayed per line.
The index string of the current recipe is highlighted. If the

desired recipe is not in view, you can scroll the list with the
scroll bar attached to the right side of the list box. When you
select a desired recipe by touching its index string, the
recipe selector writes the recipe number of the selected
recipe to the current recipe number register.
Drop-down The recipe selector is a drop-down list. It displays the index string of the current recipe and a button
List with the down arrow symbol as shown.
When the button is touched, the recipe selector displays a list box beneath itself as shown.
The list box lists the index strings of all the recipes of the recipe block, one index string per line. The
index string of the current recipe is highlighted. If the desired recipe is not in view, you can use the
scroll bar attached to the right side of the list to scroll the index string. When you select a desired
recipe by touching its index string, the recipe selector writes the recipe number of the selected recipe
to the current recipe number register and closes the list box.
If you want to cancel the operation when the list box is showing, touch anywhere other than an index
string in the list box.

10
The following operation options can be added to a recipe selector. Select and set up the options in the recipe selector
property sheet.
Options Description
Visibility Control You can show or hide a recipe selector by a specified bit or the current user level. Select and
10.6.3. Settings
You can complete all the settings of a recipe selector in the Recipe Selector property sheet. This sheet contains the
■ General
■ Advanced
■ Visibility

This section describes how to define the general settings of a recipe selector. The following is an example of the General
page.

4
10
located. The format of the IDs for the recipe selectors is RSnnnn.
Type Select one of the following types for the recipe selector:
Type Description
List The list box is displayed at all times.
Drop-down List The list box is not displayed unless the user clicks the
down arrow icon next to the static-text control.
Recipe Block Select the recipe block whose recipe is to be selected by the Recipe Selector
object.
Recipe Name Select a data item from the list as the recipe name. You can select any data items
with ASCII String data type as the name of the recipe from the drop down list.
Sort by Recipe Name Check this option to automatically sort all recipe names added to the list box.

10
10.7. Displaying and Modifying Recipe Data Using Recipe Tables

There are three types of recipe tables.
Type Description
Horizontal Displays the recipes in rows and recipe data items in columns.
View
The above is an example of the recipe table with horizontal view. The first row displays the data item
name of each column. The other rows display one recipe per row. The first column displays the recipe
Vertical Displays the recipes in columns and recipe data items in rows.
View
The above is an example of the recipe table with vertical view. The first column displays the data item
name of each row. The other columns display one recipe per column. The first row displays the recipe
Current Displays the recipe data items of the current recipe in rows.
Recipe
The above is an example of the current recipe. The first column displays the data item name of each row.
The other column displays the current recipe. You can create scroll button groups or scroll bars to scroll
the contents.

4
10
The following operation option can be added to a recipe table. Select and set up the option in the recipe table property
sheet.
Options Description
Visibility Control You can show or hide a recipe table by a specified bit or the current user level. Select and set
10.7.3. Settings
You can complete all the settings of a recipe table in the Recipe Table property sheet. This sheet contains the following
three pages.
■ General
■ Data Item
■ Visibility

This section describes how to define the general settings for a recipe table. The following is an example of the General
page.

10
located. The format of the IDs for the recipe tables is RTnnnn.
Type Select one of the following types for the recipe table:
Type Description
Horizontal View Displays the recipes in rows and recipe data items in
columns.
Vertical View Displays the recipes in columns and recipe data items
in rows.
Current Recipe Displays the recipe data items of the current recipe in
rows.
Allows operator input Check this option if you allow the operator to update the value of the recipe data
item.
Recipe Block Select the recipe whose collected data is to be displayed by the object.
Title Language Select a language so you can view and edit the settings of the title row for that
language.
Recipe Number Specifies the title for the recipe number column.
Data Font Select a font for displaying data.
All Data Items
Recipe Color Select a color for the recipe number.
Number

4
10
This section describes how to define the display format for the values of each data item. The following is an example of the
Data Item page.
table
Alignment The alignment for displaying data item #n. There are three types of alignments: Left, Center,
and Right.
Justification The justification for displaying data item #n. There are three types of justifications:
Option Description
Move Up Click the button to move the selected data item before the previous data item. The Move Up
button will help you to reorder the display sequence of the data items It will not be available
Move Down Click the button to move the selected data item after the next data item. The Move Down
button will help you to reorder the display sequence of the data items. It will not be available

CHAPTER 11
ALARMS AND
ALARM DISPLAYS
11.1. Using Alarms................................................................................................. 1

11.2. Setting Up Alarm Processing....................................................................... 2
11.3. Working with Alarm Blocks ........................................................................ 4
11.3.1. Creating an Alarm Block ............................................................................................... 4
11.3.2. Importing and Exporting an Alarm Block ..................................................................... 4
11.3.3. Deleting an Alarm Block ............................................................................................... 4
11.3.4. Specifying To-be-recorded Data.................................................................................... 5
11.4. Discrete Alarm Blocks.................................................................................. 7
11.4.1. Settings .......................................................................................................................... 7
11.5. Analog Alarm Blocks...................................................................................11
11.5.1. Settings ........................................................................................................................ 11
11.6. Alarm Displays............................................................................................ 15
11.6.3. Settings ........................................................................................................................ 17
11.6.5. Query Settings ............................................................................................................. 21
4
11
In order to use alarm display for your application, you need to set up alarm processing first, and then define an alarm block.
This chapter describes how to set up alarm processing and the alarm block. It also describes how to configure the alarm
display to show alarm history, alarm count, active alarm and alarm marquee.
11.1. Using Alarms
To use an alarm in your application, please follow the procedure as below:

1. Setting up alarm processing
2. Creating and configuring discrete alarm blocks or analog alarm blocks
Described in Section 11.4 and Section 11.5
3. Creating and configuring alarm displays
You can use the command flag setting in the command block or function button to request the panel to clear the alarm
history or clear the alarm count.
To know how to set up the command flag in the command block, please see Section 3.5.1 Command Block and Status
Words. To know how to define a function button, please see Section 5.4.1 Basic Operations on function buttons.
11-1 CHAPTER 11 ALARMS AND ALARM DISPLAYS

11
11.2. Setting Up Alarm Processing
You can set up the alarm processing with the Alarm Properties dialog box. In this dialog, you can determine the required
memory for the alarm logging buffer, choose the default color and font for the alarm message, specify how to save the
alarm history records to a text file and configure the global alarm marquee if you want to display it on the screen. To open
the dialog box for alarm processing, please double click the node named Alarms in the Project Manager tool window. The
following is an example of the Alarm Properties dialog box.
The table below describes each property in the Alarm Properties dialog.
Alarm Logging Size The maximum number of records that the alarm logging buffer can hold. For
Buffer example: 100 means that when the 101st alarm occurs, the 1st record will be
overwritten.
Required The size of the alarm logging buffer. The unit is byte. The formula to calculate the
non-volatile size is: Alarm Logging Buffer Size = Number of Records * 16 + Maximal Number of
memory Data Values for Each Record * 4 + 16.
Continued
CHAPTER 11 ALARMS AND ALARM DISPLAYS 11-2

4
11
Export Alarm Save to file Check this option so the most current alarm history record will be written to a
History automatically specified file periodically. Each time the operation is performed, the panel writes
only the record that has not already been saved to the file.
File Name The filename or the prefix of the filename of the file to save the alarm record as.
The alarm records are saved in text format and the file extension name must be
“.txt”. You can use any text editor or Microsoft Excel to view the alarm records
directly. This item is available when the option Save alarm history to file is checked.
Time to Specifies the period to save the alarm history records. This item is available when
Save the option Save alarm history to file is checked. There are nine periods available:
Every hour on the hour ; Every 8 hours (00:00, 08:00, 16:00) ; Every 12 hours
(00:00, 12:00) Every day at 00:00; Every day at 08:00; Every day at 12:00; Every
Sunday at 00:00; Every Monday at 00:00; Every first day of the month at 00:00.
Add Check this option so the exported alarm history can have the sequence numbers
sequence for the alarm records.
number to
alarm record
Default Alarm Level 1, Select a default color for alarm levels 1, 2…8. The alarm display for each alarm
Message Color Level 2… level will show an alarm message with the selected color.
Level 8
Default Alarm Language Select a default language so you can view and edit the language dependent
Message Font settings in the Text group for that language. The language dependent properties in
the Text group include Font and Alarm Status Abbreviation.
Font Select a default font for the text of the alarm message.
Global Alarm Show when Check this option if you want to show the global alarm marquee on the current
Marquee there is any screen when there is any alarm.
alarm
Position Select one of the following 3 positions for the global alarm marquee to be displayed.
Position Description
Top The global alarm marquee shows Alarm Marquee
up at the top of the screen.
Screen
Center The global alarm marquee shows

up at the center of the screen. Screen
Alarm Marquee
Bottom The global alarm marquee shows

up at the bottom of the screen. Screen
Alarm Marquee
Properties Click the button to bring up the Alarm Display dialog box to set up the properties of
the global alarm marquee. Please see Section 11.6.4 for details.

11
11.3. Working with Alarm Blocks
11.3.1. Creating an Alarm Block

To create a discrete alarm block, you may do one of the following:
1) In the Project Manager tool window, right-click the Alarms node of the concerned panel application and select Add
Discrete Alarm Block.
2) In the menu bar, click Panel to bring up the Panel sub-menu. Click Discrete Alarm Block in the Panel sub-menu to
bring up the pop-up menu. Select Add in the pop-up menu.
To create an analog alarm block, you may do one of the following:

1) In the Project Manager tool window, right-click the Alarms node of the concerned panel application and select Add
Analog Alarm Block.
2) In the menu bar, click Panel to bring up the Panel sub-menu. Click Analog Alarm Block in the Panel sub-menu to bring
up the pop-up menu. Select Add in the pop-up menu.
11.3.2. Importing and Exporting an Alarm Block

To import an alarm block, right-click the Alarms node and then select Import Alarm Block… in the Project Manager window.
Select *.alm file in the Open file dialog and then click Open.
To export a discrete alarm block, right-click the node of the desired discrete alarm block and then select Export Alarm
Block…. in the Project Manager window.
To export an analog alarm block, right-click the node of the desired analog alarm block and then select Export Alarm
Block…. in the Project Manager window.
11.3.3. Deleting an Alarm Block

To delete a discrete alarm block, you may do one of the following:
1) In the Project Manager window, right-click the node of the desired discrete alarm block and then select Delete.
bring up the Discrete Alarm Block pop-up menu. Select Delete in the pop-up menu to bring up the discrete alarm block
list of the current panel application. Select the desired discrete alarm block in the list.
To delete an analog alarm block, you may do one of the following:

1) In the Project Manager window, right-click the node of the desired analog alarm block and then select Delete.
up the Analog Alarm Block pop-up menu. Select Delete in the pop-up menu to bring up the analog alarm block list of
the current panel application. Select the desired analog alarm block in the list.

4
11
11.3.4. Specifying To-be-recorded Data
You can record maximum 8 data values and display them in the alarm message. The data value will be appended to the
alarm message with the following format:
(Name: Value of the address with the specified format)
For example, the recorded value #2 will display the 32-bit floating point number stored in W10 with the format of 4 total
digits and 1 fractional digit.
If the value of W10 is 123.456 when the alarm occurs, the following text will be appended to its alarm message:
(Temperature: 123.4)
To specify values, use the Specify To-be-recorded Data dialog. The following is an example of the dialog:
The Specify To-be-recorded Data dialog contains two parts. The left side lists the address and name of each value. The
right side shows the properties of the selected value. To select a value, click the row of the value in the list. The following
table describes each property of the value.
Language Select a language so you can view and edit the name of the value for that language.
Address The read address of the value. The address can be any valid word address.
Data Type The data type of the value. The supported data types include: 16-Bit Unsigned Integer,
BCD, 32-Bit Floating Point.
Continued

11
Total Digits Specifies the number of digits to be displayed for the value of the item.
Fractional Digits Specifies how to display the fractional part for the value of the item. When the Display Type is
32-bit Floating Point, this property specifies the number of fractional digits to be displayed.
When the Display Type is not 32-bit Floating Point, this property specifies not only the number
of fractional digits to be displayed, but also the number of least significant digits to be
displayed as the fractional part. With this feature, an integer can be shown as a fixed point
number.
Example:
formula.

4
11
11.4. Discrete Alarm Blocks
You can set up a discrete alarm block with the Discrete Alarm Block dialog box. There are two ways to open the dialog box:
1) In the Project Manager window, move the mouse to the node of the desired discrete alarm block and double click the
node or right-click the node and then select Properties.
bring up the Discrete Alarm Block pop-up menu. Select Properties in the pop-up menu to bring up the discrete alarm
block list of the current panel application. Select the desired discrete alarm block in the list.
11.4.1. Settings
Use the dialog box to define all the settings for a discrete alarm block. The following is an example of the discrete alarm
block dialog.

11
The table below describes some properties in the Discrete Alarm Block dialog.
Block Name The discrete alarm block's name. The maximum length of the name is 20 characters.
Block ID The discrete alarm block’s ID number. Select a number between 0 and 15. The number
is unique among all discrete alarm blocks of the panel application.
Type Specifies the memory type used to allocate the discrete alarm block. There are four
types:
Type Description
Bits Select Bits to create a discrete alarm block starting
from the bit device M with N continuous bits
Bits of Word Select Bits of Word Device to create a discrete
Device alarm block starting from the bit 0 of the word device
M with N continuous bits of the word device.
Word Value Select Word Value to create a discrete alarm block
at word device M. An alarm will occur if the value of
M is between 0 and N.
Random Bits Select Random Bits to create a discrete alarm block
with N specified random bits.
Legend: M: An address specified in Read Address field. N: A size specified in Block
Size/Maximum field.
Read Address Specifies the starting address of an alarm block to monitor the status of alarms.
Block Size / Maximum Specifies the block size of an alarm block. The unit is bit. The maximum block size or
maximum value you can specify depends on the type selected. The following table lists
the limitation of each type:
Type Maximum block size/value
Bits 256
Bits of Word Device 256
Word Value 0-511
Random Bits 64
Read Interval Specifies a period between 1 to 3600 seconds that the panel reads the Alarm Block
and checks the state of every bit in the block. The shorter the Read Interval is, the
faster the alarm display object will be refreshed, but the refresh rate of other objects will
be slower.
Record <Check Box> Check this option if you want to record the specified data values and display them in
specified the alarm message.
data Number of The number of data values you want to record. The maximum is 8.
values data values
Specify… Click the button to specify the recorded data values. For details, please see Section
11.3.4 Specifying To-be-recorded Data.

4
11
To specify all discrete alarms, you need to set the discrete alarm list and the discrete alarm properties field. The discrete
alarm list is located at the bottom-left of the dialog, and shows all the discrete alarms in the alarm block. The discrete alarm
properties field is located at the right of the alarm list, and shows all the properties of the selected discrete alarm.
The following table describes each column in the discrete alarm list.
Column Description
No. The number of the discrete alarm in the alarm block.
Address/Bit No./Value If the type is Bits or Random Bits, the column shows the address of the discrete alarm.
If the type is Bits of Word Device, the column shows the bit no of the discrete alarm. If
the type is Word Value, the column shows the value of the discrete alarm.
Use Check this option if you want to use discrete alarm #n.
Message Displays a specified alarm message in the selected language.
You need to make a selection before editing the discrete alarm. To select a discrete alarm, click the row of that alarm in the
list. To select multiple rows, click the row on its header column and use Ctrl + Click to add a row to the selection.
If multiple rows are selected, any modification on the common properties such as Level, Record alarm, Sound Buzzer,
Display message, Display screen, Required Acknowledgement, Record ACK, Notification, Tip Screen…will apply to all
selected discrete alarms
The following table describes each property of the selected discrete alarm.
Address/Bit No./Value Indicates the status of its corresponding alarm. The meaning of the field depends on the
selected type.
Field Name Type Description

Address Bits Shows the address of the selected discrete alarm
Bit No. Bits of Word Shows the bit no. of the selected discrete alarm
Device
Value Word Value Shows the value of the selected discrete alarm
Address Random Specifies the bit variable of the selected discrete
Bits
alarm. Click to enter an address. Click to
select a tag.
Alarm State Specify the alarm state to indicate the corresponding alarm is active. If 1(On) is
selected, a bit with high (on) state indicates that the corresponding alarm is active. And
a bit with low (off) state indicates that the corresponding alarm is clear.
Level Select a level for the alarm between 1 and 8.
ID Specifies the alarm ID. The maximum length of the ID is 6 characters.
Message Language Select an existing language that you are setting the message to.
Import All… Click the button to import the texts of *.csv files, and save the texts as the alarm
messages for the current language.
Export All… Click the button to export all the messages for the selected language to a *.csv file.
Text Specifies the text for the current language. The text will be shown when the alarm is
active.
Show Check the specified value you want to record and display in the alarm message. Note
Recorded that only the selected value will be recorded.
Value
Record alarm Check this option if you want to record the alarm to the alarm display object.
Sound Buzzer Check this option if you want the panel to play the sound buzzer when the alarm is
activated or cleared.
Continued

11
Display message Check this option if you want the panel to automatically display a message when
the alarm is activated or cleared. This field can be checked only when Display
screen is unchecked.
Display screen <Check Check this option if you want the panel to automatically display a window screen
Box> when the alarm is activated or cleared. This field can be checked only when Display
message is unchecked.
Select a window screen to display when the alarm is activated or cleared. The field
is available when Display Screen is selected. Note that only Window Screens will be
available to choose from.
Required <Check Check this option if you want the operator to acknowledge an alarm. When an alarm
Acknowledge- Box> becomes active, the panel displays an alarm message or a screen with ACK button
ment when the Required Acknowledgement option is selected. The operator should press
the ACK button to acknowledge the alarm, and have the panel refresh the current
screen. This field is available when either Display message or Display screen is
selected.
Record ACK Check this option if you want to record ACK to the alarm display object
Notification Check this option if you want to notify the specified bit when the ACK button is
clicked.
Tip Screen <Check Check this option if you want to display a screen when you select the corresponding
Box> alarm on the alarm display object.
Select a window screen as the tip screen.
Play Sound <Check Check this option if you want the panel to play sound when the alarm is activated or
Box> cleared.
Sound Select a sound from sound table of the current panel application.
Number of Specifies how many times you want to play the sound.
Plays
Break Specifies an interval between two plays. You can select 0s, 0.2s, 0.4s, 0.6s, 0.8s,
Between 1s, 2s, 3s, 4s, 5s.
Plays

4
11
11.5. Analog Alarm Blocks
You can set up an analog alarm block with the Analog Alarm Block dialog box. There are two ways to open the dialog box:
1) In the Project Manager window, move the mouse to the node of the desired analog alarm block and double click the
node or right-click the node and then select Properties.
up the Analog Alarm Block pop-up menu. Select Properties in the pop-up menu to bring up the analog alarm block list
of the current panel application. Select the desired analog alarm block from the list.
11.5.1. Settings
Use the dialog box to define all the settings for an analog alarm block. The following is an example of the analog alarm
block dialog box.

11
The table below describes each property in the Analog Alarm Block dialog box.
Block Name The analog alarm block's name. The maximum length of the name is 20 characters.
Block ID The analog alarm block’s ID number. Select a number between 64 and 79. The
number is unique among all analog alarm blocks of the panel application.
Type Specifies the type of the analog alarm block. There are two types:
Type Description
Continuous Select Continuous Words to create an analog alarm block
Words starting from the word device M with N continuous words
Random Words Select Random Words to create an analog alarm block with
N specified random words.
Legend: M: An address specified in Read Address field. N: A size specified in Block
Size.
Read Address Specifies the starting address of an alarm block to monitor the status of alarms.
Block Size Specifies the block size of an alarm block. The unit is word. The maximum block size
you can specify depends on the type you select.
Type Maximum block size
Continuous Words 16
Random Words 64
Read Interval Specifies a period between 1 to 3600 seconds that the panel reads the Alarm Block
and checks the state of every bit in the block. The shorter the Read Interval is, the
faster the alarm display object will be refreshed, but the refresh rate of other objects
will be slower.
Record <Check Box> Check this option if you want to record the specified data values and display them in
specified the alarm message.
data Number of data The number of data values you want to record. The maximum is 8.
values values
Specify… Click the button to specify the recorded data values. For details, please see Section
11.3.4 Specifying To-be-recorded Data.
To specify all analog alarms, you need to set the analog alarm list and the analog alarm properties field. The analog alarm
list is located at the bottom-left of the dialog, and shows all the analog alarms in the alarm block. The analog alarm
properties field is located to the right of the list, and shows all the properties of the selected analog alarm.
The following table describes each column of the analog alarm list.
Column Description
No. The number of the analog alarm in the alarm block.
Address Shows the address of the analog alarm.
Use Check this option if you want to use analog alarm #n.
Message Displays a specified alarm message in the selected language.
You need to make a selection before editing the analog alarm. To select an analog alarm, click the row of that alarm in the
list. To select multiple rows, click the row on its header column and use Ctrl + Click to add a row to the selection.
If multiple rows are selected, any modification to the common properties such as Level, Record alarm, Sound Buzzer,
Display message, Display screen, Required Acknowledgement, Record ACK, Notification, Tip Screen…will apply to all
selected analog alarms

4
11
The following table describes each column in the analog alarm list.
Alarm Type There are four types of analog alarms:
Type Description
Low Low An alarm will occur if the value of the destination variable is lower
than or equal to the Low Low Limit.
Low An alarm will occur if the value of the destination variable is equal
to the Low Limit or between the Low Limit and the Low Low Limit.
High An alarm will occur if the value of the destination variable is equal
to the High Limit or between the High Limit and the High High
Limit.
High High An alarm will occur if the value of the destination variable is higher
than or equal to the High High Limit.
Data Type The data type of the destination variable. The supported data types include: 16-Bit
Unsigned Integer, 32-Bit Unsigned Integer, 16-Bit Signed Integer, 32-Bit Signed
Integer, 16-Bit BCD, 32-Bit BCD, 32-Bit Floating Point.
Address Indicates the status of its corresponding alarm.
Type Description
Continuous Words Shows the address of the selected analog alarm.
Random Words Specifies the word variable of the selected analog alarm.
Click to enter an address. Click to select a tag.
Limit Set a limit for the alarm. The value range of the limit depends on the specified data
type.
Hysteresis Set a range for the limit values for an alarm to turn OFF after it has been turned ON.
If the alarm type is Low Low or Low, the range is between the Limit and Limit + Limit *
Hysteresis/100. If the alarm type is High High or High, the range is between the Limit
and Limit - Limit * Hysteresis/100.
Level Select a level for the alarm between 1 and 8.
ID Specifies the alarm ID. The maximum length of the ID is 6 characters.
Message Language Select an existing language that you are setting the message for.
Import All… Click the button to import the texts of *.csv files and saves the texts as the alarm
messages for the current language.
Export All… Click the button to export all the messages for the selected language to a *.csv file.
Text Specifies the text for the current language. The text will be shown when the alarm is
active.
Show Check the specified value you want to record and display in the alarm message. Note
Recorded that only the selected value will be recorded.
Value
Record alarm Check this option if you want to record the alarm in the alarm display object.
Sound Buzzer Check this option if you want the panel to play a sound buzzer when the alarm is
activated or cleared.
Display alarm message Check this option if you want the panel to display a message automatically when the
alarm is activated or cleared. This field can be checked only when Display screen is
unchecked.
Continued

11
Display <Check Box> Check this option if you want the panel to display a window screen automatically when
screen the alarm is activated or cleared. This field can be checked only when Display
message is unchecked.
Select a window screen to display when the alarm is activated or cleared. The field is
available when Display Screen is selected. Note that only Window Screens will be
available to choose from.
Required <Check Check this option if you want the operator to acknowledge an alarm. When an alarm
Acknowledge- Box> becomes active, the panel displays an alarm message or a screen with ACK button
ment when Required Acknowledgement is selected. The operator should press the ACK
button to acknowledge the alarm and to have the panel refresh the current screen.
This field is available when either Display message or Display screen is selected.
Record Check this option if you want to record ACK in the alarm display object
ACK
Notification Check this option if you want to notify the specified bit when the ACK button is clicked.
Tip Screen <Check Check this option if you want to display a screen when you select the corresponding
Box> alarm on the alarm display object.
Select a window screen as the tip screen
Play Sound <Check Check this option if you want the panel to play sound when the alarm is activated or
Box> cleared.
Sound Select a sound from sound table of the current panel application.
Number of Specifies how many times you want to play the sound.
Plays
Break Specifies an interval between two plays. You can select 0s, 0.2s, 0.4s, 0.6s, 0.8s, 1s,
Between 2s, 3s, 4s, 5s.
Plays

4
11
11.6. Alarm Displays

There are four types of alarm displays.
Type Description
Alarm You can display a list of alarm records by using an alarm history display.
History
The above is an example of the alarm history display. The first row is the title row. It displays the title of
each column. The other rows display one alarm record per row. You can create scroll button groups or
scroll bars to scroll the contents. An alarm history display can have seven columns. The following table
describes the content of each column of an alarm record.
Column Description
Date The date when the record is created. This column is optional.
Time The time when the record is created. This column is optional.
Alarm Block ID The ID of the alarm block in which the associated alarm is defined. This column is
optional.
Alarm Level The level of the associated alarm. This column is optional.
Alarm ID The ID of the associated alarm. This column is optional.
Alarm Status The type of the alarm record. There are three types of alarm records.
Type Description
Active An Active record is created when an alarm is activated.
ACK An ACK record is created when an alarm is acknowledged.
CLR A CLR record is created when an alarm is cleared.
Alarm The message of the associated alarm. This column is optional.

Message
The text color of a row is determined by the type of the alarm record.
Continued

11
Type Description
Alarm You can display a list of the number of occurrences for each alarm by using an alarm count display.
Count
The above is an example of an alarm count display. The first row is the title row. It displays the title of
each column. The other rows display one alarm per row. You can create scroll button groups or scroll
bars to scroll the contents. An alarm count display can have five columns. The following table describes
the content of each column of an alarm.
Column Description
Alarm Block ID The ID of the alarm block in which the alarm is defined. This column is optional.
Alarm Level The level of the alarm. This column is optional.
Alarm ID The ID of the alarm. This column is optional.
Alarm Count The number of occurrences of the alarm.
Alarm The message of the alarm. This column is optional.
Message
The text color of a row is determined by the level of the alarm.

Active You can display a list of active alarms by using an active alarm display.
Alarm
The above is an example of an active alarm display. The first row is the title row. It displays the title of
each column. The other rows display one active alarm per row. You can create scroll button groups or
scroll bars to scroll the contents. An active alarm display can have six columns. The following table
describes the content of each column for an active alarm.
Column Description
Date The date when the alarm is activated.
Time The time when the alarm is activated.
Alarm Block ID The ID of the alarm block in which the alarm is defined. This column is optional.
Alarm Level The level of the alarm. This column is optional.
Alarm ID The ID of the alarm. This column is optional.
Alarm The message of the alarm. This column is optional.
Message
The text color of a row is determined by the level of the alarm.

Continued

4
11
Type Description
Alarm You can display and scroll the messages of the active alarms by using an alarm marquee.
Marquee
The above is an example of an alarm marquee. You can place the following texts in front of the alarm
messages.
Text Description
Alarm Block ID The ID of the alarm block in which the alarm is defined.
Alarm Level The level of the alarm.
Alarm ID The ID of the alarm.
The text color for an alarm is determined by the level of that alarm.
Note: You can sort the list of an alarm display at runtime by touching the title of the column that you want to be the sort
field. Touching the same title again changes the sort order from ascending to descending, or vice versa. The columns that
can be a sort field include: Date, Time, Alarm Block ID, Alarm Level, Alarm ID, Alarm Status, and Alarm Count.

The following operation options can be added to an alarm display. Select and set the option in the Alarm Display dialog
box.
Options Description
Visibility You can show and hide an alarm display with a specified bit or the current user level. Select and set
11.6.3. Settings
You can complete all the settings of an alarm display in the Alarm Display dialog box. This dialog box contains the
■ General
■ Query
■ Visibility

11
This section describes how to define the general settings for an alarm display. The following is an example of the General
page of the Alarm Display dialog box.
The following table describes each property in the General page of the Alarm Display dialog box.
screen where the object is located and is unchangeable. The format of the IDs for the alarm displays
is ADnnnn.
Shape For details about the following properties, see Section 4.3.4 Setting up the Shape of an Object..
settings
Continued

4
11
Type Specifies the type of the alarm display. There are four types:
Type Description
Alarm History The alarm history display lists the alarm records.
Alarm Count The alarm count display lists the number of occurrences of
each alarm.
Active Alarm The active alarm display lists the active alarms.
Alarm Marquee The alarm marquee scrolls the messages of the active alarms
horizontally.
Scrolling Speed Select a speed for the alarm display when the Type is Alarm Marquee.
Direction Select Leftward or Rightward for the alarm display when the Type is Alarm Marquee.
Grid Vertical Select this option if you want the alarm display to have vertical grids.
Horizontal Select this option if you want the alarm display to have horizontal grids.
Alarm Block Select an alarm block so that the alarm display will show the alarms defined in that
alarm block only. Select All if you want the alarm display to show all the alarms.
Title <Check Box> Select this option if you want the alarm display to have a title row to show the title for
each column of the displayed list when the Type is Alarm History, Alarm Count, or
Current Alarm.
Language Select a language so you can view and edit the settings of the title row for that
language.
Color Select a color for the text.
BG Color Select a color for the title row.
Date Specifies the title for the Date column. This field is available when the Type is Alarm
History or Current Alarm.
Time Specifies the title for the Time column. This field is available when the Type is Alarm
History or Current Alarm.
Alarm Block ID Specifies the title for the Alarm Block ID column.
Alarm Level Specifies the title for the Alarm Level column.
Alarm ID Specifies the title for the Alarm ID column.
Alarm Status Specifies the title for the Alarm Status column. This field is available when the Type is
Alarm History.
Alarm Count Specifies the title for the Alarm Count column. This field is available when the Type is
Alarm Count.
Alarm Message Specifies the title for the Alarm Message column.
Continued

11
Text Sort Type Specifies how the alarm display initially sorts its list. This field is available when
the Type is not Alarm Marquee.
Note: When you want an alarm display to sort its list by the contents of a
column at runtime, simply touch the title of that column and the alarm display
will sort its list right away.
Language Select a language so you can view and edit the language dependent settings
in the Text group for that language. The language dependent properties in the
Text group include Font and Alarm Status Abbreviation.
Date <Check Box> Check this option if you want the alarm display to have the Date column. This
field is available when the Type is Alarm History.
<Drop-down List> Select a format for displaying the date
Time <Check Box> Check this option if you want the alarm display to have the Time column. This
field is available when the Type is Alarm History.
<Drop-down List> Select a format for displaying the time
Alarm Block ID Check this option if you want the alarm display to have the Alarm Block ID
column.
Alarm Level Check this option if you want the alarm display to have the Alarm Level column.
Alarm ID Check this option if you want the alarm display to have the Alarm ID column.
Alarm Message Check this option if you want the alarm display to have the Alarm Message
column.
Cleared Alarms Check this option so the alarm display will show the records of cleared alarms.
This field is available when the Type is Alarm History.
Alarm ACK Check this option so the alarm display will show the records of acknowledged
alarms. This field is available when the Type is Alarm History.
Sequence Number Check this option so the alarm display will show the sequence numbers of the
alarm records. This field is available when the Type is Alarm History.
Alarm Active Enter up to 3 characters that will be shown in the Alarm Status column for the
Status alarm records that record when an alarm occurs. This field is available when
Abbreviation the Type is Alarm History.
Cleared Enter up to 3 characters that will be shown in the Alarm Status column for the
alarm records that record when an alarm is cleared. This field is available
when the Type is Alarm History.
ACK Enter up to 3 characters that will be shown in the Alarm Status column for the
alarm records that record when an alarm is acknowledged. This field is
available when the Type is Alarm History.
Line Spacing Specifies the extra space in pixels for two adjacent rows of the alarm display.
This field is available when the Type is not Alarm Marquee.
Item Spacing Specifies the extra space for every column of the alarm display. This field is
available when the Type is not Alarm Marquee.
Alarm Click the button to replace the selections of the L1 to L8 fields by the default
Message alarm message colors defined in the Alarm Properties dialog box. This button
Color is available when the Type is not Alarm History.
L1,L2 … L8 Select a color for alarm level 1, 2…8. The alarm display will show an alarm
message with this color if that alarm is defined as a level 1, 2…8 alarm. This
field is available when the Type is not Alarm History.
Active Select a color for displaying the alarm records that record when an alarm
occurs. This field is available when the Type is Alarm History.
Cleared Select a color for displaying the alarm records that record when an alarm is
cleared. This field is available when the Type is Alarm History.
ACK Select a color for displaying the alarm records that record when an alarm is
acknowledged. This field is available when the Type is Alarm History.

4
11
11.6.5. Query Settings
This section describes how to query alarms. The following is an example of the Query page of the Alarm Display dialog
box.
The following table describes each property in the Query page of the Alarm Display dialog box.
Support Dynamic When this option is selected, the object can display the alarm records to answer the query
Query specified in the Query Parameter Block.
Query Trigger Bit Specifies the bit that will trigger the query operation at runtime. The HMI reads the Query
Parameter Block and refreshes the object according to the current query whenever the Query
Trigger Bit changes from Off to On. Click to enter the bit address. Click to enter the bit
tag.
Query Parameter Specifies the location that stores the query parameters.
Block
The following table shows the data arrangement of the parameter block.
Word Description
0 The query flags.
Bit Description
0 Query the alarm records of the specified alarm number when the bit is on.
The alarm number is specified in word 1 of the Query Parameter Block.
1 Query the alarm records that occurred within the specified duration when
the bit is on. The date range is specified in word 2-7 of the Query Parameter
Block. The time range is specified in word 8-13 of the Query Parameter
Block.
Note: When both query flags are on, the answer will fulfill both query conditions.
1 The alarm number.
2,3,4 The start date of the date range.
Year(word 2): 1~99; Month(word 3): 1~12; Day(word 4): 1~31
5,6,7 The end date of the date range.
Year(word 5): 1~99; Month(word 6): 1~12; Day(word 7): 1~31
8,9,10 The start time of the time range.
Hour(word 8): 0~23; Minute(word 9): 0~59; Second(word 10): 0~59
11,12, The end time of the time range.
13 Hour(word 11): 0~23; Minute(word 12): 0~59; Second(word 13): 0~59
Block Size (Words) The size in word of query parameter block.

Date Range Check this option if you want the object to display the alarms that occur in the specified date range.
Time Range Check this option if you want the object to display the alarms that occur in the specified time range.

CHAPTER 12
DATA COLLECTION AND

HISTORIC DISPLAYS
12.1. Data Logger................................................................................................... 1

12.1.1. Settings .......................................................................................................................... 1
12.1.4. Using LDF File to Save Logged Data ........................................................................... 7
12.2. Displaying Logged Data Values Using Historic Data Tables................... 8
12.2.3. Settings .......................................................................................................................... 8
12.3. Displaying Logged Data Trend Using Historic Trend Graph ............... 12
12.3.3. Settings ........................................................................................................................ 12
12.3.5. Curve Settings.............................................................................................................. 15
12.3.6. Axis Settings................................................................................................................ 16
12.4. Displaying History of Predefined Events Using Historic Event Tables 18
12.4.3. Settings ........................................................................................................................ 19
12.4.5. Message Settings ......................................................................................................... 22
12.5. Displaying Time Slice Data Profile Using Single Record Line Charts . 23
12.5.3. Settings ........................................................................................................................ 24
12.5.5. Pen Settings ................................................................................................................. 27
12.5.6. Axis Settings................................................................................................................ 29
4
12
This chapter describes how to set up data loggers for your application to collect data, and how to configure the historic
display objects to display the collected data.
12.1. Data Logger

A data logger can collect and store the values of a data block. You can specify what data block you want to log, determine
the frequency of data sampling, choose the type of memory to save the logged data, and specify how to save the logged
data to files.
You can create up to 16 data loggers for your application. The maximum size of the data block that can be sampled by a
data logger is 128 words.
You can use the function button to request the panel to clear logged data, or save/load logged data (.ldf/.txt file).
To know how to define a function button, please see Section 5.4.1 Basic Operations of function buttons.
To create a data logger, you may do one of the following:

1) In the Project Manager tool window, right-click the Data Loggers node of the concerned panel application and select
Add Data Logger.
2) In the menu bar, click Panel to bring up the Panel sub-menu. Click Data Logger in the Panel sub-menu to bring up the
Data Logger pop-up menu. Select Add in the pop-up menu.
12.1.1. Settings
You can set up a data logger with the Data Logger dialog box. There are two ways to open the dialog box of a data logger:
1) In the Project Manager window, right-click the node of the desired data logger and select Properties.
2) In the menu bar, click Panel to bring up the Panel sub-menu. Click Data Logger in the Panel sub-menu to bring up the
Data Logger pop-up menu. Select Properties in the pop-up menu to bring up the data logger list of the current panel
application. Select the data logger in the list.
The Data Logger dialog box contains the following two pages:
■ General
■ Data Item
12-1 CHAPTER 12 DATA COLLECTION AND HISTORIC DISPLAYS

12
Use the General page to define the general settings for a data logger. The following is an example of the General page.

Name The data logger's name. The maximum length of the name is 48 characters.
ID The data logger's ID number. Select a number between 1 and 16. The number is
unique among all data loggers of the panel application.
Use battery backed RAM Check this option so the logging buffer of the data logger will be located in the battery
backed RAM. The logged data will not be lost after power down if the battery backed
RAM is used as the logging buffer. If this option is not selected, the logging buffer will
be located in an ordinary RAM, and the data logger will clear the logging buffer
whenever the target panel is powered up.
Sample Size The size of the data to be sampled. The unit is word.
Number of Samples Specifies the maximum number of samples that the logging buffer of the data logger
can hold.
Logging Buffer Size The size of the logging buffer. The unit is word. The formula to calculate the size is:
Logging Buffer Size = Number of Samples * (Sample Size + 5)
Latest Sampled Word You can use the addresses shown here to refer to the latest sampled data of the data
Data Address logger for configuring screen objects and writing macros.
Read Address Specifies the variable representing the data block to be sampled.
size of the data block is specified in the Sample Size field.
Continued
CHAPTER 12 DATA COLLECTION AND HISTORIC DISPLAYS 12-2

4
12
Sampling Timed The data logger samples data periodically at a rate specified in the Interval field. You
Method can specify an interval between 1 and 65535 seconds for the Interval field. For
example, if you want the data logger to sample data every 5 seconds, specify 5 for
the Interval field.
Triggered The data logger samples data once whenever the trigger bit specified in the Trigger
Bit field changes from Off to On.
Clocked The data logger samples data at fixed moments specified in the At Each field. There
are six sets of fixed moments available for the At Each field.
At Each Fixed Moments
1x Every minute at 0 second
5x The following moments of every hour: 00:00, 05:00, 10:00, 15:00,
20:00, 25:00, 30:00, 35:00, 40:00, 45:00, 50:00, 55;00
10x The following moments of every hour: 00:00, 10:00, 20:00, 30:00,
40:00, 50:00
15x The following moments of every hour: 00:00, 15:00, 30:00, 45:00
30x The following moments of every hour: 00:00, 30:00
60x Every hour on the hour
Timed The data logger samples data periodically at a rate specified in the Interval field. You
(sub-second) can select an interval between 0.1 and 0.9 seconds for the Interval field. For example,
if you want the data logger to sample data every 0.5 seconds, select 0.5 for the
Interval field.
The sub-second sampling requires high data acquisition performance. As there are
many factors that can affect performance, it is not guaranteed that the specified
sampling rate can be attained.
Load from .LDF The data logger does not sample data. It receives the data loaded from an LDF file.
File
Sample Full Stop Sampling Check the option if you want the data logger to stop sampling data when the logging
Processing buffer is full.
Notify Check the option if you want the data logger to set the bit specified in the Bit field to
On when the number of collected samples exceeds the limit specified in the Full Limit
field.
Bit Available when the Notify field is checked. Specifies the bit for the sample full
notification. Click to enter an address for this field. Click to select a tag for this
field.
Full Limit Available when the Notify field is checked. Select a percentage as the full limit. When
the ratio of collected samples to maximum samples specified in the Number of
Samples field exceeds the percentage, the data logger sets the bit specified in the Bit
field to On.
External Clear Buffer Check this option so the data logger can be controlled to clear its logging buffer with
Control the trigger bit specified in the Trigger Bit field.
Trigger Bit Available when the Clear Buffer option is checked. Select a trigger bit that will control
the data logger to clear its logging buffer. The data logger clears its logging buffer
when the trigger bit changes from Off to On.
Enable Check this option so the data logger can be enabled and disabled by the enabling bit
Sampling specified in the Enabling Bit field.
Enabling Bit Available when the Enable Sampling option is checked. Select an enabling bit that
will enable and disable the data logger. The data logger is enabled when the enabling
bit is On.
Continued

12
Save Data Save Data to Check this option so the data logger will periodically write the newly collected data to
to File File a specified file. Each time the data logger performs this operation, it writes only the
data that have not saved to a file before.
File Type The type of file to save the logged data.
File Type Description
.CSV/.TXT The logged data are saved in CSV or text format. You can use any
text editor to view the logged data. Most importantly you can use
Microsoft Excel to import the logged data from such files directly.
.LDF The logged data are saved in a binary format and can only be used
by a data logger that has exactly the same data definition. This file
type allows you to view and operate historic data loaded from files.
Operation Type Specifies how to open a file to save the logged data.
Operation Type Description
Create Creates a new file with the specified filename to save the
logged data.
Append or If the specified file exists, appends the logged data to that file;
Create otherwise creates a new file with the specified filename to
save the logged data.
Time to Save Specifies the period to save the logged data. There are nine periods available:
Available Period
Every hour on the hour
Every 8 hours (00:00, 08:00, 16:00)
Every 12 hours (00:00, 12:00)
Every day at 00:00
Every day at 08:00
Every day at 12:00
Every Sunday at 00:00
Every Monday at 00:00
Every month's first day at 00:00
Filename The filename or the prefix of the filename of the file to save the logged data. The
extension name must be "txt" when the File Type is ".TXT". The extension name must
be "ldf" when the File Type is ".LDF".
Filename Suffix Available when the Operation Type is Create. This property guarantees that the
created file has a unique name and no existing file will be overwritten. There are four
kinds of filename suffixes available as shown in the following table.
Filename Suffix Description Example
_YYMMDD_hhmmss YY: year (00-99) Log_090423_102358
MM: month (01-12) (Assume that the specified
DD: day (01-31) Filename is "Log", the current
hh: hour (00-23) date is April 23, 2009, and the
current time is 10:23:58.)
mm: minute (00-59)
ss: second (00-59)
_YYMMDD_hhmm See above Log_090423_1023
_YYMMDD_hh See above Log_090423_10
_YYMMDD See above Log_090423

4
12
Use the Data Item page to define the data items of the sampled data for a data logger. The following is an example of the
Data Item page.
The Data Item page contains two parts. The left part is the data item list that shows the address and name of each data
item in rows. The right part shows the properties of the selected data item. To select a data item, click the row of that data
item in the data item list.
The following table describes each property of the data item.
Address You can use the address shown here to refer to the latest sampled value of the data item.
Continued

12
Fractional Digits Specifies how to display the fractional part of the value of the data item. When the Display
number.
Example:
Note: The Gain and Offset are 32-bit floating point numbers. They have at most 6 significant
digits. Rounding and truncation errors may occur.
formula.

4
12
12.1.4. Using LDF File to Save Logged Data
The LDF files allow you to save logged data in files and view the data later. Hence, the size of the battery backed RAM or
the buffer sizes of the data loggers will not limit the size of the historical data you want to collect.
There are three ways to write the logged data of a data logger to an LDF file:
1) You can use a function button to perform “Copy Logged Data To .LDF File”. The button writes all the logged data of the
specified data logged to an LDF file.
2) You can use the Command Block to request this operation.
3) You can configure a data logger to write its collected data to an LDF file automatically with preset time intervals.
To view the logged data of an LDF file, you need to load the data of that LDF file into a data logger first. A data logger is
able to receive the data from an LDF file only when:
1) The definitions of the data items of the LDF file and the data logger are identical, and
2) The number of samples of the LDF file is not greater than the number of samples of the data logger.
The viewing objects for an LDF file should be configured for the data logger that is able to receive the data from that LDF
file.

12
12.2. Displaying Logged Data Values Using Historic Data Tables

Use the following steps to create a historic data table:
1) Click the Historic Data Table icon in the Object toolbar, or select Historic Data Table in the Object sub-menu.
2) Move the cursor to the screen on which you want to create the object.
3) Click the desired position on the screen to place the new object.
You can use a historic data table to list the values of the data collected by a data logger.
The above is an example of the historic data table. The first row is the title row. It displays the title of each column. The
other rows display one data record per row. You can create scroll button groups or scroll bars to scroll the contents. The
titles of data columns are the names of data items defined in the Data Item page of the Data Logger dialog box.

The following operation option can be added to a historic data table. Select and set the option in the Historic Data Table
dialog box.
Options Description
Visibility You can show and hide a historic data table by a specified bit or the current user level. Select and set
12.2.3. Settings
You can set up a historic data table with the Historic Data Table dialog box. There are three ways to open the dialog box of
an object:
1) Double-click the object.
2) Right-click the object to bring up the Object pop-up menu. Select Properties in the pop-up menu.
3) In the Object List window, double-click the row that shows the information of the object.
You can complete all the settings of a historic data table in the Historic Data Table dialog box. This dialog box contains the
■ General
■ Data Item
■ Visibility

4
12
This section describes how to define the general settings for a historic data table. The following is an example of the
General page.
located. The format of the IDs for the historic data tables is HDDnnnn.
Associated Data Logger Select the data logger whose collected data is to be displayed by the object.
Continued

12
Data Source Select data logger or file as the source of the collected data.
This new feature allows you to display historic data that are stored in files.
There are two data sources you can select for Historic Trend Graphs, Historic
Data Tables, and Single Record Line Charts.
When "Data Logger" is selected as the data source for such objects, that
object displays the sampled data stored in the logging buffer of the associated
data logger.
When "File" is selected as the data source for such objects, that object displays
the sampled data stored in the specified file buffer.
One HMI can have up to 16 file buffers and each file buffer is identified by a
unique number between 0 and 15.
You can create a function button to load the sampled data stored in a file.
1) Select "Load Logged Data From File" as the operation of that function button.
2) Select the file extension type. Both CSV and TXT are supported.
3) Specify the associated data logger.
4) Specify the file buffer to save the loaded data.
5) Specify the size of the file buffer. The size is the maximum number of samples
that the file buffer can hold.
File Buffer ID Specify the File Buffer ID if the data source is a file. To specify a file buffer ID for a
file, you can use the Load Logged Data From File operation of the function
button. Please see Section 5.4 Performing Built-in Function Using Function
Buttons for details.
Title Title Select this option if you want the object to display a title row.
Language Select a language so you can view and edit the settings of the title row for that
language.
Date Specifies the title for the Date column.
Time Specifies the title for the Time column.
Data Display oldest Data Check this option if you want the object to display the oldest data first.
First
Display Sequence Check this option if you want the object to display sequence number on the first
Number column.
Font Select a font for displaying data.
All Data Items
Time/Date Date Check this option if you want the object to display the Date column. You need to
Display select a format for displaying the date.
Time Check this option if you want the object to display the Time column. You need to
select a format for displaying the time.
Color Select a color to displaying Time/Date.
Display Relative Time Check this option if you want the object to display a relative measure of time.

4
12
This section describes how to define the display format for the sampled values of each data item. The following is an
example of the Data Item page.
table
Alignment The alignment for displaying data item #n. There are three types of alignment: Left, Center,
and Right.
Justification The justification for displaying data item #n. There are three types of justification:
Option Description

12
12.3. Displaying Logged Data Trend Using Historic Trend Graph

Follow the steps below to create a historic trend graph:
1) Click the Historic Trend Graph icon in the Object toolbar, or select Historic Trend Graph in the Object sub-menu.
3) Click the desired position on the screen to place the new object.
You can use a Historic Trend Graph to display the values of the data collected by a data logger as a trend graph.
Cursor
A historic trend graph can display up to 16 curves. The above is an example of the historic trend graph with two curves. A
historic trend graph can provide a cursor for you to estimate the value in the desired time

The following operation option can be added to a historic trend graph. Select and set the option in the Historic Trend Graph
dialog box.
Options Description
Visibility You can show and hide a historic trend graph by a specified bit or the current user level. Select and
Control set this option in the Visibility page.
12.3.3. Settings
You can set up a historic trend graph with the Historic Trend Graph dialog box. There are three ways to open the dialog
box of an object:
3) In the Object List window, double-click the row that shows the information of the object.
The Historic Trend Graph dialog box contains the following four pages:
■ General
■ Curve
■ Axis
■ Visibility

4
12
This section describes how to define the general settings for a historic trend graph. The following is an example of the
General page of the Historic Trend Graph property sheet.

ID The object’s identifier. It is generated when the object is created and is unchangeable.
The identifier is unique within the screen where the object is located. The format of the IDs
for the historic trend graph is HTDnnnn.
Object. , Border Color, BG Color.
Graph BG color Select a color for the background of the graph.
Associated Data Logger Specifies the associated data logger.
Data Source Select data logger or file as the source of the collected data.
File Buffer ID Specify the File Buffer ID if the data source is a file. To specify a file buffer ID for a file, you
can use Load Logged Data From File operation of the function button. Please see Section
5.4 Performing Built-in Function Using Function Buttons for details.
Continued

12
Number of Curves Specifies the number of curves.
Cursor <Check box> Check this option so the historic trend graph will display a cursor. You can touch and
drag the cursor to the data point(s) that you want to select.
Value Display Select a font for displaying the values of the selected data point(s).
Font
Date Check this option to display the date at the top left of the historic trend graph object. You
need to select a format for displaying the date.
There are 12 formats available: dd/mm/yy, mm/dd/yy, yy/mm/dd, dd.mm.yy, mm.dd.yy,
yy.mm.dd, dd-mm-yy, mm-dd-yy, yy-mm-dd, dd-MMM-yy, MMM-dd-yy, and yy-MMM-dd.
Note: dd: 01-31 (day); mm: 01-12 (month); yy: 00-99 (year); MMM: JAN-DEC (month)
Time Check this option if you want the object to display the Time at the top left corner. You
need to select a format for displaying the time.
Time/Date Select a color to display the Time/Date.
Color
Cursor Data Specifies the variable to receive the data selected by the cursor to be read and
Receiving displayed.
Buffer
Dynamic Dynamic When this option is selected, the following three ranges can be specified at runtime:
Range Range z The minimum and the maximum for the Y values of each curve
z The maximum time duration for the X axis
z The minimum and maximum of the marks for the Y axis
The data that specifies the above three ranges should be set and arranged correctly in a
memory block called the dynamic range parameter block. You need to specify the
dynamic range parameter block in the Dynamic Range Parameter Block field.
Dynamic Specifies the variable that stores the dynamic range parameter block for the historic
Range trend graph when Dynamic Range is selected.
Parameter
The following table shows the data arrangement of the parameter block.
Word Description
0,1 The maximum time duration for the time axis (X axis)
2,3 The number of major division for the time axis (X axis); 32-bit integer
number. The minimum value is 1.
4,5 The number of sub-division for the time axis (X axis); 32-bit integer
number. The minimum value is 1.
6,7 The minimum of the mark for the Y axis
8,9 The maximum of the mark for the Y axis
10,11 The minimum of Y values for curve #1
12,13 The maximum of Y values for curve #1
… …
Continued

4
12
Support Zoom Check this option so the zoom option will be supported at runtime. You may use the
function button to zoom in or zoom out of the historic trend graph at the runtime. This
field is available only when the Dynamic Range field is not checked.
Display Relative Time Check this option if you want the object to display a relative measure of time.
12.3.5. Curve Settings

This section describes how to define the pens of the historic trend graph. The following is an example of the Pen page.
The following table describes each property on the Curve page.

Data Item Select a data item in the associated data logger for the curve.
Range Check this option so the minimum and the maximum for the Y values of the associated curve will be
specified at runtime. This option is available only when the Dynamic Range option on the General page
is checked.
Minimum The Y minimum of the data value of the associated curve. This property is available when the Dynamic
Maximum The Y maximum of the data value of the associated curve. This property is available when the Dynamic
Style Select a style for the trend curve.
Color Select a color for the trend curve.

12
This section describes how to define the Time axis (X axis) and the Y axis for the historic trend graph.

Time Axis Dynamic Range Check this option if you want the maximum time duration to be controlled
(X Axis) – by the dynamic range parameter block of the associated object at runtime.
Time This option is available only when the Dynamic Range option on the
Range General page is checked.
Unit Select a unit for the dynamic range. The field is only available when
Dynamic Range is checked.
Day/Hour/Minute/Second If Dynamic Range is not checked on both the general page and the axis
page, you need to specify the maximum time duration.
Continued

4
12
Time Axis Number of Major The number of major divisions for the X axis. The minimum you can specify is
(X Axis) Divisions one.
Number of The number of divisions between two adjacent major ticks. The minimum you
Sub-divisions can specify is one.
Show Ticks Check this option if you want the X axis to have ticks.
Show Y-axis Grid Select this option if you want the X axis to have vertical grids.
Show Time Check this option if you want to display the time. You need to select a format for
displaying the time.
Time Format The format of how the time is displayed. There are two formats available.
Format Description
HH:MM HH: 00-23 (hour); MM: 00-59 (minute)
HH:MM:SS HH: 00-23 (hour); MM: 00-59 (minute); SS: 00-59 (second)
Time/Date Font Font of the time/date.
Time/Date/Tick Color Select a color for the X axis and its ticks.
Y Axis Number of Major The number of major divisions for the Y axis. The minimum you can specify is
Divisions one.
Number of The number of divisions between two adjacent major ticks. The minimum you
Sub-divisions can specify is one.
Show Ticks Check this option if you want the Y axis to have ticks.
Show X-axis Grid Select this option if you want the Y axis to have horizontal grids.
Y Axis Show Marks Check this option if you want the major ticks to have marks.
Mark Font The font of the marks.
Dynamic Range Check this option if you want the minimum and maximum of the marks to be
controlled by the dynamic range parameter block of the associated object at
runtime.
Minimum The minimum of the marks. You can specify a 32-bit signed integer.
Maximum The maximum of the marks. You can specify a 32-bit signed integer.
Fractional Digits The number of fractional digits for the marks. For example, when the Maximum
is 5000, the Total Digits is 4, and the Fractional Digits is 2, the mark for the
Maximum will be 50.00.
Position Select a position to locate the scale. The scale can be displayed on the left, the
right or both sides.
Mark/Tick Color Select a color for the marks and ticks.

12
12.4. Displaying History of Predefined Events Using Historic Event Tables

Follow the steps below to create a historic event table:
1) Click Historic Event Table icon in the Object toolbar, or select Historic Event Table in the Object sub-menu.
3) Click at the desired position on the screen to place the new object.
You can number the predefined events of your application, use a word in the controller or the target panel to store the
number of the current event at runtime, and have a data logger in the target panel to collect the value of that word. This is a
way to record the events of your application. You can use the historic event table to display the event history. Each
message defined for the historic event table is associated with an event by the message/event number.
In the above example, the historic data table and the historic event table display the same historic data in different ways.

The following operation option can be added to a historic event table. Select and set the option in the Historic Event Table
dialog box.
Options Description
Visibility Control You can show and hide a historic event table by a specified bit or the current user level. Select and
set this option in the Visibility page.

4
12
12.4.3. Settings
You can set up a historic event table with the Historic Event Table dialog box. There are three ways to open the dialog box
of an object:
3) In the Object List window, double-click the row that displays the information of the object.
You can complete all the settings of a historic event table in the Historic Event Table dialog box. This dialog box contains
the following three pages.
■ General
■ Message
■ Visibility

12
This section describes how to define the general settings for a historic event table. The following is an example of the
General page.
for the historic event tables is HMDnnnn.
Data Logger Specifies the associated data logger. The object will take a specified word in each of the
data records collected by the data logger as the event number, and display a
corresponding message for that number.
Word Specifies the number of the word in each of the data records that stores the event
number.
Number of messages Specifies the number of event messages.
Continued

4
12
Title Title Select this option if you want to have a title row.
Language Select a language so you can view and edit the settings of the title row for that language.
Date Specifies the title of the Date column.
Time Specifies the title of the Time column.
Message Specifies the title of the Message column.
Background Select a color for the background of the title row.
Color
Grid Vertical Check this option if you want the object to display vertical grids.
Horizontal Check this option if you want the object to display horizontal grids.
Message Font Select a font for displaying messages.
Default Select a color as the default message color.
Color
Set Default Click this button to set the colors of all the messages to the Default Color.
Color To All
Messages
Date/Time Date Check this option if you want the object to display the Date column. You need to select a
Display format for displaying the date.
Time Check this option if you want the object to display the Time column. You need to select a
format for displaying the time.

12
12.4.5. Message Settings
This section describes how to define the messages of the historic event table. The following is an example of the Message
page.
The following table describes each property in the Message page.
Font Select a font for displaying the messages.
No. Color Select a color for displaying the message of the associated event.
1-N Message Define the text message for the associated event.

4
12
12.5. Displaying Time Slice Data Profile Using Single Record Line Charts

Use the following steps to create a single record line chart:
1) Click the Single Record Line Chart icon in the Object toolbar, or select Single Record Line Chart in the Object
sub-menu.
3) Click at the desired position on the screen to place the new object.
You can use a single record line chart to display the values of the data collected by a data logger as a line chart.
Cursor
Data Point Marker
Reference line
Connected line
A single record line chart can display up to 255 data points. The above is an example of the single record line chart with 8
data points. A single record line chart can provide a cursor to display the value of the desired point.

12
The following operation option can be added to a historic trend graph. Select and set the option in the Historic Trend Graph
dialog box.
Options Description
Visibility You can show and hide a historic trend graph by a specified bit or the current user level. Select and
Control set this option in the Visibility page.
12.5.3. Settings
You can set up a single record line chart with the Single Record Line Chart dialog box. There are three ways to open the
dialog box of an object:
3) In the Object List window, double-click the row that displays the information of the object.
The Single Record Line Chart dialog box contains the following four pages:
■ General
■ Pen
■ Axis
■ Visibility

4
12
for the Single Record Line Charts is HLCnnnn.
Associated Data Logger Specifies the associated data logger.
Data Source Select a data logger or file as the source of the collected data.
File Buffer ID Specify the File Buffer ID if the data source is a file. To specify a file buffer ID for a file, you
can use the Load Logged Data From File operation of the function button. Please see
Section 5.4 Performing Built-in Function Using Function Buttons.for details.
Continued

12
Number of Data Points Specifies the number of data points.
Data Type The data type of the data logger. The supported data types include: 16-Bit Unsigned
Integer, 32-Bit Unsigned Integer, 16-Bit Signed Integer, 32-Bit Signed Integer, 16-Bit
BCD, 32-Bit BCD, 32-Bit Floating Point, 16-Bit Signed BCD (LMB), 32-Bit Signed BCD
Show Data Point Markers Check this option so the single record line chart will display all the data point markers.
Show Connected Lines Check this option so the single record line chart will display the connected lines.
Time/Date Date Check this option if you want the object to display the Date column. You need to select a
Display format for displaying the date.
Time Check this option if you want the object to display the Time column. You need to select a
format for displaying the time.
Display Check this option if you want the object to display a relative measure of time.
Relative
Time
Show <Check Box> Check this option so the single record line chart will display a cursor. You can touch and
Cursor drag the cursor to the data point(s) that you want to select.
Value Select a font for displaying the values of the selected data point(s).
Display Font
Cursor Data Specifies the variable to receive the data selected by the cursor to be read and
Receiving displayed.
Buffer
Reference <Check Box> Check this option so the single record line chart will display a reference line.
Line Reference Specifies the variable as the data to be read from and displayed as a reference for
Line Data comparison.
Block
Click to enter the word address. Click to enter the word tag.
Show/Hide Check this option if you want to show or hide the reference line controlled by the
Controlled By specified bit.
Bit
Show/Hide Specifies the bit that controls the reference line to be shown or hidden.
Control Bit

4
12
12.5.5. Pen Settings
This section describes how to define the pens for the line charts. The following is an example of the Pen page.

12
The following table describes each property in the Pen page.
Historic Min. The minimum of the associated data set. This property is available when the Dynamic
Data Pen Range option is not selected.
Reference Min. The minimum of the associated data set. This property is available when the Dynamic
Data Pen Range option is not selected.
Line segment color Check this option to set the line segment color individually in the list window. The list
selectable individually window has three columns. The first column is the line segment number. The second
column is the color setting for the data line. The third column is the color setting for the
reference line.

4
12
This section describes how to define the X axis and the Y axis for single record line charts.
The following is an example of the Axis page.

12
X Show Ticks Check this option if you want the X axis to have ticks.
Axis Show Y-axis Grid Select this option if you want the X axis to have vertical grids.
Number of Major The number of major divisions for the X axis. The minimum you can specify is one.
Divisions
Min. The minimum of the marks. It is a 32-bit integer.
Max. The maximum of the marks. It is a 32-bit integer.
be 50.00.
Y Show Ticks Check this option if you want the Y axis to have ticks.
Axis Show X-axis Grid Select this option if you want the Y axis to have horizontal grids.
Number of Major The number of major divisions for the Y axis. The minimum you can specify is one.
Divisions
Min. The minimum of the marks. You can specify a 32-bit signed integer.
Max. The maximum of the marks. You can specify a 32-bit signed integer.
be 50.00.

CHAPTER 13
OPERATION LOGGING
13.1. Using Operation Logging...................................................................... 1

13.2. Setting up Operation Logging ............................................................... 2
13.2.1. Operation Message ........................................................................................................ 3
13.3. Setting up Operation Log Displays ....................................................... 4
13.3.3. Settings .......................................................................................................................... 4
4
13
This chapter describes how to set up operation logging and configure the operation log display to show the operation
loggers.
13.1. Using Operation Logging

To use operation logging in your application, please do the following:
1. Setting up Operation Logging
2. Adding custom operation messages in the Advanced page of the related object
Enter the operation message of the first language.
Click the button to bring up the Operation

Message dialog box to edit the message for all
the languages. Please see details in Section
13.2.1.
3. Creating and configuring Operation Log Displays

The software also lets users clear the operation logging buffer with the function button. To know how to define a function
button to clear the operation history, please see Section 5.4.1 Basic Operations of function buttons.
13-1 CHAPTER 13 OPERATION LOGGING

13
13.2. Setting up Operation Logging
You can set up operation logging with the Operation Logging dialog box. In this dialog, you can determine the required
memory for the operation logging buffer, and specify how to save the operation logs to a text file. To open the dialog box,
double click the Operation Logging node in the Project Manager tool window, or use the Operation Logging… command on
the Panel menu. The following is an example of the Operation logging dialog box.
The table below describes each property in the Operation Logging Properties dialog.
Enable <Check Box> Check this option to enable operation logging.
operation Buffer Size The size of the operation logging buffer. The unit is K words. The buffer size can be
logging specified between 1 and 512 K words.
Approximate number The maximum number of operation loggers that the operation logging buffer can
of operations can be hold. The formula to calculate the approximate number is: Number = Buffer Size *
logged 1024 * 2 / 64
Record <Check Box> Check this option to enable operation logging.
when Message Enter the operation message of the first language when the AP starts.
the AP
starts Click the button to bring up the Operation Message dialog box to edit the message
for all the languages. Please see details in Section 13.2.1.
Record <Check Box> Check this option to enable operation logging.
when Message Enter the operation message of the first language when the AP stops.
the AP
stops Click the button to bring up the Operation Message dialog box to edit the message
for all the languages. Please see details in Section 13.2.1.
Save <Check Box> Check this option so new operation loggers will be written to a specified file
Data to periodically. Each time when a save is performed, the panel writes only the
File operation loggers that have not been saved to a file before.
File Name The filename or the prefix of the filename of the file to save the operation loggers as.
The operation loggers are saved in text format and the file extension name must be
“.txt”. You can use any text editor and Microsoft Excel to directly view the operation
loggers. This item is available when the option Save Data to File is checked.
Time to Save Specifies the period to save the operation loggers. This item is available when the
option Save Data to File is checked. There are nine periods available: Every hour on
the hour ; Every 8 hours (00:00, 08:00, 16:00) ; Every 12 hours (00:00, 12:00) Every
day at 00:00; Every day at 08:00; Every day at 12:00; Every Sunday at 00:00; Every
Monday at 00:00; Every month's first day at 00:00.
CHAPTER 13 OPERATION LOGGING 13-2

4
13
13.2.1. Operation Message
This section describes how to define the operation messages for all languages. The following is an example of Operation
Message dialog box.
Enter the operation messages

for all the languages.

Use the text of the Check this item so the object always shows the text of the first language as the operation
first language for all message regardless of what the current language is. You need to enter the text of the first
other languages language in the following edit box.
Use Text From Text Check this item that you can select a text from the text database. The following is an example
Database that shows you how to select and edit text from text database.
Select a text from the

dropdown text table.
Click to change text

table. You can select
the text or edit the text
in the selected table.

13
13.3. Setting up Operation Log Displays

You can display a list of operation logs by using an operation log display.
The above is an example of the operation log display. The first row is the title row. It displays the title of each column. The
other rows display one operation per row. You can create scroll button groups or scroll bars to scroll the contents. An
operation log display can have three columns. The following table describes the content of each column for an operation
log display.
Column Description
Date The date when the record is created. This column is optional.
Time The time when the record is created. This column is optional.
Message The message of the associated operation. This column is optional.
The text color and font of a row are determined by the settings in the General Page.

The following operation option can be added to an operation log display. Select and set the option in the Operation Log
Display dialog box.
Options Description
Visibility You can show and hide an operation log display with a specified bit or the current user level. Select
Control and set this option in the Visibility page.
13.3.3. Settings
You can complete all the settings of an operation log display in the Operation Log Display dialog box. This dialog box
contains the following two pages.
■ General
■ Visibility

4
13
This section describes how to define the general settings for an operation log display. The following is an example of the
General page of the Operation Log Display dialog box.
screen where the object is located and is unchangeable. The format of the IDs for the operation log
display is HODnnnn.
Shape settings For details about the following properties, see Section 4.3.4 Setting up the Shape of an Object..

Language Select a language so you can view and edit the language dependent settings in the Title group and
Message group for that language. The language dependent properties in the Title group include
Font and Message; in the Message group include Font.
Continued

13
Title <Check Box> Select this option if you want the operation log display to have a title row
to show the title for each column of the displayed list.
Date Specifies the title for the Date column.
Time Specifies the title for the Time column.
Message Specifies the title for the Message column.
Background Color Select a background color for the title row.
Grid Horizontal Select this option if you want the operation log display to have horizontal
grids.
Vertical Select this option if you want the operation log display to have vertical
grids.
Message Font Select a font for the message.
Color Select a color for displaying the predefined message.
Date/Time Date <Check Box> Check this option if you want the operation log display to have the Date
Display column.
<Drop-down List> Select a format for displaying the date
Time <Check Box> Check this option if you want the operation log display to have the Time
column.
<Drop-down List> Select a format for displaying the time
Color Select a color for Date/Time.
Line Spacing Specifies the extra space in pixels for two adjacent rows of the operation
log display.
Item Spacing Specifies the extra space for every column of the operation log display.

CHAPTER 14
USING MACROS
14.1. Types of Macros ............................................................................................ 1

14.2. Working with Macros................................................................................... 3
14.2.1. Creating Macros............................................................................................................. 3
14.2.2. Opening and Closing Macros ........................................................................................ 3
14.2.3. Naming a macro............................................................................................................. 4
14.2.4. Deleting a macro............................................................................................................ 4
14.2.5. Saving and Exporting Macros ....................................................................................... 4
14.2.6. Macro Settings in the Dialog ......................................................................................... 5
14.3. Writing Macros............................................................................................. 7
14.3.1. Macro Editor Window ................................................................................................... 7
14.3.2. Macro Command Properties Tool Window ................................................................... 9
14.4. Macro Commands and Examples ............................................................. 10
14.4.1. Macro Notations and Terminology .............................................................................. 10
14.4.2. Data Transfer ............................................................................................................... 12
14.4.3. Arithmetic Operation ................................................................................................... 13
14.4.4. Logical Operation ........................................................................................................ 14
14.4.5. Calculation................................................................................................................... 16
14.4.6. Data Conversion .......................................................................................................... 18
14.4.7. Conditional Operation ................................................................................................. 21
14.4.8. Program Control .......................................................................................................... 25
14.4.9. Timer Operation........................................................................................................... 28
14.4.10. Keypad Operation........................................................................................................ 29
14.4.11. Recipe Operation ......................................................................................................... 30
14.4.12. Communication Operation........................................................................................... 31
14.4.13. System Service............................................................................................................. 32
14.4.14. Screen Operation ......................................................................................................... 33
14.4.15. File Operation .............................................................................................................. 34
14.4.16. Comparison.................................................................................................................. 40
14.4.17. String Operation........................................................................................................... 41
14.4.18. Run Operation.............................................................................................................. 49
14.4.19. Print Operation............................................................................................................. 50
14.4.20. Sound Operation .......................................................................................................... 52
4
14
This chapter explains how you can write macros to perform operations. A macro contains a sequence of macro commands
and acts as a simple computer program when it is run. With macros, some tasks that are hard to be performed by the
objects can be easily achieved, such as scheduling, data exchanges, conditional operations, and sequential operations.
Note: Do not use macros to control systems that can cause life-threatening and serious injury.
Note: The real-time OS in the HMI needs to manage multiple tasks at the same time when the application is running. In
order to not affect the whole performance, please keep the macro as short as possible.
Note: Macros execute individually and are unaware of other macros. When sharing common variables between macros,
your application may have possible conflicts. Consider an application where the cycle macro updates the value of an
address which is used by the event macro. If the event macro alters the address value before the cycle macro uses
that address, the result of the cycle macro will be incorrect.
14.1. Types of Macros
■ Global Macro
A global macro is a macro that can be used by all panel applications in the same project. With global macros, the panel
applications in the same project can share common functions without having to keep and maintain the same set of macros
locally.
You can set up a password in the Project Information & Protection dialog box to protect global macros. If global macros are
under protection, you need to enter a password to remove the protection before using them in your application.
Note that only internal variables can be used in global macros.
■ Local Macro
A local macro is a macro that can only be used by the panel application which the macro is located in.
■ Sub-macro
A sub-macro is a macro that can be run by other macros using the CALL command. When a CALL command is
encountered while running a macro, that macro stops running, and the sub-macro starts to run. The last command of a
sub-macro must be a RET command which terminates the sub-macro and returns control to the calling macro. You can
place RET commands at any location you want. The HMI will resume the execution of the calling macro starting with the
command following the CALL command once the called sub-macro terminates.
By implementing common functions in sub-macros for other macros to use, your macros can be modularized, are sharable,
easy to read, and easy to maintain.
■ Startup Macro, Main Macro, Event Macro, Time Macro for the application
■ Open Macro, Cycle Macro, Close Macro for the screen
■ On Macro, Off Macro, Object Macro for the object
Select the macro that works best for the occasion you want the macro to run, and for the purpose you want the macro to
do.
Run the Macro: Use:
When the application starts Startup Macro
This macro is run only once when the application starts. The HMI will not display the
start-up screen until the macro terminates. You can use Startup Macro to initialize
global data and settings for your application. Specify Startup Macro in Panel General
Setup dialog box.
While the application is Main Macro
running This macro is run all the time while the application is running. The HMI runs Main
Macro cyclically, i.e. it will delay preset time to run Main Macro starting from the first
command again each time after it completes the processing of the last command of
the macro or when it encounters an END command in the middle of the macro.
Specify Main Macro in Panel General Setup dialog box.
Continued
14-1 CHAPTER 14 USING MACROS

14
Run the Macro: Use:
When a specific trigger bit Event Macro
changes from 0 to 1 An Event Macro is run whenever the associated trigger bit changes from 0 (off) to 1
(on). An application can have up to four Event Macros which are numbered from 1 to
4. Specify Event Macros in the Panel General Setup dialog box.
Periodically with a preset time Time Macro
interval A Time Macro is run periodically with a preset time interval. An application can have
up to four Time Macros which are numbered from 1 to 4. Each Time Macro has a
different set of time interval options you can choose to specify how often you want the
macro to run. Specify Time Macros in the Panel General Setup dialog box.
When a specific screen is Open Macro
being opened An Open Macro is run once when the associated screen is being opened. The screen
will not be displayed until the Open Macro terminates. Specify the Open Macro of a
screen in the Screen Properties dialog box.
While a specific screen is Cycle Macro
open A Cycle Macro is run all the time while the associated screen is open. The Cycle
Macros runs cyclically, i.e. the Cycle Macro will run starting from the first command
again every time after it completes the processing of the last command of the macro,
or when an END command is encountered in the middle of the macro. The Cycle
Macro terminates immediately when the screen is closed. Specify the Cycle Macro of
a screen in the Screen Properties dialog box.
When a specific screen is Close Macro
being closed A Close Macro is run once when the associated screen is being closed. The screen
will not be erased until the Close Macro terminates. Specify the Close Macro of a
screen in the Screen Properties dialog box.
When a specific button is On Macro
pressed or released to set a An On Macro is run once when the associated button is pressed or released to set a
bit to on bit to 1 (on). The setting of the bit will not be performed until the On Macro terminates.
Therefore, it is important to keep the On Macro as short as possible in order to not
delay the setting of the bit. Both the Bit Buttons and the Toggle Switches can have an
On Macro. Specify the On Macro of a button in that button’s configuration dialog box.
When a specific button is Off Macro
pressed or released to set a An Off Macro is run once when the associated button is pressed or released to set a
bit to off bit to 0 (off). The setting of the bit will not be performed until the Off Macro terminates.
So it is important to keep the Off Macro as short as possible in order to not delay the
setting of the bit. Both Bit Buttons and Toggle Switches can have an Off Macro.
Specify the Off Macro of a button in that button’s configuration dialog box.
When a specific object is Object Macro
activated to perform a specific An Object Macro is run once when the associated object is activated to perform a
operation specific operation. Whether the macro is run before or after the operation is
performed depends on the type of the operation. The objects that can have an Object
Macro include Screen Buttons, Function Buttons, and Keypad Buttons. Specify the
Object Macro of an object in that object’s configuration dialog box.
CHAPTER 14 USING MACROS 14-2

4
14
14.2. Working with Macros
14.2.1. Creating Macros

■ Creating a new and blank macro
1) To create a global macro, use the Add… command on the Project > Global Macro menu, or right-click the Global >
Global Macros item in the Project Manager tool window to bring out the pop-up menu and then use the Add Macro…
command on the pop-up menu.
To create a local macro, use the Add… command on the Panel > Macro menu, or right-click the panel application >
Macros item in the Project Manager tool window to bring out the pop-up menu and then use the Add Macro…
command on the pop-up menu, or
2) In the New Macro dialog box, type the name you want, and hit the ENTER key or click the OK button to validate your
choice.
■ Importing an existing macro as a copy macro

1) To import a macro as a global macro, right-click the Global > Global Macros item in the Project Manager tool window
to bring out the pop-up menu and then use the Import Macro… command on the pop-up menu.
To import a macro as a local macro, right-click the panel application Macros item in the Project Manager tool window
to bring out the pop-up menu and then use the Import Macro… command on the pop-up menu
2) Click the *.mcr or *.txt file you want to create a new macro from. If you want to open a macro that was saved in a
different folder, locate and open the folder first.
3) Click Open.
14.2.2. Opening and Closing Macros

■ Opening an existing macro
To open a global macro, select the macro you want to open in Project > Global Macro > Edit menu, or double click the
macro in Global > Global Macros item in the Project Manager tool window, or in the Macro settings of the object
configuration dialog, select the macro that is located after "--------------Global-----------" item in the drop-down list.
To open a local macro, select the macro you want to open on Panel > Macro > Edit menu, or double click the macro in the
panel application > Macros item in the Project Manager tool window, or in the Macro settings of the object configuration
dialog. If global macros exist, select the macro that is located from the beginning to "--------------Global-----------" item in the
drop-down list or select the macro in the drop-down list.
■ Opening a *.txt or *.mcr file within the macro editor window:

You may do the drag-and-drop operation:
1) Open the macro editor window by clicking any of the existing macros.
2) Drag a selection of *.mcr file or *.txt file into the macro editor window and drop it.
Note: Any macros in the macro editor window will be replaced by macros from the source file.
■ Closing Macro Editor Windows:

To close a single window, select the window and click the close button.
To close all windows, choose Windows... on the Window menu, select all the macro editor windows you want to close in
the window dialog and then click Close Window(s) button.
Note: The Macro Command Properties Window will be closed automatically when the macro editor window is closed. Even
if the macro editor window is closed, all the changes will be saved, unless the software exits without saving any changes to
the file.
■ Closing Macro Command Properties Window:

To close the macro command properties window, click the close button on the Macro Command Properties window or
check/uncheck the Macro Command Properties command on the View menu

14
14.2.3. Naming a macro
When adding a new macro for global use or for the panel application, you need to specify the macro name with the
following dialog.
Specify the macro name here. The

maximum length for a macro name is 256
characters. Macro names are case
insensitive. For example, the names TURN
ON and turn on are considered to be the
same.
When importing a file as the macro, the file name will be the macro name as the default.
In each panel application, the local macro name has to be unique, but a local macro name can be the same as a global
macro name.
■ Renaming a macro from Project Manager:

1) Locate the macro you would like to rename
2) Right-click on the macro to display the macro item's pop-up menu; and then click Rename, the second menu item.
3) Once the macro name is selected, simply type the new name over the selected text, and then press the ENTER key.
14.2.4. Deleting a macro

■ Deleting a macro from Project Manager tool widow:
1) Locate the macro you would like to delete
2) Right-click on the macro to display the macro item's "pop-up menu"; and then click Delete, the third menu item.
■ Deleting a macro by menu

To delete a global macro, choose Project menu, click Global Macro sub-menu, and select the macro you want to delete on
the Delete sub-menu
To delete a local macro, choose Panel menu, click Macro sub-menu, and select the macro you want to delete on the
Delete sub-menu
Note: You can only select one macro to delete at a time. If the macro you want to delete is used by an application or object,
you will be asked to confirm the delete operation.
14.2.5. Saving and Exporting Macros

If you have a macro you want to reuse in another application panel, you can export the macro as a .txt file or a .mcr file.
You may do the following:
1) Locate the macro you would like to export
2) Right-click on the macro to display the macro item's "pop-up menu"; and then click Export Macro..., the fourth menu
item.
3) If you want to save a macro in a different folder, locate and open the folder first, then click Save.

4
14
14.2.6. Macro Settings in the Dialog
You can open and edit a specified macro or create a new macro in the configuration dialog that contains the macro page.
The following is an example of the Macro page in the Bit Button configuration dialog.
Macro Name Select an existing local macro or global macro from the drop-down list. The following is a
sample in the dropdown list
Local Macros
A separator that is used to

separate the local macros
and global macros. It shows
Global Macros only when global macros
exist.
New… Click the button to bring out the New Macro dialog box to create a new and blank local macro.
Continued

14
Macro Editor Write and edit the macros here. For details, see Section 14.3.1. If the editor window is too
Window small, you may drag out the window and resize it. To drag and move the window, left-click
anywhere on the window frame and hold down the button, then drag the mouse to move the
window outside to another area. It will “float” over the rest of the dialog, allowing you to position
it wherever you want it to be. Release the mouse button to let go of the window. Click on the
resized tabs located at the bottom right corner of the window to resize the window. Press the
close button to dock the window back into the dialog. The following is a sample of the floating
macro editor window.
Click anywhere on
the window frame to
drag out the window.
Click the close button

to dock the window
back into the dialog.
Click here to resize

the window.
Properties A floating dialog allows you specify the macro command. For details, see Section 14.3.2. The
macro command properties dialog can be moved anywhere and resized to any size you want.
However, it can’t be closed until the dialog is closed.

4
14
14.3. Writing Macros
In the software, all the macros can be written in the macro development environment that is composed of two elements:
the Macro Editor Window and the Macro Command Properties Tool Window.
You will see the following sample of the Macro Development Environment when opening a macro from Project Manager.
Macro Command
Macro Editor Window
Properties Tool Window
14.3.1. Macro Editor Window

The macro editor is a text-based editor with syntax coloring and line numbering. Line numbering in the left margin of the
page helps you refer to the specific position of the macro. Syntax coloring gives you visual cues about the structure by
using different colors for various elements, such as keywords in black, comments in green, addresses in blue and
constants in red.
■ Editing Macro
With the macro editor, you can cut, copy, and paste selected text using menu commands, key combinations or
drag-and-drop operations. You can also undo and redo selected editing actions.
You can right-click to display a pop-up menu of editing commands. The editing commands available depend on what the
pointer is pointing to.

The macro editor allows the following editing actions:
14
• Cutting, copying, pasting, and deleting selection of lines, multiple lines or text
• Undoing and redoing editing actions
• Using drag-and-drop editing to move or copy a selection of text within one macro editor window, or between macro
editor windows.
The following table shows the supported editing commands.

Menu Command Key Combination Description
Cut CTRL+X Removes selected text from the active macro editor window.
Copy CTRL+C Duplicates selected text in the active macro editor window.
Paste CTRL+V Pastes cut or copied text into an active macro editor window.
DELETE Deletes text without copying it to the Clipboard.
Undo CTRL+Z Reverses the last editing action.
Redo CTRL+Y Reapplies the prior editing that has been undone.
CTRL+A Selects all texts in the active macro editor
Note that all editing commands require a selection in order to work. Some commands can make a selection based on the
current cursor location.
■ Using Comments in Macros
Comments are notes to be ignored when running the macro commands. Macro supports both single-line comments and
block comments. Single-line comments begin with two forward slashes (//) and run to the end of the line.
The following is an example of a macro command followed by a single-line comment.
IF $U0.0 (B) // Key Down
Block comments begin with an opening delimiter (/*) and run to a closing delimiter (*/). Comments do not nest.
The following is an example of a block comment.
/* $N1001=WH2021
$N1010=$N1001 */
■ Specifying Constants in Macros
To specify a hexadecimal number, use either the h or H suffix. For example, 12abH and 3ABh are valid hexadecimal
numbers. You can also use either the “0x” or “0X” prefix. For example, 0x1278abc and 0XFFFF0000 are valid hexadecimal
numbers.
To specify a binary number, use either the b or B suffix. For example, 001100111b and 11110000B are valid binary
numbers.
For decimal numbers, in most cases, you just type the numbers as they are to specify the constants. However, ambiguity
exists when a constant is the same as a valid external variable. For example, if a panel application has a link to a Modicon
ModBus slave device, it is impossible to tell whether the number 40001 is a constant or a word address of the controller. To
avoid this kind of ambiguity, use the following methods to explicitly declare that a number is a constant:
1) Use K, k, D, or d suffix for an integer number. For example, -123K and -123d are valid specifications of constant -123.
2) Use either the f or F suffix for a decimal number with decimal point. For example, -12.3F and -12.3f are valid
specifications of constant -12.3.

4
14
14.3.2. Macro Command Properties Tool Window
The Macro Command Properties Tool Window help you add and modify a macro command quickly and easily.
If you open a macro from Project Manager or Menu Item, the Macro Properties Tool Window will be opened as a docking
window. You can easily configure the dockable tool window to automatically be displayed or hide, or tab link with other tool
windows, or dock against the edges, or float over. When the Macro Editor is opened, you can also choose to open or close
the Macro Command Properties Tool Window by clicking the [Macro Command Properties] menu item under [View] menu.
If you open the macro from an object's configuration dialog box, the Macro Properties Tool Window will float beside the
Macro Editor and can be moved anywhere, but it can't be closed.
The following table describes each property in the macro command properties tool window.
Command Click the dropdown list box to bring up the macro command selection dialog. In the dialog,
navigate the keyword of macro commands through tabs and sections by moving the
mouse and then clicking the selection. The format of the selected macro command will be
shown in the dropdown list after the dialog is closed. To cancel the operation, click
anywhere outside the macro command selection dialog.
Data Type Selects the data type of the macro command from the dropdown list. Different macro
commands support different data types. The supported data types for each macro
command are some of the following: (S) 16-bit Signed, (U) 16-bit Unsigned, (SD) 32-bit
Signed, (UD) 32-bit Unsigned, (F) 32-bit Floating Point, (B) Bit.
Parameter <Edit Specifies the bit variable when the Data Type is (B).
Box> Specifies the word variable when the Data Type is (U)/(S).
Specifies the double-word variable when the Data Type is (UD)/(SD)/(F).
Click this icon to bring up the Address Input Keypad and specify the desired address for
the Variable field.
Variable field.
Macro Command Help Shows the operation and parameter type of the selected macro command.
Note that any modification in the dialog will change the current macro command in the Macro Editor.

14
14.4. Macro Commands and Examples
14.4.1. Macro Notations and Terminology

The following notations and terminology will be used in the Macro Commands and Examples sections.
■ Notations
1) P1, P2, P3, P4, P5: Parameters of macro commands.

2) I, E, C, A, CS, M, AE, CE: Used to indicate the type of parameter a macro command can accept for a specific
command parameter.
Abbreviation Parameter Type

I Internal Variable
E External Variable
C Constant
A ASCII character string
CS Character string of the program label
M Sub-macro name
AE Arithmetic expression
CE Comparison expression
3) U, S, UD, SD, F, B: Used to indicate the types of data a macro command can support.
Abbreviation Data Type

U 16-bit Unsigned Integer
S 16-bit Signed Integer
UD 32-bit Unsigned Integer
SD 32-bit Signed Integer
F 32-bit Floating Point
B Bit
■ Terminology
Internal memory The memory space in the HMI that can be accessed by the panel application. For example,
the user memory $U, the non-volatile memory $N, the system memory $S, and the recipe
memory $R are all parts of the internal memory.
Internal variable An address or a tag referring to an address of a space in the internal memory.
Internal bit variable An internal variable that refers to a bit in the internal memory.
For ease of reading, “internal variable” is used instead of “internal bit variable” when referring
to a bit if there is no ambiguity.
Internal word variable An internal variable that refers to a word in the internal memory.
The variables can also be used to refer to a double-word, a block of bytes (byte array), a block
of words (word array), and a block of double-words (double-word array).
For ease of reading, “internal variable” is used instead of “internal word variable” when
referring to a word or a block of memory space if there is no ambiguity,
External memory The memory space or collection of addressable devices in the controllers that can be
accessed by the panel application through communication links.
Continued

4
14
External variable An address or a tag referring to an address of a space in the external memory.
External bit variable An external variable that refers to a bit in the external memory.
For ease of reading, “external variable” is used instead of “external bit variable” when referring
to a bit if there is no ambiguity.
External word An external variable that refers to a word in the external memory.
variable The variables can also be used to refer to a double-word, a block of bytes (byte array), a block
of words (word array), and a block of double-words (double-word array) if the access unit of
the associated addresses is word. If the access unit is double-word, you can only use the
variable to refer to a double-word or a block of memory space with a length of a multiple of 4
(bytes).
For ease of reading, “external variable” is used instead of “external word variable” when
referring to a word or a block of memory space if there is no ambiguity,
Expression
Type Abbreviation Description
Arithmetic AE Sequences of operators and parameters that are
Expression used for computing a value from the parameters.
Comparison CE Sequences of operators and parameters that are
Expression used for comparing value from the parameters.
The software provides the following types of operators for macro expressions:
Operators Name or Meaning Grouping Used for

() Parentheses Left to right AE/CE
* Multiplication Left to right AE
/ Division Left to right
% Modulus Left to right
+ Addition Left to right
- Subtraction Left to right
<< Left shift Left to right
>> Right shift Left to right
< Less than Left to right CE
> Greater than Left to right
<= Less than or equal to Left to right
>= Greater than or equal to Left to right
== Equality Left to right
!= Inequality Left to right
& Bitwise AND Left to right AE
^ Bitwise exclusive OR Left to right
| Bitwise inclusive OR Left to right
&& Logical AND Left to right CE
|| Logical OR Left to right CE
= Assignment Right to left AE/CE
Note: The above table lists the operators in order of precedence (from highest to lowest
precedence). Operators in the same segment of the table have equal precedence and are
evaluated in the given order in an expression unless explicitly forced by parentheses.

14
14.4.2. Data Transfer
Assignment ( = )
Format P1 = P2 Data Type U/S/UD/SD/F/B

Function Assigns the value of P2 to P1.
P1 (I/E) The destination.
P2 (I/E/C/AE) The source.
Example 1 $U2 = 123.45 (F) /* Assign 123.45 to $U2 (and $U3) */
Example 2 $U100.f = 1 (B) /* Turn on the specified bit */
Example 3 W60 = ($U30 + $W50 - 1000) / 2 (SD) /* Write the result of the arithmetic expression to W60. */
Example 4 V0.0 = 2\M0 (B) /* Assign the bit value of M0 of link 2 to the bit V0.0 of link 1*/
Logical NOT ( = ! )
Format P1 = ! P2 Data Type B

Function Reverses P2 and saves the result in P1.
P1 (I/E) The location to save the result.
P2 (I/E) The operand.
Example 1 $U2.3 = !$U3.4 (B) /* If $U3.4 is 1 (On), $U2.3 is 0 (Off) */
""
Format P1 = "P2"
Function Copies the quoted ASCII character string P2 to P1. Note that the string is a null terminated string.
If the length of the string is N then N+1 bytes will be copied to P1 and the last byte is 0.
P1 (I) The location to save the result.
P2 (A) The quoted ASCII character string.
Example 1 $U60 = "TEST" /* The null character (00h) will be moved to the low byte of $U62 */
Example 2 $U20 = "ABCDE" /* The null character (00h) will be moved to the high byte of $U22 */
MOV
Format P1 = MOV(P2,P3) Data Type U

Function Copies P3 words of P2 to P1.
P1 (I/E) The starting location of the memory to receive the copy.
P2 (I/E) The starting location of the memory to be copied.
P3 (I/C) The number of words to be copied.
Example 1 $U100 = MOV($U200, 16) /* Copy the 16 words starting from $U200 to $U100 */
Example 2 W60 = MOV($U200, $U2) /* Copy the word array starting from $U200 with the size specified in
$U2 to W60.*/
Example 3 $U10 = MOV(2\D100,10) /* Copy D100 ~ D109 of link 2 to $U10 ~ $U19.*/

4
14
SETM
Format P1 = SETM(P2,P3) Data Type U

Function Sets P3 words of P1 to word value P2.
P1 (I/E) The starting location of the memory to be set.
P2 (I/C) The set value or the location that holds the set value.
P3 (I/C) The number of words to be set. The max. no. of words are 512.
Example 1 $U100 = SETM(0, 16) /* Set the 16 words starting from $U100 to 0. */
Example 2 W60 = SETM($U200, $U2) /* Set the words of the word array starting from W60 with the size
specified in $U2 to the value of $U200.*/
14.4.3. Arithmetic Operation

Addition ( + )
Format P1 = P2 + P3 Data Type U/S/UD/SD/F

Function Adds P2 and P3 and saves the result in P1.
P2,P3 (I/E/C/AE) The operands.
Example 1 $U100 = $U101 + $U102 (U)
Example 2 W100 = 0.3*$U0 + 0.1*$U2 + 0.6*$U4 (F)
Subtraction ( - )
Format P1 = P2 - P3 Data Type U/S/UD/SD/F

Function Subtracts P3 from P2 and saves the result in P1.
Example 1 $U100 = $U101 - $U102 (U)
Example 2 W100 = 0.3*$U0 - 10.75 (F)
Multiplication ( * )
Format P1 = P2 * P3 Data Type U/S/UD/SD/F

Function Multiplies P2 by P3 and saves the product in P1.
P1 (I/E) The location to save the product. If the product overflows, the higher bits exceeding the limit will
be truncated and the remaining bits will be stored in P1.
Example 1 $U100 = $U102 * 0x192
Example 2 W100 = ($U0 + $U2) * ($U4 + $U6) (F)

14
Division ( / )
Format P1 = P2 / P3 Data Type U/S/UD/SD/F

Function Divides P2 by P3 and saves the quotient in P1.
Example 1 $U100 = $U101 / $U102 (U)
Example 2 W100 = ($U0 + $U2) / ($U4 + $U6) (F)
Modulus ( % )
Format P1 = P2 % P3 Data Type U/S/UD/SD

Function Divides P2 by P3 and saves the remainder in P1.
Example 1 $U100 = $U30 % 16(U)
Example 2 W100 = $U200 % ($U402 + $U106) (SD)
14.4.4. Logical Operation

Bitwise Inclusive OR ( | )
Format P1 = P2 | P3 Data Type U/UD/B

Function Performs bitwise Inclusive OR operation of P2 and P3 and saves the results in P1.
P2,P3 (I/E/C) The operands
Example 1 W60 = 1111000000001111b
$U100 = 0000111100001111b | W60 (U) /* The value of $U100 is 1111111100001111b */
Example 2 B15 = $U1.2 | B14 (B) /* If either $U1.2 or B14 has a value of 1(On), B15 has the value 1(On).
Otherwise, B15 has the value 0(Off)*/
Bitwise AND ( & )
Format P1 = P2 & P3 Data Type U/UD/B

Function Performs bitwise AND operation of P2 and P3 and saves the results in P1.
Example 1 W60 = 1111000000001111b
$U100 = 0000111100001111b & W60 (U) /* The value of $U100 is 0000000000001111b */
Example 2 B15 = $U1.2 & B14 (B) /* If both $U1.2 and B14 are 1(On), B15 is set to 1(On). Otherwise B15 is
set to 0(Off) */

4
14
Bitwise Exclusive OR ( ^ )
Format P1 = P2 ^ P3 Data Type U/UD/B

Function Performs bitwise Exclusive OR operation of P2 and P3 and saves the results in P1.
Example 1 W60 = 1111000000001111b
$U100 = 0000111100001111b ^ W60 (U) /* The value of $U100 is 1111111100000000b.*/
Example 2 B15 = $U1.2 ^ B14 (B) /*If both $U1.2 and B14 are 1(On) or 0(Off), the B15 is set to 0(Off).
Otherwise B15 is set to 1(On)*/
Left Shift ( << )
Format P1 = P2 << P3 Data Type U/UD

Function Shifts P2 to the left by P3 bits and saves the results in P1. The operation supports the logic shift
only.
P2 (I/E/C) The value or the location that holds the value to be shifted.
P3 (I/E/C) The number of bits to be shifted.
Example 1 $U100 = $U101 << 8 (U)
Example 2 W200 = W100 << $U10 (UD)
Right Shift ( >> )
Format P1 = P2 >> P3 Data Type U/UD

Function Shifts P2 to the right by P3 bits and saves the results in P1. The operation supports the logic shift
only.
P2 (I/E/C) The value or the location that holds the value to be shifted.
P3 (I/E/C) The number of bits to be shifted.
Example 1 $U100 = $U101 >> 8 (U)
Example 2 W200 = W100 >> $U10 (UD)
Logical AND ( && )
Format P1 = P2 && P3 Data Type B

Function Saves 1 in P1 if both P2 and P3 are 1, otherwise saves 0 in P1.
P1 (I/E) The bit to save the result.
P2,P3(I/E/C) The operands.
Example 1 $U100.0 = $U101.0 && $U101.1 (B)

14
Logical OR ( || )
Format P1 = P2 || P3 Data Type B

Function Saves 1 in P1 if either or both P2 and P3 are 1, otherwise saves 0 in P1.
P1 (I/E) The bit to save the result.
Example 1 $U100.0 = $U101.0 || $U101.1 (B)
14.4.5. Calculation
MAX
Format P1 = MAX(P2,P3) Data Type U/S/UD/SD/F

Function Sets P1 to the larger value of P2 and P3.
Example 1 $U100 = MAX(100, 200) /* Set $U100 to 200 */
MIN
Format P1 = MIN(P2,P3) Data Type U/S/UD/SD/F

Function Sets P1 to the smaller value of P2 and P3.
Example 1 $U100 = MIN(100, 200) /* Set $U100 to 100 */
BMAX
Format P1 = BMAX(P2,P3) Data Type U/S/UD/SD/F

Function Finds the maximum in an array starting from P2 with P3 elements and saves the result in P1.
P2 (I) The starting location of the array.
P3 (I/C) The size of the array.
Example 1 $U100 = BMAX($U200, 16) (F) /* Find the maximum among 16 floating point numbers starting
from $U200 and save the result in $U100 */
BMIN
Format P1 = BMIN(P2,P3) Data Type U/S/UD/SD/F

Function Finds the minimum in an array starting from P2 with P3 elements and saves the result in P1.
Example 1 $U100 = BMIN($U200, 60) (F) /* Find the minimum among 60 floating point numbers starting from
$U200 and save the result in $U100 */

4
14
SUM
Format P1 = SUM(P2,P3) Data Type U/S/UD/SD/F

Function Calculates the sum of the value in an array starting from P2 with P3 elements and saves the
result in P1.
Example 1 $U100 = SUM($U200, 16) (F) /* Calculate the sum of 16 floating point numbers starting from
$U200 and save the result in $U100 */
XSUM
Format P1 = XSUM(P2,P3) Data Type U/UD

Function Calculates one element XOR (Bitwise Exclusive OR) sum of all the P3 elements in an array
starting from P2 and saves the result in P1.
Example 1 $U100 = XSUM($U200, 5) (UD) /* Perform XOR sum of 5 32-bit unsigned numbers starting from
$U200 and save the result in $U100. Another expression of XOR sum is $U100 = $U200 ^
$U202 ^ $U204 ^ $U206 ^ $U208 (UD) */
$U100 =1001B
$U101 =1100B
$U102 =0110B
$U120 = XSUM($U100,3) /* $U120=0011B */
SWAP
Format SWAP(P1,P2) Data Type U

Function Swaps the low byte and high byte of every word in a word array starting from P1 with P2 words.
Example 1 $U120=1111111100000000B
$U121=1000000100000000B
SWAP($U120, 2) /* The value of $U120 will be 0000000011111111B, The value of $U121 will
be 000000010000001B */

14
14.4.6. Data Conversion
BCD
Format P1 = BCD(P2) Data Type U/UD

Function Converts binary number P2 to a BCD number and saves the result in P1.
P2 (I/E/C) The binary number to be converted.
Example 1 $U100 = BCD(0x1234) (U) /* The value of $U100 will be 1234. */
BIN
Format P1 = BIN(P2) Data Type U/UD

Function Converts BCD number P2 to a binary number and saves the result in P1.
P2 (I/E/C) The BCD number to be converted.
Example 1 $U100 = BIN(1234) (U) /* The value of $U100 will be 0x1234. */
DW
Format P1 = DW(P2) Data Type U/S

Function Converts 16-bit number P2 to a 32-bit number and saves the result in P1.
P2 (I/E/C) The 16-bit number to be converted.
Example 1 $U100 = DW(12345) (S) /* The value of $U100 will be 12345 and the value of $U101 will be 0. */
Example 2 $U200 = DW(-12345) (S) /* The value of $U200 will be -12345 and the value of $U201 will be
0xFFFF. */
Format P1 = W(P2) Data Type UD/SD

Function Converts 32-bit number P2 to a 16-bit number and saves the result in P1. The truncation error
may occur.
Example 1 $U100 = W(0x12345678) (UD) /* The value of $U100 will be 0x5678 */
Example 2 $U200 = W(-12345) (SD) /* The value of $U200 will be -12345 */

4
14
B2W
Format P1 = B2W(P2,P3) Data Type U

Function Converts P3-byte array starting from P2 to a P3-word array and saves the result in P1. All the high
bytes of the word array are set to 0.
P1 (I) The location (or the word array) to save the result.
P2 (I) The byte array to be converted.
P3 (I/C) The size of the byte array.
Example 1 $U200 = 0x45FA
$U201 = 0xEB29
$U100 = B2W($U200, 3) /* Convert 3 bytes starting from $U200 to 3 words starting from $U100,
$U100 will be 0xFA, $U101 will be 0x45 and $U102 will be 0x29. */
W2B
Format P1 = W2B(P2,P3) Data Type U

Function Converts a word array P2 with P3 elements to a byte array and saves the result in the byte array
P1. The conversion discards the high byte of every element of the word array to form a byte array
with the same number of elements. The array size cannot exceed 256.
P2 (I) The word array to be converted.
P3 (I/C) The size of the word array.
Example 1 $U200 = 0x45FA
$U201 = 0xEB29
$U202 = 0xC781
$U100 = W2B($U200, 3) /* Convert 3 words starting from $U200 to 3 bytes starting from
$U100, $U100 will be 0x29FA and the low byte of $U101 will be 0x81*/
A2X
Format P1 = A2X(P2) Data Type U

Function Converts a 4-digit hex number in ASCII character form to a binary number and saves the result in
P1. The character of the fourth digit is in the first word of the word array P2 and the characters of
the other digits are in the following words in sequence.
P2 (I) The word array that contains the characters to be converted.
Example 1 $U20 = 49 // '1'
$U21 = 50 // '2'
$U22 = 69 // 'E'
$U23 = 70 // 'F'
$U100 = A2X($U20) /* The value of $U100 will be 0x12EF. */

14
X2A
Format P1 = X2A(P2) Data Type U

Function Converts 16-bit number P2 to a 4-digit hex number in ASCII character form and saves the result
in word array P1. The character of the fourth digit is saved in the first word of P1 and the
characters of the other digits are saved in the following words in sequence.
P2 (I/C) The number to be converted.
Example 1 $U10 = X2A(0x34AB) /*The 4 words starting from $U10 will be: 51('3'), 52('4'), 65('A'), 66('B') */
W2F
Format P1 = W2F(P2) Data Type U/S

Function Converts 16-bit number P2 to a floating point number and saves the result in P1.
Example 1 $U200 = W2F($U10) (S)
D2F
Format P1 = D2F(P2) Data Type UD/SD

Function Converts 32-bit number P2 to a floating point number and saves the result in P1.
Example 1 $U200 = D2F($U10) (SD)
F2W
Format P1 = F2W(P2) Data Type F

Function Converts floating point number P2 to a 16-bit number and saves the result in P1.
P2 (I/E/C) The floating point number to be converted.
Example 1 $U200 = F2W($U10) (F)
F2D
Format P1 = F2D(P2) Data Type F

Function Converts floating point number P2 to a 32-bit number and saves the result in P1.
P2 (I/E/C) The floating point number to be converted.
Example 1 $U200 = F2D($U10) (F)

4
14
EXTRACT_BIT
Format P1 = EXTRACT_BIT(P2,P3) Data Type U/UD

Function Extracts bit P3 from P2 and saves the result in P1.
P1 (I) The bit to save the result.
P2 (I) The location to extract the bit.
P3 (I/C) The number of the bit to be extracted.
Example 1 $U2.0 = EXTRACT_BIT($U10, 31) (UD) /* Extract bit 31 of the double word $U10 and save the
result in $U2.0 */
14.4.7. Conditional Operation

IF ==
Format IF P2 == P3 Data Type U/S/UD/SD/F

Function Executes the commands in the command block following this IF command when P2 is equal to
P3.
IF !=
Format IF P2 != P3 Data Type U/S/UD/SD/F

Function Executes the commands in the command block following this IF command when P2 is not equal
to P3.
IF >
Format IF P2 > P3 Data Type U/S/UD/SD/F

Function Executes the commands in the command block following this IF command when P2 is greater
than P3.
IF >=
Format IF P2 >= P3 Data Type U/S/UD/SD/F

Function Executes the commands in the command block following this IF command when P2 is greater
than or equal to P3.
IF <
Format IF P2 < P3 Data Type U/S/UD/SD/F

Function Executes the commands in the command block following this IF command when P2 is less than
P3.

14
IF <=
Format IF P2 <= P3 Data Type U/S/UD/SD/F

Function Executes the commands in the command block following this IF command when P2 is less than
or equal to P3.
IF &
Format IF P2 & P3 Data Type U/UD

Function Executes the commands in the command block following this IF command when the result of
Bitwise AND between P2 and P3 is non-zero.
IF !&
Format IF !(P2 & P3) Data Type U/UD

Function Executes the commands in the command block following this IF command when the result of
Bitwise AND between P2 and P3 is zero.
IF <bit>
Format IF P2 Data Type B

Function Executes the commands in the command block following this IF command if the condition P2 is
true (1/On).
P2 (I/E/CE) The condition.
IF !<bit>
Format IF !P2 Data Type B

Function Executes the commands in the command block following this IF command if the condition P2 is
false (0/Off).
ELIF ==
Format ELIF P2 == P3 Data Type U/S/UD/SD/F

Function Executes the commands in the command block following this ELIF command when P2 is equal
to P3.
ELIF !=
Format ELIF P2 != P3 Data Type U/S/UD/SD/F

Function Executes the commands in the command block following this ELIF command when P2 is not
equal to P3.

4
14
ELIF >
Format ELIF P2 > P3 Data Type U/S/UD/SD/F

Function Executes the commands in the command block following this ELIF command when P2 is greater
than P3.
ELIF >=
Format ELIF P2 >= P3 Data Type U/S/UD/SD/F

Function Executes the commands in the command block following this ELIF command when P2 is greater
ELIF <
Format ELIF P2 < P3 Data Type U/S/UD/SD/F

Function Executes the commands in the command block following this ELIF command when P2 is less
than P3.
ELIF <=
Format ELIF P2 <= P3 Data Type U/S/UD/SD/F

Function Executes the commands in the command block following this ELIF command when P2 is less
ELIF &
Format ELIF P2 & P3 Data Type U/UD

Function Executes the commands in the command block following this ELIF command when the result of
Bitwise AND between P2 and P3 is non-zero.
ELIF !&
Format ELIF !(P2 & P3) Data Type U/UD

Function Executes the commands in the command block following this ELIF command when the result of
Bitwise AND between P2 and P3 is zero.
ELIF <bit>
Format ELIF P2 Data Type B

Function Executes the commands in the command block following this ELIF command if the condition P2
is true (1/On).

14
ELIF !<bit>
Format ELIF !P2 Data Type B

Function Executes the commands in the command block following this ELIF command if the condition P2
is false (0/Off).
ELSE
Format ELSE
Function This command specifies the beginning of the default command block that will be executed if
none of the conditions in the preceding IF and/or ELIF commands is true. This is not an
executable command.
ENDIF
Format ENDIF
Function This command specifies the end of a command block, which begins at the command following
the matching IF, ELIF, or ELSE command. This is not an executable command.
Example IF-Command Structures:
Commands and
Description
Structures
IF <condition> Runs the command block between IF and ENDIF when the
… condition is true, otherwise ignores the command block.
ENDIF
IF <condition> Runs the command block between IF and ELSE when the
… condition is true, otherwise runs the command block between
ELSE ELSE and ENDIF.
…
ENDIF
IF <condition> Runs the command block between IF and the first ELIF and
… ignores all the following commands in the structure when
ELIF <condition_2> condition 1 is true, otherwise examines condition 2. Runs the
… command block between the first ELIF and the second ELIF and
ELIF <condition_3> ignores all the following commands in the structure when
. condition 2 is true, otherwise checks condition 3. Repeats the
. same operation until condition N is processed. If none of the
. conditions are true, no command block in this structure is run.
ELIF <condition_N>
…
ENDIF
IF <condition> Runs the command block between IF and the first ELIF and
… ignores all the following commands in the structure when
ELIF <condition_2> condition 1 is true, otherwise examines condition 2. Runs the
… command block between the first ELIF and the second ELIF and
ELIF <condition_3> ignores all the following commands in the structure when
. condition 2 is true, otherwise checks condition 3. Repeats the
. same operation until condition N is processed. Runs the
ELIF <condition_N> command block between ELSE and ENDIF if none of the
… conditions are true.
ELSE
…
ENDIF
Note that there can be up to 20 nested IF-command structures.

4
14
14.4.8. Program Control
JMP
Format JMP P1
Function Unconditionally jumps to the program point specified by label P1.
P1 (CS) The label of the program point.
Example 1 IF $U10 == 0
JMP SKIP /* Skip the command "$U20 = $U10 / 2". */
ENDIF
$U20 = $U10 / 2
SKIP:
$U10 = 1
<label>
Format P1:
Function This is not an executable command. The P1 is the label of the program point where it is
positioned.
P1 (CS) The character string as the label of the program point. Remember to have the character ':' after
the label.
Example 1 IF $U10 == 0
JMP SKIP /* Skip the command "$U20 = $U10 / 2" */
ENDIF
$U20 = $U10 / 2
SKIP:
$U10 = 1
JMP ==
Format JMP(P1,P2 == P3) Data Type U/S/UD/SD/F

Function Jumps to the program point specified by label P1 when P2 is equal to P3.
JMP !=
Format JMP(P1,P2 != P3) Data Type U/S/UD/SD/F

Function Jumps to the program point specified by label P1 when P2 is not equal to P3.
JMP >
Format JMP(P1,P2 > P3) Data Type U/S/UD/SD/F

Function Jumps to the program point specified by label P1 when P2 is greater than P3.

14
JMP >=
Format JMP(P1,P2 >= P3) Data Type U/S/UD/SD/F

Function Jumps to the program point specified by label P1 when P2 is greater than or equal to P3.
JMP <
Format JMP(P1,P2 < P3) Data Type U/S/UD/SD/F

Function Jumps to the program point specified by label P1 when P2 is less than P3.
JMP <=
Format JMP(P1,P2 <= P3) Data Type U/S/UD/SD/F

Function Jumps to the program point specified by label P1 when P2 is less than or equal to P3.
JMP &
Format JMP(P1,P2 & P3) Data Type U/UD

Function Jumps to the program point specified by label P1 when the result of Bitwise AND between P2
and P3 is non-zero.
JMP !&
Format JMP(P1,!(P2 & P3)) Data Type U/UD

Function Jumps to the program point specified by label P1 when the result of Bitwise AND between P2
and P3 is zero.
JMP <bit>
Format JMP(P1,P2) Data Type B

Function Jumps to the program point specified by label P1 if the condition P2 is true (1/On).
P2,P3 (I/E/CE) The operands.

4
14
JMP !<bit>
Format JMP(P1,!P2) Data Type B

Function Jumps to the program point specified by label P1 if the condition P2 is false (0/Off).
P2,P3 (I/E/CE) The operands.
CALL
Format CALL P1
Function Goes to sub-macro P1.
P1 (Sub-macro The sub-macro to be called.
name)
Example 1 CALL CommonFunction_01 /* Go to sub-macro named CommonFuncation_01 */
RET
Format RET
Function Returns to the calling macro. This command can only be used in sub-macros.
FOR
Format FOR P2 Data Type U

Function Runs the commands within the FOR loop by P1 times. A FOR loop is enclosed by a matching
pair of FOR and NEXT commands. There can be up to 20 nested FOR loops.
P1 (I/C) Total times to run the FOR loop
Example 1 FOR 10
$U100 = $U100 + 1 /* This command will be executed 10 times */
FOR 12
$U200 = $U200 + 1 /* This command will be executed 120 times */
NEXT
NEXT
NEXT
Format NEXT
Function This command indicates the end of a FOR loop. It is not an executable command.
Example 1 Example:
$U1 = 10
$U2 = 12
FOR $U1
$U100 = $U100 + 1 /* This command will be executed 10 times. */
FOR $U2
$U200 = $U200 + 1 /* This command will be executed 120 times. */
NEXT
NEXT

14
STOP
Format STOP
Function Stops the macro immediately. If the macro is a Cycle macro, it will run again starting from the
first command when the associated window is opened again. If the macro is a Main macro, it will
run again starting from the first command when restarting the application.
This command cannot be used in sub-macros.
END
Format END
Function Indicates the end of macro and stops the macro in the current cycle. It can be put anywhere in a
macro to stop the macro at any point. If the macro is a cyclic macro, such as the Main macro and
the Cycle macro, it is stopped just in the current cycle and will be run again starting from the first
command in the next cycle.
This command cannot be used in sub-macros.
14.4.9. Timer Operation

SET_T
Format SET_T(P1,P2) Data Type U

Function Starts the timer P1 using the timer control block in P2.
P1 (C) The ID of the timer. There are 8 timers available and the IDs are 0 to 7.
P2 (I) The starting location of the memory block (or word array) that is used as a Timer Control Block for the
timer. The structure of the Timer Control Block is shown below:
Word No. Data Item Description
0 Type of operation 0: One-shot; 1: Square-wave
1 Current timer value The timer increases the value of this word by 1 every
100ms.
2 Timer limit When the current timer value reaches the timer limit, the
timer will perform one of the following operations according
to the type of operation:
1) If the type of operation is One-shot (0), sets the time-up
flag to 1, resets the current timer value to 0, and stops itself.
2) If the type of operation is Square-wave (1), toggles the
time-up flag, resets the current timer value to 0, and
continues the timing operation.
3 Time-up flag This word will be set to 0 or 1 when the current timer value is
equal to the timer limit.
The timer will use the associated Timer Control Block as its private memory, so do not use any words in
the block for other purposes.
A Timer Control Block requires 4 words.
Example 1 $U100 = 1 /* Type of operation is Square-wave. */
$U101 = 0 /* Initialize the current timer value to 0. */
$U102 = 5 /* Timer limit is 0.5 second (5*100ms). */
$U103 = 0 /* Initialize the time-up flag to 0. */
SET_T(3, $U100) /* Use timer #3 to generate a 1 Hz square wave on $U103.0 */

4
14
STOP_T
Format STOP_T(P1) Data Type U

Function Stops the timer P1.
P1 (C) The ID of the timer.
Example 1 STOP_T(1) /* Stop timer #1 */
WAIT_T
Format WAIT_T(P1) Data Type U

Function Waits for the time-up of timer P1. The macro command following this one will not be executed
until the timer reaches its limit.
P1 (C) The ID of the timer.
Example 1 $U100 = 0 /* Type of operation is One-shot. */
$U101 = 0 /* Initialize the current timer value to 0. */
$U102 = 5 /* Timer limit is 0.5 second (5*100ms). */
$U103 = 0 /* Initialize the time-up flag to 0. */
SET_T(7, $U100) /* Starts timer #7 as a 0.5 second timer. */
WAIT_T(7) /* Wait 0.5 second */
14.4.10. Keypad Operation

KB_MCR
Format KB_MCR(P1) Data Type U

Function Accepts or ignores the character/command currently input by the associated keypad button. This
command must be used only in a macro that is run by a keypad button. A keypad button runs the
specified macro when it is pressed. You can use this command in a keypad button macro to
accept or ignore the current input of that button.
P1 (I/C) The value or the location that holds the value to determine the acceptance of the keypad button
input. If the value is 0, the input will be accepted; Otherwise the input will be ignored.
Example 1 KB_MCR(1) /* Ignore the current input */
KPD_TEXT
Format KPD_TEXT(P1) Data Type U

Function The memory block (or byte array) that contains the null-terminated ASCII character string to be
used to initialize the keypad display and buffer.
P1 (I) The memory block (or byte array) that contains the null-terminated ASCII character string to be
used to initialize the keypad display and buffer.
Example 1 $U100 = "initial text"
KPD_TEXT($U100) /* Initialize the keypad display and buffer using the string "initial text". */

14
14.4.11. Recipe Operation
RB2ROM
Format P1 = RB2ROM(P2 ) Data Type U

Function Saves the data of recipe block P2 to the flash ROM and saves the completion code in P1.
P1 (I) The word to receive the completion code. If the completion code is 0, the operation succeeded;
otherwise the operation failed.
P2 (I/C) The ID of the recipe block to be saved. The option "Need space in flash ROM to save backup"
must be selected for the recipe block.
Example 1 $U10 = RB2ROM(3) /* Save recipe block #3 to the flash ROM. */
ROM2RB
Format P1 = ROM2RB(P2 ) Data Type U

Function Restores the data of recipe block P2 from the flash ROM and saves the completion code in P1.
P1 (I) The word to receive the completion code. If the completion code is 0, the operation succeeded;
otherwise the operation failed.
P2 (I/C) The ID of the recipe block to be restored. The option "Need space in flash ROM to save backup"
must be selected for the recipe block.
Example 1 $U10 = ROM2RB(3) /* Restore recipe block #3 from the flash ROM. */
REF_RCP_OBJ
Format REF_RCP_OBJ(P1 ) Data Type U

Function Refreshes the recipe objects associated with the specified recipe block P1. The recipe objects
include recipe selectors and recipe tables. You can use this command to update the display of
associated objects after changing the data of a recipe block in a macro program.
P1 (I/C) The ID of the associated recipe block.
Example 1 REF_RCP_OBJ(3) /* Refresh the recipe objects associated with recipe block #3 */

4
14
14.4.12. Communication Operation
EN_LINK
Format EN_LINK(P1,P2,P3) Data Type U

Function Enables communication link P1 or sub-link P2 of communication link P1 when P3 is 1. Disables
the specified communication link or sub-link when P3 is 0.
P1 (I/C) The number of the communication link to be enabled or disabled.
P2 (I/C) The node address of the sub-link to be enabled or disabled. If the specified communication link
has no sub-link, this parameter is ignored. If the specified communication link has sub-links and
you want to enable or disable the link itself, set this parameter to 0.
P3 (I/C) To enable the specified communication link or sub-link, set this parameter to 1. To disable the
specified communication link or sub-link, set this parameter to 0.
Example 1 ENABLE_LINK(1, 20, 0) /* Disable the sub-link, whose node address is 20, of communication
link 1. */
LINK_STS
Format P1 = LINK_STS(P2,P3 ) Data Type U

Function Gets the status of communication link P2 or sub-link P3 of communication link P2 and saves the
result in P1.
P1 (I/C) The word to receive the status of the specified communication link or sub-link. The status is a
16-bit value. The following table lists the meaning of each status value.
Status Value Meaning Status Value Meaning
0 OK 14 Device busy
1 Overrun error 15 Unknown error
2 Break error 16 Link disabled
3 Parity error 17 Initialization failure
4 Framing error 18 Failed to send data
5 No response 19 Failed to receive data
6 Unrecognized 20 Failed to open connection
response
7 Timeout 21 Connection not ready
8 Inactive CTS 22 Invalid sub-link
9 Checksum error 23 Invalid COM port
10 Command rejected 24 Error
11 Invalid address 255 Condition uncertain
12 Invalid range 65535 Failed to get status
13 Invalid request
P2 (I/C) The number of the communication link.

P3 (I/C) The node address of the sub-link. If the specified communication link has no sub-link, this
parameter is ignored.
Example 1 $U100 = LINK_STS(2, 0) /* Get the status of communication link 2 and save it to $U100. */
Example 2 $U12 = LINK_STS(1, 128) /* Get the status of the sub-link, whose node address is 128, of
communication link 1 and save it to $U12. */

14
14.4.13. System Service
GET_RTC
Format GET_RTC(P1 ) Data Type U

Function Gets the data of the real time clock and saves the result in P1.
P1 (I) The starting location of the memory block that is used as an RTC data block to receive the
operation result. The structure of the RTC data block is shown below:
Data Item Data Type/Size Word No.
Second 16-bit Unsigned Integer 0
Minute 16-bit Unsigned Integer 1
Hour 16-bit Unsigned Integer 2
RTC adjustment 16-bit Signed Integer 3
Day 16-bit Unsigned Integer 4
Month 16-bit Unsigned Integer 5
Year 16-bit Unsigned Integer 6
Day of week 16-bit Unsigned Integer 7
Second: 0-59; Minute: 0-59; Hour: 0-23; RTC adjustment: -63-63; Day: 1-31; Month: 1-12; Year:
0(2000)-99(2099); Day of week: 0(Sunday)-6(Saturday)
An RTC data block requires 8 words.
Example 1 GET_RTC($U100) /* Get the data of the real time clock. The second will be in $U100 and the
day-of-week will be in $U107. */
SET_RTC
Format SET_RTC(P1 ) Data Type U

Function Sets the real time clock using the data in P1.
P1 (I) The starting location of the memory block that is used as an RTC data block to contain the new
settings for the real time clock. See the description of GET_RTC to know the structure of the
RTC data block.
Example 1 $U100 = 0 // Second
$U101 = 30 // Minute
$U102 = 8 // Hour
$U103 = 0 // Adjustment
$U104 = 1 // Day
$U105 = 7 // July
$U106 = 10 // Year 2010
$U107 = 4 // Thursday
SET_RTC($U100) /* Set the real time clock to 8:30:00 July 1st 2010 Thursday */
SYS
Format SYS(P1,P2,P3) Data Type U

Function Requests system service P1 with the arguments P2 and P3. This command is reserved for
system use.
P1 (I) The code of the system service.
P2,P3 (I/C) The arguments of the system service.

4
14
14.4.14. Screen Operation
OPEN_WS
Format OPEN_WS P1 Data Type U

Function The number of the window screen to be opened. This command will not open the specified
screen if it is a normal screen or menu screen. The macro commands following this command
will not be executed until the opened window screen is closed. Also, when a screen's Cycle
macro is waiting for the closing of the window screen opened by this command, that screen
cannot be closed or switched by any means.
P1 (I/C) The number of the window screen to be opened. If the screen number indicates the normal
screen or menu screen, no screen will be opened.
CLOSE_WS
Format CLOSE_WS
Function Closes the window screen that was opened by the macro command OPEN_WS.

14
14.4.15. File Operation
FILE_IO
Format P1 = FILE_IO(P2,P3 ) Data Type U

Function Performs the file operation specified by P2 and P3 using default filename and saves the completion code
in P1.
P1 (I) The word to receive the completion code of the operation. If the completion code is 0, the operation
succeeded; otherwise the operation failed.
P2,P3 P2 specifies the type of file operation. P3 specifies the ID of the data source. The following table describes
(I/C) how to set P2 and P3.
File Operation P2 P3 Default Filename Format
Save Logged Data (.txt) 1 Data logger ID (0-15) DL<ID>_<Date>_<Time>.txt
Save Logged Data (.csv) 14 DL<ID>_<Date>_<Time>.csv
Save Logged Alarms (.txt) 2 0 AL_<Date>_<Time>.txt
Save Logged Alarms (.csv) 15 AL_<Date>_<Time>.csv
Save Alarm Counts (.txt) 3 0 AC_<Date>_<Time>.txt
Save Alarm Counts (.csv) 16 AC_<Date>_<Time>.csv
Save Recipe Data (.txt) 4 Recipe block ID RB<ID>.txt
Save Recipe Data (.csv) 17 (0-15) RB<ID>.csv
Save Recipe Data (.prd) 5 RB<ID>.prd
Print Screen to File 6 Screen number S<ID>_<Date>_<Time>.bmp
(256-color .bmp) (1-7999)
Print Screen to File 7 S<ID>_<Date>_<Time>.bmp
(64K-color .bmp)
Save Logged Operations (.txt) 9 0 OL_<Date>_<Time>.txt
Save Logged Operations (.csv) 18 0 OL_<Date>_<Time>.csv
Save Logged Data (.ldf) 10 Data logger ID (0-15) DL<ID>_<Date>_<Time>.ldf
Take Picture (.bmp) 12 USB camera ID (0-3) CAM<ID>_<Date>_<Time>.bmp
Take Picture (.jpg) 13 CAM<ID>_<Date>_<Time>.jpg
Note:
<ID>: ID of the data logger, ID of the recipe block, ID of the USB camera, or number of the screen
<Date>: The date when saving the data. <Time>: The time when saving the data.
You can select the formats of <Date> and <Time> on the Custom page in the General Setup dialog box.

4
14
FILE_IO_N
Format P1 = FILE_IO_N(P2,P3,P4) Data Type U

Function Performs the file operation specified by P2 and P3 using filename P4 and saves the completion
code in P1.
P1 (I) The word to receive the completion code of the operation. If the completion code is 0, the
operation succeeded; otherwise the operation failed.
P2,P3 (I/C) P2 specifies the type of file operation. P3 specifies the ID of the data source. The following table
describes how to set P2 and P3.
File Operation P2 P3
Save Logged Data (.csv/.txt) 31 Data logger ID (0-15)
Save Logged Alarms (.txt) 32 0
Save Alarm Counts (.txt) 33 0
Save Recipe Data (.csv/.txt) 34 Recipe block ID (0-15)
Save Recipe Data (.prd) 35 Recipe block ID (0-15)
Print Screen to File (256-color .bmp) 36 Screen number (1-7999)
Print Screen to File (64K-color .bmp) 37 Screen number (1-7999)
Save Logged Operations (.txt) 39 0
Save Logged Data (.ldf) 40 Data logger ID (0-15)
Take Picture (.bmp) 42 USB camera ID (0-3)
Take Picture (.jpg) 43 USB camera ID (0-3)
P4 (I) The byte array that contains the specified filename or full pathname. The name must be a valid
Windows pathname with ASCII characters only. The character string must be null terminated
and each character occupies one byte. The maximum length of the string is 127. All the folders
stated in the full pathname must already exist or the file operation will fail.
MKDIR
Format P1 = MKDIR(P2 )
Function Creates a new directory with the specified name P2 and saves the result to P1.
P2 (I) The byte array that contains the name of the new directory. The name must be a valid directory
name with or without pathname and has only ASCII characters in it.

14
OPEN_FILE
Format P1 = OPEN_FILE(P2,P3 ) Data Type U

Function Creates or opens a file.
P1 (I) The starting location of the memory block that is used as a File Information Block to receive the
operation result. The structure of the File Information Block is shown below:
File handle 32-bit Unsigned Integer 0 and 1
File size 32 bit Unsigned Integer 2 and 3
Filename Byte array with 81 elements 4 through 44
The file handle is zero if the operation failed.
The file size is zero for a newly created file.
The filename is a null-terminated character string. The maximum allowable size is 80. It is set
when the file is successfully opened.
A File Information Block requires 45 words.
P2 (I) The byte array that contains the filename or the full pathname of the file to be opened. The name
is a null-terminated string and has only ASCII characters in it.
P3 (I/C) Specifies the purpose of opening the file.
Purpose Value
Read 0
Write 1
Append 3
Read CSV File 5
Example 1 $U10 = “test.txt”

$U100 = OPEN_FILE($U10, 0) /* Open the file “test.txt” for the read operation. The double word
$U100 will contain the file handle. The double word $U102 will contain the file size. The byte
array $U104 will contain the filename. */
READ_FILE
Format P1 = READ_FILE(P2,P3,P4 ) Data Type U

Function Reads P4 bytes from file P2 to buffer P3 and saves the result in P1.
P1 (I) The word to receive the number of bytes that were actually read. If the operation failed, the
number is 65535 (0xFFFF).
P2 (I) The file handle of the file to be read.
P3 (I) The memory block to receive the data read from the file.
P4 (I/C) Number of bytes to be read from the file. The maximum you can specify is 32767(0x7FFF).
Example 1 $U200 = READ_FILE($U100,$U150,20) /* Read 20 bytes from the file specified by the file
handle in $U100 and saves the data in the memory block starting from $U150. */

4
14
WRITE_FILE
Format P1 = WRITE_FILE(P2,P3,P4 ) Data Type U

Function Writes P4 bytes of data in P3 to file P2 and saves the completion code in P1.
P2 (I) The file handle of the file.
P3 (I) The memory block (or byte array) that stores the data to be written to the file.
P4 (I/C) Number of bytes to be written to the file.
Example 1 $U200=WRITE_FILE($U100,$U150,30) /* Write 30 bytes of data stored in the memory block
starting from $U150 to the file specified by the file handle in $U100. */
CLOSE_FILE
Format P1 = CLOSE_FILE(P2,P3 ) Data Type U

Function Closes an opened file P2 and saves the completion code in P1.
P2 (I) The file handle of the file to be closed.
Example 1 $U200=CLOSE_FILE($U100) /* Close the file specified by the file handle in $U100. */
DELETE_FILE
Format P1 = DELETE_FILE(P2 ) Data Type U

Function Deletes a file named P2 and saves the completion code in P1.
P2 (I) The byte array that contains the filename or the full pathname of the file to be deleted. The name
is a null-terminated string and has only ASCII characters in it.
$U200 = DELETE_FILE($U10) /* Delete the file “test.txt”. */
RENAME_FILE
Format P1 = RENAME_FILE(P2,P3 ) Data Type U

Function Renames file P2 with new name P3 and saves the completion code in P1.
P2 (I) The byte array that contains the filename or the full pathname of the file to be renamed. The
name is a null-terminated string and has only ASCII characters in it.
P3 (I) The byte array that contains the new filename. The name is a null-terminated string and has only
ASCII characters in it.
$U50 = “new.txt”
$U200 = RENAME_FILE($U10, $U50) /* Rename the file “test.txt” to “new.txt”. */

14
GET_VOL_INFO
Format P1 = GET_VOL_INFO(P2,P3 ) Data Type U

Function Gets the information of volume P2 and saves the result in P3. The completion code is saved in
P1.
P2 (I/C) The drive ID.
ID Drive
0 Current drive
3 Drive C
4 Drive D
5 Drive E
P3 (I) The starting location of the memory block that is used as a Volume Information Block to receive
the operation result. The structure of the Volume Information Block is shown below:
Volume name Byte array with 32 elements 0 through 15
Volume size 32-bit Unsigned Integer 16 and 17
Free size 32-bit Unsigned Integer 18 and 19
Drive ID 16-bit Unsigned Integer 20
The volume name is a null-terminated character string. The maximum allowable size is 31
characters.
Both the unit of volume size and the unit of free size are 1024 bytes.
A Volume Information Block requires 21 words.
Example 1 $U100 = GET_VOL_INFO(0, $U0) /* Get the volume information of the current drive. The
volume name will be stored in $U0 through $U15. The size of the drive will be stored in $U16 and
$U17. The free size of the drive will be stored in $U18 and $U19. The ID of the current drive will
be stored in $U20. */
READ_CSV
Format P1 = READ_CSV(P2,P3,P4 ) Data Type S/U/SD/UD/F

Function Reads the data in the field of row P3 and column P4 of the CSV file P2 and saves the result in P1.
The word location to receive the value of the specified field. The data type selected for this
command should be the same as the data type of the specified field, or the operation may fail. If
P1（I）
the operation fails for any reason, no value will be written to P1. To know if the operation failed or
not, check the word $S522. When the value of $S522 is non-zero, the operation failed.
The file handle of the file to be read. The file must be a CSV file and is opened with the purpose of
P2（I）
Read CSV File. The delimiter must be TAB.
P3（I/C） The row number of the field to be read. The row counts from 0.
P4（I/C） The column number of the field to be read. The column counts from 0.
$U10 = "test.csv"
$U100 = OPEN_FILE($U10,5) /* Open the file "test.csv" for the READ CSV FILE operation. */
Example 1
$U200 = READ_CSV($U100,2,3) (F) /* Read the floating point number in the field of row 2 and
column 3 and save the result in $U200 and $U201. */

4
14
READ_CSV_STR
Format P1 = READ_CSV_STR (P2,P3,P4 )

Reads the string in the field of row P3 and column P4 of the CSV file P2 and saves the result in
Function
P1.
The byte array to receive the string in the specified field. The maximal string length that this
command can handle is 128. If the operation fails for any reason, no value will be written to P1. To
P1（I）
know if the operation failed or not, check the word $S522. When the value of $S522 is non-zero,
the operation failed.
The file handle of the file to be read. The file must be a CSV file and is opened with the purpose of
P2（I）
Read CSV File. The delimiter must be TAB.
P3（I/C） The row number of the field to be read. The row counts from 0.
P4（I/C） The column number of the field to be read. The column counts from 0.
$U10 = "test.csv"
$U100 = OPEN_FILE($U10,5) /* Open the file "test.csv" for the READ CSV FILE operation. */
Example 1
$U200 = READ_CSV_STR($U100,2,4) /* Read the string in the field of row 2 and column 4 and
save the result in the byte array starting at $U200. */

14
14.4.16. Comparison
==
Format P1 = P2 == P3 Data Type U/S/UD/SD/F/B

Function Sets bit P1 to 1 if P2 is equal to P3, otherwise sets P1 to 0.
P1 (I/E) The bit location to save the result.
Example 1 $U3.3 = ($U10 + $U20) == 25.75 (F)
!=
Format P1 = P2 != P3 Data Type U/S/UD/SD/F/B

Function Sets bit P1 to 1 if P2 is not equal to P3, otherwise sets P1 to 0.
Example 1 $U3.3 = ($U10 + $U20) != -700 (S)
>
Format P1 = P2 > P3 Data Type U/S/UD/SD/F

Function Sets bit P1 to 1 if P2 is greater than P3, otherwise sets P1 to 0.
Example 1 $U3.3 = ($U10 + $U20) > $U30 (UD)
>=
Format P1 = P2 >= P3 Data Type U/S/UD/SD/F

Function Sets bit P1 to 1 if P2 is greater than or equal to P3, otherwise sets P1 to 0.
Example 1 $U3.3 = ($U10 + $U20) >= 25.75 (F)
<
Format P1 = P2 < P3 Data Type U/S/UD/SD/F

Function Sets bit P1 to 1 if P2 is less than P3, otherwise sets P1 to 0.
Example 1 $U3.3 = ($U10 + $U20) < 25.75 (F)
<=
Format P1 = P2 <= P3 Data Type U/S/UD/SD/F

Function Sets bit P1 to 1 if P2 is less than or equal to P3, otherwise sets P1 to 0.
Example 1 $U3.3 = ($U10 + $U20) <= 25.75 (F)

4
14
14.4.17. String Operation
STRCPY
Format STRCPY(P1, P2 )
Function Copies the string in P2 to P1.
P1 (I) The byte array that receives a copy of the string in P2. The byte array must be large enough to
hold the string and the null terminator.
P2 (I) The source, i.e. the byte array that contains the null-terminated string to be copied.
Example 1 $U10 = “ABCDE”
STRCPY($U20, $U10)
After the command STRCPY is executed, the byte array $U20 contains the string “ABCDE” and
the memory content is like the following:
Word Low Byte High Byte
$U20 'A' 'B'
$U21 'C' 'D'
$U22 'E' 0
Example 2 $U10 = “12”

STRCPY($U20, $U10)
After the command STRCPY is executed, the byte array $U20 contains the string “12” and the
memory content is like the following:
Word Low Byte High Byte
$U20 '1' '2'
$U21 0 Undefined
STRCAT
Format STRCAT(P1, P2 )
Function Appends string in P2 to string in P1.
P1 (I) The byte array that contains a null-terminated string to which the command appends P2. The byte
array must be large enough to hold both strings and the null terminator.
P2 (I) The byte array that contains a null-terminated string to be appended to the string in P1.
Example 1 $U10 = “ABC”
$U20 = “12345”
STRCAT($U10, $U20) /* After this command is executed, the byte array $U10 contains
“ABC12345” */
Example 2 $U100 = “C:\MyFolder\”
$U130 = “Test”
$U140 = “.txt“
STRCAT($U100, $U130)
STRCAT($U100, $U140) /* After this command is executed, the byte array $U100 contains
“C:\MyFolder\Test.txt” */

14
STRLEN
Format P1 = STRLEN(P2 )
Function Gets the length of string P2 and saves the result in P1.
P1 (I) The word to receive the result.
P2 (I) The byte array that stores the null-terminated string.
$U20 = STRLEN($U10) /* After this command is executed, the value of $U20 is 3. */
STRCMP
Format P1 = STRCMP(P2,P3 )
Function Compares strings P2 and P3 lexicographically and saves a value indicating their relationship in
P1.
P1 (I) The value of comparison result.
Value Description
0 P2 and P3 are identical.
1 P2 is greater than P3.
0xFFFF P2 is less than P3.
P2,P3 (I) The byte array that contains a null-terminated string to compare.
$U20 = “abc”
$U30 = STRCMP($U10, $U20) /* After this command is executed, $U30 is 0xFFFF*/
Example 2 $U10 = “XYZ”
$U20 = “ABC”
$U30 = STRCMP($U10, $U20) /* After this command is executed, $U30 is 1*/
$U20 = “ABC”
$U30 = STRCMP($U10, $U20) /* After this command is executed, $U30 is 0*/

4
14
STRICMP
Format P1 = STRICMP(P2,P3 )
Function Compares lowercase version of strings P2 and P3 lexicographically and saves a value indicating
their relationship in P1.
Value Description
0 P2 and P3 are identical.
1 P2 is greater than P3.
0xFFFF P2 is less than P3.
$U20 = “abc”
$U30 = STRICMP($U10, $U20) /* After this command is executed, $U30 is 0*/
$U20 = “ABC”
$U30 = STRICMP($U10, $U20) /* After this command is executed, $U30 is 1*/
$U20 = “ABC”

14
STRNCMP
Format P1 = STRNCMP(P2,P3,P4 )
Function Lexicographically compares, at most, the first P4 characters in strings P2 and P3 and saves a
value indicating the relationship between the substrings in P1.
Value Description
0 P2's substring and .P3's substring are identical
1 P2's substring is greater than P3's substring .
0xFFFF P2's substring is less than P3's substring .
Note: The comparison ends if a terminating null character is reached in either string before P4
characters are compared. If the strings are equal when a terminating null character is reached in
either string before P4 characters are compared, the shorter string is less.
The characters from 91 to 96 in the ASCII table ('[', '\', ']', '^', '_', and '`') will evaluate as less than
any alphabetic character.
P4 (I/C) The number of characters to compare.
$U20 = “XYZAB”
$U30 = STRNCMP($U10, $U20,4) /* After this command is executed, $U30 is 0xFFFF*/
Example 2 $U10 = “ABZ”
$U20 = “ABC”
$U30 = STRNCMP($U10, $U20,2) /* After this command is executed, $U30 is 0*/
Example 3 $U10 = “AXC”
$U20 = “ABC”
$U30 = STRNCMP($U10, $U20,3) /* After this command is executed, $U30 is 1*/
STRCHR
Format P1 = STRCHR(P2,P3 )
Function Finds the first occurrence of a character P3 in a string P2 and saves a search result in value
indicating the position of the found character in P1.
P1 (I) The value of search result. If the character P3 is not found in P2, the result value is
0xFFFF.Otherwise, the result value is the index to the first occurrence of character P3 in a string
P2.
P2 (I) The byte array that contains a null-terminated source string.
P3 (I/C) The byte that contains a character code to be located.
Example 1 $U10 = “The quick brown dog jumps over the lazy fox.”
$U20 = 0x72 /* The ASCII code of character 'r' */
$U30 = STRCHR($U10, $U20) /* After this command is executed, $U30 is 11*/

4
14
NUM2STR
Format P1 = NUM2STR(P2,P3 ) Data Type U/UD

Function Converts the number in P2 to a string with P3 characters and saves the result in P1.
P1 (I) The byte array that stores the result.
P2 (I/C) The number or the location that holds the number to be converted.
P3 (I/C) Specifies the exact number of characters that the result should have. If the number of digits of P2
is less than P3, the result is padded on the left with zeros. If the number of digits of P2 exceeds
P3, the higher digits are truncated. If P3 is 0, there is no limitation on the length of the result.
Example 1 $U120 = 123
$U100 = NUM2STR($U120, 0) (U) /* After this command is executed, the byte array $U100
contains “123”. */
Example 2 $U120 = 1234567 (UD)
$U100 = NUM2STR($U120, 10) (UD) /* After this command is executed, the byte array $U100
contains “0001234567”. */
Example 3 $U120 = 1234567 (UD)
$U100 = NUM2STR($U120, 5) (UD) /* After this command is executed, the byte array $U100
contains “34567”. */
TIME2STR
Format P1 = TIME2STR(P2 ) Data Type U

Function Converts the current system time to a string using the format specified by P2 and saves the result
in P1.
P2 (I/C) Specifies the desired conversion format.
Format P2 Value Remark
hhmmss 0 hh: hour(00-23); mm: minute(00-59); ss: second(00-59)
hhmm 1 hh, mm: same as above
Example 1 $U10 = TIME2STR(0) /* Assume that the current system time is 12:30:59. After this command is
executed, the byte array $U10 contains “123059”. */
DATE2STR
Format P1 = DATE2STR(P2 ) Data Type U

Function Converts the current system date to a string using the format specified by P2 and saves the result
in P1.
Format P2 Value Remark
YYMMDD 0 YY: year (00-99); MM: month(01-12); DD: day(01-31)
YYMM 1 YY, MM: same as above
YYMMMDD 2 YY: year (00-99); MMM: month(JAN-DEC); DD: day(01-31)
YYMMM 3 YY, MMM: same as above
Example 1 $U10 = DATE2STR(0) /* Assume that the current system date is December 7, 2008. After this
command is executed, the byte array $U10 contains “081207”. */
Example 2 $U20 = DATE2STR(3) /* Assume that the current system date is December 31, 2008. After this
command is executed, the byte array $U20 contains “08DEC”. */

14
TD2STR
Format P1 = TD2STR(P2 ) Data Type U

Function Converts the current system time and date to a string using the format specified by P2 and saves
the result in P1.
P2
Format Remark
Value
YYMMDD_hhmmss 0 YY: year (00-99); MM: month(01-12); DD: day(01-31)
hh: hour(00-23); mm: minute(00-59) ; ss: second(00-59)
YYMMMDD_hhmmss 1 YY, DD, hh, mm, ss: same as above
MMM: month(JAN-DEC)
YYMMDD_hhmm 2 YY, DD, hh, mm: same as above; MM: month(01-12)
YYMMMDD_hhmm 3 YY, DD, hh, mm: same as above;
MMM: month(JAN-DEC)
Example 1 $U10 = TD2STR(0) /* Assume that the current system date is December 7, 2008 and the current
system time is 15:18:30. After this command is executed, the byte array $U10 contains
“081207_151830". */
Example 2 $U20 = TD2STR(3) /* Assume that the current system date is December 31, 2008 and the current
system time is 13:30:00. After this command is executed, the byte array $U20 contains
“08DEC31_1330”. */
I2A
Format P1 = I2A(P2,P3 ) Data Type U/S/UD/SD

Function Converts the integer number in P2 to a string and saves the result in P1. The string is generated
according to the format specified by P3 and P4.
P1 (I) The byte array that stores the result. The result is a null terminated string.
P2 (I/C) The integer number or the location that holds the integer number to be converted.
P3 (I/C) Specifies the maximum number of digits the string can have.
P4 (I/C) Specifies where to insert a decimal point in the string. A decimal point is inserted to the left of the
nth digit when P4 is n. No decimal point is inserted when P4 is 0.
Example 1 $U120 = 123
$U100 = I2A($U120, 5, 0) /* After this command is executed, the byte array $U100 contains
“123”. */
Example 2 $U120 = 1234567 (UD)
$U100 = I2A($U120, 6, 2) (UD) /* After this command is executed, the byte array $U100 contains
“2345.67”. */
Example 3 $U120 = -12345 (S)
$U100 = I2A($U120, 5, 1) (UD) /* After this command is executed, the byte array $U100 contains
“-1234.5”. */

4
14
A2I
Format P1 = A2I(P2,P3,P4 ) Data Type U/S/UD/SD

Function Converts the string P2 to an integer value and saves the result in P1.
P1 (I) The location that stores the result. The result is 0 when there is any conversion error.
P2 (I) The byte array that holds the string to be converted.
P3 (I/C) Specifies the length of the string. It is allowed to specify 0 for P3. When P3 is 0, the string must be
a null terminated string.
P4 (I/C) Specifies how many fractional digits in the string are to be converted.
Example 1 $U120 = “123”
$U100 = A2I($U120, 0, 0) /* After this command is executed, the value in word $U100 is 123. */
Example 2 $U120 = “1234567”
$U100 = A2I($U120, 6, 0) (UD) /* After this command is executed, the value in double word
$U100 is 123456. */
Example 3 $U120 = “-123.45”
$U100 = A2I($U120, 0, 2) (S) /* After this command is executed, the value in word $U100 is
-12345. */
F2A
Format P1 = F2A(P2,P3 ) Data Type F

Function Converts the floating point number in P2 to a string and saves the result in P1. The string is
generated according to the format specified by P3 and P4.
P1 (I) The byte array that stores the result. The result is a null terminated string.
P2 (I/C) The floating point number or the location that holds the floating point number to be converted.
P3 (I/C) Specifies the number of integral digits the string can have.
P4 (I/C) Specifies the number of fractional digits the string can have.
Example 1 $U120 = 123.45 (F)
$U100 = F2A($U120, 5, 2) /* After this command is executed, the byte array $U100 contains
“123.45”. */
Example 2 $U120 = 1234 (F)
$U100 = F2A($U120, 6, 2) (UD) /* After this command is executed, the byte array $U100 contains
“1234.00”. */
Example 3 $U120 = -1234.5 (S)
$U100 = F2A($U120, 5, 1) (UD) /* After this command is executed, the byte array $U100 contains
“-1234.5”. */

14
A2F
Format P1 = A2F(P2,P3 ) Data Type F

Function Converts the string P2 to a floating point number and saves the result in P1.
P1 (I) The location that stores the result. The result is 0 when there is any conversion error.
P2 (I) The byte array that holds the string to be converted.
P3 (I/C) Specifies the length of the string. It is allowed to specify 0 for P3. When P3 is 0, the string must be
a null terminated string.
Example 1 $U120 = “123.4”
$U100 = A2F($U120, 0) /*The value of the floating point number in double word $U100 is 123.4. */
Example 2 $U120 = “1234567”
$U100 = A2F($U120, 6) (UD) /* The value of the floating point number in double word $U100 is
123456. */
Example 3 $U120 = “-123.45”
$U100 = A2F($U120, 0) (S) /* The value of the floating point number in double word $U100 is
-123.45. */

4
14
14.4.18. Run Operation
RUN
Format RUN(P1)
Function Runs the executable P1 which is on the same PC. This command is only available for the runtime
software on the PC.
P1 (I/A) The name of the executable to be run.
Example 1 RUN "ABC.exe" /* Run the program ABC */
Example 2 $U10 = "XYZ.bat"
RUN $U10 /* Run the batch file XYZ */
RUNW
Format P1 = RUNW(P2)
Function Runs the executable P2 which is on the same PC and saves the result in P1. Note that the macro
command following this one will not be executed until the program is closed. This command is
only available for the runtime software on the PC.
P1 (I) The word to receive the result.
P2 (I/A) The name of the executable to be run.
Example 1 $U10 = RUNW "ABC.exe" /* Run the program ABC and use $U10 to get the result. */
IF $U10 == 0 /* If the result is 0 then run the batch file XYZ. */
$U20 = "XYZ.bat"
$U11 = RUNW $U20 /* Run the batch file XYZ. */
ENDIF

14
14.4.19. Print Operation
PRINT
Format P1 = PRINT(P2,P3 ) Data Type U

Function Sends P3 bytes of data stored in byte array P2 to the printer and saves the completion code in P1.
P1 (I) The word to receive the completion code of the operation. The following table describes the meanings
of the completion codes.
Code Description
0 Succeeded
1 Printer not ready
3 System error
4 Printer busy
7 No printer specified
P2 (I) The starting location of the byte array that stores the data to be sent to the printer.
P3 (I/C) The length in byte of the data to be sent to the printer.
Example 1 $U10 = "This is a test."
$U20 = PRINT($U10, 15) /* Send the string “This is a test.” to the printer. */
$U10 = 10
$U20 = PRINT($U10, 1) /* Send the line-feed character to the printer */
$U10 = 12
$U20 = PRINT($U10, 1) /* Send the form-feed character to the printer */
Example 2 $U10 = 0x401b /* ESC, '@' */
$U20 = PRINT($U10, 2) /* Send the initialization command to the EPSON printer */
PRINT_SCREEN
Format P1 = PRINT_SCREEN(P2,P3 ) Data Type U

Function Prints screen P2 and saves the result in P1.
P1 (I) The word to receive the completion code of the operation. The following table describes the meanings
of the completion codes.
Code Description
0 Succeeded
1 Printer not ready
2 Invalid screen number
3 System error
4 Printer busy
5 System busy
6 Improper use of this command (See Note)
7 No printer specified
Note: This command can only be used in the following types of macros: Main Macro, Event Macro,
Time Macro, and Cycle Macro.
P2 (I/C) The number of the screen to be printed. The printed area is specified in the Screen Properties dialog
box.
P3 (I/C) Reserved for future use. Must be 0.
Example 1 $U0 = PRINT_SCREEN(28, 0) /* Print screen #28*/

4
14
BLANK
Format P1 = BLANK (P2) Data Type U

Function Blanks the print buffer P1, i.e. makes the print buffer P1 contain only blank characters.
The print buffer to be blanked. The print buffer is a byte array. You should always blank a print
P1 (I)
buffer before printing strings to it.
The size of the print buffer. The unit is byte (one-byte character).
P2 (I/C) For example, if the size of a print buffer is 40, it has 20 words and can contain up to 40 one-byte
characters.
Example 1 BLANK($U100, 80) /* Blank the print buffer starting at $U100 with a length of 40 words. */
P2B
Format P1 = P2B (P2,P3 ) Data Type U

Function Prints the null-terminated string P1 to the print buffer P2 at the specified byte position P3.
P1 (I) The byte array that holds the string to be printed.
P2 (I) The byte array that is used as a print buffer to accept the string P1.
The byte position in the print buffer to put the string. The byte position counts from 0.
P3 (I/C)
For example, to print a string at the beginning of the print buffer, set P3 to 0.
BLANK($U100, 20) /* Blank the print buffer. */
$U10 = “Weight:”
P2B($U100, $U10, 0) /* Print the string “Weight:” at the position of byte 0 of the print buffer. */
$U10 = I2A(1234, 2) /* The byte array $U10 will hold the string “12.34” after this command is
Example 1 executed. */
P2B($U100, $U10, 8) /* Print the string “12.34” at the position of byte 8 of the print buffer. */
$U10 = “kg”
P2B($U100, $U10, 14) /* Print the string “kg” at the position of byte 14 of the print buffer. */
PRINT($U100, 20 ) /* Print string “Weight: 12.34 kg” in the print buffer to the real printer. */
P2B_R
Format P1 = P2B_R (P2,P3 ) Data Type U

Function Prints the null-terminated string P1 to the print buffer P2. The string is right aligned with the byte
position P3.
P1 (I) The byte array that holds the string to be printed.
P2 (I) The byte array that is used as a print buffer to accept the string P1.
The byte position in the print buffer that the last characters of the string is placed. The byte position
counts from 0.
P3 (I/C)
For example, to print a string with 6 characters at the beginning of the print buffer, set P3 to 5 as the
last character of the string should be placed at the position of byte 5.
BLANK($U100, 20) /* Blank the print buffer. */
$U10 = “Weight:”
P2B_R($U100, $U10, 6) /* Print the string “Weight:” to the print buffer and align the string right with
the position of byte 6. */
$U10 = I2A(1234, 2) /* The byte array $U10 will hold the string “12.34” after this command is
executed. */
Example 1
P2B_R($U100, $U10, 12) /* Print the string “12.34” to the print buffer and align the string right with
the position of byte 12. */
$U10 = “kg”
P2B_R($U100, $U10, 15) /* Print the string “kg” to the print buffer and align the string right with the
position of byte 15. */
PRINT($U100, 20 ) /* Print string “Weight: 12.34 kg” in the print buffer to the real printer. */

14
14.4.20. Sound Operation

SOUND
Format SOUND (P1,P2,P3 ) Data Type U

Function Plays the sound P1.
The identifier of the sound to be played.
P1 (I/C)
Note: The sounds and their identifiers are defined in the sound table of the panel application.
The number of times you want the sound to be played. If you want the specified sound to be played
P2 (I/C)
just once, set P2 to 1.
The break time between two consecutive plays. The time unit is 100 ms (0.1 second). If you do not
P3 (I/C)
want any break between two plays, set P3 to 0.
SOUND(10, 5, 3) /* Play the sound #10 5 times with a break of 0.3 second between two
Example 1
consecutive plays. */
STOP_SOUND
Format STOP_SOUND
Function Stops playing the current sound.
Example 1 STOP_SOUND /* Stop playing the current sound.*/

CHAPTER 15
SCHEDULE
15.1. Using Schedule...................................................................................... 1

15.2. Setting up the Schedule ......................................................................... 2
15.2.2. Schedule Details Dialog Box......................................................................................... 6
15.2.3. Time Setting Block ........................................................................................................ 8
15.3. Setting up Schedule Setting Table........................................................11
15.3.3. Settings ........................................................................................................................ 12
4
15
15.1. Using Schedule
The schedule function allows the HMI to perform a specified operation at the designated time. For example, the HMI can
turn on a motor at the designated stat time and turn off that motor at the designated end time. Another example is that the
HMI can set the running mode temperature at the designated start time of a process and reset the temperature to the
standby temperature at the designated end time of that process.
Up to 48 schedules (Number 1 to Number 48) can be registered in a panel application. Each schedule can be programmed
to either change the value of a specified PLC location or execute a specified macro at the designated time.
To use schedule in your application, please do the following:
1. Setting up Schedule
2. Creating and configuring Schedule Setting Table screen object
Notes:
1. The time schedule features are one time actions. When the Start Time is reached, the designated device address is
written to just once. The write action is not repeated.
2. The Start Value and the Prohibit Action Bit are read only once at the beginning of the time range. Since regular
readout is not possible, there may be a slight data communication delay that causes a slight delay in the Start Time.
Due to the same reason, the delay may occur in the End Time.
3. When the time range of a schedule is changed by whatever method and the current time is inside the time range, the
start action is performed.
4. When the same Start Times and End Times appear in multiple schedules, they are handled in order, starting from the
smallest schedule number.
5. If the Start Action is completed and then a power outage occurs, the End Action will be performed at the End Time
after the power is resumed.
15-1 CHAPTER 15 SCHEDULE

15
15.2. Setting up the Schedule
You can set up the schedule with the Schedule dialog box. To open the Schedule dialog box of a panel application, use
one of the following methods:
1) In the Project Manager window, double-click the Schedule node ( ) under Setup node of the concerned panel
application
2) In the Project Manager window, right-click the Schedule node ( ) under Setup node of the concerned panel
application to bring out the pop-up menu and select Properties.
3) In the menu bar, click Panel ->Schedule. Note that the concerned panel application must be the current panel
application or you will be working on the current panel application instead of the concerned panel application.
The Schedule dialog box contains the following pages. Some of the pages appear only when they are needed.
■ General
■ Start Macro / End Macro
CHAPTER 15 SCHEDULE 15-2

4
15
This section describes how to define the general settings for schedule. The following is an example of the General page of
the Schedule dialog box.
To enable the schedule function for the application, check the Enable box in the dialog box.
The following describes how to set up a time schedule.
Item Description
Use To register the schedule, check the Use box of the schedule first. During project development, you
can un-register the schedule temporarily by un-checking the Use box. The entered settings will not
be lost after un-checking.
ID The pre-assigned identifier of the schedule.
Name Specify the schedule name for each language. The schedule name will be shown on the Schedule
Setting Table screen object. The maximum length of a schedule name is 24 characters. To select
the language you are working on, use the Language combo box on the bottom of the dialog box.
Continued

15
Item Description
Start Action Specify the action you want the HMI to perform at the Start time and the End time. The following
table describes the five options.
Action Description
Set Bit Sets the specified bit to On at the Start Time. If the End Action is
selected, it resets the specified bit to Off at the End Time.
Example: Start Time: 09:00:00 End Time: 17:00:00
Reset Bit Resets the specified bit to Off at the Start Time. If the End Action is
selected, it sets the specified bit to On at the End Time.
Write Word Writes the Start Value to the specified word at the Start Time. If the End
Action is selected, it writes the End Value to the specified word at the
End Time.

Start Value: 100 End Value: 60
Write Address: W100
Write 32-bit Word Writes the Start Value to the specified double-word at the Start Time. If
the End Action is selected, it writes the End Value to the specified
double-word at the End Time.
Run Macro Runs the specified Start Macro at the Start Time. If the End Action is
selected, it runs the specified End Macro at the End Time.
The corresponding Start Macro tab is added to the dialog box when the
Run Macro action is selected. You can edit the Start Macro in the Start
Macro tab. When the End Action is selected, the corresponding End
Macro tab is added to the dialog box when the End Action is selected.
You can edit the End Macro in the End Macro tab.
Note: The Start Time, End Time, Start Value, and End Value mentioned in the above table are
specified in the Schedule Settings dialog box.
Continued

4
15
Item Description
Write Address Specify the target address for the desired action.
For Action Address Type
Set Bit Bit address
Reset Bit Bit address
Write Word An address that can refer to a 16-bit datum
Write 32-bit Word An address that can refer to a 32-bit datum
Power-On Select the action to perform when the power is turned on.
Action Power-On Action is Enabled (Checked)
If the HMI is turned on inside of the scheduled range, the Start Action is performed.
If the HMI is turned on outside of the scheduled range and the End Action is enabled, the End
Action is performed.
Power-On Action is Disabled (Unchecked)

If the End Action is enabled, the End Action is performed when the HMI is turned on.
End Action Check the item to enable the End Action. If the End Action is enabled, the HMI will do one of the
following operations at the designated End Time according to the selected Start Action.
Start Action End Action
Set Bit Resets the specified bit to Off at the End Time.
Reset Bit Sets the specified bit to On at the End Time.
Write Word Writes the End Value to the specified word at the End Time.
Write 32-bit Word Writes the End Value to the specified double-word at the End Time.
Run Macro Runs the specified End Macro.
Details Click the Edit button to open the Schedule Details dialog box. You can specify the Start Time, End
Time, Start Value, and End Value of the schedule in the Schedule Details dialog box. See Section
15.2.2 for details.
Prohibit Action Select to prohibit the schedule function by using the specified Prohibit Action Bit. At the Start Time,
Bit the value of the Prohibit Action Bit is read before the start action is performed. If the value is on, the
schedule action is not performed for the current cycle.

15
15.2.2. Schedule Details Dialog Box
In the Schedule Details dialog box, you can specify the Start Time/Date, End Time/Date, Start Value, and End Value of a
schedule. To open the Schedule Details dialog box of a schedule, click the Edit button of the schedule in the Schedule
dialog box.

Example 1
1) The time range starts at 09:00:00 on Monday and ends at 18:00:00 on Thursday.
2) The operators are allowed to modify the time range by using the Schedule Setting Table at runtime.
3) The Start Value and End Value are floating point numbers. When the schedule starts, the HMI outputs the Start Value
read from the internal words $U120 and $U121 to the specified Write Address. When the schedule ends, the HMI
outputs the End Value read from the internal words $U122 and $U123 to the specified Write Address.

Example 2
1) The time range can be set by a device/PLC. The memory block starts at W100 of the PLC will be used for setting the
time range.
2) Before a valid time range is set at runtime, the default time range specified in the dialog box will be used. The default
time range starts at 09:00:00 and ends at on every weekday.
3) The operators are allowed to modify the time range by using the Schedule Setting Table at runtime.
4) The Start Value and End Value are 16-bit unsigned integers. When the schedule starts, the HMI outputs the Start
Value read from the PLC word location W30 to the specified Write Address. When the schedule ends, the HMI outputs
the End Value read from the PLC word location W31 to the specified Write Address.

4
15
Example 3
1) The time range starts at 07:30:00 and ends at 20:30:00 on April 10.
2) It is not allowed to modify the time range in the Schedule Setting Table at runtime.
3) The Start Value and End Value are 16-bit unsigned integers. When the schedule starts, the HMI writes 100 to the
specified Write Address. When the schedule ends, the HMI writes 60 to the specified Write Address.
The following describes the items in the Schedule Details dialog box.
Item Description
Schedule No. The number of the concerned schedule. The field is read only.
Special Day Select to make the schedule valid only for the specified day.
Month The month of the Special Day.
Day The day of the Special Day.
Time Constant Select to make the time range non-settable by a device/PLC.
Range Variable Select to make the time range settable by a device/PLC.
Changeable with Select to allow the operators to change the time range by using the Schedule Setting Table
Schedule Setting Table at runtime.
Time Setting Address Specify the starting address of the Time Setting Block that the device/PLC will use to set the
time range of the schedule. See section 15.2.3 for the details of the Time Setting Block.
Default Time Select to allow the schedule to have a default time range. This item is visible only when the
Variable is selected for the Time Range. The HMI will use the default time range for the
schedule if there is no valid time range set by the PLC or by the operator yet.
Individual start and end Select to indicate that the start day and end day of the schedule are different.
days
Start Time The start time of the schedule.
Start Day The start day of the schedule. The item is visible when the “Individual start and end days” is
selected.
End Time The end time of the schedule.
End Day The end day of the schedule. The item is visible when the “Individual start and end days” is
selected.
Applied Days Select the day or days in a week that the schedule will apply.
Output Constant Select this item to indicate that the start value and the end value are constants.
Value Variable Select this item to indicate that the start value and the end value are to be read from the
specified addresses.
Data Type Specify the data type of the start and end values.
Start Value Specify the start value or the address to get the start value.
End Value Specify the end value or the address to get the end value.

15
15.2.3. Time Setting Block
The following table shows the word arrangement of the Time Setting Block.
Word No. Usage Description

0 Time Setting Control Word See section 15.2.3.1 for the details
1 Time Setting Status Word See section 15.2.3.2 for the details
2 Action Mode See section 15.2.3.3 for the details
3 Start Day or the month of the Special Day See section 15.2.3.4 for the details
4 Start Time (Hour) Hour: 0-23
5 Start Time (Min.) Minute: 0-59
6 Start Time (Sec.) Second: 0-59
7 End Day or the day of the Special Day See section 15.2.3.4 for the details
8 End Time (Hour) Hour: 0-23
9 End Time (Min.) Minute: 0-59
10 End Time (Sec.) Second: 0-59
15.2.3.1. Time Setting Control Word (Word 0 of Time Setting Block)
Bit 15 1 0
Reserved (Must be 0) 0
Bit 0: Time Acquisition Request Bit
When the HMI detects that the Time Acquisition Request Bit turns on (from 0 to 1), it reads out from word 2 to word 10 of
the Time Setting Block to get the Action Mode, the Start Time, and the End Time for the schedule.

4
15
15.2.3.2. Time Setting Status Word (Word 1 of Time Setting Block)
Bit 15 2 1 0
Reserved (Must be 0) 0 0
Bit 0: Time Acquisition Completion Bit
‐ 0: Either Time Acquisition is being performed or have not been performed
‐ 1: Time Acquisition completed
Bit 1: Error Notification Bit
‐ 0: Time data is being replaced with correct data
‐ 1: Time data contains an error
Note:
1) The device/PLC must turn the Time Acquisition Request Bit off (1 to 0) when recognizes that the Time Acquisition
Completion Bit turns on (0 to 1)
2) When the HMI detects that the Time Acquisition Request Bit is turned off (1 to 0), it turns off the Time Acquisition
Completion Bit and Error Notification Bit immediately.

15
15.2.3.3. Action Mode (Word 2 of Time Setting Block)
Bit 15 2 1 0
Reserved (Must be 0) 0 0
Bit 0: End Action Bit

‐ 0: Disable the End Action of the schedule
‐ 1: Enable the End Action of the schedule
Bit 1: Individual Day Specification Bit
‐ 0: The Start Day and End Day of the schedule are the same.
‐ 1: The Start Day and End Day of the schedule are different.
Note:
If Individual Day Specification Bit is 1 and two or more of the Start/End Day bits turn on simultaneously, an error occurs.
15.2.3.4. Start Day (Word 3 of Time Setting Block), End Day (Word 7 of Time Setting Block)
Designate the day used as a trigger for the Start/End Action.

Bit 15 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
Reserved (Must be 0) Sat. Fri. Thu. Wed. Tue. Mon. Sun.
Bit 00: Sunday (0: None, 1: Designate)

Bit 01: Monday (0: None, 1: Designate)
Bit 02: Tuesday (0: None, 1: Designate)
Bit 03: Wednesday (0: None, 1: Designate)
Bit 04: Thursday (0: None, 1: Designate)
Bit 05: Friday (0: None, 1: Designate)
Bit 06: Saturday (0: None, 1: Designate)
If the schedule is configured for the Special Day, the high byte of word 3 (Start Day) should contain the month (1-12) of the
Special Day and the low byte of word 3 should contain the day (1-31) of the Special Day. The content of word 7 (End Day)
should be 0.
High byte (Bit 15-8) Low byte (Bit 7-0)

Start Day Month of the Special Day (1-12) Day of the Special Day (1-31)
End Day: 0

4
15
15.3. Setting up Schedule Setting Table

You can display a list of schedules by using the schedule setting table. And the operators are allowed to change the time
range of a schedule with the Schedule Setting Table at runtime.
The above is an example of the schedule setting table. The first row is the title row. It displays the title of each column.
The other rows display one schedule per row. You can create scroll button groups or scroll bars to scroll the contents. A
schedule setting table can have seven columns. The following table describes the content of each column for a schedule
setting table.
Column Description
Schedule No. The number of the associated schedule. This column is optional.
Schedule Name The name of the associated schedule.
Status The current status of the associated schedule. The status includes: Active, Inactive, Prohibited,
Error.
Set If the associated schedule is changeable, there is a button shown in the column. Click the button,
you will see the following sample Set Schedule dialog that allows the operator to change the time
range of the associated schedule.
To set the dialog, please see Section 15.2.2 for details.

Start Time The start time of the schedule.
End Time The end time of the schedule.
Applied Days The day or days in a week that the schedule will apply.
The text color and font of a row are determined by the settings in the General Page.

15
The following operation option can be added to a schedule setting table. Select and set the option in the Schedule Setting
Table dialog box.
Options Description
Visibility You can show and hide a schedule setting table with a specified bit or the current user level. Select
Control and set this option in the Visibility page.
15.3.3. Settings
You can complete all the settings of a schedule setting table in the Schedule Setting Table dialog box. This dialog box
contains the following three pages.
■ General
■ Advanced
■ Visibility

This section describes how to define the general settings for a schedule setting table. The following is an example of the
General page of the Schedule Setting Table dialog box.

4
15
unique within the screen where the object is located and is unchangeable. The
format of the IDs for the schedule setting table is SSTnnnn.
Shape settings For details about the following properties, see Section 4.3.4 Setting up the Shape
of an Object..

Title Language Select a language so you can view and edit the language dependent settings in
the Title group for that language. The language dependent properties in the Title
group include Font and Title Name.
BG Color Select a color for the title row.
Show Schedule ID Check this option if you want the schedule setting table to have the ID column.
Schedule No. Specifies the title for the Schedule No. column. This field is available when Show
Schedule ID is selected
Schedule Name/ Specifies the title for the Schedule Name/ Status/Set/ Start Time/ End Time/
Status/Set/ Start Applied Days column.
Time/ End Time/
Applied Days
Text Language Select a language so you can view and edit the language dependent settings in
the Text group for that language. The language dependent properties in the Text
group include Font and Abbreviation.
Data Format Select a format for displaying the date.
Abbreviation Specifies the abbreviation text for the Sunday/ Monday/Tuesday/ Wednesday/
Thursday/ Friday/Saturday.
Status Active Select a color that will be shown in Status column when the schedule starts.
Color Inactive Select a color that will be shown in Status column when the schedule ends.
Prohibited Select a color that will be shown in Status column when the schedule is
prohibited.
Error Select a color that will be shown in Status column when the schedule has an
error.
Grid Horizontal Select this option if you want the schedule setting table to have horizontal grids.
Vertical Select this option if you want the schedule setting table to have vertical grids.
Line Spacing Specifies the extra space in pixels for two adjacent rows of the schedule setting
table.
Item Spacing Specifies the extra space for every column of the schedule setting table.
Show <Check Box> All the schedules will be listed. Check the schedule No. if you want the schedule
Schedule setting table to show the associated schedule.
Select All Click the button to select all schedules.
Clear All Click the button to clear all the selections.

CHAPTER 16
INCREASE EFFICIENCY
16.1. Finding and Replacing ................................................................................. 1

16.1.1. Finding/Replacing Texts or Addresses .......................................................................... 1
16.1.2. Find Result Window ...................................................................................................... 2
16.1.3. Quick Find and Replace in Macro Editor Window ....................................................... 3
16.2. Screen Overview ........................................................................................... 4
16.3. Link Overview .............................................................................................. 7
16.4. Object Library ............................................................................................ 10
16.5. Object List................................................................................................... 12
16.6. I/O List......................................................................................................... 13
-i-
4
16
16.1. Finding and Replacing
You can use the Find/Replace tool to find and replace texts or addresses used in the project.
16.1.1. Finding/Replacing Texts or Addresses

This section describes how to find or replace texts or addresses using the Find/Replace dockable window or the
Find/Replace dialog box.
The following is an example of the Find/Replace The following is an example of the Find/Replace dialog box for
dockable window for finding Text/Address. replacing Text/Address.
To open the window, use the Find… command on To open the dialog box, use Replace… command on the Edit >
the Edit > Find and Replace menu. Find and Replace menu.
The following table describes each property in the Find/Replace dockable window/dialog box.
Find what <Combo Box> Type the text /address you want to search for, paste it from the clipboard or click a
recent entry from the list.
Match case Check this option to search only for occurrences that match the combination of
uppercase and lowercase characters you enter in the Find what box.
Match whole Check this option to search only for whole words instead of matching the text
word entered in the Find what box as it occurs within words.
Look in <Combo Box> Select one of the following portions of the project you want to search in.
Current screen, Current panel application’s screens, All screens, Current Macro,
Current panel application’s macro, All macros, Current panel application’s tags,
Tags of all panel applications.
Text/Address Click any of the listed options to specify the type of text/address to search for.
In dockable Find Click the button to find the specified text or address with selected options. The
window matches for the search appear in the Find Result window. Please see Section
16.1.2. for details about the Find Result window.
Replace… Click the button to bring up the Find/Replace dialog box to do the replacing
operation.
Continued
16-1 CHAPTER 16 MORE EFFICIENTLY

16
In dialog Replace with Type the text you want to replace the find text with, paste it from the clipboard or
box click a recent entry from the list.
Find Next Click the button to find the next occurrence of the text/address specified in the Find
what box with selected options until there are no more occurrences. The matches
for the search appear in the Find Result window. Please see Section 16.1.2. for
details about the Find Result window.
Replace Click this button to search for text that matches the find text, then replace it with the
text in the Replace with field. The replacement information appears in the Find
Result window. Please see Section 16.1.2. for details about the Find Result window.
Replace All Replaces all occurrences of the find text with the text in the Replace with field. The
replacement information appears in the Find Result window. Please see Section
16.1.2. for details about the Find Result window.
Close Click the button to close the dialog box.
16.1.2. Find Result Window

The Find Result window is a dockable window. It lists all the search matches and replacement information. The following is
an example of the Find Result window. You can browse the search matches or replacements by double-clicking each entry
in the Fine Result Window.
Double click the selected entry to focus and

view the associated object.
You can right-click the Find Result window to get the pop-up menu with the following menu items:

Clear Clears all the entries in the window.
CHAPTER 16 MORE EFFICIENTLY 16-2

4
16
16.1.3. Quick Find and Replace in Macro Editor Window
Quick find and replace allows you to search the text in a currently active macro editor window. The selection moves from
match to match, allowing you to review each match within its context.
In the currently active macro editor window, quick find and replace can search or replace through a macro forward from the
insertion point. The search or replace automatically continues past the end of the macro into the unsearched portion. A
message appears when the entire macro has been searched or replaced.
Note: The matches found are not listed in the Find Results window
To display the Replace dialog box, use the Replace… command on the Edit > Find and Replace menu. The following is an
example of the Replace dialog.
The following table describes each property in the Replace dialog box.
Find what Type the text you want to search for or paste it from the clipboard.
Replace with Type the text you want to replace the found text with or paste it from the clipboard.
Match whole Check this option to search only for whole words rather than matching the text you enter in the Find
word only what box as it occurs within words.
Match case Check this option to search only for occurrences that match the combination of uppercase and
lowercase characters you enter in the Find what box.
Replace in Select one of the following portions for the project you want to search in
Option Description
Selection Searches or replaces only the selected text in the currently active document.
Whole file Searches or replaces all content displayed in this window for the Find what string.
Find Next Click the button to find the next occurrence of the text specified in the Find what box with the
selected options until there are no more occurrences. The matches for the search will be
highlighted in the window.
Replace Click this button to search for text that matches the found text, and then replace it with the text in
the Replace with field.
Replace All Replaces all occurrences of the found text with the text in the Replace with field.
Cancel Click the button to close the dialog box.

16
16.2. Screen Overview
Screen Overview shows the relations between screens of the current application. The relationship between screens is
depicted by a line with an arrow head which is called the link. A link is a relationship between screens with the screen
button or page selector.
To open the Screen Overview, check the Screen Overview menu item in the View menu. The following is an example of the
Screen Overview.
The name of the current panel The name of the currently selected The number of the currently
application. You can select another screen. You can select another selected screen. You can select
panel application of the project to screen to highlight the relations of another screen to highlight the
view. the selected screen. relations of the selected screen.
Click the thumbnail of a screen to

select that screen and its links.
Click the line between

the screens to select
that link.
Size of the selected screen; (width x height)
Coordinates of the selected screen; (x, y)
Coordinate of the cursor; (x, y) Type of the selected item. Could be a Screen/Link
With the selected screen and links, you may do the following:
z Open the screen or screen properties
Double-click the selected screen to open it if it is not already opened.
Double-click the selected screen to open its property sheet if it is not already opened.
z Move the selected screen and its links

Left-click anywhere inside the selected screen and hold down the button. When the cursor changes to , drag the
mouse to move the selection to another area of the screen overview window. It will "float" over the rest of the window,
allowing you to position it wherever you want it to be. Release the mouse button to "let go" of the selection.

4
16
The following table describes each icon in the Screen Overview window.
Reload the current content of the screens. Available only when the relations between screens
Refresh
are changed.
New Screen Create a new screen for the current panel application.
Add Screen Add a new screen button for the selected screen and set up the properties of the screen
Button Link button in the pop-up properties dialog. Available only when a screen is selected.
Add Page Add a new pages selector for the selected screen and set up the properties of the page
Selector Link selector in the pop-up properties dialog. Available only when a screen is selected.
Zoom In Make the screen overview one step bigger.
Zoom Out Make the screen overview one step smaller.
Normal Size Restore the screen overview to normal size.
Show all the contents of the screens. For example:
Show Content
Show screen name and screen number in a rectangle to indicate a

Show screen. For example:
Name/Number
Print the application information, screen index and screen overview. The application
Print information includes Panel Name, Model, Start Screen, Total Screens, Application Name.
Screen Index is used to list all the screens and the page where the screen is located.
Preview the screen overview before printing. The following is examples of the Print Preview
Window.
Print Preview
Choose from the following commands to customize your page preview.
Click the button To do this
Print… Set printing options and print the page.
Next Page Display the next page to be printed.
Prev Page Display the previous page to be printed.
One Page Display only one full page in the screen.
Zoom In Increase the magnification.
Zoom Out Decrease the magnification.
Close Close the Print Preview window.

16
You can right-click the blank space in the Screen Overview to get the pop-up menu with the following menu items:

New Screen… Create a new screen for the current panel application and display the screen
overview.
Select All Select all the screens and links.
You can right-click the selected screen to get the pop-up menu with the following menu items:

Add Screen Link… Add a new screen button for the selected screen and set up the properties of the
screen button in the pop-up properties dialog.
Open Screen… Open the selected screen.
Delete Screen Delete the selected screen.
Screen Properties… Open the screen property dialog box of the selected screen.
You can right-click the selected link to get the pop-up menu with the following menu items:

Delete Screen Link Delete the selected link.
Delete Screen Link and Button Delete the selected link and its associated button.
Screen Link Properties Set the screen link properties in the following pop-up dialog.
Click the button to bring up the

property sheet of the screen button or
page selector for the screen link.

4
16
16.3. Link Overview
Link Overview shows the relations between devices/servers and panels of the entire project. The Link Overview is a block
and line diagram. The block indicates a target panel or the device/server. The line indicates the link. The line with an arrow
header indicates the link relationship.
There are two types of blocks in the link overview window: Target Panel Block and Device/Server Block.
The Target Panel Block includes application Name and supported link ports, such as C stands for COM port (C1 = COM1),
E stands for Ethernet port. The Device/Server Block includes the device type.
To open the Link Overview, check the Link Overview menu item in the View menu. The following is an example of the Link
Overview.
Device/Server Block
Point
Target Panel Block
Connection Line that

indicates a Link
Coordinates of the cursor; (x, y)
Type of the selected item. Could be Panel/Link/PLC Coordinates of the selected block; (x, y)
You can position the mouse over a target panel block, a device/server block, or a link to select the related item. With the
selected item, you may do the following:
■ Open the properties dialog to set up item properties
Double-click the target panel block to open the General Setup dialog box to set up the panel application.
Double-click the link to open the Link Properties dialog box to set up the link.
Double-click the device/server block to open the Link Properties property sheet to select the device for the link.
■ Move the selected block

Left-click anywhere inside the selected block and hold down the button. When the cursor changes to , drag the mouse

16
to move the selection to another area of the link overview window. It will "float" over the rest of the window, allowing you to
position it wherever you want it to be. Release the mouse button to "let go" of the selection.
■ Shape the connection line

Position the mouse pointer over one of the points on the selected connection line, drag the point until the connection line is
■ Create a link
1. Position the mouse pointer over the point of the communication port. For example:
Position the mouse over the point of C2 to start

creating a link for COM2 of the panel named
HMI_104_2
2. Drag the mouse to move the point to the communication port of another panel or device/server. For example:
Drag the point to C3 (COM3) of another panel

named HMI_104_1. When the mouse is positioned
to HMI_104_1, there are rectangles around its
communication ports. The dragged point must be
inside the rectangle when creating a link for that port.
3. Release the mouse button to bring up the Link Properties dialog box to set up the new link.
4. Press the OK button to accept the settings or press the Cancel button to cancel the operations. The following is
an example of the new links between two panels.
RS485

4
16
The following table describes each icon in the Link Overview window.

Add Panel Add a new panel application, set up the panel type and application name in the pop-up
Application property sheet.
Add a new link for the selected panel and set up the link properties in the pop-up property
Add Link
sheet. Only available when the target panel is the current selection.
Add
Add a new Device/Server.
Device/Server
Refresh Reload the current relations between panels and the device/server of the project.
Show Display lines with an arrow head to show the relationship between panels and the
Relationship device/server.
You can right-click the target panel block in the Link Overview to get the pop-up menu with the following menu items:

Add Link Create a new communication link.
Delete Panel Application Delete the panel application.
Panel Application Properties Open the General Setup dialog box.
You can right-click the link in the Link Overview to get the pop-up menu with the following menu items:

Delete Link Delete the associated communication link.
Link Properties Open the Link Properties dialog box of the associated communication
link.
You can right-click the blank place in the Link Overview to get the pop-up menu with the following menu items:

Add Device/Server Create a new Device/Server
Add Panel Application Create a new panel application.
Refresh Reload the current relations between panels and device/server of the
project.
You can right-click the Device/Server block in the Link Overview to get the pop-up menu with the following menu items:

Remove Device/Server Delete the selected Device/Server.
Device/Server Properties Open the Link Properties dialog box

16
16.4. Object Library
The Object Library Window is a dockable window. It makes configuring, managing and sharing user-defined objects easier.
It contains default objects, common objects, object groups and global objects.
■ Default Objects
Each type of screen objects can have one default object and the default objects are saved in the object library. The
settings of a default object will be used as the initial settings for a newly created object of the same type. To view all the
default objects for the project, you can click the window tab named Objects.
You are allowed to specify any object as the default object for the type of that object. The old default object of the same
type is discarded when you specify a new default object. To make an object as a default object, right-click the object to get
the pop-up menu and click the Save as Default command in the pop-up menu.
■ Common Objects/Object Groups

The common object/object group can be used in the whole project. To view the common objects/object groups, you can
click the window tab with a user defined name.
To make an object as a common object/object group, right-click the object/object group to get the pop-up menu and click
the Save to Object Library… command to bring up the Save to Object Library dialog. In the dialog, you may type a name
and select a user defined category for the common object/object group.
■ Global Objects
Global objects can be used in the entire project. Any modification of a global object will be applied everywhere it is used in
the project. To view all the global objects for the project, you can click the window tab named Global.
To make an object as a global object, right-click the object to get the pop-up menu and click the Save as Global Object…
command to bring up the Save to Object Library dialog. In the dialog, you may type a name and select a user defined
category for the global object.
To open the Object Library, check the Object Library menu item in the View menu. The following is an example of the
Object Library Overview.
Click the Global category to
view all the global objects.
Click the user defined category named

Click the Objects category to Object Group to view the common
view all the default objects. objects and object groups.
Click the icon of an object to select Position the mouse pointer over the object icon.
the object. The selected object is Left-click and hold down the button to move the
highlighted. Use [Ctrl] + click or object onto the screen to create the associated
[Shift] + click to make multiple object.
selections.

4
16
You can right-click the tab on the top of Object Library to get the pop-up menu with the following menu items:

Add Category… Create a new category for common objects
and object groups. The left dialog is an
example of the Add Category dialog for you
to specify the category name and icon size
for displaying the object of the new
category.
Delete Category… Delete the selected category.

Category Properties… Click the command to bring up the left
sample dialog to set up category properties.
You can rename the category in the dialog
and define the icon size for the object to be
displayed.
Import Library… Import an existing category from an object library file (*.pol)
Export Library… Export a selected category of the object library to an object library file (*.pol)
Clean Unused Data in Click the command to clean all the unused objects in the selected category.
Library
You can right-click the selected object in the Global category window or the user defined category window to get the
pop-up menu with the following menu items:

Rename Object… Click the command to bring up the Rename dialog to rename the selected object.
Delete Selected Objects… Delete the selected object.
Object Properties… Click the command to bring up the object properties dialog. Only available in the Global
category.

16
16.5. Object List
The Object List window is a dockable window. It shows the screen objects and the associated I/O addresses.
You can modify the object properties in the Object Property dialog box by double-clicking each entry in the Object List
window.
You can right-click anywhere inside the Object List window to get the pop-up menu. In the pop-up menu, check any of the
menu items such as ID, Write, Monitor, Read, Notification, TCtrl, VCtrl, and Note to display that column. Use the Select All
command in the pop-up menu to display all the columns.
To open the Object List, check the Object List menu item in the View menu. The following is an example of the Object List.
The name of the screen. You can select another screen of the
panel application to view its object list.
Double click the selected entry to bring up the property

dialog of the associated object.

4
16
16.6. I/O List
The I/O list window is a dockable window. It shows all the I/O addresses of the project and their owners.
You can modify the address by double-clicking each entry in the I/O list window.
If the address is used by an object, you can redefine the address in the pop-up property dialog of the associated object.
If the address is used by a Macro, you can change the address in the macro editor window.
You can also click the Address column of the selected entry to type in the address directly.
To open the I/O List, check the I/O List menu item in the View menu. The following is an example of the I/O List.
The name of the current panel application. You

can select another panel application of the
project to view.
Double click the selected entry to bring up the property

dialog of the associated object.
Click the address column of the selected

entry to type in a new address.

CHAPTER 17
COMPILING/SIMULATING/DOWNLOADING
A PANEL APPLICATION
17.1. Compiling an Application ............................................................................ 1

17.1.1. Compiling an Application.............................................................................................. 1
17.1.2. Building a Panel Runtime Package................................................................................ 1
17.1.3. Build a List Window...................................................................................................... 2
17.2. Simulating an Application ........................................................................... 3
17.2.1. On-line/Off-line Simulation........................................................................................... 3
17.2.2. Simulating an Application ............................................................................................. 4
17.3. Transferring Data Between PC and Panel ................................................. 5
17.3.1. Downloading Data to Panel ........................................................................................... 5
17.3.2. Uploading Data from Panel ........................................................................................... 7
17.3.3. Installing a USB Driver to Transfer Data Using a USB Cable...................................... 8
-i-
4
17
17.1. Compiling an Application
Using the compiler offered by the software, you can verify the correctness of all the settings and designs, optimize the
communication with the connected controllers, interpret macros into compact and ready-to-execute codes, and build the
panel runtime data to be executed by the HMI engine of the target panel. The panel runtime data will be generated and
saved into a PL2 file after the user compiles an application.
17.1.1. Compiling an Application

To compile an application, you can do the following:
1) In the menu bar, click Panel to bring up the Panel sub-menu. Click Compile… in the Panel sub-menu.
Alternatively, click the Compile icon in the main toolbar.
2) The Compile Panel Application dialog will pop-up and

show the progress of the compiling process. If you want
to cancel the compiling operation, click the Cancel
button.
On the right is an example of the Compile Panel
Application dialog in the process of compiling.
3) After the compilation is complete, the Compile Panel

Application dialog will display the error count, warning
count, and total file size of the panel runtime data. All
the details will be listed in the Build List Window. To
know about the Built List Window, please see Section
17.1.3 Built List Window.
On the right is an example of the Compile Panel
Application dialog when the compilation is complete.
If the compilation is completed successfully, the runtime data of the current panel application will be saved into a file
named Project Name_Application Name.pl2.
17.1.2. Building a Panel Runtime Package

A Panel Runtime Package includes the panel runtime data and system programs. To build a panel runtime package, you
can do the following:
1) In the menu bar, click Panel to bring up the Panel sub-menu. Click Build Panel Runtime Package (PRP)…in the Panel
sub-menu.
2) If the compilation is completed successfully, you will be asked to specify the file name in the Save As… dialog to save
the package into a PRP file.
Note: The PRP file that includes the application and the system programs is portable. You can save the PRP file anywhere
on the PC or a USB disk and download it to the target panel with the software or Data Transfer Helper (DTH).
17-1 CHAPTER 17 COMPILING/SIMULATING/DOWNLOADING A PANEL APPLICATION

17
17.1.3. Build a List Window
All the detailed information about the compiling process, error messages, and warning messages are listed in the Build List
window. The Build List Window is a dockable window. In the window, error messages will have a red circle in front of the
entry, and warning messages will have a yellow circle in front of the entry.
The following is an example of the Build List window:
Double click the selected message to jump to

the associated item where the selected
problem occurs.
You can right-click the Build List window to get the pop-up menu with the following menu items:

Clear Clears all the entries in the window.
CHAPTER 17 COMPILING/SIMULATING/DOWNLOADING A PANEL APPLICATION 17-2

4
17
17.2. Simulating an Application
Simulator is a convenient tool for design verification. With the simulator, you don’t need to download the application to the
target panel. On a PC, you can simulate how the application runs on the target panel.
There are two types of simulation offered by the software: On-line Simulation and Off-line Simulation.
17.2.1. On-line/Off-line Simulation

Type Description
Off-line simulation
Simulator
Application
In the off-line simulation mode, the PC will create a memory block for all registers of
the device/server used in the application. The simulator will communicate with the
memory on the PC, so there will never be a communication error generated with the
off-line simulator.
Off-line simulation is good for screen visual effects, object operation, and logic
verification.
On-line simulation
The on-line simulator is similar to the off-line simulator except that the PC tries to
communicate with the device/server instead of the created virtual registers in its
memory.
On-line simulator is used to troubleshoot communication problems.

17
17.2.2. Simulating an Application
To simulate an application, you can do the following:
1) The application must be saved and compiled before the simulator can start.
2) Using the software:
In the menu bar, click Tools to bring up the Tools sub-menu. Click Run Off-line Simulation…in the Panel sub-menu.
Alternatively, click the Run Off-line Simulation icon in the main toolbar.
Using PanelSim.exe, an independent executable program:

Click Start->All Programs->”The software” ->PanelSim
3) In the PanelSim startup dialog, click Run button to start simulation
Click the tab to view all the settings of the

associated link.
Click the Open… button to reload a

new application runtime data saved
in a PL2 file.
Click the Exit button to exit

simulation.
Select Off-line to do off-line simulations

or On-line to do on-line simulations.
Note: When simulating an application in the software, the above dialog will show up and then close automatically
before the simulation starts. In this case, ignore the dialog.
4) Simulate the application in the simulator window. The simulator window is similar in appearance to the target panel.
The following is an example of the simulator window while running the application.
Minimize the window to an icon in the taskbar.

Close the window
Left-click anywhere outside the screen and hold

down the button. Drag the mouse to move the
window to the position you want.

4
17
17.3. Transferring Data Between PC and Panel
In the software, you can transfer the panel runtime data using any of the Serial port, Ethernet port or USB client port
whenever the target panel is running.
You can also use a Micro SD card or USB memory stick for the trouble-free update of the application.
17.3.1. Downloading Data to Panel

To download data by using the software, you may do the followings:
1) In the menu bar, click Panel to bring up the Panel sub-menu. Click Download…in the Panel sub-menu.
Alternatively, click the Download icon on the standard toolbar.

2) In the Download Data to Panel dialog, select the options and settings before downloading.
The following is an example of the Download Data to Panel dialog.
Note: If the application is modified, the software will automatically compile the application before downloading.

17
The following table describes each property in the Download Data to Panel dialog.
Data Source Select the data you want to download. The current panel application is the data generated by the
compiler. The panel runtime data package includes the current panel application data and system
programs saved in a PRP file. You need to select a PRP file to download if the Panel Runtime Data
Package (PRP) File option is selected.
Download Check Runtime Data and System Programs, Configuration Data, Time and Date if you want to
download them. Available only when the data source is the current panel application.
You can select the configuration data to backup the panel application to the target panel. The data
format is the same as the Panel Application Files(PLF)
Keep Check the previous data of User Data ($N), Alarm History, Recipe Data or Sampled Data if you want
Previous Data the selected data to be kept instead of being cleared after downloading.
The selected data will be kept only if:
1) The previous application was compiled and downloaded by the software V1.2.26 or later.
2) The configurations of battery backed user memory, recipe blocks, data loggers, alarm blocks, and
the alarm logging buffer for both the old and new applications are exactly the same.
Link Settings Select the communication port that is used to download the data.
Communication Port Description
COM Use the serial port to perform the download and select the
communication port and the baud rate used.
Ethernet Use the Ethernet to perform the download. Type the IP Address where
the target panel is located, or choose a recently connected entry from
the list.
USB Use the USB to perform the download. You need to install the USB
driver before transferring data with the USB cable. To know how to
install a USB driver, please see Section 17.3.3
If the target panel has sufficient memory, you can perform data transmission in safe mode.
Mode Description
Direct Mode Download data directly to flash memory.
Safe Mode Buffer the data in the RAM of the target panel to prevent download
problems in large files. The transmission has to be done successfully
before the data in the SDRAM will be saved to the flash memory.
Status Display the transmission status and progress.
Start Click the button to start download the data.
Cancel Cancel the download operation.
Close Exit the dialog.
Note: On the standard toolbar, you can click the Download Immediately icon to immediately download data using
the existing settings of the Download Data to Panel dialog to the target panel.

4
17
17.3.2. Uploading Data from Panel
To upload data using the software, you may do the following:
1) In the menu bar, click Panel to bring up the Panel sub-menu, then click Upload… in the Panel sub-menu.
2) In the Upload Data from Panel dialog, select the options and settings before uploading
The following is an example of the Upload Data from Panel dialog.
Note: If the application is modified, the software will automatically compile the application before downloading.
The following table describes each property in the Upload Data from Panel dialog.
Upload Select the data you want to upload and save the uploaded data to the specified file. You can import
existing panel applications from the configuration data file (PLF file).
Link Settings Select the communication port that is used to upload the data.
COM Use the serial port to perform the upload and select the communication
port and the baud rate used.
Ethernet Use the Ethernet to perform the upload. Type the IP Address where the
target panel is located, or choose a recently connected entry from the
list.
USB Use the USB to perform the upload. You need to install the USB driver
before transferring data with the USB cable. To know how to install a
USB driver, please see Section 17.3.3

17
Start Click the button to start uploading the data.
Cancel Cancel the upload operation.
Close Exit the dialog.
17.3.3. Installing a USB Driver to Transfer Data Using a USB Cable
This section describes how to install a USB driver for downloading an application to the target panel on a Microsoft
Windows based computer.
Step 1: Log on to your computer as an administrator.
Step 2: Connect the computer and the target panel through a USB cable
Step 3: Start installing the driver
You can use one of the following methods as appropriate to begin installing the driver:
■ With the Found New Hardware Wizard
Power on the target panel, “Found New Hardware Wizard” will automatically pop-up in Windows to guide you to
install the driver.
■ With the Upgrade Device Driver Wizard

If the “Found New Hardware Wizard” does not appear or if it is turned off, you can do the followign to bring out the
Upgrade Device Driver wizard:
1. On the desktop, right-click My Computer, and then click Manage.

2. Under System Tools, click Device Manager.
The devices that are installed on the computer are listed in the right pane.
3. Expand the Other devices category
4. Right-click the device named Neo HMI for which you want to install the driver, and then click Properties.

4
17
5. Click the Driver tab, and then click Update Driver. The Upgrade Device Driver wizard starts.
Step 4: Install the driver by following the wizard instructions

1. Click Next.

17
2. Click Install from a list or specific location (Advanced), and then click Next.
3. Click Search for the best driver in these locations, and then select Include this location in the search,
click Browse, select \Usb in the software’s installation folder as the folder that contains drivers, and then
click Next.
4. Click Continue Anyway if the Hardware Installation dialog box shown as below appears.

4
17
Step 5: Click Finish to complete installing the driver for Neo HMI
Note: The first time you connect a target panel that plugs into any of the USB ports on the computer, you need to install a
driver for that device.
After installing the driver, you can use the USB to transfer data between the PC and the target panel which supports USB
transferring. In the software, you need to select USB as the link settings in the Download Data to Panel/Upload Data from
Panel dialog box before transferring.

CHAPTER 18
USING TOOLS
18.1. Setting/Starting/Ending Transparent Communication............................. 1

18.1.1. Setting Transparent Communication ............................................................................. 1
18.1.2. Starting/Ending Transparent Communication ............................................................... 2
18.2. Data Transfer Helper (DTH) ....................................................................... 3
18.2.1. Operation Settings ......................................................................................................... 4
18.2.2. Operation Status............................................................................................................. 8
18.2.3. Time Range.................................................................................................................... 9
18.3. TextEditor.................................................................................................... 10
18.3.1. Exporting Text ............................................................................................................. 10
18.3.2. Importing Text ............................................................................................................. 11
18.3.3. TextEditor .................................................................................................................... 12
18.4. Recipe Editor .............................................................................................. 13
-i-
4
18
18.1. Setting/Starting/Ending Transparent Communication
Transparent communication is a serial port communication method used to link a PC and a device/server for control and
data acquisition through a target panel, as shown below. The target panel in the link is just like a transparent device that
makes the communication work as if a PC is connected to the device/server directly.
PC Target Panel Device/Server
18.1.1. Setting Transparent Communication

To make the target panel transparent and acquire or control the device data on the PC, you need to set Transparent
Communication.
To set Transparent Communication, click Tools to bring up the Tools sub-menu in the menu bar. Then, click Set
Transparent Communication…in the Tools sub-menu.
The following is an example of a link illustration and Set Transparent Communication dialog.
Panel’s Transparent Port

(COM1)
PC Port
(COM1)
Select a COM port of the
target panel that is used to
connect to the Device/Server
PC (9600/7/1/EVEN)
Panel’s Target Port

(COM2)
Note that the communication

parameters setting in the dialog
must be identical to the
communication parameters of
FATEK FBs/FBe the Device/Server.
(9600/7/1/EVEN)
18-1 CHAPTER 18 USING TOOLS

18
If the target panel has an application with the link settings that are exactly the same as the real connection between the
target panel and a Device/Server, the user only needs to press button to get all the
communication parameters from the panel before starting the transparent communication.
The following is an example of the link settings between the target panel and a Device/Server
Note: The communication parameters setting in the Link Properties dialog must be identical to the communication
parameters of the Device/Server.
If the target panel has no application or if the link settings are not the same as the actual connection, the user needs to
redefine the communication parameter in the dialog before starting the transparent communication.
18.1.2. Starting/Ending Transparent Communication

■ Start Transparent Communication
To start transparent communication, you can do one of the following:
1) Click the button in the Set Transparent Communication dialog

2) Click Tools to bring up the Tools sub-menu from the menu bar. Then, click Start Transparent Communication in the
Tools sub-menu.
If communication is successfully established, the target panel will display the following dialog, and then you can control and
acquire the device data with the PC.
■ End Transparent Communication

To end transparent communication, you can do one of the following:
1) Click the button in the Set Transparent Communication dialog in the software.
2) Click Tools to bring up the Tools sub-menu in the menu bar. Then, click End Transparent Communication in the Tools
sub-menu.
3) Click the End button on the dialog that is shown on the target panel
CHAPTER 18 USING TOOLS 18-2

4
18
18.2. Data Transfer Helper (DTH)
Data Transfer Helper (DTH) is an independent executable program. It helps you retrieve/update application data through a
serial port or Ethernet port
To run the DTH, choose Start > All Programs > “The software” > Data Transfer Helper (DTH).
You can use DTH to download recipe data or OS & AP in a specified file from the PC to the HMI. With DTH, you can also
get logged data, logged operations, alarm counts, logged alarms, recipe data, OS & AP from the HMI, and save the data in
a specified file on the PC. The following dialog is an example of the Data Transfer Helper:

18
The following table describes each property in the Download Data to Panel dialog.
Operation Select an operation you want to perform with the target panel
Type
Link Settings Select the communication port that is used to connect to the target panel.
Serial Port (COM) Use the serial port to perform the operation and select a communication
port and the baud rate used.
Ethernet Use the Ethernet to perform the operation. Type the IP Address where
the target panel is located, or choose a recently connected entry from
the list.
Password Enter a valid password of user level 8 or higher

Abort Stop the communication
Next Click the button to start the operation and do the settings for the selected operation if communication
is established successfully.
Finish Exit the dialog.
Cancel Cancel the operation.
18.2.1. Operation Settings

The following table lists all the operation types supported by DTH and shows how to make the settings for each type.
Operation Type Settings

Get logged data (.csv/.txt) Saves the data collected by the selected data logger in a specified file.
The above dialog lists all the data loggers in the application. You may do the
following in the dialog:
z Check the data logger you want to get the data from.
z Click button in Time Range to bring up the Time Range dialog to specify
the duration of the collected data. For more about the Time Range dialog,
please see Section 18.2.3.
z Type in a file name or click button of Save To (File Name) to bring up
the Open File dialog to specify the file name.

4
18
Continued

18
Get logged operations(.csv/.txt) Saves the operation history in a text file or a csv file.
You need to do the following in the dialog:

z Click button to bring up the Time Range dialog to specify the duration
of the operation history data. For more about the Time Range dialog, please
see Section 18.2.3.
z Type in a file name or click button to bring up the Open File dialog
to specify the file name.
Get alarm counts(.csv/.txt) Saves the alarm counts in a text file or a csv file.
Type in a file name or click button to bring up the Open File dialog to
specify the file name in CSV or TXT format
Get logged alarms(.csv/.txt) Saves the alarm history in a text file or a csv file.
You may do the following in the dialog:

z Click button of Time Range to bring up the Time Range dialog to
specify the duration of the alarm history data. For more about the Time
Range dialog, please see Section 18.2.3.
z Type in a file name or click button to bring up the Open File dialog
to specify the file name.
Continued

4
18
Get recipe data(.csv/.txt/.prd) Saves the data of the specified recipe block in a file using the CSV/TXT/PRD
format.
The above dialog lists all the recipe blocks in the application. You may do the
z Check the recipe block you want to get the data from.
Update recipe data(.csv/.txt/.prd) Updates the data of the selected recipe block from a CSV or TXT or PRP file.
The above dialog lists all the recipe blocks in the application. You may do the
z Check the recipe block you want to update the data of.
Get OS & AP (.prp) You need to enter a valid developer password to get and save the system
programs and application runtime data in a specified PRP file..
Update OS & AP(.prp) Updates the system programs and the application runtime data from a specified
PRP file. The original system programs and the application runtime data are
replaced by the new ones.

18
18.2.2. Operation Status
All the operation history and status will be shown in the Operation Status dialog. The following is an example of the
Operation Status dialog.
Click the button to clear all the

contents in the Edit box.

4
18
18.2.3. Time Range
The Time Range dialog is used to set up the time duration of the collected data.
The following table describes each property in the Time Range dialog.
All Select this option to get all the data from the associated memory.
Last day(s) Select this option to get the data during the last number of days. If you want to include today, check
the Include today option.
Last hour(s) Select this option to get the data during the last number of hours. If you want to include the current
hour, check the Include current hour option.
Custom Select this option to customize the duration. You need to specify the start date and time and the end
date and time

18
18.3. TextEditor
18.3.1. Exporting Text

You can export texts from the current panel application to a panel text file (PTX). The PTX file can be opened and edited in
the TextEditor. For more about the TextEditor, please see details in Section 18.3.3.
To export texts of the panel application, click Tools to bring up the Tools sub-menu from the menu bar. And then click
Export Text…in the Tools sub-menu.
The following is an example of the Export Text dialog.
If the To be Exported box of a language is

checked, the texts of that language in the
panel application will be exported to the
file. If the Export box of a language is
unchecked, the texts of that language will
not be exported.
Check this option if you want to run the

TextEditor after the export operation is
completed. The exported file will be
opened for editing in the TextEditor
Note: If the application only uses a single language, the export text operation will be invalid.

4
18
18.3.2. Importing Text
You can import or export texts from a panel text file (PTX) to the selected panel application.
To import texts to the panel application, click Tools to bring up the Tools sub-menu in the menu bar. Then, click Import
Text…in the Tools sub-menu.
The following is an example of the Import Text dialog.
The following table describes each property in the Import Text dialog.
Panel Application Select a panel application where you want to save the imported texts.
To be Imported Check the languages of the text you want to be imported.
Open… Click the button to open the PTX file.
Note: The panel application must contain the same language name as the reference
language name specified in the imported PTX file. Otherwise, the file is not allowed to be
imported.
Close Close the dialog.
Import Criteria Select the Same Usage option to import texts to the destination with the same usage as the
source in the file.
Select the Same Reference Text option to import texts to the destination with the same
reference text.
Import Click the button to import all the selected texts.

18
18.3.3. TextEditor
TextEditor is an independent executable program. It is used to edit all the screen texts in multi-languages
To run TextEditor, choose Start > All Programs > “The software” > TextEditor. Alternatively, click Tools to bring up the
Tools sub-menu from the menu bar. Then, click TextEditor in the Tools sub-menu.
The following is an example of the TextEditor:
Left click anywhere in the item to

select that item for editing in the
bottom
The texts of the reference Left click the field to edit the selected
language are read only text in the specified language
The following table lists all the buttons on the toolbar.

Open the PTX file which saved all the screen texts in multi-language. You can
Open create the PTX file by using Export Text Tool provided by the software. Please
see details about Export Text in Section 18.3.1.
Save Save the current PTX file.
Cut Cut the selection and put it on the Clipboard.
Copy Copy the selection and put it on the Clipboard.
Paste Place the Clipboard contents on to the current screen.
Alt+Dn Move the selection down from the previous item

Alt+Up Move the selection up from the next item

4
18
18.4. Recipe Editor
Recipe Editor is an independent executable program. It can be used to view and edit recipe data saved as a PRD file on
the PC.
To run the Recipe Editor, choose Start > All Programs > “The software” > RecipeEditor.
You can display the recipe data row-wise or column wise.
The following is an example of RecipeEditor displayed row-wise. You can click the button on the toolbar or use the
Row-wise command in the View menu. Row-wise means that the recipe number is used to index the row.
To edit the recipe data, left click

the cell and key in the value you
want.
Note that any value unmatched with

the predefined format will cause
an error when using the recipe at
the runtime.
The following is an example of the RecipeEditor displayed column-wise. You can click the button on the toolbar or
use the Column-wise command in the View menu. Column-wise means that the recipe number is used to index the
column.

CHAPTER 19
SETTING UP TARGET
PANEL
19.1. System Screens.............................................................................................. 1

19.1.1. Numeric Keypad............................................................................................................ 1
19.1.2. Character Keypad .......................................................................................................... 2
19.1.3. Password Keypad........................................................................................................... 3
19.1.4. Password Table .............................................................................................................. 3
19.1.5. Select File ...................................................................................................................... 4
19.1.6. Rename .......................................................................................................................... 5
19.2. Panel Setup.................................................................................................... 6
19.2.1. Entering Panel Setup Mode ........................................................................................... 8
19.2.3. Calibrating the Touch Panel......................................................................................... 10
19.2.4. Time and Date Settings................................................................................................ 11
19.2.5. Link Settings (Serial Port) ........................................................................................... 12
19.2.6. Link Settings (Ethernet Port) ....................................................................................... 13
19.2.7. LAN Printer Address ................................................................................................... 14
19.2.8. FTP Site ....................................................................................................................... 15
19.3. Recovering System by System Loader ..................................................... 16
-i-
4
19
19.1. System Screens
System screens are screens that are built into an application and can be accessed by end-users in the target panel.
System screens are window screens. Each of them has a title bar at the top of the screen that displays a line of text. The
text indicates the purpose of the screen. You can press the title bar and hold it down to move the screen to the position you
want and then release the pressing to locate the screen.
The system screens include:

Built-in keypads that are used to input numbers, ASCII characters, or passwords.
The Select File Window and Rename window are used for file operations.
With built-in keypads, you don’t have to spend any time on programming them.
19.1.1. Numeric Keypad

The target panel displays the numeric keypad to let you enter a value when you press and release the Numeric Entry
object, Word Button object, and Recipe Table object. The following are examples of Numeric Keypads:
Decimal Numeric Keypad Hexadecimal Numeric Keypad Octal Numeric Keypad
X
Y
Z
The following table describes each item on the keypad screen.
Item Description
XTitle Bar Press and hold the title bar to move the window screen.
Y Keypad Display Display the current input value
Z Allowable input range display Display the allowable input range
Buttons © Press the button to increase the value by 1
— Press the button to decrease the value by 1
0-7 Press the number buttons of the Octal Numeric Keypad to enter a number from 0
to 7
0-9 Press the number buttons of the Decimal Numeric Keypad to enter a number
from 0 to 9
0-F Press the number buttons of the Hexadecimal Numeric Keypad to enter a number
from 0 to F
Esc Press it to close the screen and discard all changes.
Clr Press it to clear the input value.
Del Press it to delete the preceding character.
Ent Press it to close the screen and accept all changes.
19-1 CHAPTER 19 SETTING UP TARGET PANEL

19
19.1.2. Character Keypad
The target panel displays the ASCII Character keypad to let you enter an ASCII character when you press and release the
Character Entry object. The following is an example of the Character Keypad.
X
Y
Item Description
Y Keypad Display Display the current input string
Buttons ASCII Press the button to enter an ASCII character.
Characters
Clr Press it to clear the input value.
Del Press it to delete the preceding character.
Ent Press it to close the screen and accept all changes.
CHAPTER 19 SETTING UP TARGET PANEL 19-2

4
19
19.1.3. Password Keypad
The following is an example of the Password Keypad.
X The following table describes each item on the Password Keypad.

Y Item Description
X Title Bar Press the title bar and hold to move the window screen.
Y Password Display Display the current input password
Buttons 0-9 Press the number buttons to enter a number from 0 to 9. It
will display asterisks (*) instead of the number.
Clr Press it to clear the input password.
Ent Press it to close the screen and input the password.
19.1.4. Password Table
To register new passwords or modify existing passwords for your application, you have to create a function button on a
screen and assign the function “Show Password Table” to the button. When the panel is running the application, a level 8
user can get the password table as shown below when he presses and releases the function button that shows the
password table.
Note: The user can only get the passwords whose levels are lower than or equal to the user’s level for editing. For
example, if the current user lever is 5, the password table will only show the passwords for levels 1 to 5.
The following is an example of the Password Table when the current user lever is 8.
Press here and release to reverse the

color of the field and bring out the
decimal numeric keypad in order to
specify the password for level 5.
Item Description
Password Press the field to bring out the decimal numeric keypad to specify the password for the
corresponding user level. A password is a positive integer of up to 8 digits. A password
must be unique within the application.
OK Press it to close the dialog box and accepts all changes.
Cancel Press it to close the dialog box and discard all changes.

19
19.1.5. Select File
The Select File screen is only for the panels that support file operations. It allows the user to select a file from the system
for the following operations:
No. Operations No. Operations
1 Select a file to update the OS & AP 15 Read recipe data from TXT file
2 Select a file and run the OS & AP in it 16 Read recipe data from DAT file
3 Select a file to read data 17 Write OS and AP to file
4 Select a file to write data 18 Print screen to file (256 colors)
5 Select a file to append data 19 Print screen to file (64K colors)
6 Select a file to delete 20 Write logged data to .LDF file
7 Select a file to rename 21 Read logged data from .LDF file
8 Write recipe data to TXT file 22 Write line chart data to file
9 Write recipe data to DAT file 23 Read line chart data from file
10 Write logged data to file 24 Write scatter chart data to file
11 Write logged alarms to file 25 Read scatter chart data from file
12 Write alarm counts to file 26 Select a file to copy
13 Write logged operations to file 27 Read logged data file from file
14 Write panel data to file
The following is an example of the Select File screen.
Indicates the operation.

Press and hold the title bar to move the
window screen.
Displays the current disk.

“C:\” Indicates the flash disk.
“D:\” Indicates the micro SD card.
“E:\” Indicates the USB memory stick.
The list box lists all the existing files on

the specified disk. The current file is
highlighted. If the desired file is not in
view, you can use the scroll bar to scroll
to the file. You can select the desired file
by touching its name which will be
shown in the file name field below.
The file name field displays the name of the selected

file. You can press the field to bring out the ASCII
characters keypad to specify the file name. The The predefined file extension
color of the field will be reversed when editing. name for the operation.

4
19
19.1.6. Rename
The Rename screen is only for panels that support file operations. It allows the user to rename a file in the system.
The predefined file extension name.
Press the field to bring out the ASCII characters

keypad to specify the new file name. The color of the
field will be reversed when editing.

19
19.2. Panel Setup
After power is applied, the target panel displays the Panel Setup screen. The following is an example of a Panel Setup
screen:
Note: Some of the buttons on the Panel Setup screen appear only when they are needed.
Note: After powering up, the target panel will not display the Panel Setup screen if “Run AP After Power On” in General
Settings is True. If it is False, the target panel will run the application directly.
The following table describes the function of each button on the Panel Setup screen of the target panel.
Property Press the button to

English/中文(繁體)/中文(简体) Display the texts of the screen in the corresponding language.
General Set the contrast and brightness of the display. Please see Section 19.2.2 for details.
Touch Panel Calibrate the touch panel. Please see Section 19.2.3 for details.
Set Time/Date Set the date and time on the Real Time Clock Chip. Please see Section 19.2.4 for
details.
Continued

4
19
H/W Display the hardware information of the target panel. The following is an example of the hardware
Information information screen
Link 1 - Link 4 Set the parameters for communication between the target panel and PLC/Controllers. Please see
Section 19.2.5 or Section 19.2.6 for details.
LAN Printer Specify the IP address of the network printer. Please see Section 19.2.7 for details.
Address
Copy AP to Copy the application to another HMI.
HMI
Copy AP to Save the system programs and the application runtime data to a PRP file. The file can be used by
File the software and compatible target panels.
Copy File Copy the file.
Format Disk C Format the built-in flash disk (C:). This operation requires a user level of 8 or higher.
FTP Site Assign the user name and the permission of the file operations for the target panel as a FTP site.
Please see Section 19.2.8 for details.
Boot from File Load-and-run the system programs and the application runtime data from a PRP file. The original
system programs and runtime data are intact. The loaded system programs and the runtime data
will be lost after power off.
Update from Update the system programs and the application runtime data from a PRP file. The original system
File programs and the application runtime data are replaced by the new ones.
Clear Clear the data stored in the battery backed RAM, which include the operation history, alarm history,
Recorded alarm counts, and the data collected by data loggers. This operation requires a user level of 7 or
Data higher.
Run Start running the application. If login is required, the operator must enter a valid password of any
user level before the target panel displays the first screen. The user level of the password you enter
becomes the current user level. Any operation that requires a user level higher than the current
user level will not work while the application is running.

19
19.2.1. Entering Panel Setup Mode
Sometimes, you need to put the target panel into the Panel Setup Mode in order to set it up. These are the steps for you to
enter the Panel Setup Mode when an application is running:
Step 1:
Pin-point the upper-left corner of the screen. If successful, there will be a square blinking once on the corner.
Step 2:
Pin-point the upper-right corner of the screen. If successful, there will be a square blinking once on the corner.
Step 3:
Pin-point the upper-left corner of the screen. If successful, there will be a square blinking once on the corner.
Only after pin-pointing the left-right-left corners of the screen successfully, will you be able to get the target panel into the
Panel Setup Mode.
Note: If the above procedure does not work, you need to check to see whether the Allow to Run Panel Setup flag under
the General Settings screen is True. If it is False, the target panel will not be allowed to run panel setup.

You may press the General button on the Panel Setup screen to bring up the General screen. The following is an example
of the General screen:
Item Press the button to

1
Move the selection in a 7-6-5-4-3-2-1-7
2 sequence. The current data entry object
is highlighted.
3
Move the selection in a 1-2-3-4-5-6-7-1
4 sequence. The current data entry object
is highlighted.
5
6 Adjust the selection or increase the
value of the current data entry object.
7 Adjust the selection or decrease the
The following table describes each property on the General screen.
Check Battery Select True if you want the panel to check the battery before running the application. If
the battery check failed, the “Battery backed RAM data error! All recorded data are
cleared!” error message will be displayed on the screen. The default setting is True.
Screen Saver Enter a number between 0 and 60 to specify the time that the panel turns off the back
Time(minutes) light of the display when the panel has not been touched for the specified amount of
time. The unit of time is minutes. This option lengthens the life of the CCFT back light.
If you set “Screen saver time” to 0, the panel never turns off the back light.
Allow To Run Panel Setup Select True if you want to exit the running application and enter the panel setup mode.
Continued

4
19
Communications Settings When downloading an application, select Default to use the same communication
parameters as those used when transmitting data. Select Current to use the
communication parameters set in the target panel. To set up communication
parameters, press the Link button on the Panel Setup screen. Please see Section
19.2.5 or Section 19.2.6 for details.
Start-up Language When downloading an application, select Default to use the same start-up language as
what is used when transmitting data, or select 1 to 10 as the start-up language.
Run AP After Power On Select True if you want to run the application immediately after powering on. The
default setting is False.
Display Upside Down Select True if you want to display the screen upside down. The default setting is False.
IP Address Press the edit field and bring up the Numeric keypad to input the IP address. Each IP
byte can be a value between 0 and 255.
LCD Increase Click it to increase the LCD brightness.
Brightness Decrease Click it to decrease the LCD brightness.
Save Click it to save the current setting of the LCD brightness.

19
19.2.3. Calibrating the Touch Panel
To calibrate the touch panel, you can press Touch Panel button on the Panel Setup screen. Use the following procedure to
pin-point the white dots and ok buttons on the screen with an unsharp pencil.
1. Pin-point the white dot on the upper-left

corner of the screen.
2. Pin-point the white dot on the lower-right

corner of the screen.
3. You can press the Redo button on the

upper-left corner of the screen to go
back to step 1.
Alternatively, pin-point the ok button on

the lower-left corner of the screen to go
to the next step.

back to step 1.
Alternatively, pin-point the ok button on

the upper-right corner of the screen to
go to the next step.

back to step 1.
Alternatively, pin-point the ok button at

the center of the screen to complete the
calibration.
After calibration is completed, the Panel

Setup screen displays again.
Note: Do not use anything that is made of metal or is sharp, such as a screw driver or a ball-point pen on the touch panel.

4
19
19.2.4. Time and Date Settings
You may press the Set Time/Date button on the Panel Setup screen to bring up the Set Time and Date screen. The
following is an example of the Set Time and Date screen.
Item Press the button to

Move the selection in a
8-7-6-5-4-3-2-1-8 sequence. The
current data entry object is highlighted.
1
Move the selection in a
2 1-2-3-4-5-6-7-8-1 sequence. The
3 current data entry object is highlighted.
4
6 value of the current data entry object.
7 Adjust the selection or decrease the
The following table describes each property on the General screen.

Current Time (hh:m:ss) Displays the current time in the Real Time Clock chip.
Current Date (yy/mm/dd) Displays the current date in the Real Time Clock chip.
Current Day of Week Displays the current day of week in the Real Time Clock chip.
Hour Select an integer value from 0 through 23 representing the hour of the day.
Minute Select an integer value from 0 through 59 representing the minute.
Second Select an integer value from 0 through 59 representing the second.
Year Select an integer value from 0 through 99 representing the year.
Month Select an integer value from 1 through 12 representing the month of the year.
Day Select an integer value from 1 through 31 representing the day of the month.
Day of Week Select Mon, Tue, Wed, Thu, Fri, Sat or Sun representing the day of the week.
RTC Adjustment Set the adjustment in seconds per day to correct the Real Time Clock (RTC).
(sec./day)
Set Save all the changes you made
Set & Exit Click it to close the dialog box and accept all changes.

19
19.2.5. Link Settings (Serial Port)
This section describes how to set up the communication parameters for the serial communication links using the link
screen in the target panel. The default setting of the link screen is transmitted to the target panel along with all the other
data when you download an application.
You can press the corresponding Link button on the Panel Setup screen to bring out the link screen. If the link is a serial
link, the target panel will display the serial port parameters screen. The following is an example:
Displays the connected device of this link.
1 Item Press the button to
2 Move the selection in a

10-9-8-7-6-5-4-3-2-1-10 sequence. The
4 Move the selection in a

1-2-3-4-5-6-7-8-9-10-1 sequence. The
7
Adjust the selection or decrease the
9
10
The screen for a serial link appears with the following options:
Communications Select False if you want to disable the communication between the target panel and the
controller. When communication is disabled, the target panel doesn’t communication with the
controller but can still display screens.
Port Select either COM1 or COM2 or COM3 to specify the serial port of the target panel that is
connected to the controller. The default setting is COM2.
Baud Rate The baud rate used.
Data Bits The number of data bits used.
Parity The scheme of parity used.
Stop Bits The number of stop bits used.
Command Delay If the Command Delay is 0, the communication driver sends the next request immediately to the
connected device after it received the reply of the last request. If the Command Delay is
nonzero, the communication driver delays for the specified amount of time before sending the
next request to the connected device.
Retry Count The number of times that the communication driver will retry to get a successful reply from the
connected device for each request. If the number is zero, the communication driver will use a
Timeout Time The maximum time allowed for the communication driver to wait for the reply from the connected
that the communication failed.
Panel Address The address of the target panel.
PLC Address The address of the connected device.

4
19
19.2.6. Link Settings (Ethernet Port)
This section describes how to set up the communication parameters for the Ethernet communication links using the link
screen of the target panel. The default setting of the link screen is transmitted to the target panel along with other data
when you download an application.
You can press the corresponding Link button on the Panel Setup screen to bring out the link screen. If the link is an
Ethernet link, the target panel will display the Ethernet parameters screen. The following is an example:
Displays the connected device of this link.
1 Item Press the button to

Move the selection in a 4-3-2-1-4
2 sequence. The current data entry
object is highlighted.
3
Move the selection in a 1-2-3-4-1
sequence. The current data entry
4
object is highlighted.
Adjust the selection or increase the
Adjust the selection or decrease the
The screen for an Ethernet link appears with the following options:
Communications Select False if you want to disable the communication between the target panel and the
controller. When communication is disabled, the target panel doesn’t communication with the
controller but can still display screens.
Command Delay If the Command Delay is 0, the communication driver immediately sends the next request to
the connected device after it received a reply from the last request. If the Command Delay is
nonzero, the communication driver delays for a specified amount time before sending the next
request to the connected device.
Retry Count The number of times that the communication driver will retry to get a successful reply from the
connected device for each request. If the number is zero, the communication driver will use a
Timeout Time The maximum time allowed for the communication driver to wait for a reply from the connected
that the communication failed.
Port Displays the IP port for use
IP Address Specify the IP address of the connected device. You can press the corresponding field to bring
out the Decimal Numeric Keypad to input numbers.

19
19.2.7. LAN Printer Address
To use a LAN printer, you need to assign an IP address and a port for the printer on the target panel. You can press the
LAN Printer Address button on the Panel Setup screen to bring out the screen. The following is an example:
The LAN Printer Address screen appears with the following options:
IP Address Specifies the IP address of the connected network printer. You can press the corresponding field
to bring out the Decimal Numeric Keypad to input an integer value from 0 to 255.
Port Specifies the used IP port. You can press the corresponding field to bring out the Decimal
Numeric Keypad to input an integer value from 0 to 65535.

4
19
19.2.8. FTP Site
To access files in the target panel from a remote site you need to do the following:
1) Open Internet Explorer (or any other web browser) and enter the site address. You will need to type ftp:// and then the
IP address of the target panel. For example, you can type it as ftp://192.168.10.163. To set the IP address of the
target panel, please see Section 19.2.2 for details.
2) The target panel (FTP site) requires a user name and password to login.
If the target panel has an application, the user needs to enter a password defined in that application with sufficient
user level to enter the FTP site for reading/writing files.
Note: A user that can write files is able to read files too.
If the target panel has no application, the user can remote access the FTP site by using the default password “123”.
After you have successfully logged on to the target panel (FTP site), you will see the available files that you have
permission to access. It will look very similar to your Windows Explorer or My Computer view. From there, you can read
and write files from your local hard drive to the target panel (FTP site) and vice versa. Keep in mind that you will need to
have the appropriate permission to perform file operations. These permissions will be assigned to the user account in the
target panel (FTP site).
To assign a user name and read/write permissions for the target panel (FTP site), you can press the FTP Site button on the
Panel Setup screen to bring out the following sample screen:
The FTP Site screen appears with the following options:
User Name Specifies the user name for the target panel. You can press the field to bring up the
ASCII Character Keypad to input up to 8 ASCII characters. The default user name
is “user”.
User Level for Write Operation Specifies the user level that is required to write files to the target panel.
User Level for Read Operation Specifies the user level that is required to read files from the FTP site.

19
19.3. Recovering System by System Loader
When there is a system-critical problem that interferes with the normal operation of the target panel, users may need to
boot into the system loader mode, which allows them to troubleshoot their target panel or update the application. Once you
have corrected the problem, you can reboot and the target panel will run normally.
To get the target panel into the system loader mode, press the upper-left corner for 3 seconds while the power is on, once
there is a beeping sound, the System Loader screen will be displayed as shown below:
CHAPTER 19 SETTING UP TARGET PANEL

PAN 19-16
4
19
The following table describes the function of each button on the System Loader screen of the target panel.

English/中文(繁 Display the texts of the screen in the corresponding language.
體)/中文(简体)
General Set the IP address and brightness of the display. The following is an example of the General screen.
The following table describes each property in the General screen.
IP Address Press the field and bring up the Numeric keypad to input the IP
address. Each IP byte can be the value between 0 and 255.
LCD Increase Click it to increase the LCD brightness.
Brightness Decrease Click it to decrease the LCD brightness.
Save Click it to save the current setting of the LCD brightness.
Touch Panel Calibrate the touch panel. Please see Section 19.2.3 for details.
Format Disk C Format the built-in flash disk (C:). This operation requires a user level of 8 or higher.
H/W Display the hardware information of the target panel. The following is an example of the hardware
Information information screen:
Update from Update the system programs and the application runtime data from a PRP file. The original system
File programs and the application runtime data are replaced by the new ones.
Run Get into the Panel Setup mode.

APPENDIX
I. The range limitation of the software........................................................... 1
-i-
I. The range limitation of the software
(A) The limitation of one project:
No. Item Maximum

01 Number of panel applications 128
02 Number of languages 10
03 Number of font templates per language 20
(B) The limitation of one panel application:
No. Item Maximum

01 Number of tags No Limitation
02 Number of macros No Limitation
03 Number of objects in one screen No Limitation
04 Number of communication links 4/16
05 Regular user memory ($U) 131072 words
06 Battery backed user memory ($N) 131072 words
07 Number of screens 7999
User Password: 8
08 Number of passwords
Developer Password: 1
09 Number of Discrete Alarm Blocks 16
10 Number of Analog Alarm Blocks 16
11 Number of Recipe Blocks 16
12 Recipe Size 4095 words
13 Number of recipes per Recipe Block 65535
14 Number of Data Loggers 16
15 Sample Size (Each Block) 128 words
16 Number of Samples (Each Block) 65535
-1- APPENDIX

HMI Manual VK, VT V1.0 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

HMI Manual VK, VT V1.0 PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

HMI Manual VK, VT V1.0 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

CHAPTER 1

1.1. Project Development Steps .......................................................................... 1

Install and run

Global Settings Create and set up

Application setup Create and set Alarm blocks

Compile current Simulate current

1-1 CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION

1.2.1. Main Menus

1.2.1.1. File Menu

Icon Menu Item Shortcut Description

New Ctrl+N Create a new project.

Open... Ctrl+O Open an existing project.

Close Close the current project.

Save Ctrl+S Save the current project.

Save As... Save the current project with a new name.

1.2.1.2. Edit Menu

Icon Menu Item Pop-up Menu Item Shortcut Description

Undo Ctrl+Z Undo the last action.

Redo Ctrl+Y Redo the previously undone action.

Cut Ctrl+X Cut the selection and put it on the Clipboard.

Copy Ctrl+C Copy the selection and put it on the Clipboard.

Paste Ctrl+V Place the Clipboard contents on the current screen.

Delete Del Delete the selection.

Group Group the selection.

Ungroup Ungroup the selected group.

CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION 1-2

Unpin Unpin the selection so it can move again.

Auto Text Select or deselect the option of automatic text resizing.

1-3 CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION

Bring Forward Bring the selected object one layer up.

Send Backward Send the selected object one layer down.

Send to Bottom Send the selection to the bottom.

1.2.1.3. View Menu

Icon Menu Item Pop-up Menu Item Description

CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION 1-4

Normal Size Display screens in normal size.

Project Manager Show or hide Project Manager.

1-5 CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION

Icon Menu Item Description

Open Screen... Open an existing screen of the current panel application.

CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION 1-6

Icon Menu Item Description

Dot Get ready to place a copy of the default dot on a screen.

Line Get ready to place a copy of the default line on a screen.

Polyline Get ready to draw a polyline on a screen.

Rectangle Get ready to place a copy of the default rectangle on a screen.

Circle Get ready to place a copy of the default circle on a screen.

Ellipse Get ready to place a copy of the default ellipse on a screen.

Arc Get ready to place a copy of the default arc on a screen.

Polygon Get ready to draw a polygon on a screen.

Scale Get ready to place a copy of the default scale on a screen.

Table Get ready to place a copy of the default table on a screen.

1-7 CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION

Icon Menu Item Pop-up Menu Item Description

Get ready to place a copy of the default toggle switch on a

Get ready to place a copy of the default step button on a

Get ready to place a copy of the default multistate lamp on a

CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION 1-8

1-9 CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION